[00:00:19] Bob Dunn: Welcome to the Jukebox Podcast from WP Tavern. My name is Nathan Wrigley.

Jukebox is a podcast which is dedicated to all things WordPress. The people, the events, the plugins, the blocks, the themes, and in this case, rebranding Do the Woo, and growing openchannels.fm.

If you’d like to subscribe to the podcast, you can do that by searching for WP Tavern in your podcast player of choice, or by going to wptavern.com/feed/podcast, and you can copy that URL into most podcast players.

If you have a topic that you’d like us to feature on the podcast, I’m keen to hear from you and hopefully get you, or your idea, featured on the show. Head to wptavern.com/contact/jukebox, and use the form there.

So on the podcast today, we have Bob Dunn. Bob is a long standing figure in the WordPress community, having branded himself as BobWP back in 2010. With nearly two decades of experience in WordPress, Bob has become one of the most recognizable voices in WordPress podcasting. Producing shows that have educated, inspired, and connected countless developers, builders, and enthusiasts.

Most recently, he launched Open Channels FM, a rebrand and expansion from his well-known Do the Woo podcast, which was originally focused on WooCommerce, but now explores broader topics around the open web, open source, and the wider maker community.

Bob talks about his journey in podcasting, from running Do the Woo for almost seven years to the decision to rebrand and launch Open Channels FM. He explains why he felt it was time to broaden the focus, welcoming listeners from outside of just the WooCommerce and WordPress ecosystem, and how that led to a network approach with multiple channels and series.

Bob describes how Open Channels is structured. Rather than traditional shows, the network features three flexible channels, Open Makers, Open Source Reach, and Open Web Conversations, each hosting a variety of series. This lets content stay organized and evergreen, and accommodates the 25 to 30 rotating hosts with the freedom to produce series across different topics.

Bob talks about the challenges, and rewards, of handing over the mic, stepping into a more of a managerial and founder role and how he’s building a sustainable, collaborative, podcasting network.

We discuss Bob’s technical approach as well, including how he uses WordPress to manage multiple RSS feeds and subscriptions, making it easy for listeners to follow specific channels or get the fire hose of all content.

Bob also shares insights on rebranding a podcast, managing redirects, retaining audiences, updating hundreds of featured images, and ensuring continuity without confusing listeners.

If you’re interested in open source podcasting, or building community driven content, this episode is for you.

If you’re interested in finding out more, you can find all of the links in the show notes by heading to wptavern.com/podcast, where you’ll find all the other episodes as well.

And so without further delay, I bring you Bob Dunn.

[00:03:37] Nathan Wrigley: I am joined on the podcast by Bob Dunn. Hello Bob.

[00:03:40] Bob Dunn: Hey, hello Nathan. Great to be back.

[00:03:42] Nathan Wrigley: Thank you so much for joining me today. Bob and I have been chatting for quite a long time. Actually over many years, we’ve been chatting for quite a long time, because we’re both very, very, very into the exact same thing, and that is podcasting in the WordPress space.

Should anybody not have heard of you, Bob, I know it’s a bit of a generic question. Do you mind doing your little potted bio to tell us who you are, and what you’ve been doing?

[00:04:04] Bob Dunn: Been in business a long time. Two major businesses, branded myself, BobWP in 2010. Did a lot of stuff between then and now.

And, yeah, right now I am doing openchannels.fm. I’m running that, that is a podcast channels with, actually three channels, we’ll be explaining more about that. But yeah, I’ve just been in WordPress quite a while and I think since, oh, I don’t know, about 17, 18 years or so.

[00:04:34] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, it’s a fairly long time. You were one of the voices, when I joined the WordPress space, you were the established podcast voice I think. There were a few, but not many. And there’s very few that have survived. You’ve managed to, turn a living out of podcasting in the WordPress space. So Bravo, well done.

[00:04:50] Bob Dunn: Thank you. Yeah, it’s been interesting. It’s something you just kind of keep going and, you know, doing it all yourself. It gets to a point where, yeah, it’s a lot of work, but it’s paid off.

[00:05:00] Nathan Wrigley: So a little while ago, I’m going to say about, I don’t know, six months ago, something like that, you can correct me in a moment. But for the longest period of time you’ve had Do the Woo. Prior to Do the Woo, there was a bunch of other naming conventions for your podcast. What was it that, in the most recent past, why did you decide to jettison Do the Woo and create openchannels?

Open channels, by the way, you can be found at openchannels.fm. There’s no hyphens or anything. It’s just as you’d imagine, openchannels.fm. Go and check that out. You’d be able to see what we’re talking about. What was the reasoning behind that?

[00:05:35] Bob Dunn: Yeah, so I actually did the rebrand early June. It was at WordCamp Europe, but I’d been thinking about it for about a year. So you have almost seven years under the belt with Do the Woo, and it started out as a WooCommerce focused podcasts. And over the years I added more WordPress into it.

And then over the last couple years I started talking about a bit more of the, you know, even outside the WordPress bubble. And I felt like something was always missing, because it’s kind of two-prong where WordPress developers, builders, a lot of our audience need to also be aware of other stuff that is going on around them. I’m not trying to push somebody one direction or another. It’s like just know stuff that is happening out there.

And then also for people that don’t know WooCommerce, expanding on that, trying to bring them in on other topics. They would look at WooCommerce or they look at WordPress and say, hey, you know, I’ve never really dug into them. I listen to a few of these.

The two major things that really, I had been chewing on for like, oh man, it had to be almost a year, was growth and sustainability of the site. And, you know, it worked great when it was really WooCommerce focus, but people had the impression that, if they know Woo, they’d look at it and say, oh, it’s a WooCommerce podcast. I’m not going to check it out because I’m not using WooCommerce.

And then of course, people that didn’t know anything about it, they would maybe think it’s, I don’t know, some wrapper or something. I don’t know what, you know, the title is like, it didn’t really define it. And of course they dig in a little bit, they learn what it is.

But, yeah, that was the impetus. It was like, I thought, man, it’s time to, as hard as it is to change a brand or even drop one that has worked for you, I thought we are moving more into content around the open web, open source, fediverse, all these different things. And I really want to make this something where, like I said before, people that don’t know WordPress or WooCommerce would come and listen to other stuff and maybe they’d check it out, maybe they don’t.

And then the WordPress people would continue, because we still have that content in there and they could learn about other stuff. They could learn about things that probably will really help their business even staying in WordPress. So I’m not, again, trying to push them out of it, it’s just open your mind a bit and learn new things.

[00:08:14] Nathan Wrigley: The wisdom that I often get when I read around the podcast industry, and if you are just a consumer of podcasts and you’ve never really dug into that industry, in the same way that WordPress has just a gigantic amount in the background, as soon as you prize open the can and realise that there’s this whole open source software, and there’s events and all of that, the same is true inside of podcasting. There’s a whole industry going on in the background that you may not realise is there.

And one of the pieces of sage advice which is often delivered, is to kind of niche down when you are beginning your podcast. Because obviously, you are going to be a small fish in a very big pond. And so the more specific that you can get, the more likely you are to build up that audience over time.

And so I’m guessing that that’s kind why you went with Do the Woo? So that it was pretty clear at the beginning, okay, we’re really focusing on Woo. So have you noticed that the pivot away from that, so from Do the Woo as a name, even though there was more content in there, to this much more open channel, so open source, whatever that might cover. Has your audience kind of, and I don’t really want to use the word forgiven, maybe I want to use the words, gone with you.

Have they come across that brand transition willingly, or do you sense that some people have, you know, lost interest because now it’s not just Do the Woo? Because that’s, I suppose, something you have to be mindful of.

[00:09:29] Bob Dunn: Yeah. You know, I’m sure some have maybe decided differently, but the interesting thing is how I built it and how I, even after the launch, reorganised it even more, is that all the content that was on there is still on there and continues to be on there. And so as I looked at how can I best organise it, I first put it into like five shows, and it still didn’t quite make sense and gel. So I thought, well, what if I do three channels, and I have an open source reach channel, an open web conversations channel, and an open makers channel.

A lot of the WordPress and Woo stuff went under the open makers channel. So now we still have series, like three or four series on WordPress. At least three series on WooCommerce, and then a variety of other stuff. So the thing was to get people convinced, and when I talked to a lot of people and I was at WordCamp Europe, you know, it’s like, it’s basically the brand is changing, we’re expanding, but the stuff you’ve been listening to is not going away.

And I have to really emphasise that. And it’s, yeah, there’s a bit where you think, oh, you know, am I going to lose it? But then they may come back, they may actually see that, yes, this is still existing, you know, getting this stuff out in front of people. And also, there will be now newer people that will, instead of looking at a name, Do the Woo and thinking, hmm, what do I do? Something like open channels, even though it is a lot broader, might interest them a little bit more.

[00:10:56] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, there’s definitely the ability to tap into a new audience. So this podcast, WP Tavern, it has one show. And on a weekly basis we have a show and, you know, it’s me talking to somebody else. And I guess Do the Woo was a bit more like that. There was this one show and it would drop with a regular cadence and what have you.

And it may have escaped people because we didn’t really introduce it as such. But open channels is not that formula is it? It’s more of a, kind of like a network, I suppose, for want of a better word. You’ve got your own mini kind of network of podcasts. So let’s just dig into that a little bit. So you’ve iterated it a bit. You started with maybe three shows and now it’s up to however many, we’ll get into that. Do you just want to go through what all of the different shows are, and broadly what they cover?

[00:11:41] Bob Dunn: Yeah, so what happened is during this whole time of change, and some of this even happened before June, was that I had a whole bunch of shows. So you go to the thing and you’d see like, I don’t know, there was like 15 shows or something. And it seemed a bit too much to me. You’d go there and it’d be like, whoa, you know? Realistic, you’d think, okay, you’d find the show you like and stuff and listen to it.

But as I was expanding the content I launched on June 5th with, there’s a website, there’s five shows and there’s some series under those five shows. And that still didn’t gel after I started getting in there and start rebranding it and working on it deeper, and I’m still working on it. I realised that what I’d like to do is eliminate the aspect of a show, so when they go there, it’s open channels, so it’s plural.

You’ve got the three channels that I mentioned, and underneath all of those are series. So there’s several. Some of them, there’s quite a few series under open makers. There’s some under the other two channels. And the reason I did that is channels are a lot more flexible, and also series are incredibly flexible. If you have a show and you stop it, it’s like, bam, you know, people, oh, where did that go?

And I thought, what if I had these three umbrella channels that I could put series in? I could start them up. Some of them have been going on forever. Some may just go on a few months, but they’re part of that whole stream under that channel.

Now everybody can go there and get all the podcasts that come in, or they can actually subscribe to the three channels.

But the series are just a variety under it. And I haven’t really, the series are often focused more when they happen, the name of the series. I mean, I decided putting all the series on the site would just confuse people more. It’d be like, oh, what?

Then they can go through and they’ll see, you know, if they look through the episodes, they’ll see the various series. I mean, there’s, under open makers, there’s Woo Product Chat, there’s WP Behind the Builds, there’s WP Agency Tracks. And a lot of those were pre-existing. And so the other channels as well will have specific series under it, like Open Web Conversations has a series on the fediverse. One is on, oh man, I should have written some of this down. I can’t even remember all the series.

Anyway, there’s a few under that and there’s a few under open source. And what the beauty of it is too with as many hosts as we have now, I don’t know if it’s like around 25 to 30 hosts. They can pop around in different channels and under different series, or they come up with an idea for a show and we basically do it, and I say, okay, where should I pop that under? I can pop it under a series. It just makes it a lot more flexible.

Talking about it makes it sound more confusing. Going to the site is a bit more cohesive. But the feedback I got from a lot of people, they loved the idea of the organisation and they loved the idea of expanding into more of the open web and open source stuff.

[00:15:08] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, well, let’s get into that bit in a minute. But let’s just stick to the consumption of open channels. So if you go and subscribe in a podcast player, so, you know, typically on a phone or something like that, to this podcast, WP Tavern, it’s fairly straightforward. You either drop in the RSS feed, which is, you know, available, or you can type in WP Tavern, and that’s then saved. And every episode that we produce, including this one, will appear when it’s published.

How are you doing it for openchannels.fm? Because you’ve obviously got three channels, and then there’s different shows and series which live under that. How is it consumed? Is there just one overall RSS feed which will get you the lot? Or can you say, okay, I only want to, I don’t know, consume the stuff about the open makers or the open web conversations? How does it work?

[00:15:55] Bob Dunn: Yeah. What I’ve done is, you can, if you want the fire hose, you can go to openchannels.fm, it has its own feed, and then I do the feed for each of the channels. Like you said, open makers, open source and open web conversations. I thought of going down even more to every series, but I thought that just confuses people more so, you know, it encapsulates what each of those channels are about.

I mean, open makers is, somebody said, yeah, you know, it’s about people in tech making stuff. You make stuff, even if it’s WordPress only. Sometimes it’s interesting to hear how other people are making stuff. And it opens it enough where it’s long, that long funnel of people that make things, you know, whether the developer, designer, their marketing stuff, whatever.

And so that was, yeah, I think that’s the best way to have people subscribe is, you know, they can get it all. But they can look at the three channels too. So if they go on their pod thing and look for open web conversations, that’s primarily what they’re interested in. What we’re talking about there, they can subscribe to that.

[00:17:04] Nathan Wrigley: Just from a, well, it’s not particularly technical, but from a slightly technical point of view, how do you manage that? If memory serves you’re using Castos, which is a sort of self-hosted, it’s a WordPress plugin, which binds your RSS feed into your WordPress website, but also carries the functionality to have different series and episodes all within the same WordPress website. I might have been kind of promoting that a bit, and it’s not the solution that you used, but I think it is.

[00:17:29] Bob Dunn: Yeah, it is. And so what it allows you to do, I could have actually created feeds for each series, but then I thought, is that going too granular? I mean, are you looking at all this stuff and thinking, so Open Web channel is like the default channel, I mean, openchannels.fm. Then you create three feeds for three shows or channels, which are the other three. And then when I do a series, I just choose to put it under whichever channel it should fall under.

[00:18:01] Nathan Wrigley: Right, okay. So you’ve basically got three places to go and update, and you can handle all of that in the WordPress admin and what have you. I should probably say that there’s a SaaS equivalent as well. You don’t have to use WordPress to make that happen, but it’s so tightly integrated with WordPress, it kind of makes sense.

The other curious thing about it though is that for the longest time we were really familiar with you as a real significant piece of that jigsaw puzzle. You know, Bob would do the episodes. It is always Bob, in the same way that there’s always me on this. But with this, I think you said now you’re up to, did you say 25 or 15 co-hosts, something?

[00:18:36] Bob Dunn: 25-30 hosts.

[00:18:38] Nathan Wrigley: Okay, that’s a lot. So you’ve got 25 other people who are helping you create the content. In effect, they have become you for these shows. They are the host, if you like, and they’re then interviewing people, and talking about whatever that episode may be about.

How are you coping with that? How are you coping with no longer being behind the mic? And you’ve basically become a bit of a manager for a podcast network, which is curious.

[00:18:59] Bob Dunn: Yeah. Yeah, I’d like to, you know, I was talking to somebody about this and to me it was, it ended up being a goal that I didn’t know I wanted it to be a goal. You know, as I started to step back, I thought, well, you know, I’ve talked a lot over the years, I mean, more than anybody ever wanted to hear. I thought, well, maybe, you know, it’s time to get some other voices out there.

For the time being, I’m still doing the opening, but I keep myself as forefront as, I guess you call founder or whatever, of the podcast channel. And I’m cool with it. I love hearing the different opinions. It just was a shift for me at some point where I had no problem with it. And I think testing it in the beginning, I think the first three, so I brought on Brad Williams at the very beginning, because I didn’t want to do it by myself. We were just doing co-hosts and then we continued for a while.

Then I brought on, later on I brought on Mendel Kurland, which at the time was GoDaddy, and Jonathan Wold who at the time, he was at WooCommerce, and now he has his own thing going on. And I would still be part of it, so it was the four of us. But I started liking the idea when I wasn’t part of it. It was fun to see somebody else take and run with it.

And so over that period of years, I became more and more confident with people. Now, it’s basically, unless I have an idea for a guest, a lot of them choose our guests. They choose a topic because they’ve done this long enough. They know what I like to hear. They know what not to do and to do. I keep it pretty open for them. And they love that freedom because they don’t have to, you know, they come in, they do the recording, all the production stuff is not their responsibility.

And I think it’s also helped them to get to know each other more. They’ve gotten to know other guests. It’s built their brands some, I hope. And it became a point where I was just like, I thought this is it, this just works. And I’ve been really lucky with the hosts I’ve had, because they’ve been excellent. I never have problems. I mean, it just is a nice flow and they’ve all become good friends and, yeah, it works.

[00:21:17] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, I think if you were looking at it from the outside, there are so many trip wires there where you think, well, that, couldn’t work. You know, 25 hosts, multiple shows, yeah, okay. Good luck with that.

But obviously, the history that you’ve got doing the shows and turning up to WordPress events, presumably you kind of knew most of these people fairly well already, so you had that rapport and trust with each other.

But it’s a lot to trust them to just get on with it. To be able to say, okay, here’s the time slot, go off, get your guests and then just hand me the recording at the end, I’ve got complete trust in you.

But it does sound like you’ve still got your fingers in there a little bit with the kind of like the post-production and the editing, and finally making the episode into what it is and all of that, and shipping it. Do you ever see yourself stepping out to the point where you don’t even do that, where it’s just, there’s just this network?

[00:22:05] Bob Dunn: You know, I’d really like to kind of just have the role as founder. I mean, I’ve done a production and I’ve done this for, when we ran our other business before WordPress, the life and WordPress and stuff, we basically did everything, we didn’t have employees. So I’ve been doing this like over three decades.

You know, I am at a point where, no, I think it’s time to step back from some of this production stuff. I would like to because it, yeah, it buries you. And when it picks up and you have quite a few shows in a row or something, there’s some serious work to do. And I get a little too over picky with editing, probably somebody could do it a lot quicker. I mean, I, it drives me nuts sometimes. I’m thinking, why am I spending this much time on it?

But, yeah, I definitely am looking at some ways of doing that over the next few months. And looking at some other opportunities, but want to still be part of this, because it’s still my baby.

[00:23:00] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, I think that’s incredible to have that level of trust. I’ve never yet managed to have that relationship where I thought that I wanted to step away. I think for me, the bit that I enjoy more than anything else is this bit that we’re doing now, the bit I’m having a chat with somebody. I really do like the one to one, or one to few. So the most I do is 2, 3, 4 really is the sort of ceiling, and that’s the bit that I like most.

And so the bit that you’ve stepped into, curiously, would be something that I would not really wish to be involved in. I’d rather just hand that off to somebody, but I do know what you mean.

You have a perfectionist approach to the editing, and you can be halfway through it and think, I’ve just spent six hours and all I’ve done is remove empty space that nobody would’ve noticed. Anyway, it can be curious.

So are you still iterating? Are you still willing to take on some new voices? Are you still open to people approaching you?

[00:23:57] Bob Dunn: Yeah, we are. Because I think with this new brand, it’s kind of, before I get into that, I was just going to mention is that when you rebrand, I’m finding there’s a ton of work with post rebranding, and another one of my picky little, I don’t know what you want to call it, is I started looking at the site and I thought, well, I want this site to reflect the new brand a hundred percent. I don’t want people to go back and get confused.

I’ve been changing the featured images on 670 episodes with the new brand. And, you know, that’s just, again, that’s me. But I want, it was quite a shift in rebranding and I want to make sure that, when they even go back, they see that, yes, I’m still on the same podcast, you know, I’m still on the same site so. Now I’ve lost track of what you asked.

[00:24:45] Nathan Wrigley: No, it’s okay. I’m actually going to pivot and just ask you a quick technical question, which is, did you close down your previous RSS feed, and rely on people finding the new one, or is there some clever way of moving people over?

[00:24:58] Bob Dunn: Yeah, you have to redirect it basically. It’s not a lot of steps, but it’s steps that if you don’t do it in the right order, it can really pretty much screw up everything. And right now, I am having a bit of challenge with some of the stuff moving over on Apple and the feeds and stuff, and I just put in a support question with them.

But you basically, eventually I’ll shut down a show called Content Sparks and Do The Woo. Because they were, they’re now under Open Makers as a series, but I kind of got to make sure all the things are connected and working smoothly. So it’s something, if anybody ever does this, whoever’s hosting your podcast, talk to them and ask them questions until you feel confident to be able to do steps one through five, without blowing up your whole podcast.

[00:25:43] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, it’s a bit like when you move a website, there’s loads of different bits and pieces that you’ve got to get right and in the correct order so that, I don’t know, your email carries on sending, and all the posts that you desperately want to be still in the search engine results, that kind of thing. Yeah, there’s a lot of hoops to jump through.

In fact, so much so that a few kind of pivot ideas that I’ve had, not around WP Tavern, but around other podcasts that I do, I’ve kind of backed away just because the technical challenge was just not worth the time investment for the minor thing that I wanted to do.

Anyway, the question, returning to where we got to. The question was, are you still open to modifying what you do or have you solidified for a little period of time? In other words, if somebody catches sight of your podcast or listens to this one and thinks, do you know what I could contribute? I’ve got an idea in the open space that I would like to contribute. Are you still open to new hosts or is it really just guests now? Have you solidified on the hosts? Where are you at with all that?

[00:26:36] Bob Dunn: You know, the hosts, I think the hosts that are on it right now, they always have the option. I mean, they volunteer their time. I’m hoping they get rewarded by, you know, brand and exposure. And I know a lot of them have met a lot of people and built relationships that they never would’ve been able to because they actually talked with someone.

So that’s another reason this particular structure of it now is so great because it’s so fluid. So it’s easy. If somebody comes in and has an idea, and it kind of gels and I think, okay, this is great, or maybe it exists with an idea I already have going or a series I do. Yeah, I’m always open to that because, you know, and some people kind of serve as, I don’t want to say substitute hosts, but they’re kind of there if I need to grab somebody, or I have an idea and it’s like, I need somebody to host this and this person would be good.

So, yeah, kind of a long answer there, but I’m always open, because this is not, this is a reason to change this is to keep it fluid and make it sustainable basically, where it can continue to grow.

[00:27:42] Nathan Wrigley: So definitely not closed, but you’re happy with where things are at the moment. If the status quo was to continue, that would be great. But, you know, new voices is possible.

Again, not just with the personnel, are you kind of fairly happy with the structure that you’ve got, the three channels that you’ve got now? Have you solidified more? Because it sounds like there’s, you know, been a couple of months of chopping and changing over there. Do you think you’ll stick with what you’ve got?

[00:28:02] Bob Dunn: Yeah, I think that’s definitely, it’s where it is because, like I said, I did something completely different in the rebrand in June, and since then I did something different again.

I think what happens is, when you rebrand and you start restructuring, what you thought was the right structure, you start looking at it and you think, oh, maybe this isn’t quite right. Maybe I should do it this way.

And so I talked to several people. Getting some opinions, it’s nice because sometimes I’m inside my own head and it’s like, I need somebody to tell me if I’m just stupid or it’s a wild idea or, yeah, this is good. So, yeah, I like the three structured channels because it gives me so much flexibility under those.

[00:28:45] Nathan Wrigley: I think it’s pretty remarkable what you’ve managed to do. You know, you went from just many, many, many years ago, just beginning a podcast. And just hacking away at that for years and years and years. And now you’ve got this, kind of like little mini network.

But also, I’m getting the intuition, I could be wrong about this, but I get the intuition that you’ve leaned into the word open so that you are no longer limited to just WordPress as a project. Is that the case? Are you going to be leaning into just other open source things, whether that’s other CMSs or, I don’t know, anything in the open source space? Is that in fact the case?

[00:29:19] Bob Dunn: Yeah, you know, I think what it is, in fact I was just talking to somebody, person that does accessibility, she wants to bring on somebody from Joomla and talk about accessibility because she’s under the open source channel. And exactly that. The impact of open source has been so huge and WordPress has been at the core of it. And WordPress will still be a big part of this podcast or this channels. And, yeah, I feel it’s healthy for my hosts. It’s healthy for everybody that listens, and everybody in the WordPress to hear about other stuff.

You know, it just opens your mind. It has you thinking more about things and knowing what’s out there. And sometimes maybe you think, well, you know, I’m burned out on WordPress, but you hear some other stuff and you think, well, maybe it’s not so bad. You get a big picture of the open source and open web.

[00:30:11] Nathan Wrigley: There’s certainly no shortage of things to talk about if you go into open. I mean, obviously WordPress is such a large niche that you really can talk about that until the cows come home. But the you prize open the can of open source, you know, you really are a hundred x’ing the amount of things that you can talk about. So that’s kind of really nice that you can, well, you’ve basically got an infinite horizon of content to make in the near and distant future. And I don’t suppose open source is going anywhere in the short, medium, or long term. It’ll still be around.

Okay, speaking of short, medium, and long term, if you’ve taken yourself away from the mic on every occasion to being in a few, and then kind of now being in the minority of things, and we talked about how you enjoy kind of managing the whole thing, even though it sounds like there’s a lot of shepherding cats, let’s put it that way, in the background.

Is the intention for you to sort of get to the point where you can be invisible in this, well, certainly from a public facing point of view. You wouldn’t have your voice in any of them at some point, and you would be able to, I guess, silently kind of move away. Is this like an end game here? What’s going on?

[00:31:14] Bob Dunn: No, you know, I think I’m going to be involved, and the thing was built on my brand really. And I need to stay and keep my fingers in whatever way works for me. And, you know, I’m, I just turned 68, and I’m ready to do other things every once in a while like sit on a rock on the beach and look the water. You know, important things like that.

But no, it’s, I like looking at it as still being the face of it, but maybe, can I say not so much the voice of it? I’m out there, I’m still, you know, a huge part of it, and probably as long as I have my fingers in it, I’ll occasionally do little short podcasts. Right now, I do some on the updates on the site and, you know, I might even whip up something like, you know, thoughts from the founder, I don’t know.

[00:32:03] Nathan Wrigley: Oh, I like it, yeah.

[00:32:05] Bob Dunn: Yeah, something like that. So there’s, I don’t want to just become invisible because it really, how a lot of people have known this, and how I’ve built it is through my personal brand, and I think that’s important to stay intact with it. So I’m not going away anytime soon. And yeah, just need to reevaluate how many hours I put into it and how I can make it, again, more productive and sustainable. Because, you know, if I’m sick, who’s to do the production?

[00:32:33] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah. When it was just you, you could just say, well, I’m not to record that one. I’ll just skip a week. But now that you’ve got like these 25 other hosts, you’ve got to kind of manage all of that. Oh, that’s really interesting. And of course, you’ve got to put time in the calendar to sit on the rock on the beach as well.

[00:32:47] Bob Dunn: Yeah, I know. I’ve got to get that in there, you know. It’s very important.

[00:32:52] Nathan Wrigley: How does this whole thing hang together from a financial point of view then? So is it a sponsorship relationship? Do you onboard sponsors to keep the whole thing, because obviously, you know, it’s trying to, you’re trying to support yourself in all of this. How does that work?

[00:33:03] Bob Dunn: Yeah, it’s basically sponsorship. And the sponsorship model, but ever since I started this podcast, in fact, before I started this one and did another one before that, I started having sponsors right away.

And if your podcast is your main source of income, you got to have something. So yeah, it’s sponsorships. I am sure you relate to it yourself. And, you know, unless you’re famous and they just roll in, or you can get like a million subscribers paying $5 a month or something like that.

So, yeah, we’re constantly looking for sponsors. And I’ve changed the model so many times over the years. And it’ll probably change a little bit here again soon. So it’s never capped at a certain number. That might be capped for a period of time. But, yeah, it’s a constant flex and it’s hard work. And that’s all I can say.

[00:33:57] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, I will just drop the URL for that. So if you’re interested from this conversation, if you’re interested in getting on as a sponsor for the openchannels.fm network, it’s the regular URL, openchannels.fm, but then append to the end of that, /sponsors, plural, or you can just find it in the main menu at the top of the site. That will also get you there and, yeah, you’ll be able to find out more about how you might make the journey into sponsoring that podcast.

Well, Bob, I know that you are a busy man. You’ve got 25 cohosts to shepherd and lots of editing to do, and dare I say it, sitting on a rock on the beach is also going to feature at some point during the day as well.

So thank you so much for chatting to me today. Once more, if you want to check out what Bob is doing with all of his co-hosts and his new structure, go to openchannels.fm to find out more. Bob Dunn, thank you so much for chatting to me today.

[00:34:47] Bob Dunn: Thank you. Always a pleasure.

[00:00:19] Nathan Wrigley: Welcome to the Jukebox Podcast from WP Tavern. My name is Nathan Wrigley.

Jukebox is a podcast which is dedicated to all things WordPress, the people, the events, the plugins, the blocks, the themes, and in this case, what goes into organizing a flagship WordCamp.

If you’d like to subscribe to the podcast, you can do that by searching for WP Tavern in your podcast player of choice, or by going to wptavern.com/feed/podcast, and you can copy that URL into most podcast players.

If you have a topic that you’d like us to feature on the podcast, I’m keen to hear from you and hopefully get you, or your idea, featured on the show. Head to wptavern.com/contact/jukebox, and use the form there.

So on the podcast today we have Karla Campos. Karla has been involved in the WordPress community for over 10 years. Starting out in Miami, and taking part in meetups and word camps before stepping into larger organizational roles. With a background in media and marketing, Karla brings plenty of experience in both web and events to the world of WordPress.

Karla joins us today as a lead organizer for the upcoming WordCamp US 2025, which will take place in Portland at the end of August. Remarkably, this is her first flagship WordCamp, and she’s organizing before ever attending.

We discuss what motivated Karla to take on this major responsibility, how she balances the volunteer work with her professional life, and the challenges, expected and unexpected, along the way.

We discuss the organization of such a huge event from working with a professional production company to handling the logistics, communications, accessibility requests, visas, and more, for a thousand plus attendees. Karla shares how the community side of the event is managed, the late night worries, and what it really takes, both in time and personal commitment, to make a WordCamp US happen, especially as a volunteer.

She also highlights some of the initiatives for this year’s event, renewed efforts to welcome students and first time attendees, including student ticket pricing and the WP Trail Buddies Program to help newcomers feel at home. She also teases the introduction of a hackathon style contributor today, and new remote collaboration options.

If you’ve ever wondered what goes on behind the scenes of a WordCamp US, how it’s organized, how volunteers are supported, and what motivates people like Karla to invest their own time and resources, this episode is for you.

If you’re interested in finding out more, you can find all of the links in the show notes by heading to wptavern.com/podcast, where you’ll find all the other episodes as well.

And so without further delay, I bring you Karla Campos.

I am joined on the podcast by Karla Campos. Hello, Karla.

[00:03:21] Karla Campos: Hello. How are you, Nathan?

[00:03:23] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, good thank you. Very nice for you to join us today. I really appreciate it. Karla’s here today, we’re going to talk about WordCamp US, which is happening in Portland. Actually, I was going to say later this month, almost later this month. We’re recording it right at the very, very end July, 2025. It’s taking place toward the end of August, 2025. So it’s pretty soon.

But before we get into that, Karla, will you just give us your little potted bio. Tell us who you are, what you do in the WordPress space, and maybe very quickly just tell us how the heck you came to be organising a WordCamp, one of these flagship WordCamps.

[00:03:56] Karla Campos: I always like to say that my involvement in projects sometimes comes about serendipitously. Just kind of like, hey, look, I saw that on the internet, it looked interesting, and I decided to join.

I actually have about more than 10 years with the WordPress community in Miami. When I first moved to Florida, I started going to meetup groups and then I met the WordPress Miami organisers and started really getting involved with them.

My ex-colleague and coworker, her name was Jackie Jimenez, she unfortunately passed away, but we had a lot of great moments building things together in the WordPress Miami community. And when I saw the announcement online, I said, you know, she would’ve loved to do this with me. Let me check it out. And then that’s how I kind of just decided to join the organizer group.

So I’ve been with WordPress for over 10 years. I’ve been working in marketing. I used to work for Telemundo here in the Florida area. I used to work for iHeartRadio. So I have a lot of the media marketing background as well as the working on websites and copy. So I’ve been around for a while, just I’m more of like a quiet, in the background type of person.

[00:05:09] Nathan Wrigley: And have you attended any of these flagship, so the flagship ones are obviously WordCamp Asia, WordCamp Europe, WordCamp US. Have you attended any of those flagship ones in the past?

[00:05:18] Karla Campos: Is it odd that this is my first flagship and I’m organising it?

[00:05:21] Nathan Wrigley: I think it’s great.

[00:05:22] Karla Campos: It feels almost surreal.

[00:05:23] Nathan Wrigley: So just before we hit record, you said that, I don’t know, something like a month ago, you caught wind of the fact that WordCamp US still needed some volunteers. Have I got that about right? It’s about a month ago that you became involved in the organisation of the upcoming event.

[00:05:38] Karla Campos: I would say May, I think May. You know, the dates are all come together. We don’t even know what month it is. Because we’re working on it so much in the backend. So I would say around May, when I first saw the, or when I got pulled into the organiser group.

[00:05:53] Nathan Wrigley: Since then, has it kind of taken over your life? I don’t mean that to sort of sound disparaging, but has it kind of crept in into all the different parts of your life? So you’ve basically got no free time left anymore.

[00:06:04] Karla Campos: It has because you’d think, okay, you know, even because we do have a production team that’s helping organise the event to make sure it’s properly handled for all the attendees, because we do expect around a thousand, it’s always been that amount for a flagship.

So we have a production company working on the backend helping us with the production to make sure everything is smooth. But still, with that going on, I still feel like at 2:00 AM I’m thinking WordCamp US, WordCamp US. I know there’s something I have to do. So yeah.

[00:06:34] Nathan Wrigley: Let’s split out what the production company do first of all. So I genuinely don’t know what that even means. So, a production company, I’m guessing you offload something, all the tasks that you can to them. I’m guessing they’re a commercial entity and they get paid to fulfill whatever contractual obligations that you’ve got. What is it that they handle? And then we’ll get into what the community side of things, the team of community, volunteers, and so on are doing.

[00:06:59] Karla Campos: So the production team is making sure that the venue and everything that happens at the venue is organised. So from some of the room logistics, so more on the venue side, that they’re handling that part to make sure that we can handle everything else that comes with organising, including all the planning around contributor day, showcase day, the photographers. So that’s our side, and then their side, the production team, is more of venue logistics.

[00:07:27] Nathan Wrigley: And so do they handle things like, oh, I don’t know, the building of the sponsor booths and things like that? Because when you attend these events, there’s a very, very professional feel to them. So it’s not like you just show up and, you know, it’s kind of thrown together at the last minute. It really does feel, when you actually stop and think about it, you have a great sense of, gosh, there’s months, possibly years of organising that’s gone on in the background. Is it that kind of thing? You know, making sure that essentially when you walk in, everything looks right, everything that you can see, they do.

[00:07:57] Karla Campos: Yes. And then Megan Marcel, which is my co-lead organiser, she’s heading that part. So she’s managing that production company to make sure the venue and all the booths are on point, that they look like what they cost. Because, you know, those booths and everything that the sponsors spend, it’s not cheap things. They’re very luxurious. Sometimes more than others. But yeah, so she’s making sure that that’s covered with the production team. That it looks a hundred percent what the sponsors expect.

[00:08:25] Nathan Wrigley: And, okay then, let’s flip to the more community side. So everything that is not part of the production team’s remit. What are some of the tasks that you are finding yourself worrying about at 2:00 AM in the morning?

[00:08:36] Karla Campos: Actually just making sure the communications, and all the attendees are getting service. So I am the lead organiser in charge of communications and marketing, and I have other team leaders under me, like Caroline Harrison, who is the team lead for the attendee communications. So we’re getting a lot of requests when it comes to accessibility, food that they have allergies or that they need visas.

A lot of traffic, of course, right now, I told you we had about 730 attendees already registered, so that email traffic is coming into our teams. So I’m just like, I saw an email and I know my team handled it, and I know they’re prompt but, you know, I wake up at 2:00 AM. Did I answer that email? Was that a nightmare? Did I miss something?

That’s how it’s been in my life, you know, like I’m having these nightmares that I didn’t do something, but I did, because I’m a very responsible individual. But it just feels like that. It’s become so intertwined in my life that I’m having nightmares that I didn’t do a task.

[00:09:33] Nathan Wrigley: When you get involved in the WordPress community, there’s obviously so many bits and pieces that you can get involved in, but very many of them don’t really, at the beginning, at least anyway of community involvement, don’t necessarily have crunch points in time. Obviously, as you get more into the community, there might be moments. You might be, I don’t know, a release lead or something like that, in which case there will be a date in the calendar where things have got to be all tied off.

But mostly, there’s never that calendar moment where everything’s got to be finished. But you very, very much are faced with a ticking clock, aren’t you? Because come the date that the first people are arriving, the attendees are arriving, and presumably, before that the production team need to get in, and set up all the sponsor booths and make sure all of that’s taken care of and what have you.

That’s a curious thing. So the stress, I guess, does pile up a little bit. And it would behoove all of us who attend events like this, just to pause for a moment and remember that it is done by a bunch of volunteers who have this ticking time bomb, if you know what I mean, in the back, where everything’s got to be finished by a certain date. And so I would just like to express my gratitude for the fact that you’ve stepped up basically and tried to fulfill that role. Appreciate it.

[00:10:40] Karla Campos: Thank you. I appreciate the nice kind words, because it’s been a little bit hectic and, you know, it’s good to hear that people appreciate your work.

[00:10:48] Nathan Wrigley: Have you actually had a chance to go around the building yet? I know we discussed this prior to hitting record, but is this more of a kind of, you’ll be showing up the first time in the same way that everybody else will, or have you managed to sort of walk the floorboards as it were?

[00:11:00] Karla Campos: Like I mentioned earlier, but we weren’t live, I’ve seen personally the venue in virtual tours and et cetera, but I’m coming to the Oregon area a week before. So I’ll be there earlier to see the venue. Go through the walkthroughs and do what the team does earlier, so that everything’s on point. But from what I’ve seen, everything’s going great.

[00:11:22] Nathan Wrigley: Do you get any sort of remuneration for any of the work that you do? So by remuneration, I’m specifically talking about finance. Does anything get offset? So for example, if you are based in Florida, presumably you’re going to be hopping on a plane, and there’ll be the food that you’ve got to eat during the time that you’re there, and the accommodation, the hotels and so on. Does somebody at the level of volunteering that you have nominated yourself for, does any of that get offset, or is this completely voluntary, where you’ve got to dig into your pocket for every single expense?

[00:11:50] Karla Campos: This is voluntary. So yeah, I’m just putting in from my end to support the community. So if ever you are planning on joining something like the WordCamp organisation groups, it usually is a volunteer thing. There are some scholarships but that’s, you have to apply for and it’s very competitive. So I don’t think everyone gets one. But yeah, no, everything that I’m putting in personally is through my own finances.

[00:12:16] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, again, obviously I gave you some thanks a moment ago and I’m about to do it again. Thank you for that commitment as well, because it’s not nothing. You know, going to Portland on an airplane from where you are, you know, it’s all the way across the country. It’s not a cheap place to reside in. Accommodation in and around the venue is probably at a premium, you know, it’s summertime, everything’s quite expensive around there. So it’s not inconsiderable, and there is an impact to that. So again, once again, thank you for taking the time, and also allocating the funds to make that possible. Obviously, events like this cannot happen without people like you doing it.

[00:12:51] Karla Campos: Yes. And I think they must be done. You know, sometimes we have to make sacrifices to bring together something that brings people together around WordPress, which powers people’s businesses, their livelihoods. So, you know, I don’t mind putting in when I know that I make an impact in a community and helping those people with their livelihoods.

[00:13:12] Nathan Wrigley: Now you said that this all began for you in May, and we could get into what it was that exactly prompted you to do that. It sounds like somebody kind of sent something in your direction, which you responded to. So what have we had May, June, July, basically, you’ve been into this for a couple of months.

Any intuitions now of regret? That’s probably not something that we want to get into too much, but do you know what I mean? If you could rewind the clock to, let’s say April during 2025, did you get into this with your eyes wide open, or has it ended up being much more of a task than you imagined? What I’m basically trying to ask is, are there any bits of this that you think, gosh, I didn’t really anticipate that was going to be involved? This is way more than I was imagining biting off.

[00:13:54] Karla Campos: Yeah, the time required to do all the work that needs to be done, and I’m a confident person, so I went in this, I have experience organising events for Telemundo, big concerts of 50,000 people plus. So I went in confident thinking, I got this. But as I got more into it, I just started to notice, okay, well, this is taking a lot of my time that I wasn’t prepared for.

But I’ve adapted and I’m good now. It’s been a rollercoaster ride, but it’s fun for me because I’m that type of person who enjoys the challenge.

Yeah, it’s been fun, it’s been unexpected for sure. So we’ve had ups and downs, but we’re getting through it, you know, and that’s the fun of a rollercoaster ride, so yeah.

[00:14:31] Nathan Wrigley: What are some of the things that you didn’t anticipate? Obviously, you said it’s ended up being more time, so yeah, more time has been required of you. But what beyond that? What are some of the things that you didn’t anticipate that you would need to do, that you have in fact ended up doing?

[00:14:44] Karla Campos: I think all the time spent talking to people, it’s been really crazy. So I think I just didn’t anticipate the timing. So I think I originally volunteered for about 10 hours per week. Leading up to the event I think, a week before the event we’re supposed, or a month before the event, we’re supposed to be putting more in time, but this feels like a full-time job.

Oh my gosh, you know, like I just didn’t anticipate for that. So it’s been kind of, like we talked about before, merging with my normal life where I’m just like, oh wait, my to-do list for my regular projects, and my family and everything is now part of WordCamp, if that makes sense.

[00:15:19] Nathan Wrigley: So during the onboarding process that you’ve had over the last couple of months, how have you learnt what you needed to know? Because this event, I mean, it can’t have been thrown together in the last couple of months. Presumably you came along and joined at some point where many things had been set in motion. But how did you acquire the knowledge that you needed to do the work that you are now doing? Who taught you all of this and so on?

[00:15:43] Karla Campos: Well, we do get the last year’s folder with all the information. So it came about from a lot of reading, asking past team members. So we do have some people who were part of the organizing team last year. Gail Wallace, one of our co-leads, she’s doing contributor day, she’s doing photography, she’s also helping with the lead organising. So she was very helpful in just kind of letting us know about the previous year.

We have mentors like Kevin Christiano and Aaron Campbell from hosting.com, who also worked with WordCamps in the past. And there are mentors who we can always contact on Slack. So we do a lot of work on Slack, and we can always message them back and forth with any information any, hey, we need help with this. They’re always there to just say, hey, this would be a better practice from our experience last year. So we do have mentors there that help us, and that’s been a big relief.

[00:16:37] Nathan Wrigley: How much time do you imagine, if I was to ask you on a, let’s go for a weekly basis. At the moment, so we’re three-ish weeks away from the event, something like that, how much time are you spending during the previous week? So the last seven days, how many hours do you think you’ve clocked up working towards this event?

[00:16:53] Karla Campos: At least, I would say 30 hours.

[00:16:55] Nathan Wrigley: Wow, okay. And so that then presumably has had a material impact upon the regular work that you do. Now, either you are just superhuman and can add 30 hours into your working week with no perceived, you know, there’s just, that’s fine. I can just add 30 hours in. Most of us, including myself, could not do that. I would have to kind of offset one thing with the other. Have you done that? Has it had an impact on the business, the work that you normally do? Have you had to sort of downgrade the amount of time you’ve been spending recently on that kind of work?

[00:17:22] Karla Campos: Not on my business, more on my free time, so I’m not getting out this summer to the pool as I would have last year. But luckily, we’re having a super heat wave in Florida, so it’s too hot outside anyway.

[00:17:33] Nathan Wrigley: It’s like it’s been planned, yeah.

[00:17:35] Karla Campos: It’s been planned. The universe is putting a heat wave out there, so now I can’t outside in the pool, but I would probably still take my devices out there.

[00:17:42] Nathan Wrigley: Has the team had any concerns around attendee numbers? Because I remember I went to this event last year, and I actually don’t know what the numbers are, but I’m going to guess it was in the region of, I don’t know, 1,300 to 1,500, something like that, attendees.

There’s obviously been a lot of controversy in the WordPress space since that event. I wondered if there has been some anxiety? I have a recollection that the event, the planning of the event probably would’ve been happening earlier than it did for this event.

So I’m just wondering if you could speak to that, whether or not the team itself are happy with the numbers that you’ve got so far? And whether or not things are kind of late in the planning, let’s put it that way. Do you feel that it’s all being put together in a rushed way?

[00:18:23] Karla Campos: No, I think we’re on track. I mean, we expected the event to be smaller this year because there have been discussions around different things that are happening in just the space, like traveling restrictions, people being scared to fly to the US, different things that we knew it was going to make the numbers less.

But right now we’re up to 730 registered attendees. So we are planning for a thousand attendees. That’s our goal. Hopefully more. But yeah, we expected that it was going to be a little bit less than last year for the various reasons, including the travel restrictions and things that people do not want to come to the US for.

But, Portland is ultimately a very friendly place and I think our concern is that everyone is safe and happy at the event. So I think we’re doing a very good job with that right now.

[00:19:11] Nathan Wrigley: I guess also there’s maybe, the fact that an event like this has happened in the previous year at the exact same venue. There’s maybe a little bit that would be squandered there, if you know what I mean?

So the idea that you’d get a similar number of the exact same people, plus others, coming back to the same venue. I know for me at least anyway, it is quite nice to have the opportunity to go to different places. I’m going to be in attendance, so it hasn’t put me off. I’m still going to be there. But I think some people do like the fact that, you know, it’s in Portland one year and it’s in, I don’t know, Texas or California or whatever it may be in different years.

So maybe that kind of speaks into it a little bit as well. But yeah, the whole thing around traveling to the US, plus the obvious problems that we’ve had in the WordPress space around the community and so on. And then maybe this third piece of it being in the same venue and in the same location, maybe all of those conspire to not make it as big as last year. But still, a thousand, which seems to be the target number, is pretty credible.

Do you anticipate getting to a thousand? Is the trajectory at the moment, if you were to map that forward, do you think you’ll actually manage that? Despite the fact that it’s an aspirational target? Are you fairly confident you’ll get there?

[00:20:14] Karla Campos: Yeah, I’m confident. But I told you earlier, I’m a confident person, I’m always thinking positive. And we do have a lot of student initiatives, because we want to bring more people into the WordPress community, more students that perhaps haven’t even had the opportunity to experience WordPress, and the community, and how that can help them build their career.

So, our topic is sort of like the future of WordPress. And we’re doing a lot of student initiatives so that, you know, everybody gets a little bit of that WordPress community feel and that would, there’s a lot of students very interested, so I think we can reach the number.

[00:20:48] Nathan Wrigley: I certainly hope so. I mean, when you say students, I’m presuming from that, that you mean younger people by that as well. So not just people that are in education, but really aiming that target at young people in education.

It always struck me when you go to these events that the demographic definitely skews older. I don’t mean, you know, particularly old, but you don’t tend to find a bunch of 18 to 20 year olds wandering around in large proportion.

It seems to me, it’s definitely in the late twenties, early thirties, forties, fifties and and upwards. So that’s been a definite charge that you’ve had then has it, to try and get younger people? Have I got that right? When you said student, did you mean younger people?

[00:21:29] Karla Campos: Well, we are working with colleges because they’re very interested in how AI and WordPress are evolving, and everything that’s going around that. And through our event, the teachers that work at the colleges are very excited to connect the students with the future of the web and whatever’s happening with web development and AI.

They’re really interested in sending the students there because even though they’re educators, they’re not the innovators. So they want to come to WordCamp to connect with those innovators, including Google. Google’s liaison of search, Danny Sullivan, that was amazing to the students. They wanted to meet people in charge of the tech industry and connect there. So I’m talking about those students, yeah, the students that are in the tech industry that want to connect with the industry leaders.

[00:22:17] Nathan Wrigley: I think things work slightly differently over here in the UK, but I know that in the US there’s this sort of concept of college credits, where you do a certain thing and it can count towards part of your educational program. You know, you can tick some boxes and it will get you to jump over some hurdles.

Do you know if an event like WordCamp, in this case WordCamp US, do you know if an event like that can count? And does that in some way then kind of make it slightly easier to sell a WordPress event into that student marketplace, if you like?

[00:22:47] Karla Campos: It can, depending on the teachers. Some of the universities and colleges already have their structured standards on how credits work. But if we’re working with the teachers, sometimes they have summer school projects that they get extra credit, that helps their grades. So we can tie that in with that.

We’re welcome to working with any teacher who wants to help their students grow their career and willing to give them extra credit and opportunities. So it depends on the college and the teacher and what already they have established.

[00:23:17] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, like I said, we don’t kind of operate that system, certainly for WordCamp US, I don’t think that would particularly count. But I know that those kind of systems exist.

Just pivoting to you a little bit and the work that you did in the past. Obviously it sounds like you’ve got a heritage in being involved in sizable events, credible events in the tech space, and perhaps other spaces as well.

What do you make of this event? How do you sort of see it? Do you see it as a sort of professional tech event, something that you may have attended on behalf of organisations that you were working for before? Or is this much more of a kind of community event?

I can’t really sum up the exact target of what I’m trying to say there, but I’m just really after a feel of what you make of the event in terms of whether it’s more, I don’t know, more friendly, a little bit less business orientated, and perhaps skewing more to community, that kind of thing.

[00:24:05] Karla Campos: I think it’s a little bit of both. It is a friendlier atmosphere from the different tech events that I’ve been involved in that feel more serious. Because when you go to a WordCamp, you automatically feel that it’s a little friendlier, a little bit less corporate.

Yes, everyone is very skilled. They’re very like awesome in their profession, but they’re also very down to earth and just willing to, hey, share a tidbit here, a tip here. I’ve even seen people help other people with their websites live at the events. Hey, look, I’m having a problem with my website. It’s not doing something on mobile. It’s not responding the way I want it to. It’s not responsive. Can you help me? And someone will stop and say, yeah, let’s sit down here in this corner. Let’s go to that room, and let me look at it and help you a little bit. And it’s something that I don’t see at other conferences where people have this community feel. So I’ve always admired that about WordCamps.

[00:24:56] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, it’s really hard to encapsulate, isn’t it? What that thing is. But that thing is a thing. And what I mean by that is there is some quality of community spirit that definitely hasn’t existed at any event that I’ve been to outside of the WordPress space. It feels a little bit more like, heads down, you’re there for work, you must concentrate entirely on work, and maybe you’ll attend some kind of, I don’t know, after party or something like that. But again, the entire purpose of that will be business, business as usual.

And there is much more of sense of camaraderie. And really, I suppose if somebody is listening to this and is kind of on the fence about these events, definitely I would draw your attention to that fact. And although if you are perhaps slightly more on the introverted side, it doesn’t necessarily make it a hundred percent easier to attend, and this feeling that you’ll just suddenly be embraced by everybody in the hallway, it probably won’t work that way. But there is definitely a more friendly atmosphere. There’s a different, and dare I say it, vibe going on, which I have always really appreciated. It definitely feels less corporate, more friendly. There’s more of an opportunity to make friendships, for want of a better way of describing it.

[00:26:07] Karla Campos: Yes. And also, I’m sure you know Michelle Frechette.

[00:26:10] Nathan Wrigley: Oh, yeah.

[00:26:11] Karla Campos: I think everyone knows Michelle. She’s organising something called WP Trail Buddies. So she’s actually connecting veteran WordCamp attendees with new attendees, so that they can have like a friend, a buddy at the WordCamp that they can do things with, so they don’t feel alone and they feel welcome.

So that’s a new thing, and that sounds, you know, if a person is coming to WordCamp for the first time, they can go that route, you know, they can actually have somebody there with them.

[00:26:37] Nathan Wrigley: I would draw everybody’s attention, if you’ve never been to one of these flagship WordPress events before, there is something particularly good about this Portland one. And the thing that I enjoyed so much last year, I enjoyed the event, but the venue itself was so brilliant, so enormous. There was never this hint of falling over people. There was quite literally acres of space to mill around.

And so the hallway track felt very much, you know, you could take five minutes out and go and sit in the corner over there and get on with your own stuff, what have you. But this would be a really good one to attend. So I would definitely advise people, if you’re on the fence and you kind of think, I maybe should go, I’m not entirely sure. Everything is geared up. We know what that place is like, the conference center is absolutely magnificent. So I would definitely urge people who are wavering, who aren’t entirely sure to give it a go.

And I will put a link into the show notes for the initiative that Michelle Frechette is leading, the WP Trail Buddies. And if you’ve got concerns about showing up and just hanging out and feeling a little bit isolated, then Michelle will be able to introduce you to somebody who has been there, done that, for want of a better word. Again, another reason to have a little look.

And the tickets are really inexpensive. It’s not nothing, but at the moment, I don’t think there’s going to be any change in this. But it’s a flat hundred bucks. And, in all honesty, you’ll probably eat more than a hundred dollars worth of food in the time that you’re there. So the ticket price is just absurdly low.

[00:28:02] Karla Campos: Yes, and we do also have a student pricing of $25, if the students show ID, or proof that they’re enrolled in school. So that’s also like an amazing deal.

[00:28:12] Nathan Wrigley: Now, the events often have a bit of a formula to them. There’ll be presentations, and they will run over a couple of days. So you’ll pick various tracks and you can go and see this person, and then come out into the hallway and hang out in the hallway.

But then also there’s this idea of contributor day. And in contributor day, typically you would select a table, that table will be aligned to some core part of the project. So it could be photography, it could be Core, it could be, I don’t know, polyglots, something like that. And you would allocate your time and decide to work on that for the day.

I have a feeling that you are doing something a little bit different on contributor day this time around. Do you know about that? Do you want to speak about that?

[00:28:51] Karla Campos: We are, but it’s a secret.

[00:28:53] Nathan Wrigley: Is it? Okay.

[00:28:54] Karla Campos: No, it’s a hackathon, but Gail Wallace is going to speak more about that in the coming weeks. So we’re just waiting for her to share all the information about what she’s been working on with that.

But there is something new, which is collaborating remotely for the Testing Team. So that’s fun. That hasn’t been done before.

[00:29:14] Nathan Wrigley: So the Testing Team will be open to kind of like a, more of like a Zoom approach. So it won’t just be people that are attending in the room. They’ll be able to offer the opportunity for people to join live, but remotely. Yeah, that’s really nice. That’s a really nice idea.

The hackathon, I was lucky enough to go to a hackathon earlier this year. I attended CloudFest in Germany, in Rust in Germany. Obviously you are not able to reveal whether you know or otherwise what that will involve. For the people listening to this, I’ll just give you some indication of what that might involve.

And a hackathon, rather than just showing up and deciding on the spur of the moment what it is that you’re going to be involved with. A hackathon is more of a kind of project based thing, where you come to the hackathon with a project that you would like to see finished in a certain way. So you might come and say, during the next day, we’re going to try and do this thing, so we’re going to move from here to here.

And in that way, everybody coalesces on the exact same purpose, and tries to push that thing over the line. And in the hackathons that I’ve been to, again, there’s this sort of slightly tongue in cheek, fun, competitive edge as well, where at the end of the day, different people from the different teams sort of stand up and say exactly what they did and how they did.

And then there’s kind of like a voting, there’s a panel of people who decide who the, and I’m doing air quotes, who the winner is. So, again, obviously I’m not going to try and get you to reveal any details, but that kind of component, if it is anything like that, that really does bring something new and a bit of fun, I think.

[00:30:40] Karla Campos: Yeah, I think people enjoy, when it’s friendly competition on something that they’re passionate about building, I think they enjoy that, like sports. So it’s exciting.

[00:30:49] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, that’s a good way of describing it, sporty, competitive edge kind of thing, isn’t it? Just sort of rehashing a bit of a question I asked a minute ago though. Obviously, like I said, you’ve been involved in these kind of events before in different spheres. Is there anything that you think, if you were to rerun your time, and maybe you’ll be involved in next year’s WordCamp US, I don’t know. Is there anything where you think, do you know what, I think we could try this, or we should jettison that? Obviously nobody’s implying that you are going to be the decision maker in any of this, but are there any bits and pieces that you think, well, we should definitely try that, or we should definitely maybe lose that?

[00:31:23] Karla Campos: I think we’ve had so many ideas, and we were all just kind of thrown together as a new team. And there were so many ideas flying around that we just couldn’t get to. So we’re doing the best ones that we thought about, but like there were so many others that we could’ve included.

So I’m not sure if I’m going to be joining next year or not, I haven’t planned that out yet. But I think we’re going to at least have a discussion with the organisers about just kind of like looking back, hey, what did we like. Let’s leave little notes for the next year’s organising team so that they can, you know, they can know what to expect.

But now we have a roadmap together as a team. So I think it’s fun. And we’ll be way more prepared next year and add more fun stuff that we just didn’t have time for. But we’re all very creative, so you know how those discussions go when everybody’s creative, throwing ideas. And it’s like, all right, we have to pick just three because all of these are great but, you know, we’re on a time constraint, so we just execute these.

So I think it’s been fun all around. But yeah, just kind of getting all the ideas that we had together and executing them next year.

[00:32:23] Nathan Wrigley: I think it’s kind of an important moment for these kind of events because they’ve been running largely on the same format for a really long time. And there’s definitely, in events outside of the WordPress space, there definitely are some of these fun ideas kind of creeping in, making it a little bit more entertainment, if you know what I mean, at the same time as being educational and informative. And I think it would be interesting to sound some of those different organisations out. Maybe go to the different events like DrupalCon and things like that, and see how they do things differently. See how sponsorship works and so on and so forth.

Now, one question, which I think probably will be rounding off the episode, if that’s all right with you, would be to ask you, when does your involvement with this end? And I don’t mean, you know, that you might get involved next year. Because obviously I’m going to attend, and the minute the whole thing is finished, it’s kind of more or less over for me. I may go back to the hotel or spend a few days in Portland having a look around or what have you. But for me, the event has kind of finished at that moment. For you, I’m guessing that’s not the case. Do you have any anticipation of what it will involve in terms of collapsing the event down? At what point it will be considered to be finished by the team?

[00:33:28] Karla Campos: Well, physically we have to be out by a certain date and everything cleaned out. So I am planning to stay there a little bit longer to handle that with the rest of the team. But I think we should be done by the 31st. Everything should be cleared out, physically.

But then of course we’re going to reunite and just kind of have a meeting and talk about the experience. And like we were talking about, what can we do better next year? And I think maybe, I think we’re still going to be in talks at least two weeks after the event is over to kind of close that out as a team.

[00:33:59] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah. So it definitely doesn’t end on the day that it’s going to end for me. So, yeah, there’s another example of the amount that people like you are doing.

I would just draw attention to the fact that clearly this is not an event which is being organised entirely by you. There’s obviously a huge team of people going on in the background. And it would be remiss of us not to thank all of them. Can’t mention them all by name, but if you go to the website, I’m sure there’ll be places where you can go and find out who is involved in the team.

Don’t forget that if you want to get tickets and you’re a student, you can pay just $25 for a, basically three day event. I mean, that’s nuts. Or if you are not a student and you want to attend, then $100. And there are still, I think, some additional options that you can explore, perhaps sponsorship options and things like that, above and beyond that as well.

So, Karla, that’s all the questions I’ve got. Is there anything that I’ve missed? Is there anything prior to recording to this you thought, ah, I must remember to say that, but didn’t get a chance to say it?

[00:34:57] Karla Campos: I just want to say thank you everyone for even thinking of attending. It’s going to be a great event. We have amazing speakers all about the future of WordPress and AI. How everything in technology is changing, what that means for your business now. Or if you have plans for a new business, what it means for you in your career. It’s going to be just a great place to network with people in the field, and I’m extremely excited. So I hope you’re excited just like I am. And I hope to see you guys at the WordCamp US 2025.

[00:35:26] Nathan Wrigley: So I should probably at this point mention that the links to anything that we’ve mentioned so far will be in the show notes. But if you do wish to find out more about it, head to us.wordcamp.org/2025. And as is usually the case, there’s a whole bunch of links at the top of that website.

So for example, you can look at the schedule, so see who’s speaking. You can look and dig into the location and about it. And obviously buying the tickets as well, that’s all going to be there. So us.wordcamp.org/2025, the numbers.

There we go. Thank you very much for chatting to me today, Karla Campos. Really, really appreciate it. And very, very best of luck with the event. I hope to see you there.

[00:36:07] Karla Campos: Thank you, Nathan.

[00:00:19] Nathan Wrigley: Welcome to the Jukebox Podcast from WP Tavern. My name is Nathan Wrigley.

Jukebox is a podcast which is dedicated to all things WordPress, the people, the events, the plugins, the blocks, the themes, and in this case, how the Google Site Kit plugin is attempting to simplify their product offering, right inside of WordPress.

If you’d like to subscribe to the podcast, you can do that by searching for WP Tavern in your podcast player of choice, or by going to wptavern.com/feed/podcast, and you can copy that URL into most podcast players.

If you have a topic that you’d like us to feature on the podcast, I’m keen to hear from you and hopefully get you, or your idea. Featured on the show. Head to wptavern.com/contact/jukebox, and use the form there.

So on the podcast today we have Mariya Moeva. Mariya has more than 15 years of experience in tech across search quality, developer advocacy, community building and outreach, and product management. Currently, she’s the product lead for Site Kit, Google’s official WordPress plugin.

She’s presented at Word Camp Europe in Basel this year and joins us to talk about the journey from studying classical Japanese literature to fighting web spam at Google, and eventually shaping open source tools for the web.

Mariya talks about her passion for the open web, and how years of direct feedback from site owners shaped the vision for Site Kit. Making complex analytics accessible and actionable for everyone, from solo bloggers to agencies and hosting providers.

Site Kit has had impressive growth for a WordPress plugin, currently there are 5 million active installs and a monthly user base of 700,000.

We learn how Site Kit bundles core Google products like Search Console, Analytics, Page Speed Insights, AdSense into a simpler, curated WordPress dashboard, giving actionable insights without the need to trawl through multiple complex interfaces.

Mariya explains how the plugin is intentionally beginner friendly with features like role-based dashboard sharing, integration with WordPress’ author and category systems, and some newer additions like Reader Revenue Manager to help site owners become more sustainable.

She shares Google’s motivations for investing so much in WordPress and the open web, and how her team is committed to active support, trying to respond rapidly on forums and listening closely to feedback.

We discussed Site Kit’s roadmap, from benchmarking and reporting features, to smarter, more personalized recommendations in the future.

If you’ve ever felt overwhelmed by analytics dashboards, or are looking for ways to make data more practical and valuable inside WordPress, this episode is for you.

If you’re interested in finding out more, you can find all of the links in the show notes by heading to wptavern.com/podcast, where you’ll find all the other episodes as well.

And so without further delay, I bring you Mariya Moeva.

I’m joined on the podcast by Mariya Moeva. Hello, Mariya. Nice to meet you.

[00:03:35] Mariya Moeva: Nice to be here.

[00:03:36] Nathan Wrigley: Mariya is doing a presentation at WordCamp Europe. That’s where we are at the moment, and we’re going to be talking about the bits and the pieces that she does around Site Kit, the work that she does for Google. Given that you are a Googler, and that we’re going to be talking about a product that you have, will you just give us your bio? I’ve got it written here, you obviously put one on the WordCamp Europe website. But just roughly what is your place in WordPress and Google and Site Kit and all of that?

[00:04:05] Mariya Moeva: Yeah. I mean, I’ve had a very meandering path. When you would look back to what I studied, which was, you know, classical Japanese literature, all these poems about the moon and the cherry blossoms, who would’ve thought at that time that I would end up building open source plugins? But I did have a meandering path and I ended up here because, mostly because of passion for the open web, and for all kinds of weird websites that exist out there. I really love stumbling upon something great.

I started Google on the web spam team, actually looking into the Japanese spam market, because of this classical Japanese literature degree and the Japanese skills. And then after a couple years or so, I basically despaired of humanity because all you look at is spam every day. Bad sites, hacked sites, malicious pages. And I just wanted to do something that makes the web better rather than removing all the bad stuff.

And so I switched over to an advocacy role, and in that role I essentially was traveling, maybe attending 20, 30 conferences every year, talking to a lot of people about their needs, what they have to complain about Google, what requests they have. And I would collect all of this feedback, and then I would go back to the product teams and I would say, hey, this and this is something that people really want. And they would say, thank you for your feedback.

Essentially at one point I said, okay, we’re going to build this thing, and that’s why I switched into product role. And I was able to take all the feedback over the years, that we’ve gotten from developers and site owners, and to try to build something that makes sense for them. So that’s how I ended up in the product role for building Site Kit.

And the idea from the very beginning was to make it beginner friendly and to make it from their perspective to match that feedback, rather than doing something that is like, here’s your stuff from analytics, here’s your stuff from Search Console, figure it out. That’s how we ended up building this and it’s been now five years. And it actually just a month ago entered the top 10 plugins. So clearly people find some value in it.

We have 700,000 people that use it every month. And overall it’s currently at 5 million active installs, meaning that these sites are kind of pinging WordPress so they’re alive and kicking. It’s been very encouraging to see that what we’re doing is helpful to people and we will keep going. There’s a lot to do.

[00:06:29] Nathan Wrigley: I think it’s kind of amazing because in the WordPress space, there are some of the, let’s call them the heavy hitters. You know, the big plugins that we’ve all heard of, the Yoasts of this world that kind of thing. Jetpack, all those kind of things. This, honestly has gone under the radar a bit for me, and yet those numbers are truly huge. Four and a half to 5 million people over a span of five years is really rather incredible.

[00:06:54] Mariya Moeva: It grew very fast, yeah.

[00:06:55] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah. And yet it’s not one that, well, I guess most people are reaching out to plugins to solve a problem, often a business problem. So, you know, there’s this idea of, I install this and there’s an ROI on that. This is not really that, not really ROI, it’s more site improvement. Okay, here’s a site that needs things fixing on it. Here’s some data about what can be fixed. And so maybe for that reason and that reason alone, it’s flown under the radar for me because it doesn’t have that commercial component to it.

[00:07:24] Mariya Moeva: Yeah, for sure. It’s for free and it’s not something that, yeah, sells features or has like a premium model and we don’t market it so much. But I run a little survey in the product where people tell us where they heard from it, and a lot of the responses are either YouTube video, or like blog posts or word of mouth. So it seems to be spreading more that way.

[00:07:46] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, no kidding. I’ll just say the URL out loud in case you’re at a computer when you’re listening to this. It’s SiteKit, as one word, dot withgoogle.com. I don’t know if that’s the canonical URL, but that’s where I ended up when I did a quick search for it. So sitekit.withgoogle.com. And over there you’ll be able to download well, as it labels itself, Google’s official WordPress plugin.

The first thing that surprises me is, a, Google’s interest in WordPress. That is fascinating to me. I mean, obviously we all know, Google is this giant, this leviathan. Maybe you’ve got interest in other CMSs, maybe not. I don’t really know. But I think that’s curious. But obviously 43% of the web, kind of makes sense to partner with WordPress, doesn’t it? To improve websites.

[00:08:31] Mariya Moeva: Yeah. I work with plenty of CMSs. I work with Wix, with Squarespace, and we essentially what I try to do and what my team tries to do, we are called the Ecosystem Team. So we want to bring the things that we think would be useful to site owners and businesses directly to where they are.

So if you are in your Wix dashboard, you should be able to see the things from Google that are useful. And same if you are in WordPress. And obviously WordPress is, orders of magnitude, a bigger footprint than any of the others. And also it has this special structure where everything is decentralised and people kind of mix and match. So that’s why we went with the plugin model. And using the public APIs, we want to show what’s possible.

Because all the data that we use is public data. There’s no special Google feature that only the Google product gets, right? We are just combining it in interesting ways because I’ve spent so much time talking to people, like what they need. And so we just curate and combine in ways that are actually helping people to make decisions and to kind of clear the clutter.

Because when you go to analytics, it’s like 50 reports and so many menus and it’s like, where do I start? So we try to give a starting point in Site Kit. And we also try to help with other things like make people sustainable. One thing that we recently launched just a month ago is called Reader Revenue Manager. So you can put a little prompt on your site, which asks people to give you like $2 or whatever currency you are in, or even put like a subscription.

And so the idea is you don’t have to have massive traffic in order to generate revenue from your content. If you have your hundred thousand loyal readers, they can help you be more sustainable. So we’re looking at these kind of features, like what can we launch that is more for small and medium sites and would be helpful? And how can we make it as simple as possible? So that people don’t kind of drop off during the setup because it’s too complicated.

[00:10:33] Nathan Wrigley: Would it be fair to summarise the plugin’s initial purpose as kind of binding a bunch of Google products, which otherwise you would have to go and navigate to elsewhere? So for example, I’m looking at the website now, Search Console, Analytics, Page Speed Insights, AdSense, Google Ads, and all of those kind of things. Typically we’d have to go and, you know, set up an account. I guess we’d have to do that with Site Kit anyway. But we’d have to go to the different URLs and do all of that.

The intention of this then is to bind that inside of the WordPress UI, so it’s not just the person who’s the admin of that account. You can open it up so that people who have the right permissions inside of WordPress, they can see, for example, Google Analytics data. And it gets presented on the backend of WordPress rather than having to go to these other URLs. Is that how it all began as a way of sort of surfacing Google product data inside the UI of WordPress?

[00:11:21] Mariya Moeva: Yeah, we wanted to bring the most important things directly to where people are, so they don’t have to bother going to 15 places. And we wanted to drastically decrease and curate the information so that it’s easy to understand, because when you have 15 dashboards in Analytics and 15 dashboards in Search Console, and then you have to figure out what to download and in which spreadsheet to merge and how to compare, then this is. Maybe if you have an agency taken care of, they can help you. But if you don’t, which 70% of our users say that they’re one person operation, so they’re taking care of their business, and on top of that, the website. We wanted to make it simpler to understand how you’re doing, and what you should do next with Google data.

[00:12:02] Nathan Wrigley: So it’s a curated interface. So it’s not, I mean, maybe you can pull in every single thing if you so wish. But the idea is you give a, I don’t know, an easier to understand interface to, for example, Google Analytics.

That was always the thing for me in Google Analytics. I’m sure that if you have the time and the expertise, like you’re an agency that deals with all of that, then all of that data is probably useful and credible. But for me, I just want to know some top level items. I don’t need to dig into the weeds of everything.

And there was menus within menus, within menus, and I would get lost very quickly, and dispirited and essentially give up. So I guess this is an endeavor to get you what you need quickly inside the WordPress admin, so you don’t have to be an expert.

[00:12:43] Mariya Moeva: Yeah. And then it gets more powerful when you are able to combine data from different products. So, for example, we have a feature called Search Funnel in the dashboard, which lets you, it combines data from Search Console on search impressions and search clicks, and then it combines data from Analytics on visitors on the site and conversions. So it kind of helps you map out the entire path, versus having to go over here, having to go over there, having to combine everything yourself. So when you combine things, then it gets also more powerful.

We have another feature which lets you combine data from AdSense and Analytics. So if you have AdSense on your site, you can then see which pages earn you the most revenue. So when you have that, suddenly you can see, okay, so I have now these pages here, what queries are they ranking for? How much time people spend on them? Can I expand my content in that direction? It helps you to be more focused in kind of the strategy that you have for your site.

[00:13:45] Nathan Wrigley: Is it just making, I mean, I say just, is it making API calls backwards and forwards to Google’s Analytics, Search Console, whatever, and then displaying that information, or is it kind of keeping it inside the WordPress database?

[00:13:58] Mariya Moeva: We don’t store anything, well, almost anything. Yeah, we wanted to keep the data as secure as possible, so we created this proxy service, which kind of helps to exchange the credentials. So the person can authenticate with their Google account, and then from there, the data is pulled via API, and we cache the dashboard for one hour. After that we refreshed authentication token. From the data itself, nothing is stored.

[00:14:23] Nathan Wrigley: So it’s just authentication information really that’s stored. Well, that’s kind of a given, I suppose. Otherwise you’ll be logging in every two minutes.

[00:14:29] Mariya Moeva: Right. So that’s the model that we have because we really wanted people to be able to access this data, but also to keep it secure. And because of how the WordPress database is, we didn’t feel like we could save it there.

[00:14:41] Nathan Wrigley: It sounds from what you’ve just said, it’s as if it’s combining things from a variety of different services, kind of linking them up in a structured way so that somebody who’s not particularly experienced can make connections between, I don’t know, ads and analytics. The spend on the ads and the analytics, you know, the ROI if you like.

Does it do things uniquely? Is there something you can get inside of Site Kit which you could not get out of the individual products if you went there? Or is it just more of a, well, we’ve done the hard work for you, we’ve mapped these things together so you don’t have to think about it?

[00:15:10] Mariya Moeva: The one thing that it does that I’m super excited about, and we’ll build on that, but we have the fundamental of it now, is it actually creates data for you. Because in contrast to Search Console or Analytics or all these other, which are kind of Google hosted, they can only tell you like a long help center article, go there on your site, then click this, then paste this code, right? They cannot help you with this, whereas Site Kit is on the website.

So if you agree, which we don’t install anything without people’s consent, like they have to activate the feature, but if you agree, then we can do things on your behalf. So for example, we can track every time someone clicks the signup button and we can generate an analytics event for you, even if that plugin normally doesn’t send analytics events. And that way, suddenly you have your conversion data available.

So very often people look to the top of the funnel, like how many people came to my site? But they don’t look to what these people did beyond kind of, oh, they stayed two minutes. So what does this mean? You want to see, did they buy the thing? Did they sign up for the thing, or subscribe or whatever it is? And we help create this data because we have this unique access to the source code of the site.

So we create, for example, on leads generation or purchases. We also, every time that a specific page is viewed, we will generate an event about the author of the page. So then we can aggregate the data, which authors bring in the most page views. Let’s say you have like a site with five, six, whatever authors. Or which categories are bringing in the most engagement and these kind of things.

[00:16:52] Nathan Wrigley: So it really does get very WordPressy. It’s not just to do with the Google side of things. It is mapping information from Google, so categories, author profiles, that kind of thing, and mapping them into the analytics that you get. Okay, that’s interesting. So it’s a two-way process, not just a one-way process.

[00:17:09] Mariya Moeva: Yeah. It’s very much integrated with WordPress. We have also a lot of other features, like for example, that kind of stretch into other parts of the website. So this Reader Revenue Manager that I mentioned before with the prompts that you can put on your pages. You can go to the individual post and for every post there’s like a little piece of control UI that we’ve added there in the compose screen, where you can say, this is excluded from this prompt, or, you know, you can control from there.

So we try to integrate where it makes sense, like where the person would want to take this action. And again, because it’s on the website, we can kind of spread out beyond just this one dashboard.

[00:17:48] Nathan Wrigley: And would I, as a site admin, would I be able to assign permissions to different user roles within WordPress? So for example, an editor, or a certain user profile, may be able to see a subset of data. You know, for example, I don’t know, you are involved in the spending on AdSense. But you, other user over there, you’ve got nothing to do with that. But you are into the analytics, so you can see that, and you over there you can see that. Is that possible?

[00:18:12] Mariya Moeva: We have something called dashboard sharing. So it has the same, like if you use Google Docs or anything like that, it has this little person with a plus in the corner, icon. And then from there, if you are the admin who set up this particular Google Service, who connected it to Site Kit, then you’re able to say who should be able to see it. So you essentially grant view only access to, let’s say all the editors, or all the contributors or whatever. And then you can choose which Google service’s data they can see.

[00:18:44] Nathan Wrigley: So yes is the answer to that, yeah.

[00:18:46] Mariya Moeva: Yeah, yeah. So they don’t have to set it up, I mean, they have to go through a very simplified setup, and then they basically get a kind of a screenshot. I mean it’s, you can still click on things, but you can’t change anything, so it’s kind of a view-only dashboard.

[00:18:59] Nathan Wrigley: I’m kind of curious about the market that you pitch this to. So sell is the wrong word because it’s a free plugin, but who you’re pitching it at. So obviously if you’ve got that end user, the site owner. Maybe they’ve got a site and they’ve got a small business with a team. Maybe it’s just them, so there’s the whole permissions thing there.

But also I know that Google, there are whole agencies out there who just specialise in Google products, and analysing the data that comes out of Analytics. Can you do that as well as an agency? Could I set this up for my clients and have some, you know, I’ve got my agency dashboard and I want to give this client access to this website, and this website and this website, but not these other ones? Can it be deployed on a sort of agency basis like that?

[00:19:38] Mariya Moeva: You would still have to activate it for every individual site. So in that sense, there’s a bunch of steps that you have to go through. But once it’s activated, you can then share with any kind of client. And actually we have a lot of agencies that can install it for every site that they have.

Just today someone came and after he saw the demo, he was like, okay, I’m going to install it for all my clients. Because what we’ve heard is that it’s exactly the level of information that a client would benefit from. And this means then that they pester the agency less. So we’ve literally heard people saying, you’re saving me a lot of phone calls. So that’s why agencies really like it.

And the next big feature request, which we’re working on right now, is to generate like an email report out of that. So for those who don’t even want to log into WordPress to see, there will be a possibility to get this in their inbox.

[00:20:30] Nathan Wrigley: So you could get it like a weekly summary, whatever it that wish to trigger. And, okay, so that could go anywhere really. And then your clients don’t even need to phone you about that.

[00:20:41] Mariya Moeva: Yeah. So we are trying to really actively reach people where they are, even if that’s their email inbox.

[00:20:49] Nathan Wrigley: And the other question I have is around your relationship with some of the bigger players, maybe hosting companies. Do you have this pre-installed on hosting cPanels and their, you know, whatever it is that they’ve got in their back end?

[00:21:02] Mariya Moeva: Yeah, we have quite a few hosting providers that pre-install it for their WordPress customers. The reason for this is that they see better lifetime value for those customers that have a good idea of how their site is doing. And yeah, Hostinger is one of those. cPanel. Elementor pre-installs it for all of their users. And they see very good feedback because again, it’s super simple to set up and super easy to understand once you have it. So for them it’s kind of like an extra feature that they can offer, extra value to their users for free.

[00:21:32] Nathan Wrigley: We know Google’s a fabulous company, but you don’t do things for nothing. So what’s the return? How does it work in reverse? So we know that presumably there must be an exchange of data. What are we signing up for if we install Site Kit?

[00:21:47] Mariya Moeva: So, at least, I mean, Google is a huge company, right? There’s hundreds of thousands of people working. So I can’t speak for the whole of Google, but I can speak for the Ecosystem Team, which I’m part of, like the web ecosystem.

The main investment here, or the main goal for us is that the open web continues to thrive, because if people don’t put content, interesting, relevant content on the open web, the search results are going to be very poor and that’s not a good product.

So our idea is to support all the people who create content to make sure that they’re found, like if you’re a local business, that people can find you when they need stuff from that particular local business. And what we see is that, especially for smaller and medium sites, they really struggle, first with going online, and then with figuring out what they’re supposed to do. And so a lot of them give up because in comparison to other platforms, it’s a little bit of an upfront investment, right? Like you have to pay for hosting, you have to set up the site, you have to add content.

So we try to help people as much as we can to see the value that the open web brings to them, so that they can continue to create for the open web. So that’s our hidden motivation. I think in that sense, we’re very much aligned with the WordPress community because here everybody cares about the open web and for all kind of small, weird websites to continue flourishing and get their like 100 or 300 or 1,000 readers that they deserve.

So that’s the motivation. I think because it includes other things like AdSense and AdWords, like people can set up a ads campaign directly from Site Kit in a very simplified flow, and the same thing for AdSense. Obviously some money exchanges hands, but this is relatively minor compared to the benefit that we think there is for the web in general.

[00:23:35] Nathan Wrigley: Google really does seem to have a very large presence at WordPress events. I mean, I don’t know about the smaller ones, you know, the regional sort of city based events, but at the, what they call flagship events, so WordCamp Asia and WordCamp Europe and US, there’s the whole sponsor area. And it’s usual to see one of the larger booths being occupied by Google. And I wonder, is it Site Kit that you are talking about when you are here or is it other things as well?

But also it’s curious to me that Google would be here in that presence, because those things are not cheap to maintain. So there must be somebody up in Google somewhere saying, okay, this is something we want to invest in. So is it Site Kit that you are basically at the booth talking about?

[00:24:19] Mariya Moeva: So me, yes, or people on my team. We have like a Site Kit section this year. There’s also Google Trends. There’s also some other people talking about user experience and on search. And this changes depending on which teams within Google want to reach out to the WordPress community.

But with Site Kit, we’ve been pretty consistent for the last six years. We are always part of the booth. But the kind of whole team, like the whole Google booth content has kind of changed over the years as well depending on who’s coming.

[00:24:51] Nathan Wrigley: I know that a lot of work being done is surrounding performance and things like that, and a lot of the Google staff that are in the WordPress space seem to be focused on that kind of thing, talking about the new APIs that are shipping in the browsers and all of those kind of things.

Okay, so on the face of it, a fairly straightforward product to use. But I’m guessing the devil is in the detail. How do you go about supporting this? So for example, if I was to install it and to run into some problems, do you have like a, I don’t know, a documentation area or do you have support, or chat or anything like that? Because I know that with the best will in the world, people are going to run into problems. How do people manage that kind of thing?

[00:25:27] Mariya Moeva: Yeah, this was something that I was super, I felt really strongly about based on my previous experience in the developer advocate world. Because very often I got feedback that it’s super hard to reach Google. And it’s also understandable given the scale of some of the products.

But when I started this project I insisted that we allocate resources for support. So we have two people full-time support. One of them is upstairs, the support lead. He knows the product inside and out. They’re always on the forum, the plugin forum, support forum. And they answer usually within 24 hours. So everybody who has a question gets their question answered.

We’ve also created the very detailed additions. When you have Site Kit, you also get a few additions to the Site Health forum, so you can share that information with them and they see like detailed stuff about the website so they can help debug. And in many, many cases, I’ve seen people coming pretty angry, leave a one star review, then James or Adam who are support people, engage with them, and then it turns into a five star review because they feel like, okay, someone listened to me and helped me figure out what is going on.

We have real people answering questions relatively quickly. And they don’t just go, of course they focus on the WordPress support forum, but they also check Reddit and other places where people like mentioned Site Kit, and they try to help and to direct them to the right place. So for Site Kit, we have very robust support.

Now, when it’s an issue with a product, a Google product that is connected to Site Kit, so it’s not a Site Kit problem, let’s say you got some kind of strange message from AdSense about your account status changing. Then we would have to hand over to the AdSense account manager or support team that they have, because we don’t know everything, like how AdSense makes decisions and stuff like that. But for anything Site Kit related, we are very fast to answer.

[00:27:22] Nathan Wrigley: That’s good to hear because I think you’re right. I think the perception with any giant company is that it kind of becomes a bit impersonal, and Google would be no exception. And having just a forum which never seems to get an answer, you drop something in, six months later, you go back and nobody’s done anything in there except close the thread, kind of slightly annoying. But something like this. So 24 hours, roughly speaking, is the turnaround time.

[00:27:45] Mariya Moeva: Yeah. I mean, not on the weekend, but yeah.

[00:27:46] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah. Still, that’s pretty amazing.

[00:27:47] Mariya Moeva: Yeah, yeah. We are very serious about this because, I mean, also the WordPress community is really strong, right? So you want to show that we care. We want to hear from people. A lot of bugs then also turn into feature requests and get prioritised to be developed. So, yeah, we really value when people come to complain. It’s a good thing.

[00:28:03] Nathan Wrigley: Excellent. Okay, well, we won’t open that as a goal, please send in your complaints. But nevertheless, it’s nice that you take it seriously.

So it sounds like it’s under active development. You sound like this is basically what you’re doing over at Google. Do you have a roadmap? Do you have a sort of laundry list of things that you want to achieve over the next six months? Interesting things that we might want to hear about.

[00:28:21] Mariya Moeva: Sure, yeah. I mean, my ultimate vision, which is not the next six months, I would love to move away as much as possible from just stats. As curated and as kind of structured as it is right now, and get more into like recommendations, and like to-do list. Because what I hear from people again and again, it’s like, I have two hours this month, tell me what should I do with those two hours?

So they’re asking a lot from us. They’re asking essentially to look, analyse everything and to prioritise their tasks, to tell them which one is the most important or most impactful. And this is like several levels of analysis further than where we are now.

So one thing that we are looking to work on is benchmarking, because you cannot know are you growing or not, unless you know how you’re doing on average. And today, people who are a little bit more savvy can do this of course, but a lot of people don’t. And so for us to be able to tell you, not just you got 20 clicks this week, but also this is okay for you, or this is better than last year, this time, or this is better than your competitors. I think that’s a really valuable way to interpret the data and to help people understand what it means.

[00:29:38] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah. And really, Google is one of the only entities that can provide that kind of data.

[00:29:44] Mariya Moeva: Especially for search.

[00:29:45] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, especially against competitors. That’s really interesting because analysing the data, whilst it’s fun for some people, I feel it’s not that interesting for most people. And so just having spreadsheets of data, charts of data, it’s interesting and you no doubt gain some important knowledge from it. But being told, here’s the outcomes of that data, try doing this thing and try doing that thing, that is much more profound than just demonstrating the data.

And I’m guessing, I could be wrong about this, and I’ve more or less said this in every interview over the last year, I’m guessing there’s an AI component to all of that. Getting AI to sort of analyse the data and give useful feedback.

[00:30:22] Mariya Moeva: I mean, we are investigating how to do all of these things. I think in the case of WordPress, it’s a little bit trickier again, because of the distributed nature, and the fact that all the site information lives on the site and then all the Google information. So we’re not like fully hosted where you can access everything and control everything, something like a Squarespace or a Wix.

But there’s definitely, like AI is a perfect use case for this, right? Like benchmarking, you can bucket sites into relevant groups and then see, are they performing better or worse? That’s like classic machine learning case. And we will see exactly, technically, how we’re going to reach this, but that’s one of the things that we’re working on right now.

Another thing is to expand much more the conversion reporting and to help people understand, are they achieving their goals? Because this is something that surprisingly to me, so many people pay money and invest time in the site, and they cannot articulate what the site is doing. Is it working? Is it doing its job? And they’re like, well, like I got some people visiting. And I’m like, did they buy the thing? So you have to know what to

track, and then also to take action after you see the metrics, like to move them in one direction or another. And so helping people like map out this full funnel is one thing that we’re working on. And the other thing is also this email report.

[00:31:40] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, that’s amazing. So really under active development. And you sound very impassioned about it. You sound like this has become your mission, you know?

[00:31:47] Mariya Moeva: I think, nobody ever complained that something is easy, right? When you make things simple and easy for people, they appreciate, even if they’re more knowledgeable than if they can do more advanced things themselves.

And I personally really care, like every time that I find a random website with really strange content, but just, someone put their soul into it. I recently found something in Zurich of like tours of Zurich, walking tours, by someone who really cares about history and architecture.

And it’s a terrible website design wise, but the content is amazing. And I was like, okay, this person could use some help, but he’s doing, or she’s doing like a great job at the content part, and then should get the traffic that they deserve for this. So that’s what motivates me also to come here.

One person, two or three WordCamps ago came over and was saying, everything about Google is hard except Site Kit. And I was like, yeah, that’s what we are trying to do. We really want to simplify things for you. So, yeah, being here is also super motivating. To talk to people and to hear feedback and feature requests. And again, we like when people come to complain.

[00:32:54] Nathan Wrigley: Well, I was just speaking to a few people prior to you entering the room and those few people all have Site Kit installed on their site. So you’re doing something right.

[00:33:02] Mariya Moeva: I hope it’s helpful. I hope it answers some questions and saves people some time. That’s what we are trying to do. Yeah, we are in the part of Google that has the ecosystem focus, so we know that ecosystem changes take longer. I mean, still it’s a fast growing plugin. It got to 5 million in 5 years, but still that’s 5 years. And in the context of software companies which move very fast, 5 years is a long time.

Yeah, we will keep going and hopefully more people can benefit from it. But we do have, yeah, still there are many people who come by and they’re like, whoa, what is this? Show me.

[00:33:36] Nathan Wrigley: Well, that’s nice. There’s for growth as well.

[00:33:38] Mariya Moeva: Yeah, yeah. For sure. I mean, for sure there’s always, and more people create new sites. So, again, going back to that hosting provider question of like, can we bring it to them at the moment of creation so that they know this is something I can use?

[00:33:50] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah. So one more time, the URL is sitekit.withgoogle.com. I will place that into the show notes as well.

Mariya, I think that’s everything that I have to ask. Thank you so much for chatting to me about Site Kit.

[00:34:01] Mariya Moeva: Yeah, thank you for the invitation. It’s been a pleasure to talk about the ecosystem. And, yeah, if people have feature requests, they can always write us either on GitHub in the Site Kit repo, or on the support forum, or if they are coming to any WordCamp where we also are, we are also super happy to hear. So we always love to know what people struggle with, so that we can build it for them and make it easy.

[00:34:23] Nathan Wrigley: Thank you very much indeed.

[00:00:19] Nathan Wrigley: Welcome to the Jukebox Podcast from WP Tavern. My name is Nathan Wrigley.

Jukebox is a podcast which is dedicated to all things WordPress. The people, the events, the plugins, the blocks, the themes, and in this case, how new, native browser features, are transforming what’s possible on the web.

If you’d like to subscribe to the podcast, you can do that by searching for WP Tavern in your podcast player of choice, or by going to wptavern.com/feed/podcast. And you can copy and paste that URL into most podcast players.

If you have a topic that you’d like us to feature on the podcast, I’m keen to hear from you and hopefully get you, or your idea, featured on the show. Head to wptavern.com/contact/jukebox and use the form there.

[00:01:10] Adam Silverstein: So on the podcast today we have Adam Silverstein.

Adam is a WordPress Core committer and works to fix bugs and improve modern web capabilities. He’s also a Developer Relations Engineer on Chrome’s Web Platform team at Google, and there he focuses on making the open web better for everyone.

Adam is here to break down how the rapid evolution of browser technology can supercharge your WordPress sites. We are doing this by referencing his presentation at WordCamp Europe 2025, in which he covered multiple new features of browsers, which can be used by WordPress users to bring a variety of experiences to their websites. In many cases these are browser APIs and features, and are quietly redefining what’s possible on the web. From CSS powered popovers, and scroll driven animations, to speculative loading that speeds up your page transitions. Adam explains how these advancements are changing what’s possible for both developers and end users.

The conversation sheds light on the collaboration between browser vendors, Chrome, Firefox, Safari, and Edge, through initiatives like Interop and Baseline, paving the way for more consistent and robust features across platforms.

Adam also talks about practical topics central to the WordPress community, like how the Popover API and native CSS carousels reduce JavaScript bloat, make sites more accessible, and deliver a better overall user experience.

He shares exciting new frontiers, such as browser-based image processing, powered by WebAssembly, which is paving the way for universal support of modern formats like AVIF and Ultra HDR, and even running AI locally in your browser, no API key or cloud server required.

He provides concrete examples on how these technologies can be leveraged in WordPress via Core updates, canonical plugins, and Gutenberg experiments, with a special focus on how developers can get involved and offer feedback to help shape future web standards. Prepare to look at your browser in a whole new light, truly.

Whether you’re a theme designer, plugin developer, or site owner simply curious about what’s next, this episode is for you.

If you’re interested in finding out more, you can find all of the links in the show notes by heading to wptavern.com/podcast, where you’ll find all the other episodes as well.

And so without further delay, I bring you Adam Silverstein.

[00:03:47] Nathan Wrigley: I am joined on the podcast by Adam Silverstein. Hello, Adam.

[00:03:51] Adam Silverstein: Hello.

[00:03:53] Nathan Wrigley: This is our second conversation. We had a conversation, I want to say four years ago, maybe more in San Diego, think. And at that point we talked about images, AVIF, WebP, those kind of things. We might get into that today.

Adam’s been working with Google for many, many years. Making the web a faster place, I think is a fair way to sum up your career. Just tell us a little bit about yourself, just so that, because this is a fairly technical topic and you are honestly going to have to teach me an awful lot as we speak. Let us know what your credentials are, why people should listen to what you have to say.

[00:04:21] Adam Silverstein: Oh, wow. Being a Googler is not good enough, huh? Well, I’ve been doing WordPress for a long, long time. I think I started, first started contributing back in 3.6. So I’m deeply involved in the Core project. I am a Core committer, which is something that I consider an honor, a privilege, and a responsibility. There’s not that many of us in the world, but I’m one of the people that actually commits code to WordPress.

And I used to have my own run, my own agency, tiny me agency, but building sites for clients directly. Then I wound up at 10up. Learned to build enterprise sites, and work with large teams, and do a lot of planning. And then eventually made my way to Google where I’ve been doing developer relations work. I’m trying to educate developers and bring things like all these new APIs that I talked about in this talk, so that people can learn about it.

[00:05:05] Nathan Wrigley: Have you been focused more or less entirely on WordPress, or are you in any way engaged with the Chrome team?

[00:05:11] Adam Silverstein: Yeah. So our team kind of organisationally was under Chrome, like that was kind of where we sit. We worked with other, like I’ve worked with Drupal and TYPO3. So I’ve worked with some of the other CMSs out there, especially like the open source ones. So that’s kind of been in my purview, but I would say primarily focused on WordPress. That’s where I’ve had the most experience and am most comfortable.

[00:05:32] Nathan Wrigley: It’s kind of interesting because on my computer, obviously I have a browser using Chrome, it’s kind of one of the most benign pieces of software that’s there, in that it doesn’t really have a task that’s assigned to it. I have a music editing piece of software, and I go there for that. And I have a video editing piece of software, and on it goes.

[00:05:49] Adam Silverstein: Yes. And you’re running those in your browser.

[00:05:51] Nathan Wrigley: Right. But also the browser is just this open thing, you know, you can basically do anything in it, and so incredibly powerful. And it feels like in the last few years it’s got way more powerful. But most of that is entirely hidden because I open it up and it looks broadly the same today as it did five years ago. You know, the UI may have changed a little bit.

[00:06:13] Adam Silverstein: Right. But what’s changed is what you can do with it, right? So you talked about editing video or editing audio in your browser. Like, that was not something that was possible five or 10 years ago when we had blue links and HTML. And it was basically, we were publishing newspapers on the web. That was the limit of what we could do.

[00:06:29] Nathan Wrigley: I have an app, it’s called Descript. I don’t know if you’ve come across it, but it’s a full audio, video editing suite entirely in the browser.

[00:06:37] Adam Silverstein: And famously Adobe released Photoshop. Runs in the browser. The full Photoshop. Yeah, I mean it’s like mind blowing that that’s even possible.

[00:06:45] Nathan Wrigley: So the capabilities of the browser have dramatically increased. And you’ve just done, or you’re about to do? Just done.

[00:06:54] Adam Silverstein: Yes.

[00:06:55] Nathan Wrigley: Okay. Firstly, how did It go?

[00:06:56] Adam Silverstein: It went great. Packed room. I think people got something out of it. People gave me good feedback.

[00:07:00] Nathan Wrigley: And it was called Modernising WordPress with New Web Platforms. And I’m just going to read a bit of the blurb that went with that. It says, WordPress is a powerful platform for building websites of all shapes and sizes. To truly thrive, WordPress is embracing the latest advancements in web technology. This talk will explore how developers and site owners can leverage cutting edge web platform capabilities to create next generation WordPress experiences. And then there’s a little bit more which mentions web APIs and so on and so forth. So that really is going to be the core of this discussion.

Now, caveat emptor, dear listener, I have nowhere near enough knowledge to ask you these questions. But I’m going to hope that you are going to help me through it.

So first stop then, let’s just go through a whole laundry list of these different APIs. What are some of the fun things that a browser can do now, that it couldn’t do previously?

[00:07:53] Adam Silverstein: So in the talk, I sort of break it into three areas. There are features that help developers do things that maybe we could do, but we struggled or relied on heavy JavaScript libraries to do.

There’s things that help users by creating better experiences on the web than we previously had the ability to do.

And then the third category is things that previously were just impossible. Just things that we can now do, like running Photoshop in the browser, we mentioned that we could not do before.

So I did not explore, this is not, the talk was not like an exhaustive list of all the APIs, but it was rather sort of a selection of ones that I thought were interesting. Most of them are new. They are sometimes available only in one browser, not in all the browsers. So they’re things that are coming to the web platform. Some of them were already on the web platform.

So let’s go through them. I’ll see if I can remember them all. I have my little slide deck here.

So in the category of helping developers, the first one that I talked about is this thing called the Popover API. So popovers are simply like dialogues or elements that you want to hover above the rest of the page content. And in WordPress we use these extensively in the admin. Like for example, the pointers that you get when you install a new plugin. Or if you open a dialogue, or even like mobile menus use a popover.

And we have it in Gutenberg. And so we already have this technology, but it relies on JavaScript, and it’s actually surprisingly complicated to do a popover. You have to pay attention to always being at the highest level. And if there’s another popover, how do you handle that? And you have to make sure it’s accessible, so when the user hits the escape key, the popover closes.

And if it’s a pointer that’s trying to point to a new feature, say in a menu, how do you handle when the user resizes the window and that element moves? These are very complicated things. And in JavaScript that means you’ve got a heavy library that’s running just to do this simple popover thing.

So with this new CSS based popover API, you can create a popover with just a couple of lines in your code, and the browser takes care of all of the complicated parts of actually doing the popover.

[00:09:49] Nathan Wrigley: So just pausing there for a moment. The whole power of CSS, I’m going to say three years, this has been capturing my attention. CSS seems to be able to do a load of programmatic things now that it didn’t used to be able to. So in this case it’s, I don’t know, it’s calculating the height of the viewport and figuring out is there another thing, how much further to move it down? All of this being handled natively in the browser.

[00:10:13] Adam Silverstein: Exactly. And I think like your point is very true, like CSS capabilities have grown tremendously, and the ability to do sophisticated layouts. And all of these kind of feature things that typically might require JavaScript, now we can do directly in CSS, even things like calculations.

So CSS is a programming language just like JavaScript, right? People like to poo poo it and and so forth, but it’s quite powerful. And a lot of these features that I’m talking about are based on CSS.

[00:10:36] Nathan Wrigley: It’s kind of interesting, if the 18-year-old me was beginning again, I think CSS would be the thing that I would do first. I think I would learn that inside and out before ever looking at JavaScript. Because I you’ve got the foundation of modern CSS, and I know there’s a lot of W3C things that are still being decided and what have you, and obviously the browsers have got various different capabilities. But so much that we would’ve relied on for JavaScript is now capable with CSS, but unexplored I think by many.

[00:11:08] Adam Silverstein: Right. So this feature popover is available in all the browsers. It’s in Baseline. So Baseline is the set of features that developers should be looking at for deciding what they can use. Baseline is a somewhat new concept, so people might not be aware of it. But it is basically a way of knowing which features are available on all the major browsers. So if you see a feature that is labeled Baseline, like in the MDN docs, that means it’s available on all the browsers. You can count on it as a developer.

So in my talk, I covered a lot of APIs that are actually not in Baseline yet. They’re still in development. They maybe are available only in Chrome, or Chrome and Edge, or maybe Chrome and Edge and Firefox, but not Safari. As developer, those are the APIs you need to be a little bit wary of, right, because you wanna build something that’s going to work for everyone.

In many cases, the API will gracefully degrade, it just won’t work in the non-supporting browser. But in the case of like a popover, if it is supported in all the browsers, so you’re safe to use it. If it wasn’t, you would need to have that JavaScript as a fallback. So some of these APIs are, you know, new and experimental, but the browser vendors are all planning on adding support for them. So I only choose APIs that actually browser vendors have indicated their support.

[00:12:14] Nathan Wrigley: Can we just pause there a moment because I began my journey with the web, oh, Internet Explorer 5 kind of days. You probably remember the days as well as I do, and it was chaos, you know? I mean, really we had to try and fix a whole bunch of things that Internet Explorer did differently from all the other browsers. The browsers didn’t agree on almost anything. They went off in completely different directions.

That, I’m going to say, over the last five or maybe more, maybe more like eight years, there seems to have been a real confluence of, and I don’t know if that’s done from like a senior management level, but it does seem like Mozilla is talking to Chromium, Chromium is talking to Safari, and a lot of the people seem to attend the same conferences and talk the same language. They may adopt it at different rates, but they’re all trying to get to the same point, the open web.

[00:13:00] Adam Silverstein: Yes. And in fact, they’ve developed an approach to collaborate on this, and that is called Interop. So the Interop effort is sort of a group effort by all of the browsers to agree upon a set of features that they’re going to work on for each calendar year. So there’s Interop 2025, there’ll be one for 2026, and so forth.

And these features are, they come from either the browser’s needs, what they want to build, or from developers. So there’s an open process where they open a GitHub repo each fall and developers can go and submit. And we’ve actually had some from WordPress that made it in and influenced what browsers do.

So as developers are out there working, they’re finding pain points, they’re struggling to do this or struggling to do that, or it doesn’t work well in one browser. It works in one browser, but not the other. Interop is sort of the effort each year to come up with a set that the browsers agree upon working on. And those features hopefully all land in Baseline the following year.

I remember those days very well, and that’s why we have things like jQuery, right? So we had all these libraries that were built with this promise of sort of normalising the capabilities. Now, you’re absolutely right, the browsers have realised this is a problem for developers and they’ve come together to form a standard, and that is the Baseline thing that I mentioned.

So they’re always building new APIs on their own, and some of them will never make it into all the browsers, and they may go away or they may change. But if they make it into Baseline, you can be sure that you can use them. And that’s what’s different, right? We have this set of features that we can rely on.

[00:14:21] Nathan Wrigley: I kind of feel we lost a decade somewhere of real productivity. You know, the browsers could have been capable of a whole lot more than they are now. I mean, we’re happy with where we’ve got, but it does feel like we lost, this proprietary approach to browsers really wasn’t in the best interest of anybody. But you can see how it grew out of Microsoft and all of these other organizations.

I’m guessing that Google with its Chromium browser, Chromium based browser, the fact that that became utterly dominant was probably quite a pivotal point. You know, it was in the sort of eighties and nineties percent, adopted by 80 or 90%. I guess Google was able to push things through a little bit more.

[00:14:59] Adam Silverstein: Perhaps, like they do often lead on features. I mean, I wouldn’t say they’re always the lead on features, sometimes Safari has a great idea and they want to develop it, and with Firefox as well. But they do have a huge effort going into it. And, you know, of course Microsoft famously adopted Chromium as the engine for Edge. And so Microsoft is actively contributing as well to Chromium, which is the core of Chrome.

So yes, I think the dominance did allow them to sort of lead on features and have the other browsers sort of need to follow. If Chrome is going to ship a feature, everyone’s going to use it. But I don’t know if that’s always the case. You know, when you read these, I’ve read some of these proposals, you know, the browser vendors, they talk to each other in the open, right?

So these aren’t like private conversations that are happening in a room somewhere. They are all into open source software. So they’re, you know, there’s a repo where like, for example, Chrome will come in and say, we’re working on this new API, we would like feedback from the teams building Mozilla and Safari about if this is a good feature, are you going to support this? And that’s like typically early in the process where they try to get that feedback so they know whether this is something that is likely to land in the platform.

[00:16:02] Nathan Wrigley: I don’t really know whether it was the best thing for one browser to sort of win out, but it certainly seems now that the dust has settled, it seems that that was a fairly good thing to happen.

[00:16:11] Adam Silverstein: Yeah, I mean, I think if we had only had one browser, that would not be good. I mean, Apple is definitely dominant on mobile in markets where iPhones are very popular.

[00:16:21] Nathan Wrigley: North America, for example.

[00:16:22] Adam Silverstein: Exactly. North America and Europe, I think as well. Although if you look at most of the world, it’s actually Android that is far more dominant. So that’s where Chrome gets a big percentage of its users because Android is the default browser there, just as Safari is the default browser on iOS devices

[00:16:35] Nathan Wrigley: I guess there was the whole Chromebook thing as well with, you know Google trying to promote this idea of a browser computer, for want of a better word.

[00:16:43] Adam Silverstein: Chrome OS.

[00:16:44] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, Chrome OS exactly. And but the idea that, when it first came out, I remember looking at Chromebooks and thinking, yeah, it’s intriguing. It can do Google Docs, but where’s the video editing? Where’s the audio editing? I’m guessing like a modern Chromebook is a full swap out for a, it just doesn’t have the physical storage memory in some cases.

[00:17:01] Adam Silverstein: It doesn’t have any. It’s, well, I mean, it has some for caching, but basically you log in and that’s your computer. Someone else logs in, it’s their computer. It’s fully in the cloud.

[00:17:09] Nathan Wrigley: It’s pretty amazing.

[00:17:10] Adam Silverstein: Although I will say, I bought a cheap Chromebook, like 150 bucks, refurbished, but I bought it to travel with so that I didn’t have to carry around my eight pound MacBook Pro. And because I’m a developer, I figured out how to do development work on it. You can install Linux on it and run, you know, Docker and all the things that you can do on a desktop machine.

Does take some effort, like that’s not built in. But they are actually full computers, it’s just that the way the operating system is set up is this sort of cloud-based thing.

But it’s quite, I think they’re amazing honestly. And, like I said, very inexpensive and also like bulletproof. You never have problems with them because your whole world is basically the browser.

[00:17:47] Nathan Wrigley: And it kind of boots in half a moment, and it’s so secure.

[00:17:51] Adam Silverstein: Yeah. They’re fantastic, and especially for like schools or corporate settings because it has all that management built in. I think they’re great computers. I would definitely recommend them, especially for people who don’t want to spend all the money that it takes to get, you know, and especially like you’re saying, everything’s in the browser these days. So there’s really, you don’t need a desktop computer to do most things.

[00:18:10] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah. I think we painted a picture of the power of the browser, we’ve done well there. We got kind of hijacked a little bit. So you were talking about popovers, that was the first thing. Let’s return to that. What’s one of the other things mentioned?

[00:18:20] Adam Silverstein: Next on my list is this Scroll Animations API. So this is animations like CSS animations that are either triggered or tied to a scroll event. So you could think about, like Slider Revolution has this feature in it, or you’ve seen it on like Apple’s website where you’re scrolling and as you’re scrolling an image is fading in or something is being revealed. Or another good example is like a reading indicator that Medium has at the top of the page as you scroll down.

So we can do these things today with JavaScript, but it involves paying attention to the user scroll position, and this kind of heavy handed approach to monitoring the user. With CSS scroll driven animations, it’s just a couple of lines of CSS and suddenly you’ve tied an animation to scrolling.

[00:19:01] Nathan Wrigley: So again, all handled by CSS, no need for a JavaScript library. Any impact in, I mean, these JavaScript libraries are famous for sort of bogging things down, tons of bloat and what have you. I’m guessing that because it’s shipping in the browser, that is minimal to say the least, almost non-existent.

[00:19:17] Adam Silverstein: Yes, and the animations are CSS animations, so they’re not happening on the main thread. JavaScript famously has one main thread, and if you have something running on that main thread, it’s going to interfere with other JavaScript. So if you can get rid of some of the JavaScript on your website, that’s freeing up that thread for the other JavaScript that you have, that you want to do to track your analytics or to, whatever else you’re trying to do on your page with JavaScript. This is one less piece of JavaScript you need on your site.

[00:19:42] Nathan Wrigley: The feature that you’ve just mentioned is something that I guess WordPress developers are going to be particularly interested in. They love all that stuff.

[00:19:48] Adam Silverstein: Yes, clients love it. They love animations. And again, this is something that’s very lightweight, right? The argument against these types of animations is they’re typically very heavy.

The other advantages of using CSS based features versus JavaScript is accessibility. Often these features, I mean this isn’t necessarily true with scroll driven, but like with the carousels, it’s got that accessibility built in. It’s got the escaping out of the dialogue.

Again and again we see that, when you build something in JavaScript, I’m going to talk in a minute about CSS carousels. When you build it in JavaScript, if you want to make it accessible, there’s a lot of extra work that goes into doing that well. If the browser builds the feature in as like a fundamental, almost like an HTML component, then the expectation is the browser will take care of that for you. So as a developer, you won’t even have to pay attention to it.

[00:20:36] Nathan Wrigley: I’m guessing that in the case of the one you’ve just described, that’s really easy to map onto this podcast because a WordPress user, they’re using a page builder or something like that. They’re going to have encountered these options, you know, somewhere buried in the settings for this image component is a fade in on scroll.

And I’m guessing that in the future in WordPress, this might be some sort of toggle in a block, an image block or something like that. You’ll just switch it on, assign some characteristics to it like, I don’t know, fade to 50% at halfway through the viewport. And that will just create the CSS, but all done inside of a panel of a block.

[00:21:11] Adam Silverstein: Yeah, I did exactly that as a pull request and have a link to that in my talk. Yeah, that’s a great example. It could be an image, it could be a header block.

I guess one question I have as a Core committer is whether that is actually Core territory. We have this long standing philosophy in WordPress that it’s kind of the 80 20 rule that a feature that we land in Core should benefit 80% of users, otherwise it belongs in plugin territory.

That said, one of the things we’re talking about now is this idea of canonical blocks. So there’s a lot of new blocks being proposed in Gutenberg right now, and the question is like, how many blocks do you actually want to ship with the editor? There’s a zillion different things you could think of building a block for, or a feature like animation, say for images like we’re talking about. But if it’s not valuable for all users, does it really belong in Core? And does it just overload the list of blocks they have to choose from, or the list of features they have to choose from? Why not just let plugins extend it?

The other idea, like I said is this idea of canonical blocks. So you could have a block that’s developed by the Core team, is supported by Core, and is directly installable in the admin, in a like clearly labeled way that this is a Core product. But actually not ship it with WordPress. So it’s something that you could install with one click. I mean, we actually haven’t defined exactly what a canonical block or plugin is, but this is sort of what my idea is. It’s something that’s like, you’re one step away from having it installed.

[00:22:27] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, it feels like a canonical plugin, at least feels to me like something which has the security guarantee of Core, plus the updating guarantee of Core. Basically if you install it, it’s going to work with the latest version of WordPress, plus the all the backwards compatibility. I kind of like the idea of, like Apple ship with things like iOS, like Core animations. A plugin which just enables the animations in Core blocks.

[00:22:51] Adam Silverstein: Right. Like the capability might already be there. I mean, you know, so one of the other APIs that I talked about in another section is the Speculative Loading API. So this is a good example. And this is actually shipping in WordPress 6.8. And this is the ability for the browser to prefetch the resources for a page that a user is about to navigate to.

And in WordPress, we shipped it in the most conservative mode possible, which essentially is the user needs to click down on the link, and then before they let go of their mouse, so the time between the mouse down and mouse up event is when the browser is prefetching the resources for that link.

So if the user clicks down on the link, we’re very confident that they’re actually going to navigate. Although it is possible to drag away and not navigate. 90% of users are going to follow that link or more. And so the idea is not to waste prefetching for links that users never visit.

However it is possible to configure this API in a more bold manner where it will, for example, prefetch links that you hover over, which is going to give you much more of a head start, but also a lower hit ratio where, you know, some people will hover over links and they never click on them. So it depends on your use case.

So I’ve already seen, so we landed the API in WordPress at the very conservative level. There’s already a plugin out that lets users configure that API for their own site, so they can adjust the default settings.

There’s another setting that’s even more aggressive where it actually pre-renders the page. And in that setting, it’s almost as if you’ve loaded the page you’re about to navigate to in another tab, and when you click the link, it’s like switching tabs. It’s an instantaneous transition. It’s like amazing.

However, you know, if you’re pre-rendering every page a user hovers over, that’s going to be a huge additional load on your server. So there is a trade off there. But maybe you have like a large call to action button on your homepage that 50% of your users are going to click on. Go ahead and prefetch that. They’re going to get a better experience. You’re going to get a better conversion rate if that page loads faster.

[00:24:45] Nathan Wrigley: if memory serves, this is a browser API, Speculation Rules API and everybody’s got it switched on in 6.8 and beyond. But it’s in conservative, and it’s prefetch not pre-render, it’s click. And honestly, the chances of you not wishing to get to that page are pretty, like you say, you could slide away. But yeah, if you were to download the speculation rules, I can’t remember what the name of the plugin is. Anyway, the plugin, the option there is to do things like pre-render, or hover. And then, yeah. You could get into a real mess with the server and, you know, just wasteful.

[00:25:23] Adam Silverstein: Yeah. If you, especially if you’re on like a light end server, but maybe you want that, like the most important. Like, let’s say you have an e-commerce store and you’re really trying to get people to add things to your cart. You know, there’s all kinds of studies that show that if your pages load faster, and it’s even buy like things like a hundred milliseconds, the conversion ratio is much higher. People are quick to abandon slow sites. I mean, there’s all kinds of data on that.

So you may decide it’s worth investing the additional resources and dedicated hosting and caching so that you can prefetch and pre-render and get that faster navigation. This API enables that type of navigation that is, you really can’t get that without this API because it’s basically letting the browser know, it’s okay to like start loading resources before I even visit a page.

[00:26:06] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, I keep having this thought that at some point Chrome’s going to come up with, it’s going to know a whole year in advance all pages that I wish to visit and just load them all for me.

[00:26:15] Adam Silverstein: Well, I did actually an experiment with AI to see, like ask AI which link is the user most likely to click on? And I tried it both with just literally dropping the HTML of the webpage in the AI, as well as drawing a screenshot. And I tried it on a very simple page, so like a WordPress plugin page. There’s a large blue button that says download. Probably the most likely link that users will click on. But the AI was like very good at identifying that. So in theory you could imagine that the browser could actually predict into some degree what users, based on their behavior, are going to click on, or based on the layout of the site.

[00:26:50] Nathan Wrigley: So this is a, curious new world in which we live, isn’t it? So there could be heuristics about what I’m literally doing with the mouse. So the mouse is, I don’t know, approaching a button. That’s a fairly strong indication. And also, I guess the speed.

[00:27:05] Adam Silverstein: Yeah, if it’s paused over the button.

[00:27:07] Nathan Wrigley: Right, or slowing down, the speed is sort of coming to a terminus. Yeah. This is all really interesting.

The 6.8, the Speculative Loading in 6.8, what I really like about that is that there’s zero configuration. It just works. So it’s using this fabulous new feature of the browser, but also no technical knowledge whatsoever. Absolutely none. And it would hopefully just save you a bunch of, well, your visitors a bunch of time.

[00:27:33] Adam Silverstein: Exactly.

[00:27:34] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah. Fabulous. Okay, that’s another one. Any others?

[00:27:37] Adam Silverstein: Oh my gosh, so many. We did touch briefly on CSS carousels, but let’s just cover that again. So over half of WordPress websites load some sort of slider or JavaScript library.

[00:27:49] Nathan Wrigley: Like them or hate them, they’re there.

[00:27:49] Adam Silverstein: Yes. And even if people don’t use them, they seem to load them because I don’t know if half of sites all have sliders, but in any case, this is a very popular feature for WordPress sites. And of course there’s many plugins out there that do this, and they all rely on a JavaScript library. There are several very popular ones. They’re very full featured libraries. They do all the things that you need for a carousel.

Now we can do that with CSS, so you don’t need the JavaScript library. Now, there may be advanced features that the JavaScript libraries will be able to do that will add some functionality. But the goal of the CSS implementation is to basically be feature parity with what you can do now with JavaScript. So all kinds of carousels

with buttons that you can click, with little indicators as to which slider, which image you’re on. You know, just all the features that you can imagine in a carousel. There’s a great demo site on the chrome.dev site of just like a zillion different carousels.

[00:28:41] Nathan Wrigley: What does the DOM look like for that?

[00:28:43] Adam Silverstein: It’s so simple. It’s like you have the images themselves, and you have a couple of pseudo elements like scroll marker, and there’s some for the scroll arrows. I don’t actually remember all the deals because I haven’t built one. But it’s all done using like CSS selectors essentially to indicate which elements are the control elements, and which elements are the target elements. And you can even do things like grouping them so that like when you hit the right arrow, it’s like a page of things moving back and forth, like several elements.

Like I said, they’ve tried to address all of the features. And again, here you would be able to do a CSS based carousel, that means no JavaScript required, right? You don’t need to load that giant JavaScript library. It’s going to be immediately available, right? So JavaScript takes some time to load. It’s going to work more quickly. And it’s also hopefully going to have accessibility built in. So you don’t have to worry about if your JavaScript library is keeping up with accessibility standards. It’s going to be a standard web component.

[00:29:36] Nathan Wrigley: Okay, okay. Of course. Yeah, if everybody’s implementing the same thing, it’s not this weirdy JavaScript thing that you downloaded from somewhere.

And okay, another question about, just sticking on that one for a moment. Will that be performant in the sense of, I don’t know, if I’ve got a carousel of 15 images, will the 15th one be loading at the moment.

[00:29:56] Adam Silverstein: Lazy loaded?

[00:29:57] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, exactly.

[00:29:57] Adam Silverstein: You would hope so, yes. I mean, I think in general it will be more performant than a JavaScript implementation. Unless the JavaScript implementation is doing some magic that the browser’s not aware of, like lazy loading. I think that is, will be built in. But you, again, don’t have that JavaScript running on the main thread doing the actual animations. All the animations are CSS animations.

[00:30:16] Nathan Wrigley: It’s kind of curious because that example, I’ve always liked how they look but I’ve always been persuaded that it’s the wrong thing to implement because of the JavaScript bloat, the inaccessibility. So they kind of went into that pariah status for a while. But if done right, there’s absolutely no reason not to implement it.

[00:30:36] Adam Silverstein: Yeah. And I think, you know, like you said, clients love them, they’re very popular. I think one of the arguments that I’ve heard about them is that data shows that most users never navigate beyond like the second image. So there is sort of questionable value there, especially if you’ve got one that say has 30 images in it on your homepage. Maybe that’s not such a great idea.

But maybe if you have three products that you want to feature at the top and you don’t know how to feature them all, a slider is a good way to have three things that the user can see all in the same space. So I think they have their uses, but I think there is the sort of resistance to using them from developers is based on solid data.

[00:31:09] Nathan Wrigley: It’s interesting as well because given, I don’t know the, bad reputation they have, it’s kind curious that that got made.

[00:31:16] Adam Silverstein: Right. So this actually brings us to a good point. Where do the browser vendors come up? Why are they building these things right? So the reason they decided to build CSS Carousel is this is an area that developers have struggled with.

Like I said, there are several libraries that are well established that have built really good sliders, but that’s taken a long time, right? And they still have accessibility challenges.

This is something that a lot of developers want to build, their clients are demanding it, and they’ve typically struggled to actually build something quality. So this is the impetus for a lot of these features that I talked about is places that developers are struggling. And that Interop project that I mentioned earlier, that’s where developers can give their feedback to the browser vendors about which features they feel are lacking.

That was the sort of like the last question of my talk was to developers, what are you struggling, what are you constantly using JavaScript for? What are you finding that’s still incompatible between browsers? Because I think that’s actually really important to get feedback from developers. The browser builders are in a room somewhere, they’re doing their thing. You know, they’re not out here building WordPress websites, so they’re not building Gutenberg. So we as developers have a responsibility to give feedback to the actual browser vendors so they know what we need, what we’re struggling with.

[00:32:27] Nathan Wrigley: You may not know the answer to this question, but does Chrome in a default setup where I install Chrome and then just click yes, yes, yes to everything that I’m asked. Does it provide heuristics back to Google about things like that? There’s millions of people interacting with carousels, for example.

[00:32:44] Adam Silverstein: I’m going to say, well, going to say no because they’re, Chrome does collect data, but you have to opt in. By default, you would not have that box checked.

[00:32:51] Nathan Wrigley: But it is possible.

[00:32:52] Adam Silverstein: Yes. And many people do. Many people do provide that. And most of that data is available publicly. So that data is anonymised and then made available publicly as part of the CrUX, the Chrome user experience data set. And that’s an open public data set that you can query using BigQuery. If you have a website or a product that’s very popular, you can get amazing data about how many sites are using it, about the performance of those sites, about growth over time. There’s all kinds of data out there.

Of course, again, it’s a subset of the web. It’s not every website on the web because there’s a privacy concern about this data. So the only data that’s reported is when the pages or sites have enough visitors that you couldn’t track back to individual users. So it is a limited data set. Small sites with low traffic won’t appear in it. However, it’s incredibly valuable. And if you build a popular plugin, for example, this is a great way for you to gather data about how your plugin is being used, because some of the sites that install it will be in that data set and it’s public data.

[00:33:51] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah. I’ll put a link to that in the show notes. That’s CrUX. CrUX. So that’s interesting. So there’s two routes there. There’s the heuristics provided by the browser if you opt in, but also it sounds to me like there are open channels communicating through people like you, if you’re a developer.

[00:34:04] Adam Silverstein: Like me, or like the Interop process that I mentioned earlier, where they open up a GitHub repo each year and you can just open an issue saying, here are the things that we’re struggling with. And I mentioned like Gutenberg actually did that.

For a couple years I was posting on the WordPress blog, hey, Interop is open, let’s give feedback. We did have one, at least one year where the Gutenberg team went in and made a long list of things that where they found incompatibilities. And some of those made their way into actual interrupt tasks. So it is incredibly valuable to give that feedback. And the browsers want to know, they want to build products that developers like to use.

[00:34:36] Nathan Wrigley: Okay. next, if there is a next.

[00:34:38] Adam Silverstein: Oh yes. Okay, so now we’re getting into, I think I hopped around a little bit, but the next section was about improving user experience. So the first one is actually a really simple one that I think is really cool. It’s customisable select.

[00:34:49] Nathan Wrigley: Oh, so good.

[00:34:50] Adam Silverstein: Yes. So the select element traditionally has been rendered by the operating system. And that means, so if you have a select list, like a dropdown, you’re going to see a bunch of words and you’re going to be able to scroll through those. But if you want to make it more visual, say add some images or icons next to each word, you really couldn’t do that. If you wanted to do that, you’d reach for a JavaScript library that would render the select element graphically, but wasn’t really a select element.

So this is the ability to actually put HTML inside your select elements. So a great example of that is icons and images in the dropdown. So, for example, I gave a lot of different examples of how we can use this in WordPress Core, but one is in the media library where we filter by media type. We can add like nice little icons. So if you’re looking for, you know, the videos, you get a nice little video icon. It just makes it easier for users to find what they’re looking for.

And again, this is still a semantic select element, so it’s going to be accessible just like a regular select element. If the browser doesn’t support this feature, it’s just going to fall back to a regular select element.

It’s also going to autofill correctly, right? So another example I gave was a currency selector that adds flags for the country of the currency. A nice, helpful thing. If your browser knows that you use the Euro, it’s going to select the Euro because autofill is this great technology that helps us select things that we always select. But if it’s a JavaScript do hickey, the browser has no idea what’s going on inside there, so autofill will not work correctly. So it has some real key advantages over traditional, you know, the way we would build these before. Now we can just do full on HTML select elements.

[00:36:21] Nathan Wrigley: It’s the kind of thing that once you’ve seen it, it’s like, why.

[00:36:25] Adam Silverstein: Why didn’t that exist before?

[00:36:27] Nathan Wrigley: Because we just have the OS. It just looks like an OS selector. So on my Mac, it looks like a Mac. On my phone, it looks like Android, whatever that would be. Which leads me to that actually. So on the phone, same experience because it’s not stepping outside of the browser. if I’ve got those flags, for example, or I’ve got coloured backgrounds or rounded corners or whatever it may be, Because it’s not reaching out to the OS to create this select, it’ll work on any device.

[00:36:53] Adam Silverstein: Right.

[00:36:54] Nathan Wrigley: Nice.

[00:36:54] Adam Silverstein: And it’s CSS controlled, right? So you could do a different mobile implementation than your desktop implementation.

[00:36:59] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah. I mean, it’s profoundly brilliant when you see. I’ll put some links to some demos somewhere into the shownotes.

[00:37:06] Adam Silverstein: You know, I’ve got several pull requests open both in Core and in Gutenberg to add these features into the select elements that we already have. It’s kind of a simple enhancement. And again, like if your browser doesn’t support it, you don’t really, there’s no harm, right? You don’t benefit from the feature, but you don’t lose anything either. I love that one. You know, I’m hoping that form plugins in our ecosystem will adopt it.

[00:37:25] Nathan Wrigley: Oh, no doubt. I mean, why wouldn’t you, basically? that’s a brilliant one. Thank you. Next.

[00:37:30] Adam Silverstein: Another one that, this one actually pairs really well with the Speculative Loading API and it’s called, the View Transitions API.

And this one is really cool because it basically turns your static website into a, kind of a fluid app-like experience. And in the slide deck, I have this great demo video of just a classic theme, where the users just clicking through to different pages. So you’re on say, the archive list and you’ve got a list of titles. And you click on a title and it’s going to take you to the single post page. And what happens is the browser actually navigates between those two states. So you see the title that you just clicked on, grow and expand, and it winds up in the position where it will be on the page you’re navigating to.

Same thing like with the featured image. Let’s say you have featured images and those appear in a list and you click on the featured image, the image will grow to where it’s going to be in the final position. So it creates a smooth animation between the different pages of your site, or states of a single page app.

And these are again, CSS animation, so you can control them. It has an auto mode where it picks the animation for you, so you really can do a very, just few lines, and get this effect working, but you can also customise it. So if you want the page to say scroll left when you hit the next button and scroll to the right when you hit the back button, you can implement it that way.

[00:38:45] Nathan Wrigley: So the place I’ve seen this before really is on mobile applications.

[00:38:48] Adam Silverstein: On apps. You see it on apps, right. Because it creates this fluid experience. We are used to on the web this idea of, you click on a link and then there’s kind of like a little bit of a wait. Then boom, there’s a refresh and the next page starts loading. And this kind of bridges that gap. It’s something that changes how users perceive your website. It doesn’t really change what’s loading. It’s the same before and after states. What it’s doing is creating that transition between the two states.

[00:39:12] Nathan Wrigley: It feels more like you’re on a journey as opposed to these little stops along the way to get to the final destination. It just creates this sort of fluid, endless experience. And I believe, I think I saw one of your colleagues, Felix Arntz, I believe he’s got a plugin, like a feature plugin out.

[00:39:30] Adam Silverstein: It is. It just shipped. It’s part of the Performance Lab plugin suite. So that is basically going to add a way for themes to just opt in. So we have a feature in WordPress where you can be, add themes support. And you can say, my theme supports this feature. So if themes opt in, they can just enable this API and just, you instantly get the navigations.

We fortunately benefit in Core from a lot of consistent naming for things. Like the class names on titles tend to be consistent among all the Core themes. And even in the ecosystem, a lot of people have stuck to those standards. And that makes it really straightforward to sort of choose the correct elements for the transitions.

Because part of setting this up is you sort of need to tell the browser, this is the title element. On the previous page, this is the title element on the next page. I want you to navigate between those two. And fortunately, at least for the Core themes, that’s pretty standard to do. So there is a pretty straightforward way to like implement it across all the core themes.

[00:40:23] Nathan Wrigley: I just want to remind the listener that, you may have got lost, we’re not talking about WordPress per se. We’re kind of talking about what the browser enables WordPress to do. So these view transitions, of course they can be implemented by a WordPress website, but it is in effect the browser that’s doing the hard work here.

You don’t have to be tied to WordPress, you could do this in HTML and CSS if you so wish to do it. But it’s easy to imagine that this is some clever JavaScript thing that somebody’s implemented in WordPress. And it’s just not that. This is just happening inside the browser.

[00:40:53] Adam Silverstein: No, these are all browser features and, yeah, the talk is kind of like, how do they apply to WordPress? How WordPress use them?

[00:40:59] Nathan Wrigley: I can imagine a world in the future where this feature in particular will have been massively overused. You know, people will, like scrolling animations for the, you know, this grows and this shrinks, and let’s see how that’ll settle. But the implementations that I’ve seen are just magnificent. They give you that, I don’t know, I’m on my phone, I use a music app, and I go to the next song and somehow the little icon for that song grows in this nice fluid way. Things fade in and fade out. Text becomes bigger, and it’s all happening. And It just encapsulates the screen perfectly. It gives everything the perfect place. And instead of it being a moment where it all just changes, everything slides into place. And it just feels natural, and we’ve got it coming in the browser.

[00:41:39] Adam Silverstein: It is amazing. Yeah. It’s, a pretty cool feature.

[00:41:41] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah. Okay, next.

[00:41:42] Adam Silverstein: Okay. So I did talk about what you mentioned, we talked about modern images before. So I did talk a little bit about modern image formats, just a kind of love of mine. I honed in on. HDR imagery. So we all, most of us have smartphones these days that actually take high dynamic range images, right? Previously we had standard dynamic range, but now all of our phones take multiple exposures and combine those to create an HDR image.

We have long had the ability to save images in HDR with formats like AVIF, WebP supports it. However, the challenge comes when you upload those images to WordPress and then you try to use them on a standard definition monitor, an SDR monitor, right? So you’ve got an HDR image, but suddenly you’re displaying it on a monitor that can’t display HDR, and you have to sort of, re downsize it to that lower bit depth, and that degrades the image greatly.

So there is a new format available that’s ISO standard, and it’s called Ultra HDR. And this is a combination of standard jpeg SDR imagery with a gain map metadata layer. So it’s a single image format that includes both the SDR data as well as the data required to render the HDR version of the image. So it’s a full HDR image when you view it on a monitor that can support it, but on a monitor that doesn’t support it, you can just use the SDR image, you don’t need to do some conversion to try to create that alternate image.

[00:43:09] Nathan Wrigley: I’ve never heard of this, so I’m going to try and parse it in real time. Let’s see how this works. So I’m imagining an image and I’m imagining like a CSS gradient over the top, There’s a bit of metadata which does something. The underlying image is unchanged, but there’s something gone over the top.

[00:43:25] Adam Silverstein: Yes, it’s called a gain map.

[00:43:27] Nathan Wrigley: Right, so gain mapping. And I can put that on, put that off. So it’s metadata transforming the image, but the image is the same.

[00:43:33] Adam Silverstein: Yes.

[00:43:35] Nathan Wrigley: Interesting.

[00:43:35] Adam Silverstein: Yes. So I am a programmer and I deeply know about how WordPress media works, but I am not a photographer. However, there have been some great contributions from photographers who really know this space well. And they’ve come in and helped us on the media team really understand the challenges of handling these types of images and publishing them to the web, right?

So I have a link in the slide to one of those guys and his photography website. He’s a software developer and a photographer. And he’s got like those sliders you can kind of see before and after and see what the difference is between SDR and HDR imagery. And you realise, oh my God, HDR images are amazing. So the point of this feature, or the thing that I’m talking about is to try to let people actually be able to use HDR images on their WordPress websites.

[00:44:17] Nathan Wrigley: That’s fascinating. So a metadata layer living on top of an image, which visibly transforms it, but not just to add, I don’t know, to change the hue or the tint of it, to render a better image of a higher quality. Gosh that’s fascinating.

[00:44:32] Adam Silverstein: Yep. So the challenge we have in WordPress is the ability to process these images. So in WordPress, when you upload an image, it goes to the backend, to the web server, and then we process it, we convert it to various sizes for different display sizes. So you get a different image when you’re browsing the site on a mobile or a desktop or a high definition screen. We have all different sizes, and themes can add sizes.

And all of that image processing happens using a couple of image processing libraries. GD and Imagick are the two that we support natively. Those libraries do not support the latest format, so Ultra HDR was maybe just added to Imagick. It will take years before that library, the new version of the library is actually available to WordPress sites. So even a format like AVIF that’s been around for quite a while now, is only supported by 30% of WordPress servers. So only 30% of WordPress sites can actually upload AVIFs and get the full, you know, various sizes that they need.

So that’s a limitation of the architecture of WordPress. And one of the next features that I talked about is something that will help us leapfrog that limitation. Browser based image processing. Exactly right. So what I’m talking about here is WebAssembly.

So WebAssembly is the ability to run code that was written in another language like C or C++, that targeted a machine language, is meant to be run natively on the hardware. So that, for example, these image processing libraries, and also newer image processing libraries, can be run directly in the browser.

And what this gives us the ability to do is ship the latest version of the image library directly with WordPress. We no longer have to rely on hosts doing the messy and difficult process of upgrading servers, very challenging thing for hosts to do, to get the latest version of the Imagick library. We can just ship that library directly in the browser. And that gives us the ability to make every WordPress site support AVIF, and it also gives us the ability to do things we simply can’t do today on the backend.

A good example of that is converting gif or gifs to movies, right? This is a common performance recommendation. Gifs are very heavy. You convert them to a native video element and they behave just the same for users, but they’re much lighter because the compression is so much smarter. Can’t do that in WordPress right now. Neither of the image libraries support that ability. But there are image processing libraries that handle this, and we can run those directly in the browser.

[00:46:52] Nathan Wrigley: Let me see if I’ve got this right. So in this world of the future, it’ll be possible, let’s say in the block editor, I drag in a, I don’t know, a jpeg or something, but I could convert that on the fly to an AVIF for example.

[00:47:05] Adam Silverstein: Yes. Even if your server didn’t support AVIF.

[00:47:06] Nathan Wrigley: Even if. So it’s literally in the browser.

[00:47:09] Adam Silverstein: Yes

[00:47:09] Nathan Wrigley: Okay. First thing is that quick.

[00:47:11] Adam Silverstein: Well, okay, so it’s not quick on the backend either, right? But it is asynchronous, so you can continue working on your post while it’s happening.

[00:47:18] Nathan Wrigley: Right. So you wouldn’t necessarily see anything.

[00:47:20] Adam Silverstein: Right. You would that it was processing. And of course it would depend on how large your image is, how many subsized images you’re creating. But no, it’s not fast. It’s a slow process, but it’s a one time thing each time you upload an image.

[00:47:31] Nathan Wrigley: That was next question. It’s a one time thing. So the movie thing that you just described, where you got the gif to a movie, again, a one-time thing?

[00:47:38] Adam Silverstein: Yes.

[00:47:39] Nathan Wrigley: So we upload it. In the background, asynchronously, it’s converting it, and then at some point it gets saved, I guess as a .mov file or something like that? inside the media library?

[00:47:50] Adam Silverstein: And this is actually not some future technology you’ll be able to use someday. You can use this today by installing Pascal’s Media Experiments plugin. So my colleague Pascal has swisspidy as his handle, people know him by that. But he’s got the Media Experiments plugin, and that will let you do all these things that I’m talking about today. And it is experimental, so beta software, but, check it out because it really demonstrates what we can do.

There’s also a PR already open in Gutenberg with a whole roadmap for landing this feature. It is already sort of an experimental feature in Gutenberg. So if you install the Gutenberg plugin and you go into experiments, you can actually enable this feature. I don’t think it has all of the things that he has in the plugin, but it has sort of the additional framework for it.

[00:48:28] Nathan Wrigley: If I were, well, I am fairly non-technical, this is the kind of stuff I expect, I think. You just drag an image from any device of any kind into the editor, whatever that editor interface is be it Gutenberg or, you know, whatever. It should just handle that. You know, there shouldn’t be a proclivity for we prefer this thing or we prefer that thing. It should just do it and whatever output I want, I want it as an AVIF, I want it as a WebP. Okay. we’ll just transform it in the background. I know there’s a ton of technological milestones to be achieved and overcome with that, but that is, I think, the expectation. The web should just work like that. Everything should convert and be easy, and drag and droppable and, yeah.

[00:49:10] Adam Silverstein: Yeah, and famously, several years ago, Apple started storing images in the HEIC format, which is a better compression than jpeg. However, it’s not a web safe format. I think Safari is the only browser that supports it. So when we upload HEICs to WordPress now, we do convert them to jpegs for users.

However, that only happens if your server supports HEIC images. Again, we rely on the server libraries, and that statistic is very similar to AVIF. It’s about 30% of sites. Fortunately Apple does automatically convert them if you upload them from your phone. But people do get into this problem where they wind up with HEIC images on their desktop and they’re trying to upload them to their WordPress, and then it will get rejected if your server doesn’t support it.

[00:49:50] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, this whole thing of, I’ve got images. It’s an image. Well, it’s in the wrong format. It’s an image.

[00:49:55] Adam Silverstein: Right? Why do I have to care?

[00:49:57] Nathan Wrigley: It shouldn’t matter. Yeah, okay. That’s a perfect example. Okay, so images, anything else?

[00:50:02] Adam Silverstein: The other one that I think is really cool that maybe people don’t know about is running AI directly in your browser. So there’s a great library called Transformers.js that lets you run a whole bunch of different models, kind of, it acts as an interface.

So just like the large language models that we have online, like Gemini and ChatGPT. You can actually run smaller versions of those directly in your browser. And some of the advantages of that are the data is private. There’s no API key required, or cost to you to use these. You can ship an AI directly with your product. So imagine you have a software, a plugin that is designed for company bulletin boards. You don’t really want that data going out to some remote API, but you’d like to give users a way to summarise the conversation from yesterday. A language model running in your browser is capable of doing that.

[00:50:49] Nathan Wrigley: Where does it live.

[00:50:50] Adam Silverstein: It runs in the memory of the browser and it gets downloaded in cache. So there is a large download when you first start using it to actually download the model. And then it’s cached, with the browser storage APIs.

[00:51:01] Nathan Wrigley: It’s persistent.

[00:51:03] Adam Silverstein: It’s persistent, yes.

[00:51:03] Nathan Wrigley: Okay. Switch the machine off, switch the machine on.

[00:51:05] Adam Silverstein: Yes. It’ll stay cached in your, browser. Browser has the ability to store files.

[00:51:08] Nathan Wrigley: I’m guessing the constraints around what it can do compared to, I don’t know, ChatGPT 4o or whatever is much more minimal.

[00:51:15] Adam Silverstein: Significant. Right. This is in the browser, you’re probably going to get the performance maybe that you got out of the models a year ago or a year and a half ago. Remember when.

[00:51:24] Nathan Wrigley: Oh not that bad then.

[00:51:25] Adam Silverstein: Yeah. Not that bad, right? And you can imagine that a year or two from now, they’re just going to get better. And there have been dramatic improvements, and even like new approaches to how they’re doing them. So they’re getting quite good. They’ll never be as good as the large language models that are running in the cloud that have abundant resources.

There’s also hybrid models, right, where you use the local version when that’s all you have available, your offline, say, for example. Or you have a more complex query, then it can go to the cloud. There’s different ways of approaching that. But you can build a hybrid system, but the point of, the ability to run it in the browser, is to actually be able to do everything locally, and not rely necessarily on a cloud provider.

[00:52:00] Nathan Wrigley: It really feels at the minute as if Google is in a big pivot towards AI.

[00:52:06] Adam Silverstein: Absolutely.

[00:52:07] Nathan Wrigley: In fact, it kind of feels like if you were to describe it as a race, it feels like Google is kind of nudging ahead at this moment in time. I just watched some of the bits and pieces from Google IO.

[00:52:16] Adam Silverstein: Yes. Really impressive.

[00:52:16] Nathan Wrigley: It was pretty profound in many respects. But also, can you constrain that AI? So for example, could I limit it to one, well, let’s say website? It can only be used and consumed by this thing. I don’t know if there would be a need for that. I’m just wondering, is it available to all the things or can you constrain it?

[00:52:35] Adam Silverstein: I mean, so there are actually aI things being built into the browser where you’ll get AI in the browser itself. But this is not really that, this is more like it’s running inside your app. So it would be constrained. And I see this as something that we’ll start to see like plugins, shipping AI with their plugin, and it doesn’t require you to have ChatGPT or some other service provider, it just has the AI built in.

Maybe it’s identifying objects in an image. Or maybe it’s reviewing comments as to whether they’re spam. So things like that where it’s a pretty straightforward AI capability, it works really well on these smaller models. And so that’s something that I could imagine would just be built into a plugin. You would add this AI feature, but it doesn’t require that you sign up for a ChatGPT account, and get an API key and install it. You know, there’s a lot of barriers, I guess, to using the cloud models.

[00:53:23] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah. I feel like you’ve left the most interest, well, not the most interesting, but the bomb is there. My head is kind of a bit taken by that one because I can really, I mean, everybody’s fascinated by AI, the possibilities of it. But it’s always an API key. It’s always a go off somewhere else. I mean, maybe it hasn’t been for people such as yourself, but I did not know that it was possible in the browser.

And if it’s only a year behind, honestly, the stuff that I want to do with it is give it a corpus of information and filter that a little bit and give me a summary of it. That’s what I’m using it for. I’m imagining that all of that would be possible in the browser at no monetary cost.

[00:53:59] Adam Silverstein: Exactly. Right. Because you’re doing the computing yourself on your own platform.

[00:54:03] Nathan Wrigley: And I would imagine, like I said, Google leaning into this, that’s only going to get more investment from them.

[00:54:10] Adam Silverstein: Yeah. I mean, there is, yes, there’s a lot of investment going on in AI right now, so it’s pretty exciting. Yeah, and I did have, you know, I did talk a little bit about just how AI is going to impact all of our workflows and stuff, but that’s not really in the, it was kind of an expansion because it’s not actually a web capability, per se.

[00:54:25] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah. Well, I think maybe that’s the perfect place to end it. Unless you’ve got some cataclysmic thing which can trump that.

[00:54:30] Adam Silverstein: Nope. That was the end of talk. The last slide was really just asking for feedback from developers. So that would be my last thing to say is just, you know, try to give feedback. I’m always open. My DMs are open on WordPress Core Slack. And like I said, there’s the interop thing where you can actually open up a ticket.

[00:54:45] Nathan Wrigley: So, again, dear listener, just remember all of this, the browser is doing this. It sounds like it’s WordPress doing it, or it sounds like some other third party service. It’s not, it’s all in The browser and it’s fascinating. The browser is definitely more powerful today than it was yesterday. Adam Silverstein, thank you so much for chatting to me.

[00:55:02] Adam Silverstein: Yeah, thank you.

[00:00:19] Nathan Wrigley: Welcome to the Jukebox Podcast from WP Tavern. My name is Nathan Wrigley.

Jukebox is a podcast which is dedicated to all things WordPress, the people, the events, the plugins, the blocks, the themes, and in this case, reducing your WordPress website’s carbon footprint.

If you’d like to subscribe to the podcast, you can do that by searching for WP Tavern in your podcast player of choice, or by going to wptavern.com/feed/podcast. And you can copy that URL into most podcast players.

If you have a topic that you’d like us to feature on the podcast, I’m keen to hear from you and hopefully get you, or your idea, featured on the show. Head to wptavern.com/contact/jukebox, and use the form there.

So on the podcast today we have Charlotte Bax. Charlotte is a sustainable web designer with a background in both environmentally conscious living and technology. Beginning her journey as a sustainable lifestyle blogger, she soon merged her passion for sustainability with her skills in web design, rebranding herself as Digihobbit.

For several years now, Charlotte has been focused on building websites that prioritize low carbon footprints, and she is also the founder of the climate tech startup ENNOR Toolbox for Online Sustainability, which helps measure the CO2 emissions of websites and web applications.

When we made this recording, Charlotte had just finished presenting at WordCamp Europe on the topic of how to make your website more sustainable, and her presentation is the topic of the podcast today.

We talk about digital environmental impact, the hidden pollution our websites create through their energy use and infrastructure. Charlotte explains some striking facts about the carbon footprint of ICT, noting that if the internet were a country, it would be the seventh largest polluter globally.

She shares a wide array of practical steps for web professionals to reduce the environmental impact of their sites. You’ll hear about the benefits of green web hosting, using modern image formats like WebP and AVIF, optimizing architecture and UX to minimize unnecessary page loads, the crucial role of caching, as well as some new innovations like grid aware websites, which adapt themselves based on the renewable energy mix available to users in real time.

The conversation also touches on Charlotte’s involvement in WordPress sustainability initiatives. The importance of multiplying small improvements across high traffic sites, and the moral imperative web creators have to help shape a greener internet.

If you’ve ever wondered how digital choices impact the planet, and what steps you can take to help, this episode is for you.

If you’re interested in finding out more, you can find all of the links in the show notes by heading to wptavern.com/podcast, where you’ll find all the other episodes as well.

And so. Without further delay, I bring you Charlotte Bax.

I am joined on the podcast by Charlotte Bax. Hello Charlotte.

[00:03:29] Charlotte Bax: Hello Nathan, and thank you for having me.

[00:03:31] Nathan Wrigley: You are very welcome. Charlotte and I are having a conversation at WordCamp Europe. We’re in Basel, and we’re going to be talking today about the environmental impact of your website, whether that be WordPress, or any other platform that you might be using.

In order to establish your credential, Charlotte, would you just for maybe a minute or something like that, just tell us a little bit about you, your relationship with technology. And I guess if you lean into your sustainability credentials, what you’ve been doing in the past, that would be helpful too.

[00:03:59] Charlotte Bax: Yes. Well, I started out as a sustainable lifestyle blogger, really, like in 2000 and something. And I didn’t really feel like I was at the right place in my work at that time. I was doing a job at the service center for ICT. It was really overwhelming. So I decided to make my hobby into my work and I chose the web design side. And after only a year, I think I stumbled upon a sustainable website challenge by some Dutch guys, that I got to know them. And that was the missing link between my sustainable lifestyle and my work as a web designer.

So I really went down that digital sustainability rabbit hole, and I sort of rebranded myself as a sustainable web designer in the name of Digihobbit. Well, so I’m building sustainable websites for quite some years now.

Two years ago, I really wanted a tool to make estimating the CO2 emissions of websites easier because, for example, Website Carbon by Whole Grain Digital, I love that tool. And there’s also some other tools I really loved, but you have to copy paste every single page of a website in there.

So I wanted a tool to do that in bulk. So I asked a friend to build me a tool to do that really easily, and he did. And that sort of escalated into a full blown startup. So since August, 2024, I also have a climate tech startup called ENNOR Toolbox for Online Sustainability, in which we build software to measure the CO2 emissions of websites and web applications.

[00:05:37] Nathan Wrigley: Wow, that’s fascinating. You’re the first person that I’ve spoken to who’s actually finished their talk at WordCamp Europe. Your presentation was, I’m sure you know, how to make your website more sustainable. So very quickly, how did it go?

[00:05:49] Charlotte Bax: It was amazing. Like the room was so full. It was such an amazing experience, and it went so good. And yeah, I’m just still riding that high.

[00:05:59] Nathan Wrigley: Do you feel, I mean, obviously there’s tons of topics on here and there’s many, many tracks, and the fact that you filled yours up, do you sense that sustainability is a thing which web developers are latching onto, that they find important, that they’re curious about?

[00:06:14] Charlotte Bax: Yes, I think so. Especially the curiosity part. I’ve done presentations in the Netherlands also for some government entities, and there were some senior developers. They talked to me afterwards and they said like, I have never thought of this before. Just, yeah, like spreading that awareness, planting those seeds. I think really nice to do that.

[00:06:34] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, I think that it’s a topic which many people will not even have given any thought to. Because, we were talking just before we hit record about how clean and sterile our technology feels in our lives. You know, I’m staring at a laptop, and I’ve got a microphone in my hand, I’ve got a phone over to my side here, and none of it emits anything by itself.

You know, it’s clean. If I hold it in my hand, I’m not going to breathe any toxic fumes in from it. And yet all of the technology that we’re surrounded by in some way, shape, or form will have been produced, there’ll be some pollution that’s associated with that. But also particularly around ICT, the mere fact that it’s switched on and is consuming electricity, well, that electricity has to be generated in some way.

And you put a really interesting statistic on the blurb for your presentation, which says that 8 to 10% of all energy, and I think I’m saying that right, yeah, all energy that’s produced globally, 8 to 10% is related to ICT. I would never have suspected it because it’s completely divorced. I switch my computer on, there’s no pollution in my house because of that. It’s happening elsewhere.

So how does ICT rate? If it’s 8 to 10%, where does it sort of slot into all the other industries?

[00:07:57] Charlotte Bax: Well, it’s more than aviation. There’s this book, Sustainable Web Design by Tom Greenwood. There is this graph somewhere, quite in the beginning, that puts the internet, if it were a country, it would be the seventh biggest polluter in the world. So that’s really, really big. And you don’t see it because all the pollution happens elsewhere. Like, you don’t have a data center, or an energy plant, in your backyard. It’s all hidden away. Or there’s those big boxes next to the highway, you know? You don’t see it. And in Dutch we call it far from your bed show. And that is a really nice comparison I think.

[00:08:36] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, I think if I was to ask you to stand behind my car and I rev the engine, so I use the car, you are going to be really reluctant to stand behind my car because you know that out of the back of the car is coming a lot of terrible gases that you don’t wish to consume. And yet my computer, in a remote destination that I am not standing anywhere near, is doing basically the same thing.

[00:09:05] Charlotte Bax: More or less.

[00:09:06] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, I mean it may not be the same gases or what have you, but there is a pollution component to that.

[00:09:10] Charlotte Bax: Yes, there’s a pollution component indeed.

[00:09:11] Nathan Wrigley: But every bit of technology that I own, I sense none of that. And so that’s a really interesting disconnect. And I guess that promotes us, well, not promotes us, I guess it allows us to ignore the problem because we do not see it.

[00:09:28] Charlotte Bax: Yes. That is exactly the right wording for that. It allows us to ignore it because we do not see it. It’s not just like there’s this energy usage, for example, data centers and routers and your own devices, of course. But there’s also so much more. There’s this embodied carbon from producing all that hardware. And that’s not just the machines that we see around us, your laptop, my laptop, your phone. It’s also like the data centres, the servers, the wifi box, the routers, satellites, et cetera, cables.

Producing electronics is really dirty. It takes up a lot of resources and energy. Data centers, they use up a lot of water for cooling. And at the end of the day, most of those things, they become e-waste, because electronics don’t get recycled that much yet.

[00:10:21] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, I guess given the nature of this podcast, we probably won’t focus on all of the different bits and pieces that are involved in all of that. You know, we can’t talk so much about how a phone ought to be recycled. Well, we could, but we are going to talk about websites.

And again, the disconnect is so profound. I go to a website, any website, there is no connection in my head between browsing that website and the consequences to the environment. Essentially, in my head, and probably the heads of many people listening to this podcast, it’s entirely benign. I’m doing no harm whatsoever. Of course, on some level, intellectually, if I apply thought to it, of course I know that I am, but it’s way easier for me to ignore that.

So then that leads to the question, what on earth can people like you, like me, like the people listening to this podcast who create websites, what on earth can they do? What are the little things that they can pick out that they can change about their website in order to make them less polluting, more sustainable, whichever term you’d like to use?

[00:11:26] Charlotte Bax: Oh boy. I don’t think we have enough time in this podcast to touch on all of that. But in my talk I sort of, yeah, I had a list of certain areas where you could make sustainable choices, and they also arrange really widely. For example, your web hosting, choose a green web host. It makes such a difference. Renewable energy. Not all web hosts are hosting on green energy. And there is this really nice organisation, the Green Web Foundation, they have this database of web hosting providers that are using renewable energy.

And they have a tool, you can put in your website and see if your website runs on renewables. And if you are a web hosting provider, you can send evidence to the Green Web Foundation that your data centers are running on renewables, so they can add you to that database, which is also very good for your reputation as a web host.

[00:12:23] Nathan Wrigley: Right, okay. So as you say the things that you mentioned in your talk, I’ll throw them back at you just so that we’re absolutely certain what we’re talking about.

So every website obviously, well, most of them need some kind of hosting environment. And what you’re saying is go out and be proactive. Look for this badge, this Green Web Foundation badge. They’ve done the hard work, if you like. You can be certain that if there’s a Green Web Foundation sticker on there, there has been an exchange, to and fro, between the host and the Green Web Foundation, and they classify that as sustainable. What does that mean? Does it mean that, like, is it 80% of their energy consumption is renewable or a hundred percent or do you know?

[00:12:59] Charlotte Bax: I don’t know that exactly. You should ask Chris Adams. But they’re also, yeah, I learned that also from that book from Tom Greenwood. You can make a difference between certain ways of using renewable energy, such as like actually producing your own renewable energy by having solar panels on the data center, for example.

You can invest in green energy. You can buy it from a green energy supplier.

And there’s a fourth thing, and it is that you buy certificates from other countries and that, yeah, I think that’s greenwashing.

But as far as I know, they don’t show that yet in the Green Web Foundation database. I have contacted them like months, maybe more than a year ago about it, whether they would do that. And they were open to the idea. I think someone was even working on it. But it just takes a long time because they are not a commercial party of course. They also just run on subsidies and they have just so many resources.

[00:14:02] Nathan Wrigley: Okay, so there’s the first piece. There’s one thing that you can do. That’s a really easy concrete thing to do. We all need the hosting. So when you go, go and look and have some trust in the Green Web Foundation’s badge, if you like. You trust that they’ve done the due diligence and that that is in some way superior, in the way that that energy is captured or what have you.

[00:14:24] Charlotte Bax: Yes, yes. But I have a little disclaimer. Not all green web hosting providers are in the database yet, and not all of them show the badge. But it’s really easy just to check your own website through the tool on their home page.

[00:14:39] Nathan Wrigley: Okay. Thank you. Okay, what was next? What did you have next on your list?

[00:14:43] Charlotte Bax: Well, you can make sustainable choices in your architecture and your UX design. Just make it very easy for your visitors to find things on your website, so they don’t have to go here and there to search for stuff and produce lots of unnecessary page views. Because that’s all data traffic and that’s all CO2 emissions. That’s a thing you can do. Just think really good about that website architecture.

[00:15:12] Nathan Wrigley: So the idea there is that every time we produce a page, the server at some point is having to do some work. That work requires electricity. If we can cut 10 visits down to 5 visits, there’s an, obviously a 50% reduction in the amount of pages that are loaded. And again, it’s so hard in my head to encapsulate what that is doing because it just, I’m just thinking, okay, i’ve saved time. But obviously, you know, now that we’re having this chat, I’m now beginning to think more, okay, not only am I saving time, I’m actually saving electricity and therefore it’s more sustainable.

So that has a knock on consequence of course, in that nobody wants to go to 10 pages if you could go to five pages anyway. So figuring all that stuff out from the start is a good idea. Okay, lovely. Next one.

[00:15:58] Charlotte Bax: Next one is design and content creation. Yeah, what your website looks like. There’s lots of sustainable choices you can make in the assets that are shown on the front end, such as images, video, audio, the fonts that you use, the CSS styling, et cetera. We could do a whole podcast on that alone. So things I talked about previously this morning is scaling your images. Be very picky in your images.

Also sometimes I see websites that have so many pictures on it. I think people are afraid to be boring or something. But use the images that are actually valuable to your content, to tell a story instead of just putting a thousand pictures on there just because. Because images, they tell more than a thousand words, but also images are very, very heavy compared to just plain text.

[00:16:52] Nathan Wrigley: So I guess it’s, couple of things there. The first thing is use images when necessary. So that there’s not unnecessary images being loaded. But also I’m imagining that we’re probably trying to lean into newer image formats. So not only reducing the scale of the image so that it’s the correct dimensions and it’s not, you know, this giant image which is being shrunk in the browser, needlessly downloading a four megabyte image that really is like 150 kilobytes.

[00:17:19] Charlotte Bax: I saw this like on a government website that I tested and there was this, a really small icon, it was like 36 pixels wide or something. And there was an image like 6,000 by 8,000 pixels loaded for that. And I was, my heart bleeded.

[00:17:36] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, this should have been about 3K and it was probably more in the sort of four or five megabyte territory.

[00:17:41] Charlotte Bax: Yes, yes. I don’t know the exact numbers, but terrible.

[00:17:44] Nathan Wrigley: But image formats are changing as well, aren’t they? You know, in the past we were, everybody familiar with PNGs and JPEGs and things like that. And now we’ve got things like WebP and AVIF images as well. My understanding is that they are significantly reduced in their scale, with no measurable difference in the way that you can see them. They look basically identical.

[00:18:06] Charlotte Bax: Yes, yes. That’s really nice. WebP and AVIF, they are web friendly formats for your images and they are really lightweight. They also, they support transparent background and animation, so they are also really good alternatives to PNG and GIF, not only to JPEG.

And what I also like is that you can change the image quality when exporting to that format. Just like with JPEG, you can say, I want quality of 90, or image quality of 80% or even less. And when you’re choosing something between 80 and 90%, usually you don’t really see the difference. You can just play around with that on your computer. But it’s significantly reduces the file size.

[00:18:53] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, I was playing around with something the other day and I was converting a JPEG image to a WebP image. And I went to a service, which enabled me to do that, and at 80% I genuinely couldn’t see any, I was really staring hard and I could not see a single pixel that was different.

I think, you know, maybe if it was some incredibly detailed picture of some medical procedure or something like that, maybe. But in most cases it’s not necessary. But also if it’s going to represent a tiny icon on the website, upload an image which is a tiny icon in size. Don’t upload the big one and the browser handle that.

[00:19:28] Charlotte Bax: Yeah, but also for icons, you can much better choose like a vector image, like SVG, because vector images when done right, I have seen it done wrong, which is terrible, but when done right, they are really lightweight and they are scalable without limits and without any loss of quality. And that’s really suitable for logos, for icons, for certain illustration styles. You can also use SVG really well.

[00:19:56] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, so that’s a really good point. So for what you might call like a bitmap image, you’ve got AVIF and WebP, they seem to be the ones that are out in the front at the moment. And then for things like logos, then some kind of vector based image, like an SVG where essentially it’s data, you know, it’s bezier curves and things like that. So it can really scale up, and it will still look just as good if it’s gigantic.

So definitely listener, if you’re hearing this, go and explore those, it’s well worth it. I would say that WordPress, by default won’t allow you to upload an SVG image. You might need to get a plugin to help you out with that.

[00:20:28] Charlotte Bax: My favorite for that is Safe SVG. I just put it on there as soon as I start a new website and then just put all the SVGs on there.

[00:20:36] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, it’s curious. It’s because it’s not truly an image. It’s kind of like a file format and so it potentially could contain some code which might be harmful to your website. But those plugins strip out all of that. That’s my understanding anyway.

[00:20:47] Charlotte Bax: Yes. So indeed, if you use plugins like that, you are at less risk of malfunctioning code, not malfunction, maleficent code.

[00:20:56] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, like malware. You know, security problems, things like that.

[00:20:59] Charlotte Bax: Yeah, but if you make your SVGs yourself, well, then you have control over that. You know there’s no malware in that, unless you put it there yourself.

[00:21:06] Nathan Wrigley: I don’t know if you have an answer to this, but obviously video is really important on the web. You know, certain types of things that people are doing online, maybe not quite so much websites but, you know, things like Instagram and TikTok and things like that, it’s really, really popular.

Do you know if there’s any similar thing happening like WebP and AVIF with movie formats? Is there anybody trying to compress those in a way that WebP and AVIF have been?

[00:21:29] Charlotte Bax: I haven’t dived into that that much, but I know there is WebM I think. But also, MPEG and or MP4. They are really good compression techniques and as lightweight as you can make it.

[00:21:45] Nathan Wrigley: I guess the same rules apply for images as for video though. You don’t needlessly put video on the website. And certainly it’s possible to deploy video in a way that it’s not as environmentally profound. You know, for example, auto play switched off.

[00:22:00] Charlotte Bax: I really hate those websites with this automatically playing background video. I must admit, when I started out as a web designer, some of my first clients, they really wanted that, so I did it. But I had an opinion on that and I explained, I didn’t know anything about the sustainability part yet by then, but I explained that it is a big file that gets loaded automatically. It really slows down your website also, so it’s a bad user experience. So I recommend that they didn’t do it, but they really wanted to.

But I really hate how some websites shove like an enormous amount of megabytes down your throat as a visitor by those autoplay background videos.

[00:22:43] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, and also I think there’s a move to make it so that, and I don’t know if the block editor, the video block automatically does this, I could be wrong about that. The idea of having an image placeholder instead of the video itself, because the mere putting the iframe onto the page, there’s some communication between, let’s say YouTube, if you’re embedding something from YouTube. Whereas really, you don’t need to engage YouTube until somebody’s actually clicked the play button. So having some placeholder there, click the button, click the image, and then the video begins to load. I guess there’s something there. That’s a good idea.

[00:23:18] Charlotte Bax: I have a trick for that. When you embed a YouTube video or a Vimeo, they do the preload is none thing really good, which is nice, so you don’t shove that many megabytes through someone’s throat. But what YouTube does, and Vimeo also but less, is they put a lot of tracking scripts in that embed.

So what I like to do is, so something I did for one of my latest websites for the Rotterdam Metal Band, Ann My Dice, they have this show reel of their newest songs on top of their homepage. And I put an image thumbnail there. And when you click that, it opens a modal. So the video and all those tracking scripts, they are loaded only when you click on a thumbnail to open the modal. That’s a nice little trick to work around that.

[00:24:04] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, so video and images, that’s a really easy win. There’s loads of things that you can do.

There’s lots of services out there, both on your computer, but online where you can compress the images. And obviously we’ve talked about the different formats and not necessarily loading video.

Okay, should we move on? Is there anything else on there?

[00:24:21] Charlotte Bax: Yeah, yeah. There is caching of course, which can make a huge difference. WordPress is based on a database. So in theory, every time someone visits a page on your website, the server has to calculate the webpage and then send it over to your visitor.

But if you use, for example, server side caching, you can do that once and send the generated page to all your visitors. So that saves a lot of computing energy server side. But there’s also browser caching, which means that certain assets that you can reuse, for example, your CSS style sheets, and your fonts, you can retain in a browser. So they don’t need to get loaded on every page your visitor goes to.

[00:25:06] Nathan Wrigley: There’s so many different ways of tackling this, isn’t there? Whether that’s through your web host or a collection of plugins that you might use. But yeah, caching, the idea being that it’s stored somewhere, kind of ready to go. It’s already been created. Somebody just comes along and if you like, just picks it up.

Whereas in the typical WordPress way, there’s this whole crunching of data. There’s all this PHP being rendered in the background. And the database is being called to construct the page. And really, if the page isn’t being changed from minute to minute, there’s no need for all of that. You can just have a cached version. And increasingly, you know, you don’t even have to make that cached version travel across the globe, because you can put it at the edge in different countries and so on and so forth. So there’s a whole load of interesting stuff. But caching enforce that where possible.

[00:25:54] Charlotte Bax: If you have a, I always recommend people to look at their target audience for choosing their hosting. For example, I live in the Netherlands and my target audience is mostly Dutch companies and Dutch governments. So it makes sense for me to host my website in the Netherlands. But if your target audience is all over the world, I really recommend using a CDN to distribute all your cached web pages. It makes it more sustainable and it also makes it a lot quicker.

[00:26:23] Nathan Wrigley: It’s curious that one, isn’t it? Because in many ways, using a CDN, you are creating a bigger footprint because there’s more, you know, instead of it being cached in one place, it’s now cached in multiple places. So there’s more caching happening. But the people who are absorbing that cache, using that cache, there’s a net benefit there because they have to travel less distance.

So for example, if there’s a cache data center in Sydney, and some Australian user is using that, it doesn’t have to come all the way, for example, to London and then back again. So even though you are storing multiple versions of the cache around the world, the traffic that’s going backwards and forwards from that cache often will make up for that.

[00:27:01] Charlotte Bax: Yeah, it’s really dependent on the situation and the size of your target audience because obviously if you only have like one visitor from Australia every month, it’s not worth it. So it’s also sort of, look at your own situation and make choices based on that.

I always think about, like sustainability is not something like what you can and cannot do, but I like to view it as more as inspiring people and giving them the tools to actually make conscious choices instead of just doing what the masses do and what is easy.

[00:27:37] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, there’s no destination, is there, probably? It’s more of a journey. You’re kind of trying to do little bits, and chisel away the bits that you can. Okay, so caching is a whole other topic. You can no doubt go down that rabbit hole and spend the rest of your life there.

[00:27:49] Charlotte Bax: Yes, yes. If you want to know more about caching, I think Ramon Fincken from Halvar knows more about that.

[00:27:56] Nathan Wrigley: Okay, thank you. Okay, so there’s another one we’ve ticked off. Anything else on your list?

[00:28:00] Charlotte Bax: Yes. There’s visitor management, because obviously the page weight is not the only factor of a website, but also you have to multiply that with all the page visits to get your total CO2 emissions over time.

So if you have a lot of visitors, and that’s not only the human visitors, but also the bots of course, then that’s a lot of CO2 emissions. And that can be up to hundreds of times more than you actually realise.

Joost de Valk had a really great talk about that a few years ago, 2022 at WordCamp Netherlands. I wasn’t there myself, but I have seen a YouTube video and I really, really recommend people checking that out because he can explain that really well.

[00:28:44] Nathan Wrigley: So this is to do with the amount of traffic that you are getting.

[00:28:47] Charlotte Bax: Yes, yes. The amount of traffic. So page weight times traffic is CO2 emissions basically.

[00:28:53] Nathan Wrigley: Okay, interesting.

[00:28:54] Charlotte Bax: Yes.

[00:28:54] Nathan Wrigley: Okay. Next one.

[00:28:56] Charlotte Bax: That’s the last one in my list. And that is sort of the cherry on top. And that is to make your website grid aware. I don’t know if you’re familiar with Fershad Irani. No. He is one of the pioneers in website sustainability. He does a lot of projects for the Green Web Foundation. And currently he is working on grid aware websites toolkits to make your website responsive to the energy mix on the local energy grid from your visitor. And he does that with Cloudflare CDN workers. I hope I explained that right because that’s an area that I’m less familiar with.

But what it does, for example, if your website visitor is in an area where the energy grid is mostly running on fossil fuel energy, then it shows a more minimal experience of your website to the visitor. And when they are in an area where the grid is a big percentage renewable energy, then it shows a more rich experience of your website.

[00:30:01] Nathan Wrigley: Gosh, that’s fascinating. So it’s like progressive enhancement, but for sustainability.

[00:30:07] Charlotte Bax: Yes.

[00:30:07] Nathan Wrigley: So I might see an entirely different page with, let’s say, I don’t know, a greater number of images on it or something like that, given the awareness that the website has of where I’m viewing it, or where it is being hosted? I wasn’t sure about that bit. Is it more about the visitor or more about the location of the hosting of that?

[00:30:26] Charlotte Bax: It’s about the visitor in this case, yeah. And I think he does that in a really, really smart way. There’s also sort of a version of the toolkit that does it browser based. I don’t know enough about that to explain that right I think.

[00:30:39] Nathan Wrigley: Genuinely, that’s fascinating. That really feels like he’s pushing the boundaries. What I’ll do is I’ll try to find a link to something.

[00:30:46] Charlotte Bax: There is a page on the website of the Green Web Foundation, and if you contact Fershad through LinkedIn or Mastodon, or I’m happy to link you with him. He is currently working on it and he is looking for people and websites to experiment with it. I think it’s a really nice experiment to see how much effect this can have. I’m really curious.

[00:31:07] Nathan Wrigley: It kind feels like a technology which is going to be very difficult to pull off, but very profound if it is pulled off. You can imagine high traffic websites, and I’m thinking of news organisations, for example, the BBC or something like that, that just have millions of views every few minutes, I would’ve thought, and could really benefit from something like that. You know, showing a different website. I’d never heard of that. That’s fascinating.

[00:31:29] Charlotte Bax: Yeah, it’s a really new project. He’s still developing the toolkit right now. I think it’s a really amazing project and that could be really impactful for, yeah, those really high traffic websites. I have seen, earlier this week I had a video call with Fershad, and he showed me a demo version on, oh, I don’t know the name, I can’t recall it, but it was like an online magazine.

There was this menu, there was just this dropdown in the menu bar with four items, live low, medium, and high. So you could choose the settings yourself, or you just could go with the live thing, based on your own energy grid where you were localised.

[00:32:08] Nathan Wrigley: So like a demo, and you can pick how you would like to see it in four different versions. Okay.

[00:32:12] Charlotte Bax: Yeah, yeah. The live version is like how it is shown based on your energy grid. But as a visitor, you can also choose your own way if you want to see the more rich version or the more minimised version. And the information on the website, it just stays the same of course, but it shows less images and that kind of stuff. But if you view it in the, like the minimalist version, you can still opt to see images if you want to by just clicking on it. It’s a really smart way he does that.

[00:32:43] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, it’s fascinating. So in my email client, for example, I have it set up, the default is do not show me images, and I just click a button, display images, and they all come in. I can’t pick which images, they all just come. But there’s a decision there, you know, it is like I’ve decided not to see all the images off the bat. Click a button and in they come.

That is really interesting. So I presume the text would stay the same, because that’s the core of what the website is probably offering, text. But, you know, do you want a heavy experience in terms of data? Well, there it is. There’s all the images and the videos. Yeah, okay, I will follow that up. That sounds fascinating.

So we’re at we WordCamp EU. This is all about WordPress. How do you feel WordPress, by default, so ignoring any plugins, if I just chuck a default version of WordPress, a vanilla version of WordPress out there, how does it do in terms of sustainability compared to other things in the environment?

[00:33:33] Charlotte Bax: Oh, that’s really funny because I haven’t really done any research into that. What I have done is I made, it’s some time ago, but I checked some of the WordPress vanilla themes against some of my favorite themes, just making a staging website with only lorem ipsum paragraph, and just the vanilla theme, and then checking how much page weight it is, and how much CO2 emissions on first load. But that’s ages ago. And I, maybe you just sort of started a new project in my head.

[00:34:05] Nathan Wrigley: Ah, nice.

[00:34:07] Charlotte Bax: Measure the CO2 emissions of WordPress themes and vanilla WordPress. I think that’s a good idea.

[00:34:12] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, because it feels to me, especially if you’re using a WordPress default theme, they do seem to be quite light, you know, there’s a lot of text and very, I mean, some of the themes that we’ve had in the past, I can’t remember, I’m just trying to conjure it up, it might have been 2021 or something like that. It was basically all text. And I just wondered if WordPress itself could be proud of its sustainability over time, or whether it was something that, you know, compared to other CMSs but, you know, if you don’t have that data, that’s okay.

[00:34:40] Charlotte Bax: I don’t have the data, but I do think that maybe WordPress could be more of a front runner in terms of sustainability. For example, I learned that Drupal already has like a sustainability policy and they’re doing certain things on that. But unfortunately, our own sustainability team got canceled.

But yesterday, during Contributor Day, there were like 10 people or something, they really wanted to do a sustainability table, so we just impromptu did that. The table cards, they were there. So we just did it and we formed a new team. Still unofficial. I have no idea how it happened, but apparently I’m a team rep now. There are some of the old sustainability team members that also want to continue their work. So we sort of started an impromptu petition to get the sustainability team their official status back, so it can become a core value of WordPress.

And I think that it would really help WordPress to be a front runner, especially in Europe where sustainability is, as far as I know, sustainability is a bigger thing in Europe than in America or Asia. That’s how I feel it. And I think if we don’t jump on that sustainability bandwagon, we could really lose market share.

[00:35:58] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, I think you’re right. I’m curious about the sustainability team. So you are talking about Contrib Day yesterday?

[00:36:03] Charlotte Bax: Yes.

[00:36:05] Nathan Wrigley: An impromptu sustainability team sort of set itself up and just carried on as if nothing had happened. So that’s interesting.

[00:36:11] Charlotte Bax: Yes. Not really as if nothing had happened. Most of the time we spent on like strategising how to get this back on the road again, and how to continue because the previous team, they did really great work and I just latched on a few weeks before they got closed down and I think it’s really sad.

[00:36:29] Nathan Wrigley: Well, you’ve given us loads of really interesting tips. Hopefully the listeners to this have gathered some useful information. Realised that it’s a profoundly important and moral topic to be involved in.

Should anybody wish to contact you and get into a conversation about how they could become involved, or just some tips or what have you, where do we find you, Charlotte?

[00:36:48] Charlotte Bax: You can find me on LinkedIn. You can find Digihobbit on LinkedIn, and you can also find Digihobbit on Mastodon. I’m not really on like the regular social media channels, but that’s a whole different topic to discuss. I also have a personal LinkedIn profile, but if you want to link with me personally, just add a message to it so I sort of know the context.

[00:37:08] Nathan Wrigley: Okay. So dear listener, I will put everything that we’ve talked about today, all of the Green Web Foundation’s, and other varied links into the show notes. Head to wptavern.com and search for the episode with Charlotte Bax.

So Charlotte Bax, thank you very much for chatting to me today. I really appreciate it.

[00:37:22] Charlotte Bax: Thank you very much, Nathan, for having me.

[00:37:24] Nathan Wrigley: You’re most welcome.

[00:00:19] Nathan Wrigley: Welcome to the Jukebox Podcast from WP Tavern. My name is Nathan Wrigley.

Jukebox is a podcast which is dedicated to all things WordPress. The people, the events, the plugins, the blocks, the themes, and in this case the power of local WordPress Meetups in community building in Spain.

If you’d like to subscribe to the podcast, you can do that by searching for WP Tavern in your podcast player of choice, or by going to wptavern.com/feed/podcast, and you can copy that URL into most podcast players.

If you have a topic that you’d like us to feature on the podcast, I’m keen to hear from you and hopefully get you, or your idea, featured on the show. Head to wptavern.com/contact/jukebox, and use the form there.

So on the podcast today we have Héctor de Prada.

Héctor is one of the founders of Modular DS, a tool for managing multiple WordPress websites. But his contributions to the WordPress community go far beyond his day job. Based in Spain, he’s been involved in creating and developing websites for years, and has immersed himself in the WordPress community, attending numerous WordCamps and Meetups in various cities.

More recently, he’s been co-organizing the WordPress Meetup in Leon, a city in northern Spain, which has seen impressive growth and engagement since its revival after the pandemic.

Héctor shares why he volunteers his free time to organize these community events, and the impact Meetups can have, not only for individual learning, but for revitalizing local tech ecosystems.

We discuss what makes a successful Meetup, how his team approaches event planning, rotating roles so nobody feels the pressure to attend every time, and how sponsors and local venues help make it all happen.

Héctor explains how their Meetup group draws diverse attendees, from students and marketeers, to business owners and agencies. And how they’ve experimented with differing formats and topics to keep things fresh and inclusive. Whether it’s inviting guest speakers from digital businesses, running panel forums, or focusing on networking opportunities for job seekers and entrepreneurs, he highlights the power of community in building connections that exist beyond WordPress.

We cover everything from the practicalities of finding venues and sponsors, to managing team workflows and keeping the events welcoming and approachable.

If you ever thought about starting a WordPress Meetup in your city, or want to bring new energy to an existing group, this episode is for you.

If you’re interested in finding out more, you can find all of the links in the show notes by heading to wptavern.com/podcast, where you’ll find all the other episodes as well.

And so without further delay, I bring you Héctor de Prada.

I am joined on the podcast by Héctor de Prada. Hello, Héctor.

[00:03:20] Héctor de Prada: Hello, Nathan. A pleasure to be here.

[00:03:22] Nathan Wrigley: We’re at WordCamp EU. It is in Basel. We are on the contributor day. And you are going to be giving a presentation about an experience that you have, I guess, on a monthly basis running an event. Let’s get into that in a moment. First of all, just introduce yourself, who you work for, what you do in the WordPress community outside of Meetups.

[00:03:41] Héctor de Prada: Okay, so I am Héctor de Prada. I am one of the founders of Modular DS, which is a tool to manage multiple WordPress websites. So that’s like my main occupation. But thanks to that, and also since way before, I have been involved with WordPress, creating websites, developing websites.

And for the past couple of years, or three years I could say, I have been also involved in the community. I’ve been in many WordCamps in Spain because as you know, in Spain, we have a lot of WordCamps. I’ve also been in many Meetups in different cities. I try to stay as much connected as I can to the community.

I also write a newsletter about the WordPress ecosystem in Spanish. And since a year and a half ago, I am also one of the co-organisers of the Meetup, and that’s what I’m going to talk about, well, Saturday in the WordCamp Europe in the talk I have.

[00:04:39] Nathan Wrigley: This is going to seem like a strange question because you know, on a very visceral level, you really understand why you do it, but I’m kind of keen to explain that to the audience. Why do you use up your free time organising WordPress events on a sort of voluntary basis? You know, you’ve given up lots of your free time, there’s no financial gain, you’re just doing it. Why do you do that?

[00:05:02] Héctor de Prada: Okay, well, I was thinking a lot about this question before and I came up with two different answers.

The first one is that since, like I said, I have been kind of part of the community for a few years, and I have been in many events outside of my city. I saw how the WordPress communities, how it feels, all the good things that come out of it. And then one of the main things I was always thinking when I was going to these events was like, why can’t we have this in our city for the people in our city to experience this, to have this type of connections, inspiration, learning, and so on? So that’s one of the first things.

And then it was also mixed with, I come from a small city in the north of Spain, and one of the things, many people say inside the city and outside of the city is that we don’t have many things anymore, okay. So it’s hard to explain, but like there is not much to do, a lot of young people leaves the city. So it’s kind of like depressing mood a little bit.

So it was also like, why don’t we try to do something in our city to try to start creating an ecosystem? And WordPress gave us the perfect excuse to also do that. Try to get people together, people in the tech world, which is what we do, talking about me and my partner, my friends, we are always talking about websites, technology, design. So it kind of all got together and we said, okay, let’s start doing the WordPress Meetups. And it’s been great so far.

[00:06:31] Nathan Wrigley: How long have you been actually involved in the one that you’re doing now?

[00:06:34] Héctor de Prada: The meet up in our city, we have been doing it for around year and a half now. So after the summer, we’ll do two years.

[00:06:40] Nathan Wrigley: I should probably say to the listeners that a Meetup, if you’ve never attended one, WordPress has a whole community outside of the software, who help create the software, but they also show up for social events and things like that. And the ones that you may have heard of are WordCamps, and they’re the big ones. That’s where we’re at right now. So they tend to be an annual thing, perhaps in a city or, we are at WordCamp Europe, which is an annual thing, which moves around Europe.

But the Meetups, which is what we’re talking about, that’s usually bound to a city or a town or something like that, and it’s much more regular and it’s probably happening in an evening. It’s not a whole day. It’s maybe, I don’t know, six o’clock till nine o’clock, something along those lines. And presumably using local talent, using the people in the community that you’ve got, drawing them in and trying to get them to do the presentations and all of the bits and pieces.

So if you don’t know anything about that dear listener, now you do. If there’s something close to you, if you actually log into your WordPress dashboard, there will be an area in the dashboard, if you put all of the panels on, if you turn them on, you’ll be able to see, hopefully it will geographically locate you and give you some intel as to that.

So tell us a little bit about the one that you’ve been doing. You said it’s been going for 18 months, or at least you have been involved for 18 months.

[00:07:53] Héctor de Prada: Actually it was already working before Covid, so for a couple of years before Covid. Then it was shut down. I wasn’t involved before Covid. I didn’t even know the WordPress community before Covid. And then it was like three years stopped. Yeah, like 18 months ago, we kind of restarted the Meetup.

[00:08:13] Nathan Wrigley: So how many people typically would attend your Meetup? Because yours is quite a big one. The one that we are at at the moment is ridiculously big. You know, it’s going to have several thousand. Nobody can expect those kind of attendance numbers. That would be extraordinary. What are the kind of numbers that you are seeing on a monthly basis?

[00:08:28] Héctor de Prada: Yes, so I was checking this for the presentation I’m giving on Saturday, and we have, in this 18 months, we don’t do it every month, okay, it is more like every couple of months, because we don’t do it in the summer or during Christmas, for example, in December. So it’s kind of like six, eight, a year. And we have an average attendance of 60 people.

I know it’s pretty big because like I said, I’ve been in many other places where having like 25 people, 30 people, is already like a huge success. And that’s what we were trying to accomplish at the beginning. Like, okay, let’s try to get 20 people here, 25 people, get together. And since the beginning it’s been like, yeah, like sometimes it’s 50 people, sometimes it’s like 75 people. And for us it’s like, sometimes we don’t even know, how is it possible? But sure, it’s very fulfilling and we’re very happy about it of course.

[00:09:16] Nathan Wrigley: And how do you sort of account for that? Do you email people? Do you have like a system? So for example, a lot of the Meetups will use a platform, which is called Meetup. You can go to meetup.com, and figure all of that out. But do you use a system like that to keep in touch with people and notify them that there’s a new one coming in June or July or whatever it may be?

[00:09:35] Héctor de Prada: Yeah, we use meetup.com to create the events and send the email communications to all the people that is subscribed to the group, or has been in one of the previous Meetups. And also, we always try to get people to follow us on social media because it is where, we have like a Twitter and Instagram account. It’s where we try to advance the new Meetups and give all the information and stuff.

And then we try different things also to get more people to come in. For example, we go kind of old school and we print some big flyers, okay, to put it on the walls. And we put it, for example, in the university, in the buildings the city hall has for technology companies. So we put them over there just for people, when they go to work or students, when they go to the university, they will just check it out. And maybe they will feel like going. So that’s also something we do.

[00:10:25] Nathan Wrigley: And where do you actually do it? Do you have the same venue every single time, or do you tend to move around?

[00:10:30] Héctor de Prada: No, we move around. This is very important because it, I think it’s one of the most important things when you are organising any kind of event, the venue where you’re actually doing it. And we are very lucky because, even when I was telling you that in our city it seems like not many things are being done. When you actually try to do something, everybody tries to help you.

So we have been offered many different venues from City Hall, from the university, from private companies, from the government, public buildings they have. So what we have tried to do is to do the Meetup in different places. So in case, at some point, we can do it in one of them, we will always be able to go to any of the other ones. And that has worked very well for us.

[00:11:12] Nathan Wrigley: Oh, nice, yeah. I think that’s not typical. I think usually it’s done in kind of the same venue and what have you.

My understanding also, and I could be wrong about this, but my understanding is that the Spanish WordPress community is actually one of the healthier ones, for want of a better word. It seems to be kind of thriving. I don’t know if I’ve just heard a story and that’s not true, but is that true?

[00:11:33] Héctor de Prada: No, I think it is. I think it is definitely, well, I was talking with somebody that is organising here at WordCamp Europe, and we were accounting for WordCamps made in Spain last year. And I think it was like 12 WordCamps in one year, only in Spain, which I could say is what the rest of Europe has in one year.

So it’s like pretty crazy. I think, we Spanish people, we just like to gather a lot and just meet each other. But also I think there are many Meetup groups in Spain that are doing a great job and have great numbers and do a lot of Meetups with really great speakers. So yeah, I would say in Spain there is a lot of community movement.

[00:12:14] Nathan Wrigley: I’m quite jealous. The part of the world where I live in the UK, Covid really had a profound impact. The Meetups kind of disappeared, and in some cases came back, but in most cases they didn’t. I think maybe the year 2025 was a bit of a watershed. There’s a few I think that maybe are on the cusp of returning.

So it can’t just be you. I’m presuming that there’s a whole bunch of people, a team, if you like. And how does that work? How many people regularly are helping you out, and do you have, I don’t know, different roles that you perform? Like, you’re in charge of the emails, you’re in charge of the venue, you’re in charge of the snacks and whatever it may be. How many people on the team and how do you manage all that?

[00:12:49] Héctor de Prada: We are six people currently, and what we tried since the beginning was to find other people that could be complimentary to us. And like you said, we try to split responsibilities. So one of us, who is very good with social media, is the one taking charge of posting everything in social media so everybody sees what we are doing.

Other person is always in charge of the networking we do afterwards to get the catering, even the venue we have to change somewhere, because it’s somebody who has a lot of contacts in that space.

Also somebody’s in charge of sponsors. Somebody’s in charge of creating the Meetups. Somebody’s in charge of the design.

Okay, so we try to split the responsibilities, but at the same time, and this is not so obvious, I think what we have also found very important is that, even when each one has a responsibility, we also try to rotate every once in a while. So, for example, when we started, everybody thought or supposed I was always going to be the one presenting, because I’m kind of more used to speaking in public. One of the first things we decide is that every day one of us was going to present the Meetup. So in case I’m missing or anybody else is missing, the Meetup will work exactly the same.

Because we don’t want this to feel like an obligation, like every member of the team has to be every single Meetup no matter what, because it’s not a job. You said it. This is like a volunteer thing. We do it for the community. So if at some point something happens with life, you have to take your kids to school or anything, well, the rest of the team will be able to take charge.

[00:14:27] Nathan Wrigley: So everybody kind of rotates things around so that if somebody’s, I don’t know, unwell during that day, somebody can slot in. Yeah, that’s kind of an interesting approach.

[00:14:35] Héctor de Prada: Exactly. Yeah, the same with like organising the networking and the catering afterwards, taking charge of cleaning everything up afterwards. We try to rotate everything.

[00:14:44] Nathan Wrigley: There’s so much that goes into these events. So let’s just go through the little laundry list of things that you have to achieve. Now, you may do some of these, you may not. But I guess it’s things like booking the venue has to be done. Maybe there’s a payment that needs to be involved with that. You have to presumably have an email list. You’ve got social media accounts. You’ve got ordering the food, tidying up at the end.

[00:15:03] Héctor de Prada: You need to talk with the sponsors as well to get any merchandise they might send to you to give to the attendees. Also, you have to select the speakers and then prepare it with the speakers.

[00:15:14] Nathan Wrigley: So do you work with the speakers as well? Because my experience is that often speakers can be, if they’re new to it, they can be a little bit nervous. And so having some sort of, coaching is maybe the wrong word, but some intuition as to, yeah, you’re on the right lines. That, I think, is what our audience will like.

[00:15:27] Héctor de Prada: It depends a lot on the speaker, because it’s true that there are some speakers that are very, I’m not going to say professional, but they’re like very used to, they are experts in something and they’re very used to give talks about it. So you basically can’t tell them anything because they already know more than you do, okay, about how to do it right.

But it’s true that one thing that we like to do a lot is that we don’t only try to do like the normal talks you might see in a WordCamp, where somebody is an expert on a field, and they just give you a talk trying to allow you to learn something. But we also like to do more experience stuff like trying to look for inspiration instead of learning.

So for example, like you do with the podcast, nowadays I think podcasts are a trend because we like to listen and understand the stories behind people, how they are doing something, or how did they come to this? So for those kind of talks, it’s true that we kind of give them a guide. So, we would like you to talk about this.

Or sometimes if we do, the last meeting we did, it was like a forum with three different businesses, and we wanted to just talk about their experience. And what we did is try to get like the main questions we wanted them to answer. And we gave them to them previously so they could kind of prepare a little bit of what we wanted to talk about. Because they didn’t have any presentation or anything, it was just like a normal conversation, like an interview more. So in those cases, it takes much more work than if it’s just somebody with a presentation and they do their thing.

[00:16:58] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, i’ve been to Meetups where they’ve done a whole variety of different things, not all at the same evening. So for example, they might do two presentations of, I don’t know, 45 minutes each, and then have a bit of networking in the middle.

Some places do social things where it’s just, maybe there’ll be an hour where you just do the networking and hang out. I’ve been to Meetups where they do prize giveaways and quizzes and things like that.

So there isn’t just one model. You can sort of mix it around a little bit and offer things which the audience, I don’t know, it’s a bit more entertainment, if you like.

[00:17:29] Héctor de Prada: Of course. I think it’s very nice to try different formats, different things. Because also people, when we have a lot of, I guess like many Meetups, we have many regular people, they go to almost every Meetup, so I think it’s also good for them to try different things so it’s more like, a little bit unexpected. You get a surprise of what you are getting out of it, and it’s not always the same thing.

[00:17:51] Nathan Wrigley: Have you had things which you’ve tried maybe recently in the last six months or something that you just thought, oh, let’s give that a go. And if so, maybe you could share that.

[00:17:59] Héctor de Prada: Well, the last one we did, at the beginning it was a little, it wasn’t so much about the format because we had already tried that because it was like, yeah, like four people from three different businesses talking about how they achieved what they have done. But the crazy thing is it was the topic about it. Because it was three different gastronomic business, which at the first time you could say, okay, so what does this have to do with WordPress?

But it was very interesting because those three businesses, it was a social media influencer only talking about restaurants, a food influencer. Then it was a restaurant that has digitalised all the experience inside the restaurant. So you get to the restaurant and you order the food with your phone, everything, so no people around you or anything.

And then the other one was an e-commerce site made with WooCommerce of one of the biggest meat sellers in Spain. It’s a big restaurant just to eat meat. The type of meat, like you pay a lot for that. And they are really crushing it, like with their e-commerce made with WooCommerce.

So it was all very digital, but at the same time, the topic was like gastronomic and at the beginning people was like, doesn’t feel like a WordPress Meetup. It was amazing. People loved it.

[00:19:08] Nathan Wrigley: It worked.

[00:19:08] Héctor de Prada: Yes, yes. Because their stories were so interesting and how they kind of mixed with the technology and how it started, the pains they had at the beginning, trying to introduce that technology and how it has now changed their business. It was super interesting.

[00:19:23] Nathan Wrigley: How did you come up with the idea of that particular one? Because that’s so curious. Because usually it is, there’s a strong WordPress focus to the ones that I’ve been, you know, there’s a presentation, it’s WordPress, there’s a Lightning Talk, it’s WordPress, there’s another presentation, it’s WordPress.

But that one, there’s a thread running through it, which is technology. Sounds like the audience really liked it. And there was obviously that WooCommerce bit at the end that you mentioned. How did you even conceive of that topic?

[00:19:47] Héctor de Prada: Yeah. Well, it wasn’t only that WooCommerce, like the three of them had started somehow the business with some WordPress, a WordPress website, a WordPress blog, a WooCommerce, okay. It wasn’t the main focus of the talk, but they all had something to do. And that wasn’t intentional, like it just came out because I guess WordPress, you want it or not, it is behind most of the worldwide web. So it was very nice.

But one thing talk about in the presentation here at WordCamp Europe is that I think that WordPress is what unites us, but I don’t think it should be what separates us. So I think, thanks to WordPress powering like 40 something percent of the worldwide web, it allows us to talk about almost everything related to the digital world. It will always be somehow related to WordPress.

So it’s true that we don’t go too deep into the technical WordPress part. It’s always somehow related, but we feel like our audience is not like WordPress experts, to say it like that. We have a lot of students, marketing students, marketing agencies, entrepreneurs. And then we talk more about like the digital business part, the online marketing. It’s always somehow related to WordPress, but it has worked for us very well to kind of get a broader view and not go so specific, to get also like more attendees coming, and they all feel like they understand, that they can apply that to themselves.

Of course we always talk a lot about WordPress. It’s a WordPress Meetup. But I think that’s also important because even us that we are so deep in the community, I feel like WordPress is like my main thought like 24/7 almost. But for most people outside the community, it is not like that. And I think one important thing in WordPress is that we try to get as many people to the community as possible, and they don’t have to be such experts.

[00:21:36] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, it’s kind of interesting because if you show up and you did two presentations back to back and it was all about, I don’t know, WP-CLI, followed by some other very technical thing, it may be that half of the audience, maybe more, maybe 70% of the audience would think, I don’t really understand that. And managing that is quite difficult.

So mixing it up a little bit and making sure it’s not too technical for one of the evenings. Maybe you have a technical one now and again, but you’ve got to think a lot about the audience and what they are prepared to consume.

So, pivoting slightly, I guess this cannot be entirely free. So I know that you give your labour for nothing. But presumably there is a cost somewhere along the line, whether that’s for snacks or whether it’s for hiring of the venue. How do you finance your Meetup? How does that work?

[00:22:22] Héctor de Prada: Yeah, we have sponsors that help us with the cost. We basically, our costs are only the flyers, which is like almost nothing because we don’t do that many, and then the food and drinks for the networking. So we always try to have two sponsors. One, it’s always a local company, and then one is a workers community company.

I think in Spain at least, because I don’t know outside of Spain, but there are many companies, mostly hosting companies that really want to sponsor these kind of events. And since the beginning, we have had a lot of offers of companies trying to sponsor. I guess it’s also important that we have good attendee numbers and stuff. But I think they sponsor most of the Meetups in Spain. That’s what we use to cover the cost.

[00:23:08] Nathan Wrigley: How does the sponsorship actually work? Because obviously they couldn’t realistically be paying you directly and then you then move the money to buying the snacks and the pizzas or whatever it may be. How does that sponsorship actually work? Who is the person that’s receiving the money and distributing it and so on?

[00:23:23] Héctor de Prada: Well, normally what we do is that, since our costs are very located in, I would say 90% or maybe 95% of the budget goes to the food and drinks for the catering, which we have also tried different companies and different stuff. So they give us a bill and then we’ll send it to the sponsors so they pay the bill. I know it’s not the easiest way. Sometimes because of the company requirements of the food, we have to give the money first and then ask the sponsor to give us the money.

Well, I guess as long as you are, for example, us of course, in the team, as long as you are completely transparent and you show where all the money goes and what is being spent. At least for us, I’m sure for you guys in London, for example, it has to be way different because it’s another city, other kind of prices and everything. But for us, the money sums are really, really small. Even when we have a 60 person Meetup, the money is really small. It just gives you for that, for like the food and that. We are still waiting to try to do some T-shirts for the team, but we haven’t still gotten the money for that.

[00:24:27] Nathan Wrigley: So you tend to get a sponsor on board to sponsor a thing, a component of the Meetup. So it might be that this week hosting company X is sponsoring the food. Or such and such a company is sponsoring the venue. It’s like in one door out the other. Somebody on your team will pay for the food, but then send the receipt, the bill if you like, to the sponsor, who will then reimburse them for all of that.

[00:24:50] Héctor de Prada: Yeah, could be. For example, we have never paid for the venue. We have always had agreements, it’s always free for us so far. Yeah, it’s basically always the food. And the sponsor, even the local company has changed a few times.

But for example, I would say the WordPress community company, that for us is a hosting company, that also sponsors many WordCamps in Spain, we have always had the same one because since the beginning they told us, we want to sponsor, and as long as you keep doing it, we will send you the money or give us the bills.

And also the sponsors we’ve had, they always give us gifts or merchandise for the attendees or maybe to give something like a raffle and then somebody can win a prize or something better. Or they even give us gifts for the speakers as well. So they always treat us very good.

[00:25:37] Nathan Wrigley: So is there like a magic number that makes the event work? So you said that sometimes 70, sometimes 55, something like that. I mean, they seem like pretty good numbers. If you stand in front of that many people, that can be quite intimidating, you know, that’s a lot. Obviously other places will have smaller numbers. Maybe some places will have bigger numbers.

Is there some feeling in your head about, if the numbers dipped down to 20, it’s not worth doing it anymore or anything like that? Do you have any of those thoughts? Because I know that a lot of people who’ve put these events on before, they get quite demoralized because they begin it, three people show up and they do it again, and then two people show up and maybe five people show up. And it kind of seems like a lot of effort. There’s not much interest. I’m trying my hardest, I’m doing all the things which I think are the right things to do. Any thoughts on that?

[00:26:22] Héctor de Prada: Yeah, well, I think it’s definitely challenging because I’ve seen, like you said, many cities where this is the case. It’s really hard for them to get people to attend. I think the main focus for us, when we got all the team together, we always try to think about new things to bring new people in. Maybe talking with the teachers at the university, or maybe going to a business group to present them the Meetup, or maybe get a collaboration with a social media influencer in the city, so he can talk about the Meetups, even be a speaker and then post it on socials. So it is definitely, I think it’s the most important thing.

In my experience, i’ve been in many Meetups and when you are more than 20 people, I could say, it already feels pretty good. Because more than 20 people, it’s already a good number of people to network, to talk, to give a presentation in front of. So more than 20 people, I think it’s already a good number. When you go below 20, below 10, I guess it’s pretty hard.

[00:27:19] Nathan Wrigley: You sort of feel that it’s a lot of work and, you know, it’s difficult to justify that work if the interest is not there.

So speaking of that then, is there a support, like a wider WordPress Meetup support network? So where you can go and dip in for ideas, advice. Obviously if you’re listening to this podcast, that’s one avenue you might get it. But is there a place that you can go, like a Slack channel or a wordpress.org forum or something like that where you could go and gain advice, or some leadership from people like you who’ve been doing this before?

[00:27:48] Héctor de Prada: Yeah, well, there are different places. In the day to day, we have the Slack channel, for example, in the Spanish community inside the WordPress Slack, we have a channel for the Spanish Meetups. So every time we have a problem, we had one a few weeks ago with the Meetup platform, for example, or things like that. We always go there and there is always somebody from the community team replying, and telling you, and helping you, whatever you need.

Also I think it’s very important. It was huge for us at the beginning, before we started doing the Meetup of our city, again, when we started now 18 months ago, it was very helpful to go to WordCamps and in the Contributor Day, like today, go to the community tables and talk with the people that has experience organising Meetups. And they were the ones, for example, when we started it was like super easy because people like Rocío Valdivia, Juan Hernando, who are very deep into the community team for many years, they have been there. They just help us do all the process, all we needed to know. They gave us all the basic advice to know, screwed up at the beginning.

So I would say, if somebody’s looking to organise a Meetup, the first thing they should do is to go to a WordCamp event, or maybe a Meetup in a different city, and talk with people that is organising a Meetup to just get some of the real experience, because I think that’s invaluable.

[00:29:08] Nathan Wrigley: How do your team actually meet up then? Do you have like a regular weekly gathering, like a session where you all gather on zoom or something like that?

[00:29:16] Héctor de Prada: It’s more like on a monthly basis. So since we do Meetups every two months, let’s say on average. So one month we do the Meetup, and then the next month we got all together. It may be all together on the same place, because since it’s a small city, we are all kind of close to each other, or it might be on Zoom. And then we do like the feedback of the previous Meetup to talk about what went well, what could be improved, and at the same time to prepare the next Meetup.

So it’s kind of one month, Meetup, one month, all get together to talk about it. Next month, Meetup, next month, get together to talk about it.

In one hour we can talk about the previous Meetup and organise the next one. And I’m not talking about organise everything, I’m talking about kind of like divide the responsibilities and say, okay, so I’m going to do this, you’re going to do this. And then on a WhatsApp group, we are just letting each other know like, okay, I already booked the venue. Okay, I already talked with the speaker, and he said, okay. Okay, I already designed the flyer or the image and we are good to go, and things like that.

[00:30:14] Nathan Wrigley: From what you’re saying, it sounds like it’s kind of got a homely, family sort of vibe to it.

[00:30:20] Héctor de Prada: Yes. We try to have that casual vibe, like friendship vibe. Like, even in the Meetups, when people come at the beginning when other people on the team was speaking at the beginning, like presenting the Meetup, and talking a little bit about what is the WordPress community, or what do we do here, what type of events are in the WordPress community and everything. They were a little bit nervous about it because they haven’t done it before or seen it as many times as I have seen it.

And I would always tell them, this is like a friend group. If you say something wrong, you just say naturally, okay, this is my mistake. I should have said that this way and not that way, okay. And just do it in a casual vibe. Like, most of the people, like I said, since they’re regular people, we kind of know everybody. We all know each other because we do, if we do like one hour talk, then we always have like one hour, or hour and a half, of networking. So almost everybody knows each other.

So it’s kind of more like, yeah, like friendship, not family, but friendship. We try to do that also so everybody who comes feels comfortable and not afraid to speak with anybody or even to ask something during the Meetup or anything. Because it feels really like it’s just a group of friends and you are part of those friends and everybody’s welcome.

[00:31:35] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, that feels really nice. The Meetup that I attend, we also have this idea of kind of networking and that seems to be quite a powerful thing as well. So people don’t just show up to make friends, which is nice. They don’t just show up to watch the presentations. Again, it’s nice, but they also show up, and there’s an opportunity to share stories about, I’m looking for work, I’ve got a job that I need to be filled.

And just the other month we had a story about somebody who, you know, started a new job because of a conversation that had happened at that event. Just wondered if that kind of thing was something that you have noticed happens with yours as well?

[00:32:09] Héctor de Prada: Definitely, definitely. One of the first things I was telling, for example, in the first Meetup we have, I think a few students came from the university. And I was like, this is where you have to be because you’re studying for marketing, and here there are like, I don’t know, like seven or eight agency owners that are going to be looking for the next people to work on their marketing team. So this is the perfect place. You are not going to meet them any other place. You’re not going to go on the street and just cross them all. So you have a marketing agency. I want to work on a marketing agency. No, it’s not going to happen.

But here you just come here for free, you learn something, and also you can talk to these people directly. You can tell them about your life. They can tell you about theirs. Maybe there is a match. So yeah, I hope, I know a couple of stories that have worked, but I hope, I really hope it will be like the best thing for the Meetup that a lot of good things, it’ll either be collaborations, hirings, partnerships, anything come out of the Meetup. Because that would be great for the ecosystem, for the people in our city, for the people attending the Meetups. So that would make us so, so happy.

[00:33:11] Nathan Wrigley: It’s one of those things that I think many people might find it a little bit nervous to go for the first time. You know, just the idea of sitting in a room full of strangers. You can do just that. You can sit at the back and you don’t have to contribute. You don’t have to put your hand up and say anything. So the idea of just showing up, lurking maybe a few times, just seeing what the whole situation is like. And you never know, something completely revolutionary might happen.

[00:33:33] Héctor de Prada: Yeah. There is always, sometimes when you go to the networking part, and you don’t know anybody, the normal thing is that you probably go to a corner just by yourself, okay. Or just close to a wall and just stay there. But the normal thing in this type of events, or I would say almost any event, is that you’re going to find other people next to the wall, next to you, because they also don’t know anybody.

And those are the first people you’re going to meet. And you’re going to create that relationship. And from that you’re going to start moving to other groups. Somebody’s going to come that knows one of you. And that’s how it starts. So it might feel intimidating at the beginning, but then once you get into it, also, this is especially in the WordPress community, it’s very easy to start to know people.

[00:34:17] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah. It’s just occurred to me, Héctor, that we’re sort of 40 minutes in and I haven’t said, where is it? Where is your Meetup?

[00:34:24] Héctor de Prada: Okay, yeah, true. Well, it’s in the city of León, which is in the north of Spain. It’s a small city in the north of Spain.

[00:34:31] Nathan Wrigley: And I will make sure, when I put the show notes together for this episode, if you go to wptavern.com and search for the episode with Héctor in it, I’ll make sure to link any resources that you put in my way. I’ll make sure to link so that if you are in that neck of the woods, you can check it out, but also I’ll make sure to link to other more wider resources.

[00:34:50] Héctor de Prada: If somebody that listens to this at any point thinks that me or anybody on our Meetup group can help them, if they are trying to create a Meetup, or doing a Meetup and trying to change something, please reach out to us and of course we’ll be happy to talk with anybody, if our experience can help in any way.

[00:35:10] Nathan Wrigley: That’s perfect. I will make sure to put some links to your bio as well. That’s absolutely wonderful. Héctor de Prada, thank you so much for chatting me today.

[00:35:17] Héctor de Prada: Thank you, Nathan.

[00:00:19] Nathan Wrigley: Welcome to the Jukebox Podcast from WP Tavern. My name is Nathan Wrigley.

Jukebox is a podcast which is dedicated to all things WordPress, the people, the events, the plugins, the blocks, the themes, and in this case, learning from mistakes in website development agencies.

If you’d like to subscribe to the podcast, you can do that by searching for WP Tavern in your podcast player of choice, or by going to wptavern.com/feed/podcast, and you can copy that URL into most podcast players.

If you have a topic that you’d like us to feature on the podcast, I’m keen to hear from you and hopefully get you, or your idea, featured on the show. Head to wptavern.com/contact/jukebox, and use the form there.

So on the podcast today, we have Jennifer Schumacher.

Jennifer has been working with WordPress and web development for over 15 years. Her journey began with a spark of curiosity in university, building her first WordPress website after a YouTube crash course. Then evolving into freelance gigs, team collaborations, and eventually running a white label agency working alongside other agencies around the world.

Jennifer’s experiences have exposed her to the highs and lows of agency life. Projects that run smoothly, but also cultures that can become toxic, people burning out, and the all too familiar frustration of unbillable hours, and broken processes.

This inspired Jennifer’s lightning talk at WordCamp Europe 2025, where she shared some of the most common, and painful, mistakes she’s seen agencies make, and what can be learned from them.

Jennifer walks us through her path in the WordPress world, and we discuss three real world mistakes agencies make. Web support that drains your soul, the design handoff from hell, and work more, bill less, and smile anyway.

We talk through support, bottlenecks, frustrating design to development handoffs, and the dilemma of over servicing clients without fair compensation.

Jennifer shares her candid perspective on why processes and honest communication matter, not just for the bottom line, but for the mental health and building sustainable teams. She also discusses how transparency, learning from failure, and continually improving processes can improve agency life.

Jennifer’s approach is refreshingly open about both the mistakes and the solutions, aiming to help others avoid repeating them.

If you found yourself frustrated with agency workflows, or are hoping to build a healthier business in the WordPress ecosystem, this episode is for you.

If you’re interested in finding out more, you can find all of the links in the show notes by heading to wptavern.com/podcast, where you’ll find all the other episodes as well.

And so without further delay, I bring you, Jennifer Schumacher.

I am joined on the podcast today by Jennifer Schumacher. Hello, Jennifer.

[00:03:26] Jennifer Schumacher: Hello. Nice to be here.

[00:03:28] Nathan Wrigley: We’re here on Contrib Day. It’s WordCamp Europe 2025. Now, because it’s Contrib Day, that means you haven’t yet done what it is that you are going to do at WordCamp Europe. But you’ve got a presentation, like a lightning talk. So you’ve got 10 minutes to stand on the stage.

The idea is that you are going to be talking about agency, WordPress agencies, how they mess up, I’m going to use that word, and how they can learn from their mistakes.

So before we get into that, just tell us a little bit about you.

[00:03:56] Jennifer Schumacher: I started web development about 15 years ago, maybe a even more even. I was at university, no money, on a freelance platform, and somebody asked me if I could build a website. I checked on YouTube, okay WordPress. I said yes, and then I sold a website. No idea how to do it, honestly. But then YouTube helped me figure things out, and that’s how I started and fell in love with it. No way to turn back.

Went for it, did a couple of freelance gigs and then, you know, joining other team members, joining other people in the freelance world, building like groups, working on stuff together, working on projects. And then it grew, got bigger. We got bigger projects. We built a white label team working for the agencies, collaborating with other agencies. And that’s what I have done over the past years. So that’s a bit of my background.

[00:04:47] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, that’s perfect. Yeah, that’s great. I think your story sounds like a lot of people’s stories in that they, if you began 15 years ago, the web was still very much discovering what it was going to be. And you drop in and learn as you went along. I think maybe now that’s a little bit more difficult. I think if you drop in these days, it’s maybe more challenging. There’s so much more competition out there and things like that. yeah, your story kind of mimics mine except that you grew an agency and I didn’t, I just stuck as a one person, and that kind of worked out for me.

[00:05:15] Jennifer Schumacher: Yeah, it’s like the people network, right? You meet different people and then you get to know each other, and then you start learning, and then you think about the opportunities. And then either you say, okay, this is a path that I want to take, or you don’t, right?

[00:05:27] Nathan Wrigley: And have you ever worked for other people in website building? Have you worked for other agencies, or been an employee? Or has it always been you and the agencies that you have run?

[00:05:36] Jennifer Schumacher: I never have been like an employee per se, so it was more like a contractor, but either freelance or for the agency that we built. But the nice thing, and why I really loved this was it was in different roles, right? Sometimes I was the designer in the beginning, or I was the developer. Later on I did develop myself, but that was in the WP Bakery days. So I don’t do that anymore to be honest.

Yeah, so it was design then more development. And then later on I moved more into project management. And then in the most recent years, there’s so many things that I, after all those years, you know, it’s nice, I love WordPress, but certain things make me sick. I was like, God, no, I don’t want this anymore.

Certain stress levels that I’ve reached where I said, no, I don’t want to do it the same old way as usual. This is something that my talk will be about, to be honest.

And the last couple of years have been more about process improvement. Doing things faster, less stress, and then also all these unbillable hours that many people just hide below the table. So this has been my focus for the last couple of years.

[00:06:41] Nathan Wrigley: Okay. Well, I’ve got to say it’s very, very nice to meet somebody who’s really open and honest about their successes, but also things that they consider they could do better. Let’s use the word failures. I think most people kind of hide that stuff, but it’s really interesting that you are doing a presentation where you are raising that as, okay, I messed this up, I messed this up, I messed this up, and here’s how I took it as a, you say learning opportunity, which I suppose is the best way to parse any of those kind of things.

Why are you doing a talk though at WordCamp? So this is kind of a more of a community question. It’s not really about the presentation itself. I’m just curious as to why, what is it that you get out of it? Do you just enjoy sort of hanging out at these events or, why have you decided to do it?

[00:07:20] Jennifer Schumacher: How can I explain that in the best possible way? I’ve met many great people over the years, but I’ve seen many of them who got frustrated about certain things in part of the culture at the agency they worked at. I’ve seen toxic cultures as well. I’ve seen many projects that started off very nice and then it became frustrating over the time. And then towards the end, people were not getting paid according to what they actually delivered.

I’ve seen people that later on actually quit and they said again, I don’t want to do it anymore. That they were so frustrated, especially in project management, I’ve seen a couple of them just drop out. It’s like, you know what? Not doing it anymore. And I don’t think that that’s worth it.

If we don’t talk about what goes wrong, if we don’t acknowledge about stuff, these things that could be better, and then say, hey, you know what, let’s figure out a better path and resolve this kind of stress because we deserve a better team that’s in sync, then what are we doing? If we just continue and say, well, that’s agency life, you know? That’s how it is in agencies. No, it’s not supposed to be that way.

If you just accept it and just go with it, then it’s going to be that way. I think it’s worth sharing that, because if you don’t ask the question, how can it be better? You’re not making anything better to be honest.

[00:08:38] Nathan Wrigley: Okay. Thank you. So let’s hope that the wisdom that you impart will land with the people. But you’ve got this idea of three real world agency mistakes. That’s what you’re going to focus on in your 10 minutes.

I have a question around that. So obviously you’re going to highlight the things that went wrong, explain how you tackled it. Do you ever get the sense though that there’s ever, and I’m doing air quotes, a perfect system? Have you ever landed on something where you think, okay, that’s it, I do not need to improve that thing anymore? Or is there always room for improvement?

[00:09:09] Jennifer Schumacher: Well, that’s a good question to be honest. I’m German. Many Germans try to be perfect to be honest. But I don’t think perfect exists, and isn’t imperfect perfect. Because the thing is like, learning is a journey, so if we set up a system and then we figure out, okay, let’s try that way, and then we work with it and then see, what can we tweak, what can we improve? And isn’t that what makes it perfect, right? Because we keep improving things.

There are new things coming out now, you know, AI is everywhere. So, are there certain things that we can use that help our system? We just keep tweaking it. So, no, perfect system. Do I want one? No. Is it fun to keep tweaking things? Yes. So I think you’re just trying to get started, build a certain setup and try to improve it over time.

[00:09:58] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah. So that would’ve been the way I would’ve paraphrased it as well. You kind of get something which feels like it’s good for now and then the technology changes, WordPress adapts and you have to figure it out a new. Okay, that’s great.

So there are three things that you’re going to tackle. Maybe you could’ve done 5, 10, but the time was probably the limitation. What are the three things that you are going to mention? What are the three things which agencies make as mistakes that you have encountered?

[00:10:21] Jennifer Schumacher: First of all, I had to think a lot about, okay, which kind of situations do I want to include, right? Because over the years, you know, you collect a lot of stories, and I think the most impactful is a story. You want to talk about a specific situation where you were in. And so I was thinking about, what should I cover?

For each story I made a nice headline. I can just quickly share those headlines, and then you think about what you think that that means.

[00:10:46] Nathan Wrigley: Perfect.

[00:10:47] Jennifer Schumacher: So the first one is, support that drains your soul. The second one is, the design handoff from hell. The third one is, work more, build less and smile anyway.

[00:10:59] Nathan Wrigley: Let’s go back to the first one then. You’re going to have to say the exact wording, because I’ll probably get it wrong. What was number one again?

[00:11:04] Jennifer Schumacher: It’s web support that drains your soul.

[00:11:07] Nathan Wrigley: Okay, tell us, what went on here? What calamity befell you and your agency that led to that portion?

[00:11:13] Jennifer Schumacher: I’ve seen it in many, many agencies and if, for example, once I had a agency in Switzerland and they said, we manage one point of contact for our clients. So this was mainly the project manager, right? So whenever the client wanted something, they contacted this person.

Why was that not a good idea? Because pretty often the people that I met were just simply overworked, especially when it came to support staff. Because the client got in touch with them, they got in touch with the designer. The designer got in touch with them. They got back to the client and they were just in the middle on every little item.

And the more you have of this kind of support work, the stressier it gets. And this is something where I’ve seen a lot of things go wrong and where I’ve seen a lot of frustration just for being the person in the middle.

[00:11:58] Nathan Wrigley: That was something which was commonly, I want to use the word taught. People often told me it would be better to always deal with this one person, because that one person at least is this single point of contact. You can build up a relationship with them. Just prize that open a little bit. Has that led to problems, and what were those kind of problems? Was it that that person, I don’t know, maybe they are not a good communicator or something like that?

[00:12:21] Jennifer Schumacher: Well, the thing is, that person doesn’t, it’s just a person most of the time that communicates. This person’s never resolving the issue. So for example, the client has something super simple, I want to change the position of that button. So the client asks their single point of contact. The single point of contact, they go to the developer, hey, they want to change that button. But then the developer goes back, but yeah, but this position we cannot do, it’s not recommended.

It’s like ping pong. And let’s say changing that button takes like maybe just 30 minutes, but the entire communication about where the button should go and why not there, why it would be more recommendable to go into that spot exactly, or which size or animation they want. These kind of details take maybe two and a half hours. But now the client doesn’t really want to pay for the communication about it.

And then in the end, I’ve seen many, many agencies, they just put this under the table, under the rug, or they say it and then just don’t admit it. And if you have a lot of these support items, you have a lot of unbillable hours. And is that sustainable? No. Is that frustrating? Yes. Especially if you’re a small team and you need to bill for the time. If you’re not able to bill for it, then what are we doing here?

[00:13:31] Nathan Wrigley: So this is the idea then that in a company, let’s say that you as a freelancer are working with a company, I don’t know, maybe they’ve got a hundred employees or something like that. You’ve set it up so that you only speak with this one person in their company. But those other 99 people are funneling all of their bits and pieces through that one person.

You just get this backwards and forwards. That one person becomes a bottleneck because they’ve got to communicate with the 99 people. Any change has to go through them.

Okay, what was the second one? I’ve forgotten, I’m sorry.

[00:13:57] Jennifer Schumacher: The design handoff from hell.

[00:13:59] Nathan Wrigley: Okay, what’s that?

[00:14:00] Jennifer Schumacher: Have you ever worked, like you’re a developer and then you are working on a project where they say, okay, the design will be done by a design agency or by some other designer. And then you get the design, you’re like, well, that doesn’t fit anymore what I thought I would spend on time in the beginning. And then I get a file, it was not even clear like this page, what should be the H1?

And then inconsistent styles. And then suddenly on the mobile view, if the designer also did a mobile view, the designs do not match at all. Like, on this screen they use this size, on this screen, this size. Super inconsistent. And this is so frustrating. Because as a developer, in theory, then suddenly you have so many hours.

Then, again, you have to decide, do I log them? Do I tell them that this is not anymore a fit? And if I am not anymore making it a fit, do I look bad? And again, unbillable hours. And then either you bill them or you’re like hiding them. I don’t like that.

[00:14:57] Nathan Wrigley: This is the idea of if you are, I guess if you’re in a big agency where you’ve got a design team, and the design team is literally in the, you know, the cubicle next to you. That’s a fairly easy point to solve because you just stand up and have a chat about it. But if you’re a freelancer, or you’re dealing with a third party design agency or something like that, it’s a real bottleneck, isn’t it?

Because you get a design, it looks great, but suddenly you realise, well, yeah, it looks great, it would make a great magazine piece. Transferring that over to the web with H1s and paragraphs, and it’s got to be accessible and color contrast has got to be good and all of this kind of stuff, that suddenly becomes problematic.

And usually the client doesn’t have that same level of expertise. So you know, they might catch sight of that design and think, perfect, do that. Do exactly what we see and then you have to have this whole tennis again of explaining, well, actually we can’t do it quite like that. So, okay, that’s the second one.

[00:15:50] Jennifer Schumacher: What I can tell you is that I’ve seen this happen nonetheless in big agencies too. I have worked also with agencies with more than 150 employees. And it always depends a lot on their internal processes and how they approve and the system, right?

Nonetheless, I’ve seen also like big design agencies, and it looked all fancy, but then it did not match up. Maybe you’re very good at selling, but if you internally do not have certain systems in place, this stuff can still happen.

[00:16:21] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah. And I also feel that when I was doing this kind of work, when I was a freelancer, I had to be all the things. I had to be literally everybody. I had to be the designer, I had to be the developer, I had to be the communicator, I had to be the marketer, I had to be the SEO. I had to be all of these things. And with the best will in the world, I’m not the best at all of those things. Probably one or two things I’m pretty good at, but the rest of them fairly lousy.

And so that kind of fits in as well. And again, the process, getting a process exactly right. You are all about sort of saving money by having a process, saving time and money by having a process, yeah.

[00:16:54] Jennifer Schumacher: To be honest, in my opinion, it’s mental health. Because if it goes on for too long that you’re charging less than what you are actually bringing to the table, that’s frustration. You bring that frustration to your home, that’s when you get stressed out. You share with your family what happened. You are like unloading the stress. You are not that much capable of being a good listener if you’re stressed. And you want to be a good listener with the people that you love. So, what are we doing here? You know?

[00:17:23] Nathan Wrigley: You also become like a double fronted marketplace a little bit. Because you’ve got the designer over here who’s giving you designs and you are sat in the middle. And then you’ve got the client over here and you are sat in the middle. And you become this person that has to communicate the ideas in both directions.

And when they say, we want this, you have to communicate that back to the designer. Do you have like a trusted designer or a design, like a network or a team or something like that, that you just more or less rely on that because you’ve figured out they know what I am typically going to want?

[00:17:52] Jennifer Schumacher: I give them guidance how I want it. Some have, you know, worked with me before, here and there, and then they already know. But I tell them exactly how we need things, and then I point things out, okay, hey, like a checklist. Okay, we need to check this, this, this, this, this. And this sometimes could take a lot of time too, depending on the people that, you know, I work with.

But it’s not that I have like a hundred percent go-to person per se. No. Maybe I can share that same thing. I did design many years ago, then development. And sometimes I need to also, you know, pause and say like, Jenny, no, don’t jump in and just do it yourself. You know, I could, but I just should not. So I just try to, let’s say, express how I need things to be done before going into development. If that’s not done, we’re not going into development.

[00:18:41] Nathan Wrigley: I think designing for the web is really difficult because it is a real skill in and of itself. You know, if you’re designing for a magazine layout, I mean, obviously there’s a high level of skill required to do that in an effective way. But then being able to actually understand the semantics of that design, and how it might look, and especially now where we’re going into a web which is not three view ports. It’s not just mobile, it’s not just tablet, and it’s not just desktop.

It’s this much more kind of, we have no idea what you’re going to be viewing it on. We don’t know the width. I think this sort of Intrinsic Design, which people keep talking about, that makes the job even more difficult, okay. So there’s number two.

Number three, what was that one?

[00:19:23] Jennifer Schumacher: Number three was, work more, bill less and smile anyway.

[00:19:27] Nathan Wrigley: Okay, go on. Did you say work more, bill less?

[00:19:30] Jennifer Schumacher: Yeah. Work more, bill less.

[00:19:32] Nathan Wrigley: That seems counterintuitive.

[00:19:33] Jennifer Schumacher: Yeah.

[00:19:33] Nathan Wrigley: Most people would say work less, bill more.

[00:19:36] Jennifer Schumacher: Well, everybody likes to say that, which is unfortunately, the truth is not always how it works, right? So, how about this? Have you ever been on a project where time goes by in the beginning, everybody’s excited? All fits, looks good. We’re progressing and then the client comes back with feedback and then there’s a change. Maybe it’s a change request, you know, okay, we add some extra hours.

But then there’s something that either we did not notice, for example, oh, this doesn’t work in the Safari. And suddenly we need to work a bit more to make it a fix. But the budget is really tight. Anyway, we need to fix this. Or the client wants something, oh, but this should also animate. You animated this, but also this needs to be animated.

Details. Detail here, a detail there. And then suddenly you notice like, well, the budget we had is not anymore available, but the client is still asking for things, and even saying stuff like, that should be included. How could you charge that extra? Or it was not communicated early enough like, hey, you know what, client, our budget is getting tight. If you are requesting more things, we will need to invoice you extra down the road.

Of course you want to say, okay, if there’s something wrong with our work, we will cover this internally. You don’t want to be somebody who says, okay, I did a mistake, but I’m not correcting it, haha. But if the client is requesting more stuff, you need to let them know in advance. Because if you let them know later, they also go like, huh? Where does that come from? Why didn’t you tell me that this has got more expensive?

And then suddenly you cannot charge them for that. And now you worked more, but you are effectively billing less if you take your effective hourly rate, what you actually delivered and work.

I’ve met agencies, freelancers, when they would really calculate their effective hourly rate, they would be crying, sitting in the corner of the room and crying. This is frustrating, right? And nobody likes that. But anyway, they expect you to sit there smiling and just pretend like everything was good.

[00:21:33] Nathan Wrigley: Do you always do that with your clients though? Do you have that approach of, we must smile through this, even though things are not necessarily working out? Because that was one of the things that you wrote in your description. Let me just find it. You wrote, it’s about laughing, learning, and maybe even recognising a situation you’ve been in yourself.

So do you try to have that sort of humorous approach when things are not working out? Can you always laugh? Because sometimes these things can be so profoundly, well, annoying, let’s go with that. It’s difficult to laugh, I think.

[00:22:01] Jennifer Schumacher: I think it depends a lot on your personality. I can tell you something. So I live in Spain and in Mexico. I’m German, but I don’t live anymore in Germany. But I think when you meet different cultures and see how they react, how they treat certain situations, that made me open up my eyes and see like, okay, you know, you always have the choice. How do you react to this? This is your choice.

And if you get frustrated and you dwell into the pain and just continue again and again, and in the same cycle, then that’s your choice. What’s the other end, right? You can just say, hey, you know what? It was a mistake or this happened. I’m not happy about it, but the only thing I can do is appreciate that it happened because it gave me the opportunity now to learn from it. And that’s the super different perspective.

Some people are not capable of thinking like that, but I prefer to think like that, because it makes me feel better and it makes me look at possible solutions and focus on that. Instead of me looking at the situation, focusing on the issue and the problems.

[00:23:07] Nathan Wrigley: I think it’s very difficult in the moment sometimes to be so, I’m going to use the word sanguine. Just to be so measured about it because you know, something doesn’t work out. Maybe the first reaction is a buildup of anger or something like that. But to have that, to be able to in your head, parse that and say, you know what? The anger probably won’t get me anywhere, but viewing that as a learning opportunity.

Because you go into pains, that’s what you say over and over again. Treat it as a learning opportunity. It’s almost like Zen Buddhism, or something like that, you know, it’s kind of trying to turn a bad situation into a good situation.

But you are also at pains to say, well, it feels like you’re at pains to say, just don’t keep repeating it though. You know, if something bad happened, learn from it, but then adapt the process. Make the process different so that it doesn’t happen a second or a third time because, well, that’s crazy making.

[00:23:57] Jennifer Schumacher: Yeah. But that’s, again, the reason why I think I really love the opportunity to be here and to be having that speech at WordCamp. Because, I get frustrated just thinking about it, I’ve seen so many great people just do the same thing over and over again, because they think that’s it and that’s how it is in agencies. It doesn’t matter if they work at this agency or that agency.

Maybe some do it a bit different here or there, but the same problems come up and they do not really think about, how can I resolve this? New project. Like, new projects will fix it, or let’s sell more. Let’s fix it in the next project. Let’s fix it in the next project.

But then they don’t think about a fix. And I have a couple of people who I really think like, God, you’re so good at what you do, but why do you do this to yourself? Why don’t you think about how to get out of this mess? And I think that’s what I want to do, what I want to share because you have to focus on how to solve this. Otherwise, if you don’t make it a priority, you’re stuck where you are.

[00:24:50] Nathan Wrigley: I guess also, each one of us really genuinely does have, so I’m focusing on a freelancer at the minute, you know, so you’re not in an agency, it’s just you. We all really genuinely do have a unique set of attributes which make us the way we are. And it may be that you just have to lean into those. You’re good at this thing, you’re not so good at that thing, so maybe that gets outsourced, or maybe you just have to approach it in a different way. But it’s very, very hard.

I also think that over the last 10 years, we’ve lived through a cycle of YouTube videos where people are trying to pitch us the perfect solution. In 10 minutes I’ll teach you how to revolutionise your agency. Some of that works, I’m sure, but there seems to be quite a bit of snake oil there as well.

And what i’m trying to say is, just because it’s in a YouTube video or somebody is shouting from the rooftops that they’ve got the answer, it may be that that answer actually won’t work for you because that’s not who you are.

[00:25:43] Jennifer Schumacher: Yeah. Well, that can be too. The thing is like, if you see those fancy videos on YouTube with these nice titles, they put them because that gives them a better click rate because people are more like, okay, well, I want to see if I just say like I have something that’s way high work. If you think that that’s a good idea or not, that’s up to you. It’s not a big selling point, right?

So they write it that way just because of the enticing title makes you click. So that’s also, you know, it’s your human brain that follows this kind of direction. Yeah, so I think a big part, just as you mentioned, resources, YouTube. For me, the biggest part has been asking. And that’s why I loved, we started white labeling, working with other agencies, I learned so much from them. So much.

And just sharing, I have one CEO that I once asked, he had built an agency with over two hundred employees, and they started out as four many years ago. I asked him for lunch. I asked, I would love to know how you did it. What was your motivator? How did you decide who to hire? How did you find the right people? What were the big decisions or risks that you took.

And I think that is so important. Why not? What do we have to lose? I think, why not open up conversations and just ask, how are you approaching this? And I think this kind of stuff gets lost a lot. It’s not just only just sitting there and looking at YouTube videos. Who else could I ask? How do you deal with this?

[00:27:12] Nathan Wrigley: I have a question, which is maybe one that you don’t want to answer because it’s quite vulnerable. But what is your biggest mistake? What’s the thing that if you look back over your career you think, oh boy, that was a calamity?

[00:27:23] Jennifer Schumacher: I have one and I think I’m not, well, it is embarrassing. Yes, it is. But why not? It’s like a learning opportunity, right?

So when I was younger, oh God, I don’t know how many years ago, it was like 10 years maybe. So I thought, okay, I want to build a team, I want to do this. Let’s make it at an agency. We have clients, we have projects, okay, cool.

So I searched for people. I got an office and we were all there. And I thought, okay, I also want to be great with our culture because I think, you know, the team is what matters because only if the team is happy, we can make great work. I wasn’t going to be the one that’s sitting there with a whip, you know, like, do this, do this, do this. That was not how I envisioned myself.

But I focused so much on this team that I did not notice that I did not yet learn enough how to be a good salesman. Few months later, I ran out of money.

And because I was not yet intelligent enough about putting up boundaries that certain clients were like, oh, what? That should be included. Why was that not covered? And we just went in and covered it and not communicate, okay, that we stopped covering certain things for free. We did not yet know how to charge certain things on time.

So we were still like, or I was still, did not resolve it. I did not think about, how do I need to do it so I don’t get myself in the situation that I would have a hard time getting out of, especially financially? And then I had to say, okay, that’s it. Pack my bags. I then started a job in sales. And then I had to learn, damn, how do I sell? How do I communicate? And that I did for a year and a half. And when, again, made more money outside of the job, I did quit.

[00:29:06] Nathan Wrigley: Okay, so that was a real learning opportunity, wasn’t it? You went, the whole thing collapsed but the key bit that was missing was sales. You pick yourself up, got a sales job, learnt the sales portion, and then kind of began again. I guess it worked out the next time.

[00:29:18] Jennifer Schumacher: Yeah. This time, we’re still here.

[00:29:20] Nathan Wrigley: That was the low point. That was the thing which you did worst. Maybe you’ll be good at answering this question. Some people are a bit shy when you ask a question like this. What’s the thing that you think you’ve done best?

[00:29:29] Jennifer Schumacher: Oh. What? The best.

[00:29:30] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah. What’s the bit that if you look back over your 15 years, I mean, it may not be exactly one thing, but can you summon up something which you think, actually, do you know what? I’m really proud of me for that.

[00:29:41] Jennifer Schumacher: I’m really proud of me for opening up and saying like, you know what, that’s not how it has to be. I don’t want this anymore. I want to see how I can improve this. I must say that my husband has been a bit of an inspiration here too. He’s the kind of person that’s like, ah, I want to work less. Like, I don’t want to work that much. And he finds a way to do it. He always does. He always finds his way around. It’s like, how come that he figures that out and I don’t? And I’m like, sitting here stressed.

And there was also this thought like, do I like this stress? Do you know these people who are addicted to this kind of stress? And they just think they need it. It’s like, do you really think you need it? Do you really think that that’s what you want? Yeah, this is what made me think. And I’m happy that decision, saying like, you know, no. I don’t want that anymore.

And i’m still having things to learn. You know, there’s still things that I’m working on. Totally. I think having that in your, like a little angel, I don’t know, or figure in the back of your head saying like, you shouldn’t do that. Can this be better? Think about it. That’s what I’m proud of.

[00:30:47] Nathan Wrigley: Being honest with yourself, even if that means some uncomfortable realisations.

[00:30:51] Jennifer Schumacher: Oh God, yeah. Tell me. Admitting to yourself like, damn.

[00:30:56] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah. Yeah. I know what you mean. We often have a culture of, okay, just work harder. Just keep going. Just keep doing the same thing because I’m pretty sure the process over there is bulletproof. Just keep going, and maybe being a bit more open with yourself and trying to learn from the mistakes.

[00:31:12] Jennifer Schumacher: And I think when you see somebody, it’s not cheating the system, but it’s kind of like doing it faster and being more relaxed and even having time to do some extra stuff, and you’re like, I want that. Why am I not striving for that? Why the hell I’m just focusing on being more busy? I think you start doubting things.

[00:31:31] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, that’s interesting. There’s always somebody in my life who seems to have way more free time than I do. There has to be a reason for that. And probably that they’ve just figured it out and allowed themselves the time off.

And I always found that curious. I would find myself sitting at the desk doing the busy work, just because it felt like I needed to be shackled to the desk because that was where work took place. But really, I probably would’ve been way more productive if I’d gone for a walk for half an hour or just did something a little bit more for me, and then come back, regroup, start again. I never did learn that.

[00:32:05] Jennifer Schumacher: Isn’t that, like it sounds so weird, but isn’t that kind of the expectation of society that you should be sitting there on that desk. How come you’re just going for a walk? How come you’re just saying, you know what, I’ll just get my hair done. Let’s just relax a bit and then I get back with a clear mind to that issue. Why not? But no, society expects you to be available, to be at the desk. That’s how you look good.

[00:32:29] Nathan Wrigley: And it’s curious, we’re in such a fortunate position. I mean, obviously if you work in an agency and they provide you with a desk and you have to be there from nine to five, you’ve got that. But there’s a lot of people in our industry who don’t. You know, they’re working out of a spare room in the house. Maybe they’re doing it out the kitchen or what have you. And you can, you genuinely can, take time off and do other things and work a little bit later because you gave up some time during the day. You can be flexible. I think that’s one of the most remarkable things about the industry that we’re in. It’s utterly brilliant.

[00:32:57] Jennifer Schumacher: I read the other day on my phone an article, it was about a bank where they were saying like the four day work week. And they were saying like, now that AI is around the corner, it’s a no brainer. That’s going to happen. Because we will be able to get more efficient with how we do things. And I think, isn’t that beautiful to more focus on outcomes instead of like the nine to five.

Well, depends also how you manage the agency and everything. And I’ve seen many, they said they want to call their employees back. For example, in Mexico, like I live partially there. Many, many people got called back. But others in Germany I’ve seen, they still keep a hybrid model. Some days they just say, okay, we do a day here, a day there. But many developers said like, nope, staying at home.

[00:33:42] Nathan Wrigley: So people listening to this podcast, hopefully some of them will think, do you know what? It’d be really interesting to chat this through with Jennifer. You know, she seems like she’s got some interesting ideas around that. Do you have a little community of people that you vent your anger, vent your frustration with? Do you have a little clique of people where you share the ideas that you’ve been discussing today?

[00:34:01] Jennifer Schumacher: Besides my husband.

[00:34:02] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, how do you keep yourself sane? Yeah.

[00:34:04] Jennifer Schumacher: I do not yet have a big community, but I am working on this. Because I think it’s great just to share. I was in this mess, in this chaos until I realised, like I had this awakening moment for more like 10 years. So 10 years, I kind of would, was like lying to myself, I feel.

So I would love to share more. I want to do a LinkedIn live show. So I’m preparing that kind of stuff just to share, like we do, like a bit of talking. How did you do that? And just this story. I have a great network of people that I’ve met over the years with great stories.

And this is something that I want to share. I also wrote a book for freelancers, where I just share the exact same thing because damn, I wish I would’ve noticed certain things earlier, to be honest. Because 10 years is quite a lot, you know? And especially when you start out and you’re freelancing, oh God, I just charge way less. I just shouldn’t think about it.

But you know, I didn’t even know how much I was worth. I didn’t even know how to protect myself so that certain situations I could say ahead of time, you know what? That’s it. This entire project management mindset, or building the system, it didn’t occur to me for so long. I just thought, no, let me put this in a book and then, why not?

[00:35:21] Nathan Wrigley: So, where do we find the book? Or where’s the best place to find you, which then might link to the book?

[00:35:26] Jennifer Schumacher: On LinkedIn. And just, first of all, my network, I just want to get some feedback and then improve it. And then let’s see what else I can put in it. I also can share you something, maybe that’s something you found interesting. There’s this writer, Ryan Holiday. He has a great, great book that’s just called Growth Hacker Marketing. Read it. I love it. And I love the way how he writes this book because it’s so honest. It’s so transparent.

And I wrote it the same way he did. I took my entire inspiration, how I wrote it, based on his book. And I also have a couple of stories that I share at the end of the book from other people out of my network. How they did resolve, for example, the cash flow issue, right? How they approached the entire setup. Where how they even were able to sell their agency. You know, like build it and sell it.

That’s what I mean, ask others. Ask others how they did it. And then not getting stuck on these fancy YouTube videos for people that say they have the solution. But I think it’s so much worth it just to have conversations and learn and listen.

Maybe you do not have to take everything that people say, but maybe just can take a bit here or there and then build your own. That’s what I like.

[00:36:34] Nathan Wrigley: Perfect. Jennifer Schumacher, thank you so much for chatting to me today.

[00:36:38] Jennifer Schumacher: It was a pleasure to be here, to be honest. Thank you.

[00:00:19] Nathan Wrigley: Welcome to the Jukebox podcast from WP Tavern. My name is Nathan Wrigley.

Jukebox is a podcast which is dedicated to all things WordPress. The people, the events, the plugins, the blocks, the themes, and in this case a debate about whether or not there’s a place for accessibility in a canonical plugin.

If you’d like to subscribe to the podcast, you can do that by searching for WP Tavern in your podcast player of choice, or by going to wptavern.com/feed/podcast, and you can copy that URL into most podcast players.

If you have a topic that you’d like us to feature on the podcast, I’m keen to hear from you and hopefully get you, or your idea, featured on the show. Head to wptavern.com/contact/jukebox, and use the form there.

So on the podcast today, we have Joe Dolson and Jonathan Desrosiers. As you’ll hear in their podcast introductions, both Joe and Jonathan are veterans of WordPress, committing to Core in different ways. They’re deeply committed towards making the platform more useful for all users.

This episode is all about exploration rather than answers. Joe and Jonathan discuss the world of canonical plugins, a special category of plugins maintained by the Core team. They’re designed to be as reliable and secure as features found in WordPress Core itself.

The discussion unpacks exactly what defines a canonical plugin, how these plugins have evolved out of the traditional feature plugin model, and what it means for users and contributors alike.

At the center of this episode is accessibility, should accessibility enhancements remain a primary concern within WordPress Core, or is it time to start developing them as canonical plugins? Joe and Jonathan discussed the pros and the cons of both options, referencing technical challenges, project philosophies, and the ever-changing legislative environment, especially with tough new regulations in Europe.

They consider the discoverability of canonical plugins for non-technical users, potential overlaps and division of labour between plugins and Core, and the moral imperative of making websites accessible to all.

We also touch upon practical examples, from the WordPress video block to the Performance Lab plugin, and weigh up how cadence, stability, and focus can differ outside the Core.

The conversation also goes beyond theory, delving into the real life impact accessible technology has, from legal requirements, to personal stories and the broader mission of democratizing publishing.

Whether you’re a developer, a site owner, or someone interested in the ethical questions at the heart of open source software, this episode is for you.

If you’re interested in finding out more, you can find all of the links in the show notes by heading to wptavern.com/podcast, where you’ll find all the other episodes as well.

And so without further delay, I bring you Joe Dolson and Jonathan Desrosiers.

I am joined on the podcast by Joe Dolson and Jonathan Desrosiers. Hello both.

[00:03:35] Joe Dolson: Hello. I’m so glad to be here again.

[00:03:37] Jonathan Desrosiers: Likewise.

[00:03:38] Nathan Wrigley: We’ve had quite a preamble chat prior to recording this. This is going to be an exploration podcast. I don’t think we’re going to arrive at the destination. This is, I think about the journey.

But it’s going to be a conversation about something called canonical plugins. Dear listener, if you don’t know what that means, hold on. But also about accessibility. Prior to that, probably a good idea to get both of your biographies so that we know a little bit about you, and your credentials in the areas under discussion. So should we start with you, Jonathan, just a little bio. Tell us who you are.

[00:04:08] Jonathan Desrosiers: My name is Jonathan Desrosiers. I am a full-time sponsored Core contributor to the WordPress project from Bluehost. And I spend a lot of my time on the day to day, the work that keeps the project moving. That may be lesser seen, like our processes, our testing frameworks, helping the release squad with the resources, make sure they have the resources they need to do their jobs well, and ultimately produce good releases of WordPress every time.

[00:04:35] Nathan Wrigley: Nice. Thank you so much. And Joe.

[00:04:37] Joe Dolson: So I’m a part-time Core contributor to WordPress. I’m also a Core committer and I’m sponsored by GoDaddy and Kinsta. I mostly work on accessibility, so I help make all aspects of the project more accessible, including Core, Gutenberg, wordpress.org itself and all of those related bits and pieces.

[00:04:56] Nathan Wrigley: Okay, so we’ve established your credentials. The topic under discussion, I’m going to try and find the post in the Slack channel, which kind of promoted this whole thing, but it goes back a few months now. And the topic under discussion today is about whether or not it would be a good idea, I’m going to say, let’s go with that, an interesting idea, a good experiment, who knows, to put accessibility work into a plugin of a special type called a canonical plugin. So we’re used to hearing about plugins, perhaps not so much canonical plugins. So let’s make that the first port of call. What is a canonical plugin?

[00:05:34] Joe Dolson: I mean, I think we can kick this off with the idea that we don’t really know. But there is a long history in the project of essentially Core sponsored plugin projects that are used for specific features or provide various functionality. And then sometimes they get merged into Core and sometimes they don’t. It’s highly variable.

So there is a deep reality that this particular proposal, we don’t have any clear idea of what it’s actually proposing. But I think it’s good to talk about some of the historical canonical plugins that have already been used.

One great example I think is the WordPress Importer. It’s a plugin. It’s installed on demand into your dashboard when you decide to go to import something. And it’s an extremely standard tool. And it’s kind of the classic idea of something that isn’t needed in Core permanently, but is heavily used and really needs to be something that is maintained by the project.

[00:06:29] Jonathan Desrosiers: Yeah, I think it goes back, like Joe said, pretty far in that in the past we’ve had this concept called feature plugins. And so the initial idea behind those was to begin work on a feature that would span many releases and to get it into a refined state where it was ready for primetime to be included, you know, and shipped to the world.

So some good examples of this are the MP6 plugin which, re-skinned the dashboard in the modern way that we know today.

The REST API started as a feature plugin project. There’s many more to that effect. Simple XML Sitemaps, I believe started as a plugin as well.

I think of this in the way that canonical plugins are always feature plugins, but feature plugins are not always canonical. And so what I mean by that is a feature plugin can always become a canonical, but that may not be the case. It may end up in Core and we don’t need it long term. Or we could decide that it’s just not a good fit and it could become a canonical, and we maintain it long term as that add-on type plugin that you would use, that’s officially supported and maintained.

And so even before the suggestion to put accessibility into a canonical plugin, there were a few posts from Matt that suggested that we revisit this concept of feature plugin. And I think it’s just, canonical is just in some ways a new name for it in the sense that, you know, an SEO, canonical is you put the canonical tag and it points to the one true page on the internet that represents that content, right?

And so it’s similar to that, in that we want to have these canonical plugins that are the one true place you should be able to rely on for functionality that adheres to the project philosophies in the same way as if it were in Core itself.

[00:08:07] Nathan Wrigley: I suppose my supposition about canonical plugins are that they encapsulate important things that could be in Core. You know, if the universe was slightly different, they could easily be rolled into Core. But also importantly, they receive security updates and the same kind of inspection that Core might have. So it’s not like they’re just sort of left to fester.

On a regular basis, they would be inspected, updated in much the same way that Core would be. So it’s almost like Core, but kind of install it yourself. But the importance being that you can utterly rely on it, if you install it to be dependable, to be updated, to be secure. Have I misremembered, that or is that a part of the definition of a canonical plugin?

[00:08:53] Jonathan Desrosiers: No, that’s accurate. We give you that same commitment to backwards compatibility. The project philosophies, as I mentioned, the plugins that are maintained that are released as community plugins are covered by the Bounty Program and our Hacker One program as well. So there’s incentive for people to find security vulnerabilities and responsibly report them and work with the security team to fix these for the community.

That’s right in that you are getting kind of like that badge of honor, like we promise, guarantee type thing, that we’re going to do our best to give you the best plugin for this particular feature.

And the importer I think is a great example of that, right? They’re not all great, in good shape, and part of that is because some of them are importing from software that’s also, that’s really old and outdated, right? And the concepts that they have and the data structures.

But we have almost a dozen importer plugins that are, in a sense, canonical, and they are the go-to plugins to import your content into WordPress. I’m hopeful the Data Liberation Project will help make those more refined and make them easier to use and less prone to issues, yeah. But, yes, in theory we do give you that guarantee and that backing.

[00:09:58] Joe Dolson: I mean, one of the reasons I did bring up the importers is because I think they’re actually a really good example of something that isn’t getting the care that it really needs. I mean, they’re stable and they’re functional, but there are certain things that they really don’t do very well.

And one of them is, like if you’ve got a site with say, 10,000 users, you just can’t use the importer plugin. Because it generates these select dropdowns to assign your posts to a particular user, and the performance on those is ludicrous when you’ve got a page that has 100 dropdowns with 10,000 items in them.

This is the sort of thing that I think everybody would like to see worked on more in the world of canonical plugins. And that’s, I think one of the fears that maybe some people have about moving more stuff into canonical plugins, is this idea that they might not get the care that we theoretically promise.

Because I do think, the idea of canonical plugins, we absolutely do promise those security updates and making sure all of these things are solid, but I’m not sure we’ve always carried out on that as well as we could.

[00:11:03] Jonathan Desrosiers: You said something that resonated too in that. So one of the Core philosophies is the 80 20 rule. And so we want to make sure that the things we merge into Core work for the majority of our users that use our software. And so the same kind of holds true for canonical plugins in some ways. Not that we want to plug in that 80% of people will use, because then it would belong in Core, but 80% of the people that want that feature, the plugin should be relevant to them, right?

And so in the sense of imports being too large, the canonical plugin is a great tool and it’s the defacto recommended way, but it’s may not be the right tool for your instance. And so in that instance of a large import, WPCLI is probably more something that you would want to use in that case, because it’s not subject to timeouts and there’s just different technical boundaries that it works within.

So we want these canonical plugins to be the defacto, but they’re not the end all be all, and they don’t cover every situation. But we want to cover the majority of situations for as many WordPress users as we can.

[00:12:00] Nathan Wrigley: Okay. So I think we’ve established what a canonical plugin is, and I’m going to summarise it as follows, basically something that you can depend upon. I would summarise it just that.

[00:12:08] Jonathan Desrosiers: Something that tackles a specific, or group of features.

[00:12:10] Nathan Wrigley: Right. It’s got a specific feature. It could have gone into Core, but it was decided not to go into Core, but you can hopefully rely on it. Although, Joe made a very good point that, you know, reliance is an objective thing.

However, what we’re talking about today is accessibility. We’re in the year 2025. It’s June, 2025. We’re at WordCamp Europe. And it feels like the train over the last few years has really pushed accessibility to the front. I think any web designer, developer, in the year 2025 who doesn’t have accessibility right at the front of their mind is kind of missing the point.

The legislation in Europe is coming thick and fast, I imagine in other jurisdictions and other parts of the world, the same will be true. So I guess the question, and I’m going to ask this to Joe first, given his background of committing to Core in the accessibility arena. What do you make of this? The idea of pushing something to this canonical plugin that previously was the domain of Core.

Does it feel a bit like it’s, I don’t know, that the importance of it is being relegated in some way? Do you feel it’s like undermining? Because we should all have an accessible approach to WordPress development, website development, but in this way, well, it’s not important enough, if you like, to be in Core?

[00:13:30] Joe Dolson: So I think there’s a lot to unpack here. One of the first things I need to say is, first I’m going to, I have just a very slight quibble with your definition of a canonical plugin because there are kind of two different paths. There is the whole canonical plugin, which is intended to always stay outside of Core, but there’s also the canonical plugin, which is used for experimental progress.

And that’s something like the Performance Lab plugin, where it’s a whole bunch of different pieces, and they’re targeted for probably being merged into Core, and this is an experiment ground where we can figure out, is this really working? Is this the best way to do it? Is this suitable for Core? Maybe it should be different in the plugin than it is in Core. Like, for example, what was it that was just shipped? Speculative loading.

They used different rules in the plugin than they ultimately added to Core. It was just a less aggressive version of speculative loading. And I think that can be a very reasonable thing. And that can apply to accessibility too, as accessibility is a spectrum. We’re not talking necessarily about all accessibility is just, this is accessibility, it’s all required. Accessibility covers a gamut from, this is absolutely mandatory, basic level stuff, to this is pie in the sky. To even, basically there are some accessibility features that are literally contradictory to each other. In order to make something optimal for this population, you have to implement something that is actually not what this other population needs.

So there’s a lot of complexity there. The idea of putting accessibility into a plugin can lead to some very negative consequences. It is not necessarily inevitable. So there’s a lot of difficulty in just determining what is an accessibility plugin? What is it supposed to do? Is this something that’s supposed to change the front end? Is it supposed to change the back end? Is it implementing editor tools? Is it implementing new features? Is it fixing things that already exist? And I think all of those are complicated unanswered questions.

So kind of figuring out that path and, what is actually intended in this idea of an accessibility plugin? What are the problems it’s trying to solve? Is the first question mark. And we don’t really have that. That hasn’t been worked out in any way.

[00:15:44] Nathan Wrigley: So the complexity, and thank you for the clarification, the complexity there, the devil is in the detail. I guess Core in a sense is, if it’s going to ship in Core, it’s there. There’s a menu for this and a toggle for that, and a switch for this, and what have you. What you are saying is the landscape of accessibility is much more complicated than that. And so maybe, in a way, if it was pushed over to a canonical plugin, you could have a more a la carte approach to it. I don’t know if that’s where you were going.

[00:16:14] Joe Dolson: That’s conceivable. So, many years ago, Matt proposed the idea of an accessibility, it wasn’t a plugin at the time, but it was the concept of an alternate admin that would be a simplified admin. And, you know, I pushed back on that, and I still would if it was being marketed as an accessibility feature. There is a value to a simplified admin. It’s just that it can’t be considered accessibility focused unless it actually does achieve all goals. But simplification is in itself a goal. Making something easier to use, and having an option where somebody can do something in a simplified way, is extremely valuable.

[00:16:52] Jonathan Desrosiers: Yeah, just some thoughts to that. So I’m a Core committer and I make changes to the software that everybody uses and needs to be compliant, right? I’m not an accessibility expert by any means, but I’m versed in the concepts.

So one of the differences that could be in a canonical plugin for accessibility, Core, our coding standards for accessibility, we adhere to the web content accessibility guidelines, version 2.2 at Level AA, right?

But there’s different levels, there’s different versions of that. And so with different levels come different requirements, and different strictness to how you approach different interfaces. And so maybe a canonical plugin could allow you to adhere to different levels that perhaps your organisation needs to adhere to, that the 80% of users don’t necessarily need to.

Another thing that, I wanted to mention this because I always think of this. We, by default, think of accessibility as someone in a wheelchair or someone that’s blind, but you could break your hand, you could fall down the stairs, you could get eye surgery and have to wear a patch for a month. And so it’s not just permanent, it’s temporary disability as well. And I like to try to remind myself of that because you don’t need accessibility until you do, and then you’re glad it’s there when it’s there, right?

My grandfather was legally blind and he was a veteran. So he went to school and he learned how to use a computer. And he had a computer with like JAWS on it, and it would read it to him, and we’d send each other emails and stuff. I always like to think of him too, because if you know someone in your life that has accessibility needs, it also raises that importance to you as well. So, if I don’t do this in the right way, my grandfather won’t be able to use this website, or communicate with the world in the same way that I can.

And so finding those, I think that when you talk about accessibility, and this isn’t directly related to what you said, Joe, but I wanted to mention it. But if you can humanise it in some ways, in a way that’s in your life that you can relate to, it helps you find the reasoning in why it’s important, why these discussions are important, right? That we approach these problems in the right way, and that we meet the acceptable standard.

[00:18:57] Nathan Wrigley: In the end, this will be a binary decision. It either will be a canonical thing at some point in the future or it won’t, I guess maybe.

[00:19:05] Jonathan Desrosiers: Will it? I mean, we might merge some of it into Core or we might choose, it doesn’t fit in a plugin, right? And that’s kind of where that gray area is. And in some ways, canonical plugins take up a little more time because we are having these discussions. Like, we feel strongly this should go in, someone else may not. We have to work to get a consensus, and once we reach that consensus, we have to, I talk about this in my talk about how we make decisions, but we disagree and commit. And so you can state your disagreement, but then it’s important that we move forward together. Building that consensus and deciding on the right path, even if you disagree.

[00:19:39] Nathan Wrigley: Does the canonical option then, does that allow for more flexibility? So as an example, you could release, I don’t know, every two weeks, or every month or something like that. Whereas at the moment, we’re recording it in June, we don’t need to get into it, but we’ve got a different, a very different cadence for how often Core is being updated. Maybe that will change in the future, maybe not.

But with a canonical option, it would be possible to do any cadence you liked. And also, I suppose you could be a little bit more a la carte because you could have a variety of canonical plugins wrapped around the theme of accessibility. So, yeah, I guess what I’m asking there is really, does the cadence of a canonical plugin allow more flexibility?

[00:20:21] Jonathan Desrosiers: Absolutely. Whether we’re releasing once a month, or we’re releasing once a year, you can release a canonical plugin as often as you want, whereas Core has a much more predictable, well, not that the canonical plugin releases won’t be predictable, but it has a much more standardised schedule, I guess.

And so you could release once a week for your canonical plugin, and then if we have a Core release every three months, that’s 12 weeks, you have 12 releases of that canonical plugin that you could potentially refine issues. Whereas if you released it in the one Core release, you’d get all that feedback at once instead of dividing it up and making adjustments and going from there.

[00:21:00] Joe Dolson: So just to pose an example of something that I think actually is extremely suitable for an accessible plugin, and this is because, you know, I actually have written this. So let’s take for an example, the WordPress video block. It is extremely basic. It produces a video element and it gives you options to upload various tracks that are used in that video element. It is just the raw HTML 5. That’s what WordPress produces in the block editor.

Now, is it appropriate for WordPress Core to make a decision about how that video block is actually going to be rendered as it is with this raw HTML 5 element? It’s rendered differently by every browser. They have their own rules, their own way of doing it. That’s what it’s going to do. You can make it much more accessible, because there are a lot of things that those native blocks don’t support, the native video element doesn’t support.

In the past, WordPress did use MediaElement.js to render videos. And I actually think getting rid of that, and just using the raw video element was a good thing. But it’s not the most accessible way of viewing video. So is it something that we should do in Core? Should we dictate a player interface, or should we leave that raw in Core? Core just produces a video element, and then a plugin can enhance that to make it more accessible.

I’m also the lead developer for an accessible media player called Able Player. That’s a completely separate JavaScript project that has nothing to do with WordPress, but I have got a WordPress plugin for it, which basically just says, hey, here’s a video block, I’m going to re-render it using Able Player.

[00:22:37] Jonathan Desrosiers: I think if you want another good example of what a canonical plugin can be in the framework it can operate within, look at the Performance Lab plugin. The Performance Team has this plugin, and initially it had all these different features in it, and then we were trying to merge in support for the WebP image format in Core, and we realised it needed a little bit more time. And Matt suggested that we break them out into more finite plugins.

So the Performance Lab feature plugin has, or canonical plugin, has a framework and then there are sub plugins that you can install for modern image formats. Pre-loading the images, there’s an accessibility feature where it shows you the color, the dominant color of the image, and it’s there until the image loads. And so that way it’s visually represented. And so that’s another good example of that.

And one example that I’m wondering may be a good use of canonical plugins is the new AI Team. And so we’re at a point where we need to do some research and figure out what, in the context of WordPress, is needed for AI to flourish, and WordPress to be AI friendly. And I think that in some way, that will end up being a base foundation, some classes and some ways to interact with your content and your site, that can communicate with different models.

So perhaps some canonical plugins could be one for each of the popular models. And so you have this data transport layer that passes your site’s information to these plugins, and then it connects with ChatGPT, or whichever your preferred model is. And so within that you could have settings. The reason why I brought up the Performance Plugin is there’s settings within it. So for the modern image format, you could say, I only want WebP, or I only want JPEG XL or AVIF. You can decide which ones you want. But if that were to get into Core, that’s not the right thing to say like, I do or I don’t want this.

Another philosophy is decisions not options. We don’t want to overwhelm users with this. And a good example of this is, should this site be indexed by search engines? And if you disable that, it also disables your sitemap. And so making those intuitive decisions on behalf of the user and what they’ve done, the actions they’ve taken, we don’t want to overload them with options.

And so in canonical plugins, you can be more, you don’t have to follow that as strictly, because the point is that it’s a plugin that’s configurable, that we’re testing different things in different ways, and finding out what works for which groups of people, and in what ways, and gathering feedback around that.

Back to the point about, one other thing I wanted to mention too, is that one complaint I’ve always had with canonical plugins is that it’s very difficult to know about the experiences of the people using them. So for example, we had a plugin for a while that they want to, thankfully they want to rekindle it, is the Design Experiments plugin.

And you would install that, and there were, you know, at any given time, a couple of 2, 3, 4 different design experiments in the plugin. But we never knew who had which experiments active, which ones they disabled. Did they have bad experiences? And that’s why they turned it off. Did they like it? Did they prefer it?

We almost need to have some type of either AB testing within the plugins themselves, or a way to gather that feedback from the people that are using these canonical plugins. This is especially true when it’s a feature plugin that we may want to emerge into Core.

And so I did bring up to Matt in one of our recent meetings with the Core committers, and he was open to exploring the idea of better ways in canonical plugins to gather that feedback, because they’re now of a renewed importance in our community and how we foresee maintaining things.

We’re quite large, and we need to start saying no to more things in some ways. And so this is a great way to push it to a canonical plugin. Like, we don’t think that’s a right fit in Core, it’s too much, we can’t handle it. But create a community maintain plugin and we’re happy to stand behind it with you.

[00:26:32] Nathan Wrigley: I’m going to try and get this out. I’m not sure I’m going to encapsulate it right. I’m going to offer this one to Joe first. And that is the legislation in the landscape of 2025. And we know that in Europe in particular, a lot of this stuff is mandated. Obviously there’s degrees to that, but there’s a lot of mandatory stuff coming down very, very soon.

Given that, putting things into a canonical plugin where you can pick and choose, I have not installed that, I have installed that, what are your feelings about that? Is there some, I’m going to use the word core, set of features around accessibility that really where we’re at now, there’s just no choice, it just has to be in Core?

Because the concern that I have perhaps is, how will you discover this canonical plugin? How will it surface itself? The three of us will find it, because this is what we do. But the regular user who’s just got a brick and mortar store, they want to put a WooCommerce site out there, just something quick and easy, where are they going to even find out about these canonical plugins?

[00:27:32] Joe Dolson: And I do think this is a big part of what comes down to that question of, what does the accessibility plugin, what does it do? Because that is where things can really go kind of horribly wrong.

When we’re talking about the accessibility of existing WordPress interfaces, how you actually interact with the admin, I don’t think there’s anything there that should ever be in a plugin because the Core code has to be accessible.

You know, Jonathan mentioned that we’ve got this commitment to WCAG 2.2 at Level AA. I would say that we haven’t quite achieved that. It’s a goal, but I mean, the reality is there’s still a lot of legacy interfaces that our, I find new things every day. It’s just the reality. But those need to be fixed in Core. They should not be part of a plugin.

So, a plugin should be something that enhances something in a meaningful way that perhaps doesn’t apply to all situations. That’s one of the reasons I brought up the video element, because one of the interesting exceptions in WCAG is that you are not responsible for the accessibility of browser defaults. The browser is responsible for that.

And so if you are using a video block, and it’s just the video element, that is actually something that should pass. It’s not necessarily accessible, that’s up to the browser, but it’s not the responsibility of your site. And that’s a really fuzzy area from the law because, yes, you should still fix it.

[00:29:00] Nathan Wrigley: Imagine a scenario where we have a canonical plugin for accessibility. So we have WordPress Core, and then a canonical plugin for accessibility. WordPress Core is evolving all the time. No doubt missteps will be made. People like you, Joe, will be going in and saying, okay, this needs to be adapted, this needs to be amended.

And then on top of that, we’ve also got this complete other path of developing the canonical plugin side of things. There’s two strains of work happening now. So that’s just interesting. I don’t know whether that’s good or bad.

[00:29:30] Joe Dolson: So one thing I will say is, you know, the bulk of the new development in WordPress is in Gutenberg. There’s no need for a canonical plugin to handle accessibility things in Gutenberg because honestly, that should just go into the plugin Gutenberg. If there’s something in Core that needs to be fixed, you should be able to install Gutenberg and be able to move forward. I think that would be reasonable. I don’t think that’s a practical path to have a separate accessibility canonical plugin that fixes issues in Gutenberg problems for Core. I mean, I can’t see that as making any sense.

[00:30:04] Jonathan Desrosiers: In some ways we have to just weigh the benefits with the effectiveness and the time and the resources available. Some other ways that you can find canonical plugins, when you click add plugin on your site, there’s different tabs at the top, like featured, popular. One of them is featured, and so that is one that when we have canonical plugins, we want people to adopt or use, we add plugins to that tab.

So the performance plugin is there, Gutenberg is there because we want people to be testing those up and coming changes. To the point of the, we’re not being fully compliant with that standard, it’s, we have to remember that this constant churn going on with a code, right? There’s new code coming in, there’s old code being removed. And so in a way the goal line is still the same, but we’re getting peaks and valleys that we have to, they suddenly appear and we have to tackle them as we go.

I think for discoverability, it depends on the ecosystem in some ways. For example, as an American, you know, I’m not always, sometimes I hear of new legislations from EU and I say, oh, what are they up to now, right? It’s more things I have to do to follow the rules. But I think about maybe an American business owner, or American site owner, and sometimes it’s not clear. What happens if I’m in Europe and then I visit my site when I’m traveling, right? Does that open me up for legal action. If someone happens, if I make a very specific or rare type of trinket, and people in the EU find it, does that open me up to legal problems?

And so these are things that the normal site owner, I just want a website, I just write on it, right? They don’t think about this stuff. And so, in addition to being compliant with these guidelines that we strive to achieve, we need to think about those decisions, not options type things.

Another philosophy is to be simple, strive for simplicity. Most people don’t know what an XML sitemap specification is, or how to implement it, or what should go in it. And so we just make the decision to handle that stuff on their behalf. And if they need to, they can install a plugin to customise it, right?

So the same is kind of true in this sense. And if the world is susceptible to, or responsible for adhering to certain things, and we can reasonably help them without them having to find certain things to install or configure, then maybe it’s the right thing to put that thing into Core, right?

Perhaps it falls on the shoulders of hosts, where if the customer has an EU address, they install the accessibility canonical plugin, depending on what’s in it and what’s not. It’s likely not. We should be deliberate about what goes in Core and what goes into the accessibility plugin and for what reasons. But we also should be conscious that, as a community, we have to also help these non-technical users by making decisions for them when we know that it’s a problem.

Like, our legal team says, yep, any site that potentially gets EU traffic, they have to have this, or they have to block EU or whatever it is. We can outline these situations and make the best decisions for our customers and our users, given those criteria that we are aware of.

[00:33:07] Joe Dolson: It’s interesting you say that because one of the things you particularly dove into there is the idea of an accessibility plugin being something for the front end. And that is something that is actually fundamentally challenging. Because when it comes right down to it, we don’t know what’s on the front end. And accessibility is an incredibly difficult problem to solve when you’re kind of just trying to do automation on something that you don’t know.

You know, there’s a lot of accessibility plugins out there that are already doing that sort of thing. Overlay plugins. They are famously iffy, because they really don’t solve most of the problems. And some of them actually introduce more. And that is the thing that I most want to avoid, is that we create our canonical plugin and it’s just screwing up people’s websites.

[00:33:59] Jonathan Desrosiers: We’ve all installed a plugin that has way too many options, way too many features, and it doesn’t do any of them well, right? That’s not what a canonical plugin should be. In instances where there are many features, like the Performance Lab, there’s a framework perhaps, and then there’s sub plugins that do it, right? We don’t have an importer plugin that has every importer in the same plugin. They’re in specific plugins so that it can be more targeted, more focused on that specific outlined goal or focus area.

And so that, yeah, that speaks to me, because we definitely don’t want to mimic some of the plugins that are out there where they try to adhere to cookie laws, and then they also try to adhere to popups and, you know, Consent API and all that type of stuff. And so we want to make sure that we’re dividing those problems up into meaningful chunks, but chunks that we can manage reasonably and not be a runaway train in some ways.

[00:34:47] Nathan Wrigley: I was thinking about this last night and I was thinking, why does this conversation matter to me so much? And it came down to the fact that if we were having this conversation about a canonical plugin for, let’s say, performance or SEO, it would be intriguing, but there’s no moral component to it. You’re just serving a bunch of people who would like a more performant website. Well, that’s great. That will increase your SEO. No doubt, more traffic will come to your website.

But there is a moral component here, and there are people whose lives will be immeasurably better if WordPress is, and I’m doing air quotes, accessible. And so that just makes this whole thing so much more important and impactful. So there’s no question there, it’s just an observation.

There’s a different wrinkle here. There’s just some other thing. You know, you can imagine the panoply of different people trying to use websites. The frustration, the endless frustration that’s being caused by things because they’re not configured in a way that they can use them. And it would be a shame to miss this opportunity. And I don’t know what the right answer is here. I just know that there’s this moral component that makes this much more of a hot button topic than anything else. So that’s my piece, but if you want to respond to that.

[00:36:03] Jonathan Desrosiers: I just left the keynote this morning by Noel Tock, and he spoke a lot about the impact. I try to illustrate this often, and he did a much better job than I’ve done before. He’s involved with a lot of organisations in the war affected Ukraine. And so he covered a half dozen organisations that are saving lives, rescuing animals, providing humanitarian relief, and they run on WordPress. And so accessibility lends to that in some ways, because you don’t know where a group is that has a need, and the free software could help them with that need, and in what ways and what impact that could have on them.

Sometimes I think about how certain things overlap. And so I picture two circles, one for accessibility, and if you were to make a diagram of how it overlaps with democratising publishing. In many ways, it almost completely overlaps that circle. There’s something democratising with being accessible. I mean, it’s in the name, it’s accessible to as many people as possible. And so I think that, whether you know it or not, that probably in some ways is eliciting that feeling, right, of we all believe in this project where we all want to do good in the world. We want our software, and our community, to have an impact. And in many ways, accessibility leads to that mission that we all have.

[00:37:26] Joe Dolson: And I do want to say that, as it stands right now, when we’re talking about the admin of WordPress, it’s already one of the most accessible content management systems out there. We have done very good work there.

The front end is kind of a completely different story, and that ultimately is the fact that Core doesn’t control very much of front end, which is both one of the incredible powers of WordPress. It’s got this amazing degree of flexibility, and you can do almost anything with it. And it’s also one of the curses, because if we want to globally make the front end of everybody’s website better, there is very little we can do.

That’s where I kind of feel like our accessibility efforts most are needed right now is just kind of getting plugin developers, getting theme developers, to be better. Make better choices and provide better options in their tools.

[00:38:18] Jonathan Desrosiers: It is true that we don’t control the front end, but one of the features I love in Gutenberg is when you’re selecting the text colour and the background colour of a block. If you select light blue and dark blue, it says, hey, this is not accessible, it doesn’t meet the guidelines. People are going to have a hard time reading this.

I often think about ways that maybe, one I had suggested before which hasn’t been implemented yet, some issues take many years to flesh out and be adopted, if at all. But one of them is perhaps we do another notice like that when someone is entering an alternate text for their image. You know, maybe they just put jpeg 123, right? That’s not what alt text is meant for. It’s meant to describe what’s in the picture in case someone can’t see it, or it’s not visible.

And so it should be, Nathan Wrigley holding his microphone, sitting at a table, talking to Jonathan and Joe, who also have a microphone. Stuff like that. He’s got a red shirt. Things that illustrate what’s in the image. And so what are opportunities that we can take to guide our users to produce better content on the front ends?

And I think there’s a particularly large opportunity for that in block themes, because the nature of block themes is very structured. It starts with a theme.json file, and it’s gobbledegook for a lot of people. They don’t understand what the JSON is, how to read it. But it’s structured data that’s extrapolated into the editor to apply the default margin for your blocks. To apply the default labels, the colours, all those different things that are configurable in a block theme.

And so like, what’s missing from that that we can add that will lend to better visual representations of your content? There’s the HTML API behind the scenes that manipulates HTML strings in the context of WordPress. So how can we make sure that we’re generating accessible markup, those building blocks?

A lot of times we run into issues where there’s no good solution for a specific accessibility problem because the foundational elements, were not taking that into consideration when it was built. And so oftentimes it’s hard to get backing for those changes, because it’s such a big undertaking because it wasn’t a part of the the initial discussion and consideration.

And so how can we replace these over time, but also as we build new things, take those things into consideration so that the things that get expanded into the user experience and exposed in the site editor, result in better front end experiences for everyone, that are more accessible?

[00:40:50] Joe Dolson: Yeah, I think that’s a really great thing to call out is those places in the authoring process where we provide accessibility feedback. There’s a whole set of guidelines that are specific to that. That’s the Authoring Tool Accessibility Guidelines. And I love everything we do to try and implement those.

I will say that the colour contrast one, it was implemented very, very early on. There are a number of things that are in Core now that it actually just isn’t able to handle. Some layering things that it’s just like, oh, I don’t know what’s going on here. So that needs work. But that’s just kind of the constant process. At least it does exist and it can cover a lot of the most common use cases.

But, yeah, that alt text one, that’s also a really valuable thing to be able to have some checks on. It’s a hard thing, and I think one precursor change we actually need to be able to make that possible is we need to make some revisions to how alt text is stored in the database.

Because the reality is, right now WordPress stores alt text as a meta field that’s tied to the attachment, tied to the image. But alt text actually is context sensitive. And so really there shouldn’t be one canonical alt text for an image. There could be a canonical description of that image, but the alt text itself should always be context sensitive.

On the other hand, if we just removed that field and didn’t save it, which is something that the block editor has kind of taken that path, when you change it in the block editor, it does not save to the media library, that’s also flawed, because sometimes you do actually want to use that, or at least want to use it as the basis for the next version of that alt text you write. So what I’d like to see is that we could actually save multiple alt text fields and have that managed.

[00:42:33] Jonathan Desrosiers: There’s all these great ideas, and great things, but we also need to strive for simplicity. We don’t want them overwhelmed with a hundred different accessibility notices of how they could improve to the point where they say, I’m going to somewhere else, this website’s too confusing.

This is potentially also another opportunity for AI. Perhaps AI could be used to suggest what accessible alt text should be in the context of the article you’re writing, or the page you’re authoring. You know, maybe AI can be trained in a way to audit your page for accessibility and make suggestions.

AI is really exciting. I often sit back and watch and just observe because there’s so many models and you never know which ones to use. And unless you’re really deeply involved, it’s hard to know the best model for certain tasks.

But I definitely like to think about, it’s helped me be more organised for sure. I have a hard time sometimes when I am creating a talk, getting my thoughts into an organised deck. And so by putting all my thoughts into AI, I’m able to better organise it and then I can drop my notes and my thoughts in the structured outline that it kind of organises for me, right?

But, in what ways can that be applied in the editing process within WordPress under the lens of accessibility? And we could have SEO, we could have, Yoast has a lot of SEO tools that makes SEO recommendations. And we could have our canonical plugin perhaps has an AI interface and we go from there.

So, yeah, there’s many different ways we can tackle these accessibility issues. It’s exciting to have these types of discussions and consider what could be.

[00:44:05] Nathan Wrigley: Sadly, I think time is going to get the better of us. But I would like to say thank you, both of you, for your intelligent commentary on this. I don’t know which way it’ll go.

[00:44:15] Jonathan Desrosiers: And there’s no right way necessarily.

[00:44:16] Nathan Wrigley: That’s right. And it seems like there’s benefits in both possibilities. I’m not going to put you on the spot and ask you which your preferred one is. I have suspicions. Let’s keep this debate going I suppose. Let’s see which way it falls out. And, yeah, Joe and Jonathan, thank you so much for chatting to me today.

[00:44:33] Jonathan Desrosiers: Of course. Perhaps we could do like a six month check-in on the state of canonical plugins.

[00:44:38] Joe Dolson: Yeah, it’ll be interesting to see what happens next. Thanks so much.

[00:44:40] Nathan Wrigley: I honestly think that we could have gone in a hundred different directions here. I think there’s bits of this podcast, which we could have opened up and probably spoken for many, many more hours. But, yeah, thank you both.

[00:00:19] Nathan Wrigley: Welcome to the Jukebox Podcast from WP Tavern. My name is Nathan Wrigley.

Jukebox is a podcast which is dedicated to all things WordPress. The people, the events, the plugins, the blocks, the themes, and in this case, how Human Made have built WordPress at the scale of a global bank.

If you’d like to subscribe to the podcast, you can do that by searching for WP Tavern in your podcast player of choice, or by going to wptavern.com/feed/podcast, and you can copy that URL into most podcast players.

If you have a topic that you’d like us to feature on the podcast, I’m keen to hear from you and hopefully get you, or your idea, featured on the show. Head to wptavern.com/contact/jukebox, and use the form there.

So on the podcast today, we have Tom Willmot and Jon Ang.

Tom is the co-founder of Human Made, an enterprise WordPress agency that’s been pushing the boundaries of what WordPress can do since its inception. Jon is also with Human Made, and together they bring a huge amount of experience working with major clients on large scale projects.

At this year’s WordCamp Europe in Basel, they presented a case study, their long-term, continually evolving work, with the global banking giant Standard Chartered. Most listeners might not be working at the scale of 85,000 employees, 70 countries, and hundreds of millions of page views a month, but Tom and Jon are here to share insights from the top end of WordPress implementation.

They explain how Human Made helped Standard Chartered shift from a proprietary CMS lock-in, to a flexible, open source Gutenberg powered WordPress solution that serves as the main web platform for the bank across all its markets.

We talk about the unique compliance and security challenges of working in the banking sector. What it takes to persuade giant enterprises that WordPress is not a toy, and how to support hundreds of CMS users with custom workflows and integrations.

Tom and Jon discussed the specifics of scaling WordPress for the enterprise, from accessibility and multilingual setups, to custom block development, and real time collaborative editing. We also hear how Human Made works with clients to contribute innovations and security improvements back to the WordPress community, ensuring that lessons learned at the enterprise level benefit everyone.

If you’re curious about how WordPress powers mission critical web infrastructure for some of the world’s biggest organizations, or how you might pitch WordPress for enterprise use, this episode is for you.

If you’re interested in finding out more, you can find all of the links in the show notes by heading to wptavern.com/podcast, where you’ll find all the other episodes as well.

And so without further delay, I bring you Tom Willmot and Jon Ang.

I am joined on the podcast today by two fabulous guests. I have Tom Willmot and Jon Ang. Hello both.

[00:03:32] Tom Willmot: It’s great to be here.

[00:03:33] Jon Ang: Hello.

[00:03:34] Nathan Wrigley: This is my first interview at WordCamp Europe in, I want to say Basel, but I still don’t know how to pronounce it. Let’s go with that.

[00:03:41] Tom Willmot: I mean, I think it’s Basel.

[00:03:42] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, okay, we’ll go with that. And we’re here today talking to Tom and Jon all about an interesting project, which I want to say they’ve just completed, but I’m not sure that’s the right word.

They’re doing a presentation at WordCamp Europe and it’s all about a project for a bank, and a very large bank I might add. Standard Chartered, you may have heard of it, you may not. But that’s the presentation. I’m guessing you haven’t done it because we’re still in Contrib day, but are you all prepared and ready?

[00:04:06] Tom Willmot: I think we’re pretty prepared. When did you submit the slides, Jon?

[00:04:09] Jon Ang: Just submitted it 10 minutes ago, so I think we’re good. But it’s been revised multiple times, yeah. I’m fairly certain that it’s going to be quite interesting.

[00:04:16] Tom Willmot: I mean, one of the challenges actually of doing a presentation about a bank is you have to double check that you’re allowed to say everything that we’re going to say.

[00:04:23] Nathan Wrigley: So we’re going to be editing this heavily.

[00:04:25] Tom Willmot: Yeah, potentially.

[00:04:26] Nathan Wrigley: So Standard Chartered is a very large bank. WordPress is obviously a CMS, which allows us to create websites for these banks. But let’s talk about the whole story. These are not new clients of yours, or they are new clients of yours. How long have you been working with them?

[00:04:39] Tom Willmot: No, I mean, this has been a relationship that we’ve had since 2016. So, yeah, this is a long term client. These projects are not really like the project starts and the project finishes. We got involved working with them, yeah, back then there was an early prototype that turns into more stuff, that turns into more stuff. And we’ve been building and iterating and evolving the platform for nearly 10 years.

[00:04:59] Nathan Wrigley: Prior to us hitting record, I will have recorded a preamble saying who both of you are. But just in case you’ve dipped into the podcast right now, you’re both with Human Made. My understanding, Tom, is that this was something that you are the founder of.

[00:05:12] Tom Willmot: Yeah, I’m the co-founder. Me and my, actually my brother Joe, which a lot of people don’t know, co-founded the company together, and then Noel joined a year, in so that we are the three founders.

[00:05:21] Nathan Wrigley: And I guess it’s fair to categorise you as, maybe this is something that you don’t like the sound of, I don’t know, an enterprise WordPress agency.

[00:05:27] Tom Willmot: Yeah, for sure. We’ve been focused on like WordPress at the high end, since the beginning. We were always interested in like, what’s the biggest stuff that WordPress is possibly being used for and how can we get involved in that?

[00:05:38] Nathan Wrigley: And I guess you must have some kudos, credentials, now which enable you to open doors like the Standard Chartered door, in a way that nathanwrigley.com, that’s probably not going to happen.

[00:05:48] Tom Willmot: I mean, we’ve got a history now of doing that kind of work and so that helps.

[00:05:52] Nathan Wrigley: So tell us about this client then. Just paint the backstory. Who are they? What do they do? I guess what we’re trying to do is build a picture of just how massive a project this is. Because working for a bank, I imagine there’s lots of t’s to cross and i’s to dot.

[00:06:06] Jon Ang: Yeah, they’re a global bank inside about 70 countries, hovering around to 150 markets. I think about 85,000 employees worldwide. So out of those, there’s maybe, and it’s a bit of a intro into what we see in our slides, but 500 employees that’s using the backend on a day-to-day to publish.

So think of them working with the monetary authorities of each country that is governing how a website should function for a bank that has all of this running with the staff, figuring that out, and us providing the platform for them to stay compliant, and continue to be a agile in a way of what they’re publishing every day.

I think that’s a bit of what Standard Chartered is like. They are, I think, a bank that started in 1800’s, and has a pretty massive presence in Asia Pacific, particularly I think Singapore and Hong Kong. Started from the UK a long time ago.

[00:06:59] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, it’s got a lot of heritage, hasn’t it? There are banks which are popping up all over the place at the moment, but there are still a few holding on that have been there for literally centuries. And this is a name which is very familiar to me. And whenever I’ve traveled throughout the world, there’s always some presence there. They’re big, essentially. This is not a child’s play website. You can’t throw this together in a matter of weeks. This is a big deal.

[00:07:19] Tom Willmot: And I mean, you know, they’re a big company and it’s a big name, there’s a lot of employees. I think also what’s interesting is that their use of WordPress is also big. So they’re not just using WordPress for a campaign mini site or their corporate comms department. This is like the primary web platform for Standard Chartered across all those countries, including sc.com, Wealth Banking. I think something like 95 plus percent of all web traffic goes through WordPress.

[00:07:44] Nathan Wrigley: Just to paint a picture of that, so it’s a website though, we’re not dealing with the sort of transaction data. You know, if you’re a customer of Standard Chartered, WordPress is not handling the money going from one account to another. This is the sort of front end, public facing website, I’m guessing.

[00:07:57] Tom Willmot: Yeah, we’ve not got like a dollars custom post type.

[00:08:00] Nathan Wrigley: So paint a picture of just how big they are. So they’ve been going for a couple of centuries. You mentioned that, I think 2015, you built this relationship. You’ve been working with them in an agile way since then.

Do you have any metrics in terms of, I don’t know, the amount of traffic that the website is currently having? The number of locales? I think you touched on that a little while ago. Number of users? And then I’ve got this fourth one that I’ll come to in a minute. So let’s hit traffic first. Do you have any idea of the amount of petabytes or terabytes of data that are flying around just for this website?

[00:08:28] Jon Ang: I don’t have the petabytes, we’re talking about like hundreds of millions of page views per month. Like, that’s the kind of traffic that they’re getting. Your previous question around, so like it’s not quite hitting the dollars amounts, like, how much do I have in my savings account? But there is a lot of work passing, let’s say account signup information from the front end to the back end stuff that we do on that front as well. So it does work on some fairly critical pieces too on the banking website, it’s not just the marketing setup.

[00:08:56] Tom Willmot: Yeah, like for example, when you use the internet banking mobile apps, all of the customer messaging there comes from the WordPress CMS.

[00:09:04] Nathan Wrigley: Wow, okay. So lots and lots of data flying around. Some fairly critical components where you have to be absolutely a hundred percent sure that you’ve got the bulletproof security. In terms of the number of users, what was that? Did you say 500?

[00:09:17] Tom Willmot: Around 500 in the CMS, at any one time. I mean, that’s kind of interesting. There’s like a central global team that manage like brand governance and all of that. And then each country has their own country level marketing team across like 150 markets or something.

[00:09:32] Nathan Wrigley: And when you say the 150 markets, does that translate into 150 different languages as well? I’m guessing languages, there’s a fairly large component there.

[00:09:40] Jon Ang: I think there’s about 30 separate languages in there. So around that, 150 markets is split into what we call retail banking and non retail. So retail banking are regular things that you and I would do. We go into the bank, we get a credit card set up, we withdraw cash. And then non retail will be like investors, people who are interested in big money. So those are the like individual markets they work in. And across that, 150 markets, 70 countries, 500 plus users, doing this on a day-to-day basis.

[00:10:09] Nathan Wrigley: These are all genuinely eye watering numbers actually. They just come out of your mouth like they’re nothing. But if you actually pause for a moment and consider it, they’re breathtaking. You really are pushing what is possible.

I mean, I’m sure there’s websites out there which exceed that, but getting onto compliance, which is going to be my next question. There can’t be an industry where compliance is more important than banking, I mean, maybe there is, but it feels like banking and compliance. And you’ve got how many countries? 70 odd countries, each of those with a different set of criteria for compliance. Just open that box a little bit. I mean, that must have been fun.

[00:10:46] Jon Ang: So think of it as every country has some sort of monetary authority that governs the banks. So you’ve got that monetary authority that sets this bunch of rules that you’ve got to follow. Then they’ve got pretty much an association of banks in a specific country that listens to that. And below that you’ve got the banks that have to obey all these rules. And then we have to talk to all three organisations in every single country that’s out there that wants to use our CMS. So that’s basically it.

And obviously this did not start in 2016, or at once. But across time, all of these individual countries that need to use the CMS has gone through the process, and talked to us, and we’ve gone through making it work for them. And pretty much every single country has their own set of rules. But the idea of good compliance, good governance, good security, is rooted in good practices. So it’s not that we’re trying these things every single time fresh, you know?

[00:11:43] Nathan Wrigley: Given that you are working with one company, so Standard Chartered is obviously spread out amongst all these different countries, does that make that piece a little bit easier? So Standard Chartered to take care of the compliance. Do they give you the documentation, you sign it off? Because if you were to work with 70 different companies in 70 different countries, that’s your entire project grinding to a halt, I imagine.

So do they come to you with their lawyers and say, if you can satisfy this stack of requirements, we are good to go?

[00:12:08] Jon Ang: It’s a bit of that but it’s also, it’s 85,000 employees. And these regulations, they change on a regular basis. And it’s not like, you pass it on day one, you’re going to pass it on day a hundred again. They might come back and say, oh, there’s something new that we have to talk to you about. And they might not know actually how to pass this, because it’s their first time dealing with this as well.

So there’s a lot of discussions and collaboration, I guess, between Human Made and Standard Chartered. There is a central team that we work with, but they are fairly open on figuring this out with us. We work together to get through these regulations.

[00:12:40] Tom Willmot: Something else I think that’s worth mentioning is there’s also industry compliance regulation. And so I think we’re probably the only WordPress agency with the OSPAR compliance, which is the kind of banking industry, digital compliance process which took I think maybe a year for us to go through that process. We were audited by Deloitte, and then they sign you off. And so that helps a lot because it’s like, once you’ve got that sign off, then the bank can kind of trust that most of what you’re doing meets their compliance.

[00:13:04] Nathan Wrigley: So did you do that in order to prize the door open to the financial sector, or did you do that so that Standard Chartered could come on?

[00:13:12] Tom Willmot: Yeah, actually did that fairly late into working with Standard Chartered. They were able to, it goes back to there’s like 85,000 employees, there’s a lot of internal politics and stuff too, as one can imagine. And so we were able to avoid needing to meet that highest level of compliance for the first few years.

[00:13:29] Nathan Wrigley: And I’m guessing that was not a toy. I imagine that that was a fairly serious piece of paperwork.

[00:13:34] Tom Willmot: For sure. I think it cost us like a hundred grand.

[00:13:36] Nathan Wrigley: We’re at WordCamp EU, and if we were to walk out those doors, we’re surrounded by all manner of different people using WordPress. Some of them may be freelancers, they’ve got a couple of websites. And then at the other end of the spectrum, there’s you guys. How easy is it to convince a company like Standard Chartered that WordPress is not a toy?

[00:13:54] Tom Willmot: I mean, it’s an interesting question because obviously we started talking to Standard Chartered in 2016, so that’s a long time ago. In the context of this question, back then the concerns were much more around scalability and security and performance. Actually, that one of the big hurdles that we faced to begin with is there really just weren’t examples of companies of that size using WordPress as their primary CMS in the way that Standard Chartered wanted to use it.

And so when they would come to the ecosystem and say, show us the biggest people using WordPress, and we would say, oh, PlayStation use it for their blog, or Skype use it for their blog. And so they had some big names, but they used it for small stuff. And so that was kind of a problem because Standard Chartered were like, well, we don’t want to move our blog to it. We are talking about making it the primary CMS of the bank that we’re going to mandate every employee use for the next 10 years. How can we trust that WordPress is up to the task?

[00:14:42] Nathan Wrigley: So did you have to saddle that burden as a company then? So it wasn’t leaning into, okay, that agency over there built that thing and we can sort of say, okay, that’s WordPress, and there’s another agency over there that built that. So did you have to do the job of convincing?

[00:14:56] Tom Willmot: Yeah, yeah, we just went for it. We were just like, of course WordPress can do this. I mean, the big thing that helped was that they had an internal senior stakeholder that really wanted WordPress. And so that meant we could work with him to figure out, you know, how do we satisfy the concerns of the bank? How do we sell this in the way it needs to be sold in? That was really much more common, especially back then. WordPress wasn’t in the conversations unless somebody internally wanted it, and then they would do the work.

[00:15:22] Nathan Wrigley: That’s an interesting bit of serendipity. There’s this one character in the company who potentially was the route in.

[00:15:29] Tom Willmot: Yeah, and that’s, almost every big project we did back then, there was some internal champion that had fought the fight to get it taken seriously. And then we could come with the data and the expertise to back up what they were saying.

These days, that’s definitely changed. Now WordPress just is in the conversation. Which CMS should we move to? WordPress is going to be the one that’s considered. And so that’s much easier.

[00:15:48] Nathan Wrigley: Is it? Do you not have to do any persuasion anymore?

[00:15:50] Tom Willmot: Not as much. I mean, you’d be surprised. These days WordPress is seen as more secure in the enterprise level. Like, open source generally is seen as more secure than proprietary often. And so that can actually be an advantage.

[00:16:00] Nathan Wrigley: That’s fascinating because my next question was exactly that. How do these big companies view an open source platform? Because it’s not like, I use the analogy sometimes, it’s not like they have the bat phone. There’s no person that they can immediately contact and say, we have something that’s broken, we need Core to be fixed. There is no bat phone.

And I would’ve thought, do you remember when, I think it was Log4j or something, there was this thing, maybe it was in 2019 or something like that, and there were all these pictures of this edifice held up by one Lego brick and that person, do you remember?

And that was all about the bat phone. We have nobody to contact to get this done. And I would’ve thought that would still be an obstacle and a difficult conversation to have. But maybe it’s just the rock solid nature of Core that kind of allows you to sidestep that.

[00:16:44] Tom Willmot: I mean there are just so many big examples now of WordPress being used that it’s, people will still have some of these concerns. Maybe they still have an idea that WordPress is not used for serious stuff. But then you just show them the huge list of like NASA, the White House, Standard Chartered, the New York Times. You just show them all of these brands, that helps.

[00:17:00] Jon Ang: I think there’s also a bit of that where, we mentioned that Standard Chartered had a senior stakeholder that really wanted WordPress because he’s used it, he likes it. The difference it makes against proprietary, very large CMSs. I think even right now you continue to have these people become senior stakeholders, to become CTOs of major companies. They’ve used WordPress maybe in their personal life as well, and they’re thinking, why wouldn’t I make this easier for the rest of my team? Why wouldn’t I make this easier for the rest of the world, and use something that’s good?

So there’s a lot of people coming to these spaces, into these roles that could say, yeah, let’s look at WordPress and figure it out. And just going back into what you were asking around, who did they co-op? I think this is one part, like, so we mentioned we’ve got this OSPAR compliance. We’ve probably gotten our SOC2 compliance as well. And we’re probably the only agency in the world, well, only WordPress agency in the world that has SOC2 as part of our setup.

They look at these things and did something that someone like Human Made is able to support them. You know, even if we are not WordPress support. We are their platform support. And WordPress is part of it. WordPress is what we do. But they call Human Made, I guess, to help them fix things, yeah.

[00:18:07] Nathan Wrigley: When you are, and I know this hasn’t been a pitching process as such, because you’ve been working with them for a decade or more, but do you ever lean into the whole, no vendor lock-in thing? Is that something that you big up or something that you sort of push to one side? Because obviously you would like to have them as a client forever more, but equally suggesting that, look, if some time down the road, you know, it’s not working out between us, that’s a really credible selling point of the CMS. But equally it might not be something that you wish to mention.

[00:18:37] Jon Ang: That is actually something we mention in almost every single one of our sales stacks, that we are not there to lock you in. By using WordPress, by working with Human Made, we make everything possible for you to move away if you ever wanted to in the future. And it might be that you still stay with WordPress, but maybe Human Made is not the company you want to work with in the future, that’s fine.

But your entire platform remains open source. It remains portable, remains yours. And that’s something we’re very serious about, to the point that like we have worked with large Fortune 500s to open source what we’ve built for them, so that it could be maintained beyond Human Made, so that their team could continue to work on it, to extend that into their own product.

And that’s something that I think is built into our DNA. As part of this, the banks, this Fortune 500s, they believe in this and therefore they don’t feel locked in, and therefore they feel more compelled to invest in it. Yeah, I think that’s a lot of that.

[00:19:35] Nathan Wrigley: I have this impression, and this is really nothing to do with this conversation. I haven’t even written it down. But there seems to be a push towards this open banking standard. I don’t really know much about it, but there seems to be a push to make banking transactions a much more open protocol as well. So that’s kind of a curious overlap.

[00:19:50] Tom Willmot: I mean, I think there is just, the trends over the last decade have been in open source’s favor, right? That people, we’re going to talk a bit about this again in our talk, but there’s, I’ve now, as a bank, been through multiple decades of being locked into proprietary platforms, I’ve felt the pain and expense of that. That’s where Standard Chartered were when we got involved.

They were running a CMS that had been end of lifed by the company, and they were having to pay for that company to keep that CMS on life support just for them. And that was incredibly expensive. The CMS was terrible. It was super painful. I remember hearing early on actually, that they had 40 people on site that they were paying for full-time from the CMS vendor, because every single content edit had to be done by the CMS vendor. They couldn’t do it themselves.

Absolutely, it’s in our DNA. Like, we care a lot about growing WordPress, and so there being no lock in a big part of that. But also, all of these customers have felt the pain of lock in so much that it’s like a huge selling point. We couldn’t afford to not mention it. It’s such a benefit of WordPress.

[00:20:48] Nathan Wrigley: Okay, so lock in is one thing, but if you had to cherry pick just one or two things that make it easy to pitch WordPress at this level. So the vast majority of the people listening to this podcast will have no experience dealing with clients of the nature of Human Made. But they might be curious, you know, it’s nice to hear. What are the things at this enterprise level, that you can say, okay, WordPress has this? Just one or two things.

[00:21:12] Tom Willmot: Yeah, yeah. I mean, I think there’s two kind of, I think fairly obvious ones that I’ll mention up front. One is just how flexible WordPress is. Like, a lot of these proprietary systems are not that flexible and customisation is very hard and expensive. And the reality for big enterprise is they’ve got a ton of like weird stuff that they need to integrate with. They’ve got a ton of weird, unique workflows that they need to support. And WordPress is just like, can do all of that really easily. So the flexibility’s a big selling point.

I think the interesting one that maybe listeners won’t realise, and which like honestly still surprises me to this day actually, is just how important the usability of WordPress is. I mean enterprise software generally is like known to be terrible to use, and that’s really true even in the enterprise CMS space. Even today with the like major enterprise CMSs, if you actually see the backends, they’re all pretty awful. And so often what we do is we go in and we like demo, and they’re like blown away.

[00:22:04] Nathan Wrigley: Genuinely blown away.

[00:22:05] Tom Willmot: Yeah.

[00:22:05] Nathan Wrigley: That’s fascinating.

[00:22:07] Jon Ang: I think another number you could take away as well is that the market share of WordPress in Japan is something like 80%. 80% of websites in Japan use WordPress. Not a lot of that is enterprise yet, but whenever I do demo just default Gutenberg, I am showing them creating a block, I am making changes to the font sizes, I’m moving things up and down. They are like, that’s possible?

And again, like this is just them looking at this, right? We’ve not even like built the custom blocks, made it tuned to the design. And I take a look at the backend that Tom just mentioned, and it would be something that WordPress was maybe 20 years ago when it was first created and. A lot of this really enterprise CMSs that have not moved on.

So Gutenberg is, I think it’s a major, major piece that people get interested in. And once you then continue to build that into the way that they think about workflows, content approvals, the way that it integrates into other APIs, and all this visualisation is just showing up, straight up on their backend editor. It’s just so much more amazing, yeah.

[00:23:10] Tom Willmot: This just reminds me of another story from, this is not from Standard Chartered actually, this is another big enterprise customer. When we went in for like the initial discovery, the way that they managed their online catalog, they were like a product company, they had a custom Java application that ran on one Windows XP PC. All of the content edits had to be done on that computer through that Java application.

And so like the idea that multiple people could log in and edit content was a major selling feature for them. Again, like I said, I still get surprised by this. It’s so easy to take for granted the stuff that WordPress does. But actually, in enterprise, a lot of that is pretty groundbreaking.

[00:23:45] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, it’s interesting. I recall the joy I found when I first opened up Gutenberg and I could move a paragraph up and down. And I’ve completely lost that appreciation for that because I’m in it every single day. And in fact, you get to the point where you only see the things that it can’t do because you’re just really familiar with it. But the description that you’ve just given, it is quite a profound technology, isn’t it? And because I’m so familiar with it, can’t see the wood for the trees.

[00:24:09] Tom Willmot: It’s one of my favorite things, you know, especially in a company like Standard Chartered, there’s 500 people using that. Their entire job, they’re spending in that, doing those workflows. And so like the transformation that something like WordPress can bring to just like the quality of their life at work is huge.

[00:24:23] Nathan Wrigley: Is there anything though where you have to have the opposite discussion? So you’ve demonstrated it and they find that there’s drawbacks to WordPress. Do you have to convince them of things in the WordPress space? So you’ve just demonstrated a couple of things where it was fairly easy. You know, you show them the block editor, great. Are there bits of WordPress Core that they’re not that happy with?

[00:24:41] Tom Willmot: I think most of that, mostly not with the Core software. Like, I honestly think the Core software is like industry leading. I think the biggest challenge they face goes a little bit back to the bat phone piece, which is that they look at the WordPress ecosystem and it’s like how am I supposed to interact with this? I need to find a host. I need to find an agency. There’s all these plugins. Can I use those? What are WordCamps?

And so it’s like, it’s pretty difficult for an enterprise to like understand how that should be put together to meet their needs, and how do they procure it? In enterprise software, there’s usually an organisation, a vendor, that you can go and deal with that’s packaged all of that very nicely, and can like tell you what the roadmap is.

And so that tends to be the biggest challenge, and that’s like most of what the work we do is like, how can we package what’s available in the WordPress ecosystem? But like make it available in a way that these companies are going to understand in the terminology they use, provide them with the roadmaps and the confidence that they need to be able to say like, yeah, okay, we’re going to use it.

And to some degree hide all the mess and the chaos, which are like, is a real strength for the ecosystem but, yeah, can make it difficult for someone, a digital executive who like doesn’t really know that much about the ecosystem, and it’s probably going to get freaked out if they like go to the plugins directory and are like, oh, I need Salesforce. That’s not a great entry point.

[00:25:57] Jon Ang: I think there’s also a lot of work that we do to help them understand that moving alongside WordPress’s innovations is good for you. They’ve spent last, what, 9, 8, 9 years, 10 years, like believing in that. So it doesn’t take us a lot of effort saying, this is what WordPress is thinking about in the next few versions. Given the amount of Core committers we have on the project, we kind of can get a good sense of where the roadmap of the project is going. And then we kind of tell them ahead of time. So when it does come out in an actual Core version, like a major version update, then they already knew about it, maybe like a year ago. They’re thinking, okay, great, now we get to use it.

[00:26:33] Nathan Wrigley: If I was to look at the Standard Chartered backend, would I recognise it? Would it be something which is entirely familiar to me, or is there just a ton of bespoke stuff in there which makes it, you know, usable for them? So I’m thinking of things like, you’ve built custom workflows so that people who are, I don’t know on the editorial blog team or whatever, they can get their work done more quickly, or permissions which allow them to access this block, particular attribute of that block or not. So really, I’m just opening it up. Have you built a bunch of custom stuff for them to use?

[00:27:04] Jon Ang: There’s a lot of custom stuff. I’ll say that our focus in making sure that they stay open and they’re not bound to, you know, anything that we built that is just not understandable by them. So we continue to use the WordPress language, I guess. Things that feel like it should be part of the block editor, how the workflow should be placed. It should be part of the published button, should it show up as a separate overlay and so on? All of that is taken into the understanding of how WordPress kind of demands it, and we present it in a very similar way.

So even if you have someone that’s new to the bank, you know, but that person’s used WordPress before, they should be able to quickly understand how this is all going.

Now obviously there are bank rules, and workflows, and regulations that they have to be like inducted into, but the understanding of how to build a content in the platform that’s built for them should be something that you could get it understood in 30 minutes or an hour. You would probably see it about 60, 70% as what you would usually see in WordPress. But the rest of it, again, is still built within the WordPress design language.

[00:28:05] Nathan Wrigley: So it looks the same. So it looks like a WordPress site, but there’s obviously some custom bits and pieces, okay.

[00:28:10] Jon Ang: Where you would expect things to be will be where we place it, like the extra buttons, extra workflows, and so on. They’ll be exactly where you think you’ll be clicking the publish button, for example.

[00:28:19] Nathan Wrigley: So, I’m making air quotes, you are using modern WordPress, I’m guessing. So this is blocks, this is Site Editing. Tell us a little bit about that. Have you got some sort of custom block functionality in there? And I’m guessing it’s a Site Editing theme, a Full Site Editing

[00:28:35] Jon Ang: So it is some Full Site Editing, and then the way we’re set up obviously is that we try to build patterns on Core blocks. So there’s obviously a lot of custom blocks, but the more we do with the default WordPress blocks. We style them. The more that they benefit when WordPress decides to make some improvements and so on. So that’s a lot of that.

And part of our talk, we’ll talk about the integrations of different APIs into the blocks themselves. So, we are pulling, let’s say investor data, stock prices, and so on directly from all these APIs outside, and then into this charting systems that we’ve built within Gutenberg, so you get to build a chart within the block editor itself.

And there will be visuals, that you’ll be able to see in our talk. But I think that’s probably one of the most customised things out there. But it goes back to what’s using the virtues for the block editor, gives you the visual of what you’re trying to create, and then it allows you the press button to create this graph that you want to create within WordPress.

When you see these graphs on the WordPress website that we’ve created for Standard Chartered, it’s not an image that someone created in Microsoft Word. It is something that’s created within WordPress and generated directly inside there. So that’s basically what, well, part of what we’ve done for the block editor.

[00:29:47] Nathan Wrigley: I always had this impression that the block editor enabled blocks to basically be mini applications. So, in the example of banking, like you said, you put a block onto the page, it’s hooked up to some API or something, and then you can provide some custom infographic or something like that. You know, you can see it on the back end and you click publish and it looks basically the same on the front end.

The curious thing about that is it seems like only the enterprise can get there because that’s so much work. But the promise is so profound. These little mini applications, you know, for a real estate agent, like a house block or something like that. And in your case, display information about last year’s stats for Standard Chartered. I just think that’s the power of it, but so few people can pull it off because of the time and expense.

[00:30:33] Jon Ang: I’ll say that at an enterprise level, obviously you have to work with someone like Human Made as an enterprise agency to get the maximum out of this very unique API data. You don’t get access to Morningstar’s API data as a regular person, for example. But if you’re talking about, let’s say a real estate person, there are plugins out there that plug into, let’s say the country’s real estate data that automates a lot of this. And these blocks are already built for that.

So I think if you were in that industry and then talking to even a regular agency, they’ll be able to find these plugins that do a lot of that. And I said, these vendors, for example, they realise the need their software to integrate into WordPress. They will be building blocks that directly integrate that.

An example of that is HubSpot. They do a lot of integration into WordPress, and then you’ve got blocks to do that. Even if you don’t have a specific official plugin. Gravity Forms, does a lot of integration into separate ecosystems and so on.

So you get actually all these block transformation integrations and so on with this like popular plugins out there. And the more we use WordPress and the block editor together, I think the more of these blocks will become very accessible to the general public.

[00:31:40] Nathan Wrigley: How do you even have that conversation with a client like Standard Chartered though, because they’re into banking, you are into building websites, there can’t be a great deal of overlap in, like we would love this to be on the website. Okay, we can build that. How does that conversation even happen? How do you draw out of them, we can build that into a block? Because you are so miles apart in your areas of expertise.

[00:32:02] Tom Willmot: Really what we did is we worked with Standard Chartered to help them build a web platform team internally. And so the platform is really run as a 50/50 partnership between Human Made and the web platform team. They then act as the kind of internal service provider to all of these like country markets. Compliance and IT, and all of these other stakeholders, they bring the banking knowledge, and we bring the WordPress knowledge. It’s like we’ve got to work very, very closely together to make the most of that.

[00:32:30] Nathan Wrigley: So it’s a case of often them coming to you saying, can this be done?

[00:32:33] Tom Willmot: Yeah. And, you know, we’ve been running like two week sprints now for 8 years or something. So it’s like a very deep, agile relationship.

[00:32:40] Nathan Wrigley: This project, fingers crossed, has no end goal. There’s no date at which it’s done.

[00:32:45] Tom Willmot: No, exactly.

[00:32:46] Nathan Wrigley: Every two weeks, lets see we’re at.

[00:32:48] Tom Willmot: WordPress obviously has a pretty fast paced and iterative development process, right? There’s new stuff coming out pretty regularly. The bank has got aggressive growth targets and marketing plans across all of those countries. I mean, something else we didn’t talk about in terms of the lock-in, some of these country level teams will have their own agency relationships, maybe a marketing agency or something.

And so we also act as a centralised agency coordinator service so that those other agencies can plug into the right bits of the website, but in a safe way that complies with the development processes and things that are necessary.

[00:33:20] Nathan Wrigley: Just to finish it off, a few little questions around accessibility and multilingual and things like that. So multilingual, I suppose is fairly self-evident. You’ve got to translate this website into just about every language on the planet, I would’ve imagined. So that’s a whole body of work.

[00:33:36] Tom Willmot: One of the ways actually that, I mean, multilingual is somewhat easier at this big enterprise level because essentially every country just has its own team and its own website. And so actually multilingual is just solved with multi-site. Standard Chartered do not translate their content, they rewrite it in that language. Different people write the content using multi-site.

[00:33:52] Nathan Wrigley: But in terms of accessibility, very hot topic in the year 2025. And I’m guessing, again, goes back to compliance. I’m guessing there’s no missteps here. You can’t get this wrong. So just tell us about what’s been going on in that sphere.

[00:34:06] Jon Ang: I think the way that we’re set up as well is that every single team has their own site, which means that every deploy gets checked in terms of accessibility. So we would expect that any designs that come along is accessible in the first place. So they’ve done their work. And then when we actually build the front end for it, and a part of their team also builds the front end, it goes through all this accessibility checker stuff that we’ve already built across time that I think feeds the WCAG to 2.2 AA Plus standards.

So every single deploy is checked against that to make sure it is accessible. At any point in time where this looked at and said, okay, there should be improvements that we need to be making. It’s part of the whole two week adjustments that we continue to make sure that all these like websites are accessible.

It doesn’t matter whether it is a Chinese website or Japanese website, where maybe like they’re not held to the same EU accessibility laws, but every piece is actually taken to the same level and held out to the belief that, if we’re accessible in a specific space, that’s should be the same everywhere else.

[00:35:06] Tom Willmot: You know, something to say on accessibility, often listeners will probably feel this. It can be difficult to get clients to care about it enough to pay you to do the work necessary to make it accessible, right? That’s a common problem. It’s one of the really nice things about working with a heavily compliance regulated industry like Standard Chartered. Like, actually, they really care about it. And so they really do the work. They want to invest to make sure the platform can enable them and support them as much as possible to like meet their compliance requirements, yeah.

[00:35:31] Nathan Wrigley: Has the more recent WordPress past, let’s say since about September last year, has that caused any ripples in the nature of the work that you do? Or has it required a different relationship with your clients, more explaining what’s going on in the community? Has there been any kind of blowback from the pace of Core amendments? I think we’re maybe getting more back on track with that. But I just wondered if there were any ripples?

[00:35:58] Tom Willmot: The dropping from three to one releases a year, like I think in many parts of enterprise, it’s kind of helpful actually, like three releases a year is pretty fast. And so certainly that’s not raising eyebrows at the enterprise level.

I think just like, we’ve got a mix of clients, some who are the kind of stakeholder who loves WordPress and really wants it, and so they’re perhaps a little bit more plugged in. And so, yeah, they’ve got more questions. And then you’ve got the other 50% of clients who know nothing about it.

[00:36:22] Jon Ang: And I think that when we are building these enterprise websites, right, we are kind of playing at a slightly different playing field. So they’re not using the typical consumer level plugins and so on. They’re using the service that we’ve provided them. So when you look at this, they look at this as the Human Made WordPress thing that we’ve been doing. And then when they look at whether they can trust this thing, they’re looking at the service that we provide. So they’re not concerned about what’s going else out there. They’re concerned about whether we have the ability to continue providing this service and nothing has said otherwise, yeah.

[00:36:53] Nathan Wrigley: Okay, very last question then. How much of this can be contributed back into the project? Are there any facets of this, little bits over here or over there that can be contributed back to the community? I don’t know where they would land. And if that’s a question you can’t answer, how does Human Made take on the position of contributing back? What’s your posture on that?

[00:37:13] Jon Ang: So Standard Chartered was definitely one of the earlier adopters of Gutenberg. But I think one of the earliest, earliest adopters we had was a part of Disney, where we were using version 0.2 beta of Gutenberg. It was not much in Core. We’re talking about a very beta version of it. So we were building sidebars, we were building like all these things that, Gutenberg didn’t have yet. It was just paragraphs and so on, like back then.

So we were doing that and we were contributing back the idea of it, back to the project. And so you’re going to hear from our talk how we’ve already completed collaborative editing in Human Made. We are now talking to people outside about contributing the idea back to it as well. I think the growth of the block editor itself has been stuff that we are, you know, pushed back in as well. And then I’ll say that’s one part.

The other part as well is the security aspects of stuff. So banks are checked on CVEs and all these pieces, and their security team are on contact points with us on a regular basis. So when we do learn of these things that they’re concerned about, and this is something that we’ve then fixed for them, we then contribute it back to the project.

So I know John Blackbourn works in Human Made, he’s the WordPress Security Team lead. Big part of his job is making sure that the projects that we work on is secure, but the stuff that we have secured then afterwards is contributed back to the WordPress project. So there’s a lot of that ongoing.

[00:38:30] Nathan Wrigley: Do you blow your own trumpet about contributions back or do you like to keep it quiet? I was having a conversation with somebody in the Drupal space recently, and it seems like there’s this whole thing that they’ve got there where, if you contribute, you accrue benefits in terms of, you attend an event like a Drupal Con and you can sponsor because you did some things. And so you had to blow your own trumpet in a way to be acknowledged as having done the things.

I don’t know what your position on that is, whether you like to sort of shout it from the rooftops. We did this, we contributed this back, or I don’t know if it’s more softly, softly than that.

[00:39:00] Tom Willmot: Yeah, I think I’m quite a fan actually of the maker taker stuff that Drupal does. Like, I think they do some really interesting things to benefit maker organisations, which I think has the right incentives then associated with it. Something I learned about, they’ve worked with some of the federal and public sector contracting authorities to preference maker organisations in the RFP processes that they do. So I think stuff like that’s actually really good. I would like to see some of that on the WordPress side.

We really do trumpet it when we’re talking to clients because it’s a big part of our sales pitch, right? That’s how we contribute back to WordPress. We’re a part of the Security Team. That means that we can use Gutenberg way before it’s shipped in Core, which means by the time it’s shipping in Core, Standard Chartered are already using it. They’re already familiar with it. There’s not a big expensive transition. It’s not a shock.

The collaborative editing that Jon mentioned, they needed real time editing in the CMS for multiple users, and we were able to take the like alpha version that the Core team are working on, finish that off and do the work to get that running in production.

[00:39:58] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, just snuck that in. I mean, that’s a whole episode.

[00:40:01] Tom Willmot: Yeah. And you know, that’s really interesting. They’ve been running that in production for a year or more. So then, yeah, there’s obviously stuff there that is like a two-way thing. So some stuff is like, okay, we build something unique and that’s like released open source, but actually more of it is just we are using the stuff that’s coming ahead of time, so then what we are learning can feed back, and make sure that when that is ready, it’s like already learnt the enterprise lessons it needs to learn to be relevant or whatever, yeah.

[00:40:26] Nathan Wrigley: Well, that was a really, honestly, I got so much out of that. Thank you very much, Tom Willmot and Jon Ang for talking to me today all about your project with Standard Chartered. Thank you very much.

[00:40:35] Tom Willmot: Great to be here and a great way to kick off the day. We’ve recorded as our first thing for the conference, so that’s pretty cool.

[00:40:41] Jon Ang: Thank you for helping us walk through our talk as well. So a lot of what we mentioned, it’s probably going to be mentioned our talk. But it’s been good to be here.

[00:00:19] Nathan Wrigley: Welcome to the Jukebox Podcast from WP Tavern. My name is Nathan Wrigley.

Jukebox is a podcast which is dedicated to all things WordPress. The people, the events, the plugins, the blocks, the themes, and in this case, website maintenance for WordPress agencies and freelancers.

If you’d like to subscribe to the podcast, you can do that by searching for WP Tavern in your podcast player of choice, or by going to wptavern.com/feed/podcast, and you can copy that URL into most podcast players.

If you have a topic that you’d like us to feature on the podcast, I’m keen to hear from you and hopefully get you, or your idea, featured on the show. Head to wptavern.com/contact/jukebox, and use the form there.

So on the podcast today, we have Reyes Martínez, and Héctor de Prada.

Reyes has been involved in the WordPress community since 2015, with a background in journalism, digital communications, and early stage startups. From 2021 to 2024, she was sponsored by Automattic to contribute full-time to global marketing and communication efforts for the WordPress Open Source project, She led several initiatives during that time, including the experimental WordPress Media Corps. Reyes currently serves as content lead at Modular DS.

Héctor has been building websites since he was 12, and has worked with WordPress for nearly a decade, first as a freelancer, then running his own agency. Today, he’s one of the co-founders of Modular DS. He co-organizes the WordPress meetup in León in Spain, and writes a Spanish newsletter that keeps readers updated with the latest news from the WordPress ecosystem.

In this episode, we get into the nitty gritty of WordPress maintenance. What it takes to effectively manage multiple websites, and why maintenance is such a crucial, if often overlooked, part of running a successful client business.

You might think that updating plugins and themes is all there is to it, but Reyes and Héctor explained that there’s much more involved, performing regular backups, monitoring, uptime, and performance, checking for security vulnerabilities, database cleanups, and ensuring essential features like contact forms continue working as expected.

We discuss best practices for educating clients, how to position ongoing maintenance as an investment rather than a cost, and solutions which can help automate and streamline these essential tasks.

We also chat about how the maintenance landscape is changing with upcoming legal requirements around accessibility and privacy, and the emerging business opportunities for professionals specializing solely in website care.

If you’re a freelancer or agency owner looking to scale up your business, perhaps you offer care plans to clients, or are considering adding maintenance plans to your service, this episode is for you.

If you’re interested in finding out more, you can find all of the links in the show notes by heading to wptavern.com/podcast. Where you’ll find all the other episodes as well.

And so without further delay, I bring you Reyes Martínez and Héctor de Prada.

I am joined on the podcast today by Reyes Martinez and by Héctor de Prada. Hello Both.

[00:03:53] Héctor de Prada: Hello Nathan.

[00:03:54] Reyes Martínez: Hello Nathan.

[00:03:55] Nathan Wrigley: I’m so pleased to have both of you on. This is going to be interesting because I’m going to be speaking to Héctor in about a week’s time as well, which will be kind of interesting. So there’ll be two podcasts coming out in quick succession featuring Héctor.

But the topic will be very different, and I’ll explain in a moment what the topic is going to be about.

But before that, I wonder if we could just get a little bit of an introduction to both of you. If we can keep it around the subject of WordPress that would be helpful.

So let’s go to Reyes first. Tell us exactly who you are, who you work for, what do they do, whatever you like in your little potted bio.

[00:04:29] Reyes Martínez: Yeah, sure. I’m Reyes and I have been part of the WordPress community since 2015. My background is in journalism and digital marketing and communications, and over the past 10 years, more or less, I have worked with startups and tech companies closely connected to the WordPress ecosystem.

And from 2021 and 2024, I was sponsored by Automattic to contribute full time to the WordPress project, where I had the opportunity to contribute to different marketing and communications initiatives.

And now I am the content lead at Modular DS. We’re building a tool to help freelancers and agencies manage multiple WordPress sites more efficiently.

[00:05:13] Nathan Wrigley: Thank you so much. And let’s move over to Héctor. Similar question really, just give us your little potted bio.

[00:05:19] Héctor de Prada: Of course. Well, I have been making websites, I always say almost all my life, since I was like very young, at 12, 13 years old. At the beginning, not with WordPress, I have to say. But I started working with WordPress around 8, 9 years ago when I started freelancing as a web designer, and that evolved to creating a web design agency.

So I have been doing web design and websites, WordPress websites, for a long time. And 4 years ago almost, it’s when my partner and I, David and I, we started our current company, which is Modular DS, which is now where Reyes is working.

I am also part of the community. This is what you were saying, Nathan, that we are going to talk about, WordCamp Europe, because I am one of the organisers at the meetup in León, in my city. So this is also something I like a lot because we go to a lot of WordCamps, a lot of WordPress events, and it’s very nice to be able to do that in our own city as well.

[00:06:20] Nathan Wrigley: Thank you both so much. So if we stray into anything today, like a blog post is mentioned or a homepage or anything like that is mentioned, I will endeavor to link to that into the show notes. So if you head to wptavern.com and then search for the episode with these two fine people, then you’ll be able to find all of those links. It’s going to be easier to do it that way than to read anything out in an audio podcast.

The approach I think I want to take with this episode is one of somebody fairly new in the WordPress space. So if you are new in the WordPress space, then you might just have the one website. And maintaining that one simple website is probably a reasonably straightforward thing to do. You know, you log in, you update the plugins, you update the themes and what have you.

But if you’ve got any aspirations of becoming a bigger player in the WordPress space, perhaps you want to take on the job of maintaining multiple websites, perhaps you want to have clients and you want to maintain their websites, it becomes fairly obvious, fairly quickly, it’s a bit of a chore. There’s quite a lot of tasks that you need to do in order to keep those websites live.

So that’s what we’re going to talk about. What are those tasks? What’s important to notice if you are a WordPress freelancer or agency owner. What are the things that you need to make sure that your clients are getting updated with and for? And then I guess we’ll sort of mention right at the beginning that Modular DS is something which kind of can take that process off your shoulders and make it fairly automated. But you can go and check out that of your own accord.

So let’s just get into it then. What are the things that you would need to worry about? You can interrupt each other as you see fit. What are the kind of tasks that as a newbie WordPress we may not even know are coming our way, when we’ve got 2, 3, 5, 50 websites that we’ve got to keep maintained?

[00:08:14] Héctor de Prada: I don’t think it’s, how to say, like that we don’t know we have to do that, or that we don’t expect to do it when we are trying to manage a few websites. Reyes and I, we were talking this morning, normally maintenance or maintenance tasks are something nobody is very thrilled about doing, okay. It’s not like the best job. Like, you can be a designer because you love creativity and designing things, or a developer because you love to build things.

But I haven’t met anybody that is like, oh, my dream is to update plugins, create backups, and restore the website when it’s broken, you know? I think that’s the number one challenge, okay. Normally I see that one of the biggest problems is that we know maintenance has to be done in a website, but we don’t always do it. And when we have more and more websites, it becomes even a bigger problem, because we also let it aside more and more because it’s too much work. So that’s one of the main problems.

[00:09:17] Nathan Wrigley: One of the things that in my life, I don’t know what the number of websites was, but there was a point where each morning, because I decided to do the updating on a more or less daily basis, there came a point where you realise that you’d now logged into X number of websites. So you’d gone to the URL to log in, you’d found the username and password, you’d logged in, you’d inspected whether there were plugins or themes to be updated. You’d gone to them individually, you’d update them in a careful manner to make sure nothing got broken, and you moved on to the next website. And at some point you kind of have the intuition, how many minutes or hours have I just lost?

And whilst for one or two websites this really isn’t a problem, I guess what we’re talking about here is something at scale, when you’re over a, let’s say 2 or 3 or 5, or whatever that number is. It does start to add up, and you can’t afford to waste time in that way. And I think it’s exactly like you said, you don’t really know going into it that this is what you’re going to end up doing with your WordPress websites. But you’re right, nobody wrote down on their bucket list of things to do in life, I would like to update plugins for a living.

[00:10:23] Héctor de Prada: And it’s very important at the same time. Like we said, yeah, maybe Reyes, you can say a little bit more about it. But maintenance, it’s really important for many reasons, in particular in the WordPress ecosystem.

[00:10:34] Reyes Martínez: Yeah, I would say that it’s just that, that it’s not the most glamorous part of managing a website, like all the maintenance tasks. But I think it’s also what keep things running smoothly and professionally. I guess that’s the difference between being reactive and being proactive as well. I mean, that makes all the difference. So even though it’s not the most, I don’t know, glamorous part, it’s still very important to keep things professionally.

[00:11:03] Nathan Wrigley: What are the things that we’re updating? So we’ve covered plugins and themes, and I suspect that they’re the ones most people, and again, the audience for this podcast is really broad, so obviously that sentence will be really blindingly obvious to many people. But there may be a proportion of people who don’t even know that that kind of stuff needs to be updated. So let’s just work from the basics upwards. There’s plugins and themes. When you talk about maintenance, what else are you bringing into that?

[00:11:30] Héctor de Prada: You have the updates, both plugin, themes and the Core of WordPress, because it also gets updated. Now it’s once a year, it used to be like two, three times a year so those are also very important updates. But normally it’s mostly, because some people might ask, why should I update a plugin? If my website is working, if it’s perfectly fine, why do I have to update a plugin or a theme?

Well, one of the biggest things in maintenance, because we have to do these updates, is the security part. I am positive that WordPress is a secure solution, that is why it powers 40 something percent of the web. But at the same time, we have 60,000 different plugins just in the WordPress repository. Each one of them is created by an independent team or developers. And even when everybody tries to create the best possible plugin, a secure plugin, and everything, there is human error, of course. And there is always people, since WordPress is so popular, trying to find vulnerabilities to attack these kind of plugins or themes.

So many times, the most important updates are security updates. To avoid that, you have an older version of a plugin or a theme that maybe got exposed, and somebody found a vulnerability, and your website might get hacked because you didn’t do the updates. So even if your website is functioning perfectly, you should still do those updates. And this is something, for example, a lot of end clients, they normally don’t understand when you run an agency and stuff, because they don’t see the point of doing this. But this is one of the reasons, it’s super important.

[00:13:08] Nathan Wrigley: In the normal experience in life, you go into a shop and you buy a thing, like some new sunglasses or a pair of shoes. You don’t anticipate having to update the shoes or update the sunglasses. You kind of just bought the thing and the thing is now yours and off it goes. You know, you expect it to function as sunglasses from now on, and the shoes will keep going as shoes. You know, you might have to replace them from time to time, but that’s another thing altogether. So it’s kind of hard to encapsulate that.

But also, I suspect that most clients wouldn’t even know that there’s this sort of specter of security problems and the fact that bad things could potentially happen. Most clients I imagine have just come to you, the agency, the freelancer, because they want a website. They’re not interested particularly in all of that, but you have to explain that to them. And I always thought that was quite hard. I always got an intuition that the clients kind of thought, what are you on about? I’ve just bought this thing from you, why do I need to update it? Why do I need to keep doing these things?

[00:14:07] Héctor de Prada: Education is one of the biggest parts in having a WordPress maintenance service in your agency or as a professional. Most people, end clients, many people is not tech people so they won’t understand. Updates, backups, these are all very not tangible things. So it’s not hard to explain, but it is more, it’s not like you go to a store, okay? You buy something, it normally doesn’t need maintenance. But I would say it’s like, you buy a house, you buy a car, it needs maintenance, okay? Because you can keep running with a car, but even if the car still works, maybe the brakes, at some point they will stop working and you will have a crash and nobody wants that. So I would say a website is more like a car than a normal product.

[00:14:49] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, that’s a really nice example because with a car particularly, there are bad people who are literally trying to break into the car and take the car away, or do damage to the car, or steal bits from the car. That explains it really well.

Okay, let’s imagine that you’ve had that conversation, you’ve done that education piece, you’ve said to the clients, look, we need some kind of thing going on in the background. There has to be some kind of ongoing relationship between me, the website builder, the developer, and you, the client. But what are those tasks? What are the things, I guess your software will handle these kind of things, but just talking about them hypothetically, what are the list of things just beyond plugin, theme, Core updates? Are there any other things which you recommend?

[00:15:32] Reyes Martínez: Besides updates there are also, for example, like I think it’s very important making regular backups. Monitoring up time and performance. Checking for security issues, you were just talking about that as well. Vulnerabilities, cleaning up the database, and in general, like making sure the site is running smoothly, like contact forms and links are working.

Because there are things that even people think they might have not, I don’t know, like they are not very important. They can have an impact on their business as well. For example, like a broken contact form, that’s just like a very small example, but yeah, those things come to mind. I don’t know, Héctor, if you want to add anything else.

[00:16:15] Héctor de Prada: I think those are the main ones, like your backups and the restoration of the backups when you have a problem. It happened to me I have to say. When we had the agency, I remember more than a few times having a client calling me and telling me, hey Héctor, the website is not working. And I was like, I didn’t know. So it’s like a very, very embarrassing moment because you’re supposed to be taking care of the website, but you didn’t know it wasn’t working until the client told you.

So things like monitoring. When I started making websites, I couldn’t monitor them at all. If they break, I wouldn’t find out because somebody told me or I was just trying to do something and I found out. So monitoring as well. Security Monitoring, like you said, for vulnerabilities, for malware. There are a bunch of tools. I mean, it’s not only tools, maintenance tools, like it can be Modular or others.

There are a bunch of tools in WordPress, like for everything in WordPress, that can help you with this maintenance task. Because the ideal thing, like we were saying, is to automate them so they don’t take so much time. Even if you only have one website, the ideal thing is that backups, monitoring, you have most of it automated, so you make sure even if you forget, if you go on holiday or whatever, it will still be running.

[00:17:30] Reyes Martínez: Yeah, and you can get alerts, for example. Like Héctor was saying, if a website goes down, you can get alerts so you don’t have to be monitoring all the time. Imagine like manual monitoring or going site by site, just checking if everything is working correctly. And monitoring, it’s exactly a big task as well of maintenance and because it can help you catch problems early.

[00:17:55] Nathan Wrigley: Okay, let’s just break all that now and then. So we’re imagining a scenario where we’ve built a website, we’ve handed it over to a client, and then we’re sort of presenting with the client the scenario, look, although we’ve given you the thing, here’s the website, there it is, it’s on the internet, there’s a whole load of other things that we need to do in the background.

And there’s an education piece there, but there’s also a bit of sales that has to go on there because you have to persuade them, presumably that the thing that I’m suggesting here, you are going to need to pay for probably, there’ll be a, some kind of subscription model going on there. We will do all of these things in return for a monthly fee or whatever it might be.

But broadly it is updating things. So that’s plugins, themes and Core. Making sure that those things are available. Then there’s the backup piece, a different thing altogether, and that’s just basically storing in multiple locations, an entire version of the website, the database, and the files to make sure that if an absolute catastrophe occurs, you can go back to whenever the website was last saved successfully, minus any security problems that you might have.

And then another thing is uptime monitoring, which is the process of just alerting you, and I presume it’s you, not the client, that something’s gone wrong. The website that was there 10 minutes ago is not here now. And that’s a really, really, you know, that’s not a once a day thing, that’s once every two minutes kind of thing. You want to know the minute the website goes down, so that you can be the person that contacts the client to say, look, we see that the website’s gone down. And in some curious sense, you actually paint yourself in a good light by admitting something before they’ve even learned about it.

But also something that you said that I never really think about is the idea of bits of the website, which may appear to work, but which don’t work. So the contact form is a big one. You know that whole egg on your face moment where you realise that possibly for six months, the contact form hasn’t worked, has never worked, and you have no way of saying to your client, look, sorry, we’ll be able to reverse that, we’ll be able to get all of the contact forms that would have been submitted over the last six months, because you won’t. It’s gone. And if it wasn’t working, that’s a catastrophe.

But then my mind then goes to things like e-commerce. The site might look fine. Everything might check out okay, when I say checkout, I don’t mean checkout through the cart, I mean, looks fine. But the checkout might not work. Maybe people can’t actually buy things off your website, so it’s up but it’s not working.

So there’s all this stuff. And I guess what Modular DS is doing, and the rivals that you’ve got in that space, is they’re trying to take all of those tasks, package them up into a wrapper piece of software, and basically you don’t really have to worry too much about it. You just sort of set it all up, make sure that all the dominoes are set up in the right place. And then it will do all of those things for you without you having to do too much. Have I got that about right?

[00:20:54] Héctor de Prada: Yeah, of course. That’s the idea, to try to centralise everything when you have a lot of websites. And at the same time, like we were saying, yeah, automate these kinds of tasks so they don’t slip away. And it’s a great point about the WooCommerce because one thing about maintenance is that it’s very dependent on the type of website you have. I mean, it’s not the same maintenance you have to do for maybe a small corporate website, like the Meetup group website, for example, than a big e-commerce that is selling hundreds of products every day. You won’t need to have the same systems in place, not for backups, not for monitoring, not for any kind of checks. So that’s also very important to know. Maintenance is very different depending on the website.

[00:21:38] Nathan Wrigley: So in the case of this whole idea of being able to do this for your client, I’m guessing your position would be that this is something that you can in fact sell to your clients on a regular basis. It’s not like you built the site back in 2024 and you’ve charged a fee for it, and then that’s the end of that. This is more of a, you charged a fee to build the website, and now we have this kind of, I think the term which I hear used a lot is like Care Plan or something like that.

Some kind of process of, on a monthly basis, annual basis, whatever it might be, you offer these different things in return for a subscription fee, and therefore kind of have recurring revenue. And in many cases that recurring revenue might not need a lot of work. You know, fingers crossed, if everything works out okay, and WordPress updates itself correctly, and the plugins all work out and there are no security vulnerabilities, you might have days, weeks, entire months go by where your revenue is really not that difficult to manage.

[00:22:39] Héctor de Prada: In what you said there, it’s like all the main things. Not only you can offer Care Plans or Web Maintenance Plans, but you should as a professional. Because I’ve heard you talk on another podcast, Nathan, you were saying that when you’re a freelancer or an agency, you are always waiting for next projects to see when they come. What’s going to be next? And if you’re going to have enough work to keep going.

And that’s why recurring revenue, it’s so important for us as professionals. And in web design or web development, it’s not so easy to get besides web maintenance. It might be if you want to go to plugin development or theme development or do something like that, you can start getting recurring revenue.

But if it’s just building websites, I think the only way to get that recurring revenue is by offering Care Plans. That’s why I always say, the critical thing that you were also mentioning before, is that it’s of course also a sales job to sell this to a client, but I don’t think it has to be once the website is generated, and you try to tell the client, okay, we did the website, it’s looking good, it’s working. And now we are going to do maintenance on the website, and you have to pay this or that.

I think it has to go way before that. When we were an agency, what worked really good for us, so I always give this advice because it really worked for us, is that we used to talk about maintenance with the clients before we started the website project. If somebody would come to us saying, okay, we want a new website design for our company, we’d include it always in our proposal. It’ll be, okay, we are going to design the website, we are going to do the development of the website, and then after that we are going to care for the website.

So we are going to do a maintenance on the website because this is very important. We are not going to just leave you there with your website, out in the open. Like, you don’t really know how it works, but we are going to be there with you. And this was like a massive change for us because when we were selling it this way, once the website was completed and we would tell the client, okay, now is the time to start the web maintenance job, and they were like, oh great, so this what we were talking about. It is not even a discussion anymore. It is like, oh great, it’s finally the time. So that’s like crucial. It was crucial for us.

[00:25:00] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, I think when people do get recurring revenue into their business, especially around maintenance, it does feel like, why didn’t I do this before? Because it really is kind of, I hate to use the phrase, you are kind of leaving money on the table a little bit.

I wonder what both of you have in your head around the way to pitch that product. Because I went through lots of different ways of doing it. Some of them I’m not that proud of. So for example, in some cases I would emphasise the problems that could happen. You know, your website could go down. The internet can be a bit of a dark place, there’s hackers out there. And in the end it felt a bit like, I’m trying to scare you into giving me this maintenance deal. But then on the other hand, there was the sort of more positive way of doing it. You know, we’ll make sure that your website is always up and just different ways.

I wonder how you, both of you, tackle that. Do you have a particular kind of language? Do you have like a brochure or a booklet that you pass on to somebody which outlines it all?

[00:25:59] Héctor de Prada: For us, at least when we were an agency, you are seeing that I like to talk a lot. So for me it was like I could talk a lot with the clients. I would just try to be very educational, like we said from the beginning, in calls or in meetings I could talk about maintenance, the task it requires. Trying to explain it for everybody, of course, like not trying to make it sound technical or anything. Just trying to make them understand that technology evolves, WordPress evolves, the needs that the website, or the business, might have change so we should keep the website evolving with the business so it always stays in good shape.

Luckily, even when this is a terrible thing for our field, is that many, many clients, they come to you when they have had a bad experience before, having a website design. And this experience, so many times has more to do about not having maintenance than about the web design itself. Because they might come after three, four years and they might tell you, somebody did this website for me four years ago and now nothing works.

And it’s like, okay, when they did the website, everything worked. What happened? Nobody looked at the website for four years, so now nothing is working, which is understandable. So that also helps you a lot to make them understand that you don’t want that to happen again.

[00:27:22] Reyes Martínez: I think it’s also important to maybe reframe things or just showing clients that that’s part of, I mean that you care about their success over time. So it’s not just about launching their site. I don’t know, sometimes I like to think about maintenance as insurance. You hope you don’t need it, but if something goes wrong, you’ll be glad to have it. So I think it’s the same. Like, if you have someone who’s taking care of your website to make sure it’s healthy, that it is performant and that everything is running smoothly. I think you are investing in its long-term success as well.

[00:27:57] Nathan Wrigley: Framing it as an investment is quite a good way around it, isn’t it? As opposed to a, it’s not like a cost, it’s an investment. You’re putting something in so that it maintains. Spending money kind of feels like, oh, I’ve spent it, it’s all gone. Whereas an investment, you feel a bit more like, okay, I’ve spent some money, but as a result, things are going to be better in the future.

[00:28:15] Héctor de Prada: You both said it, Reyes, you said right now that it is kind of an insurance also, if something bad happens. Because when something really bad, like the website crashes or gets hacked or whatever, because it can always happen, at some point everybody will be glad to have a professional taking care of things.

Because another way to frame this, and you were saying that before Nathan, is that I’ve seen many, many professionals that they are like, okay, so the client doesn’t want to pay for maintenance, so I’m just going to wait until they have a huge problem that will come sooner or later. When they come without the maintenance deal, I’m going to charge them a bunch and then they will be glad they get the maintenance package. And they will start paying for that. I’m not saying I recommend that, I haven’t done that, but I’ve seen so many people do that at the same time.

[00:29:04] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, I think describing his insurance is quite interesting. The curious thing about insurance is, how to describe it, at some point you might begin to resent paying the insurance if you never have an accident or nothing is ever stolen. So one of the things that I often got with the Care Plans was this whole thing of years would go by, I would do my job well, so nothing ever happened.

And so after 24 months of nothing ever happening, the client would turn around and say, what am I actually spending the money on? And then it occurred to me, okay, maybe there should have been some process of telling you what I was doing each month. Some kind of report or something to give to the client to say, look, literally things are happening. It’s not like we’ve gone away with your monthly subscription and done nothing.

So I wondered if you had any thoughts around those, you know those clients who think nothing’s happening, why am I spending this each month in order for apparently nothing to happen? It’s just a black hole.

[00:30:02] Reyes Martínez: That’s actually one of the hardest parts as well, like showing all the work that professionals are, like us are doing in the background. That work, that it’s not so visible as well, and how to communicate the value of all that work.

So I think there are, I don’t know, there are many different ways to communicate that value, but for example, like reports are pretty common. Showing, not just task, but all you have been monitoring and performance data, updates. And just, again, like educating on how all the work done have an impact on their business.

Because I think it’s also easy to go maybe, or to get into technical details, but I think clients don’t really care if you update a plugin or if you, you know, how you are maintaining their site. I think they care that their website is secure, fast and it’s working. It’s always working.

[00:30:58] Nathan Wrigley: One of the things that I ended up doing, which I think worked well was, I eventually landed on the idea of this report thing. So I would issue a report and it would say, during the course of the last month, these things have happened. And it would be a list of all the plugins that been updated, maybe WordPress Core had been updated, maybe I’d done some work on the server to update that, a PHP version or something like that. So all of those kind of things. And then some kind of indication of how the uptime went. You know, it was 99.9% last month, we had a little glitch on Tuesday or whatever, but that was taken care of within five minutes.

But the thing which worked best for me was I offered a proportion of time, based upon the plan that they gave me, of my actual time. And that could be deployed in any which way they wanted.So, for example, it could have been, I will just tell you what that report means or let’s just knock our heads together for half an hour or an hour, and figure out if there’s anything you wanted doing on the website. Maybe you want a telephone number updating or you want to have a different design on the homepage because Christmas is coming or whatever it might be.

And interestingly, most clients never took me up on it, but the mere fact that it was offered, and I’d offered the time, there was just something a bit more to it. There was something more tangible and more credible about it. And then when the clients did take me up on it, and I could explain what had happened and that it wasn’t this black hole where the money was just falling into for the maintenance plan and nothing happened, that really worked.

But I had the time available. And it may be that some people, most people don’t have that time available. For me, that was a good thing, you know, that kind of personal touch was a way to make it work.

[00:32:33] Héctor de Prada: Also another thing that is very important to solve, for example, in client reports, and it’s not so obvious, it’s because it is not a job you are doing. It’s some stats about how the website is working for their business. Because 99% of the time a website comes from a business that needs an online presence.

So it should be very important for them to know how this is performing or how this is helping the business. And I found this hundreds of times, that people have a website and they don’t know if somebody’s visiting the website, if you can find it on Google. They don’t know anything about the website. They are just like, yeah, I have a website there, but I don’t really know what’s happening with it.

So I think adding things like, I don’t know, like Google Analytics or any other analytics. Or search console results so you know, it’s somebody coming from Google or where is people coming. Or if you have an international website, from which countries is people coming. Things like that, I think it’s like very valuable for the end client, for the business, to know how the website is performing. And it’s not always added, but I think it’s crucial to also put that information.

[00:33:41] Nathan Wrigley: Do you know if anybody actually makes a business out of what you do? So, do people have a business of maintaining websites? Just doing that work. So they’ve decided they don’t want to be involved in creating the website, but they want to turn this product, if you like, that we’re talking about now. Is that a thing? Do people do that for a living? They maintain other people’s websites for them. Maybe you could bind yourself to an agency and they would hand the maintenance side to you. You are both nodding, so I’m guessing the answer’s yes.

[00:34:11] Héctor de Prada: We know many people, but we are kind of biased because most of our clients are agencies or freelancers that manage a lot of websites. So many of them are actually specialised in this kind of service. So we have freelancers that manage like 120 websites, and that’s all they do. They don’t do any websites, they just manage websites.

And then we have agencies that they are like fully specialised in web maintenance, web caring, and maybe if you have an urgency in your site because it’s broken or something, they can help you with that also. But they don’t design websites or create new websites.

So I think, yes. And one example I always say is that, at least in Spain, if you search in Google for WordPress maintenance, there are so many page results. So that means it’s a profitable business, okay? There is a lot of competence of people trying to get leads out of those keywords. I would imagine in most countries it could be the same. So yeah, definitely. I think it’s possible. I see it every day, so yeah, a hundred percent

[00:35:10] Nathan Wrigley: That’s kind of interesting because it may be that you are, I don’t know, you just want to take a break from actually building websites, and this might be an interesting way to pivot, especially if you’ve got your foot in the door with a bunch of agencies, and you know people that could supply you that work and they don’t wish to be involved in that. That’s curious.

[00:35:27] Héctor de Prada: You can automate much more stuff than in a web design process, or web development. In maintenance, like we were saying, with tools like Modular or other tools, you can automate most of the maintenance tasks. So many times, yeah, like one person can manage like 120 websites. Imagine how long it would take to build 120 websites. It’s almost impossible. You could say, oh, I don’t know, like five years, seven years. But you can maintain every week or every month, 120 websites by yourselves, just with the tools that are available. So that’s a really big difference.

[00:36:04] Nathan Wrigley: Does this maintenance landscape change? Because I’m just curious, the web industry changes all the time, but broadly, you know, plugins and theme updates, that’s been around since WordPress got plugins and themes. Hosting and backups, again, similar.

But there have been developments in the more recent past where I’m thinking, okay, you could definitely push that into the maintenance idea. So things that come to mind are, I don’t know, optimisation, Core Web Vital scores, maybe something like that could leak in.

And the one at the minute, which I think would be really interesting, and again, maybe it’s a thing already, is accessibility. Some kind of report about, okay, it looks like these pages need a particular bit of attention, or something’s gone wrong here from an accessibility point of view. And so really my question there is, does the landscape of maintenance change, or is it broadly fixed with whatever it is now is how it’ll be in a decade?

[00:36:57] Héctor de Prada: Now also with AI, I don’t even know what’s going to happen in a decade. But I do think things change. For example, with accessibility, like you said, now in Europe it’s going to be big changes. With security as well, with the new Cyber Resilience Act, it’s going to be changes.

And for example, we saw it a few years ago with the data privacy law in Europe. I’ve seen so many agencies offering legal checks for the cookie banners and things like that. To also add in maintenance, I don’t know, like seven years ago, that wasn’t a theme because it wasn’t mandatory, so nobody really cared that much. And it is the same with accessibility.

A few years ago, nobody, almost nobody cared about that. And I think now because of the law changes, this is going to change drastically and almost every professional is going to start doing things related to accessibility, and is going to care about that. And it’s also going to be able to offer that to their clients as an upsell, or as an extra value, they’re going to give in their care plans.

So yeah, I do think it changes. We don’t have a lot of changes because the basics are always the same, the updates, the backups, the monitoring. But there are things that, yeah, might bring big changes every once in a while and we have to adapt.

[00:38:12] Reyes Martínez: I just wanted to add that also with AI and no-code tools, I mean, it’s easier than ever to launch a website. But what happens after that? Because maybe we find that more and more sites are being left behind with no updates, no backups.

What I mean with this is that maybe, maybe not, there’s already a growing maybe opportunity, because there are more and more sites that we don’t know what would happen with them. And they will need maintenance for sure. So I think we are seeing a growing opportunity as well, there for people who want to manage or dedicate themselves to maintain websites, yeah.

[00:38:51] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, it does feel like in the year 2025 when we’re recording this, there are some key bits of legislation which are coming. You know, the European Accessibility Act very, very soon going to be completely mandatory across the whole of the EU. I mean, basically it should be something that you’ve taken care of already, but nevertheless.

And so these kind of things I imagine, will become part of the platform, the ethos of doing maintenance in the future. So that’s kind of interesting.

Just for the last moment or two, minute or two, let’s talk a little bit about what you have. So Modular DS, I’ll put a link into the show notes, but is the URL, is it modulards.com? Is that where we would go?

[00:39:30] Héctor de Prada: Yeah, we could say dash EN for the English version.

[00:39:33] Nathan Wrigley: Lovely, okay, so I will link to that into the show notes. I’ll link to the English version in this case, just because I think that makes most sense given that we’re all talking in English.

This is what you do. This is that in a nutshell. You have a service that you can sign up to. Is it plugin based? Is it a SaaS? Is it a mixture of SaaS and a plugin? How does it work and what kind of things can you do?

[00:39:56] Héctor de Prada: It’s kind of a mixture. It’s a SaaS outside of WordPress, we are going to say, but it needs a connector plugin to connect your websites to Modular DS. So basically what you do is you connect your different websites, the ones you manage, to Modular, and then from there you can like centralise most of the maintenance tasks, do updates, for example, in all the sites at the same time.

And also you can automate monitoring, vulnerability analysis. You can automate client reports like the generation of this client reports. So it basically tries to help, yeah, agencies, freelancer to save time, to have a good maintenance business. And also, like we have been saying, to sell the maintenance business to their clients, which we all know is not easy. So that’s what we try to do.

[00:40:42] Nathan Wrigley: So if I were somebody looking after my site and a bunch of others, you cater to that market, but also you are catering towards the more agency owner, if you know what I mean, where they’ve got multiple websites.

Is it possible to, white label is often the word I hear surrounding this. Is it possible to sort of make it so that it appears your own? That seems to be something that people really like, but I don’t know if you offer that feature.

[00:41:04] Héctor de Prada: You can white label everything that goes to the client. Let’s say, client reports. Of course, you can white label that, like your agency logo, your agency email to send the reports. Also, you can white label the plugin. So in the WordPress installation, you can change the plugin info so the client doesn’t know you’re using Modular, if you don’t want them to know. So yeah, of course, that’s important for many professionals, yeah.

[00:41:27] Nathan Wrigley: You could definitely be checking that out. And obviously this entire episode really was to provide an education piece around what it is that you might need to do, especially for those people who are new. You may not realise that there’s an actual business opportunity here for you, but also that there’s a whole cavalcade of different things that you can do.

So just to reprise, plugin, theme, updates, plus up time monitoring, backups, client reports. There’s a whole laundry list of things in there.

Yeah, I think that’s everything I wanted to ask. So if that’s the case, I will say, Reyes and Héctor, thank you very much for chatting to me today. I really appreciate it.

[00:42:04] Héctor de Prada: Well, thank you, Nathan.

[00:42:05] Reyes Martínez: Thank you.

[00:00:19] Nathan Wrigley: Welcome to the Jukebox Podcast from WP Tavern. My name is Nathan Wrigley.

Jukebox is a podcast which is dedicated to all things WordPress, the people, the events, the plugins, the blocks, the themes, and in this case, how speculative loading is speeding up your WordPress website.

If you’d like to subscribe to the podcast, you can do that by searching for WP Tavern in your podcast player of choice, or by going to wptavern.com/feed/podcast, and you can copy that URL into most podcast players.

If you have a topic that you’d like us to feature on the podcast, I’m keen to hear from you and hopefully get you, or your idea, featured. On the show. Head to wptavern.com/contact/jukebox, and use the form there.

So on the podcast today we have Felix Arntz. Felix is a Senior Software Engineer at Google, and a WordPress Core contributor from Germany, currently residing in San Francisco, California. He helped establish the WordPress Core performance team, and has been heavily contributing to its efforts. He has been using WordPress for a decade and contributing back to the project since 2015. More recently, he has stepped into the role of the inaugural performance lead for the WordPress 6.2 release, and subsequently of the 6.3 and 6.8 releases. In the latter release, he spearheaded development, and launch, of the new speculative loading feature, which is the focus of the podcast today.

Speculative loading is one of the most important, and yet, almost invisible performance enhancements of recent times. If you’re on WordPress 6.8, this new feature is already active on your site, working quietly in the background to make page navigation faster, but you might never know from the WordPress UI. There’s no menu, no toggle, and no obvious indicator to show it’s there.

Felix explains exactly what speculative loading is and why it feels almost like browser magic. The Ability for WordPress, using the browser’s new Speculation Rules API to load the next page just as the user is about to visit it. It’s a clever use of browser signals like mouse clicks, and hovers, to anticipate navigation, shaving off precious milliseconds, sometimes even providing what feels like an instant page load.

Felix clarifies the difference between conservative and more aggressive approaches to speculative loading. And why the WordPress core team opted for the safest, least wasteful, option by default, while still giving developers or advanced users the hooks and tools to customize, or even disable it, as needed.

Felix discusses the origins of the feature as a plugin, the testing and data collection undertaking with tens of thousands of sites, and how this real world data gave the team confidence to ship speculative loading to all WordPress users. We talk about what those performance wins mean at scale, how a 2% improvement on 43% of the internet translates into saving users untold hours of waiting collectively.

We also get into the weeds on measurement and methodology, how the team uses data from the Chrome user Experience Report and HTTP Archive to track web performance, prioritize features, and validate real world impact. Felix offers insights into how these global, anonymized data, sets allow the performance team to make truly data-driven decisions.

Beyond the tech, Felix addresses practical considerations such as how to opt out or fine tune speculative loading if you have specific needs. How environmental concerns are balanced by default configurations. And how plugins or agencies might build on this foundation in the future.

If you’ve ever wondered how large scale browser level improvements make their way into WordPress Core, or simply want to know if there’s a way to make your own WordPress site that much faster, this episode is for you.

If you’re interested in finding out more, you can find all of the links in the show notes by heading to wptavern.com/podcast, where you’ll find all the other episodes as well.

And so without further delay, I bring you Felix Arntz. I am joined on the podcast by Felix Arntz. Hello, Felix.

[00:04:46] Felix Arntz: Hey. Happy to be here.

[00:04:47] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, thank you. I appreciate you joining us. Felix is joining us all the way from California. I’m in the UK so there’s a big time gap. And I appreciate you getting up early and talking to me. That’s fantastic.

Felix is going to be talking to us today about something which is now in WordPress, and you may not even know that it’s in there because there’s nothing to see here. But the endeavor of what Felix has built is to make all WordPress websites basically immediately better. More performant, so that the end users of your websites will be able to access your content more quickly.

It is something that’s really fascinating. But before we begin digging into all that, I know it’s a dreadfully banal question, Felix, but would you just tell us who you are so that people understand your credentials in the WordPress space?

[00:05:32] Felix Arntz: Sure. Thank you. I have been contributing to WordPress now for 10 years. So I started as a freelancer building websites using WordPress, and eventually got into contributing to WordPress Core after I went to my first WordCamp, which was a great way to get started.

Yeah, ever since then I’ve been contributing to WordPress Core, and eventually became a Core Committer. And now, for over six years, I’ve been working at Google, the team where we focus on CMS projects for the most part. So I’ve been, especially in the last good three years or so, I’ve been sponsored by Google to contribute to WordPress with a specific focus on improving performance.

So our team essentially co-founded the WordPress performance team, which is an official part of the wordpress.org project. And ever since that was founded in late 2021, we’ve been contributing to that effort, and the speculative loading feature is a big part of that.

[00:06:25] Nathan Wrigley: That’s what we’re going to talk about today. Can I just rewind a little bit though, and talk about Google for a minute. So, are you employed by Google to commit to WordPress Core? Do you spend a hundred percent of your time working on WordPressy things, or do you have a proportion of your time which is devoted to more, and I’m doing air quotes, Google things?

[00:06:46] Felix Arntz: Yeah, I mean, I wouldn’t say that I contribute a hundred percent of my time, but a good chunk, probably 70, 80 or something. Our focus is, when it’s not on WordPress, it’s still on other somewhat related open source projects. So we have been contributing, we’ve been also working with other CMSs here and there.

[00:07:02] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, that’s interesting because I know that Google have a big presence. If you go to the flagship WordPress events, you know, WordCamp Asia, WordCamp US, and so on, then Google very often have a huge advertising booth. You know, they’re a global partner if you like.

But drawing the line between Google and Open Source CMS is a little bit hard to do. It’s almost like a philanthropic thing. Because I guess their job is to just try and make the internet better and part of it, if they can make 43% of the internet better by seconding somebody like you to commit to the project, that’s just good for everybody.

So yeah, bravo to Google. I appreciate the fact that they’re sponsoring you and helping the project in that way.

Also bravo to you and the team, the Performance Team. It is just a relentless good news story coming out of the Performance Team. So, I don’t know, when did you say, 2019 it was founded?

[00:07:54] Felix Arntz: Late 2021, but things really kicked off like mid 2022 I feel.

[00:07:58] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, and I am habitual about the WordPress news, and it just never stops. The Performance Team do something profound, help everybody out, it just ships into Core. Most people don’t even know that things have happened because, you know, they’re not in the baseball in the same way that you and I probably are.

A profound thanks. Maybe there was just this massive backlog of things that needed to be tackled. Maybe not. But it did seem that the minute the doors opened to the Performance Team, lots of dominoes fell really quickly.

So thank you on behalf of me and everybody who uses WordPress for the work that, I don’t know whether you feel that you get the credit that’s due to you, but I’m giving you some credit now, so thank you.

[00:08:37] Felix Arntz: Thank you. I appreciate it. That’s definitely great to hear.

[00:08:39] Nathan Wrigley: I’m pleased you know, that there’s people as capable as you who are doing this kind of work and that you’re willing to do it in the background. And a big piece of that is what we’re going to talk about today.

Landed in WordPress 6.8, but has a history prior to that as a plugin. It’s called speculative loading. It sounds impressive. But it also, I guess it is impressive and it’s a bit like voodoo. It’s kind of doing things that you wouldn’t imagine were possible. Do you want to just tell us what it is? What is speculative loading?

[00:09:08] Felix Arntz: So essentially, speculative loading, the idea is that when you navigate to a new URL, when you are browsing through a website and you go to a URL, the moment that you land on the URL, it starts loading. And we probably know that the performance aspect of that is very important to the user experience.

So if a page takes, I don’t know, three seconds to load, that’s not great. If it takes eight seconds to load, it’s probably horrible of a user experience. And so one of the performance team’s goals is to make that time that it takes a load shorter. So what then speculative loading does is load the URL, the idea is that it loads the URL before you even get there.

[00:09:47] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, that’s the bit that’s voodoo. That’s the bit that just sounds like you’ve basically hopped into Back to the Future and you’ve gone back in time a moment or something. It’s very counterintuitive. So you are going to have to explain, how on earth does it do that?

[00:09:59] Felix Arntz: Right, right. Essentially, there are browser, there are heuristics which can be relied upon to hopefully assume correctly that a URL will be visited. So when you are on a page on the website, there is of course links to other pages on the website. So if you hover over the link with your mouse, if you’re on a computer for instance, and you hover over the link with your mouse, maybe you’ll click it. That’s like one level of signal. It’s not the strongest signal.

But then an even stronger signal is when you actually click the link. When you click a link, you want to go to that URL. I think that’s a fair assumption in like 99 plus percent of cases. So when you click on the link, that’s technically still before you’re at the other URL though. We’re talking about milliseconds. You probably think when you click, you are already on the other URL, but that’s not the reality. There is like maybe, I don’t know, 200, 300, 500, however long it takes, there are some milliseconds in between the time you actually click and that the other URL opens.

So by loading, for instance, by loading a URL, when you click on the link, you still gain those, whatever, maybe 500 milliseconds. I’m just going to make that up now, and reduce the actual load time by that.

[00:11:07] Nathan Wrigley: Let me just prize that apart. So we are now going to talk about a tiny fraction of time. For the next few minutes, we’re going to be talking about literal milliseconds. So let me imagine that I’m on my computer, desktop computer, let’s start there. I’m on a webpage and there’s a bunch of links, buttons, what have you.

I’m holding my mouse, my mouse approaches the button and it begins to slow down, you know, because at some point we have to rest on the button. So there’s this deceleration of the mouse and the cursor, and it eventually lands there. And then I click it.

Now my intuition is that the click event is the moment, that’s when everything begins, if you know what I mean. But are you saying that you can go back in time prior to me actually hitting the button with my finger? Is it the mere fact that, okay, the mouse has come to a standstill, you haven’t engaged the finger yet. Maybe the finger is literally on the way down in the real world, in this slow motion universe we’re imagining. Is that kind of it? It’s taking heuristics about, where is the mouse now? How is it decelerating? Or is it literally he clicked? Because if it’s the click bit, then I don’t understand what’s different to how it usually was because it felt like the click was always the moment.

[00:12:19] Felix Arntz: There are different ways to configure speculative loading. And one way, and that’s the way that WordPress Core does now, is to only speculatively load on the click. You say now that that feels like it’s always been like that, but it’s not quite always been like, that because of what I tried to mention with there’s still like 500, maybe 300, whatever, little milliseconds time between the click and the actual URL loading.

So when you hit the other URL, then it starts fetching the HTML document and all the CSS and JavaScript and so on. By doing that already on the click, on the link, on the previous page that you are on, you still gain those, I’m going to say valuable milliseconds. And we’re probably talking about at the very least, a hundred milliseconds, maybe a few hundred milliseconds.

[00:13:04] Nathan Wrigley: It doesn’t sound like a lot, but it’s, you’ve invented time out of nowhere. You’ve completely conjured up time that didn’t, well, actually you’ve removed time. You’ve gone in the opposite direction. But that time was needlessly spent before. Now that time has been saved.

You also mentioned that the WordPress implementation, and we’ll get into how you might be able to configure that in a moment, but the default WordPress installation, so this is in every WordPress website from 6.8 onwards, it is set to, and I’m going to use the word conservative, but it’s set to a fairly dialed back approach to this Speculation Rules API.

I’m curious, and we’ll get into how you do it in WordPress, but just in terms of the Speculation Rules API, what are some of the more aggressive things that you could do if you wanted to? And is things like the mouse slowing down, is that potentially part of it? Those kind of things.

[00:13:55] Felix Arntz: Right. So maybe let me take a step back, first to clarify that there’s a speculative loading feature that is in WordPress Core, it’s built on a browser API that is called Speculation Rules API. We can talk about maybe two things. There’s like, well, how can you use the Speculation Rules API? There’s different ways to configure it, and that’s something that we could apply in WordPress. But then we could go beyond that, and I’m probably not the best person to speak about that, but we could also think, how can you actually, what could the Speculation Rules API possibly do, that it isn’t able to do today?

So in terms of using the Speculation Rules API, it allows different configuration modes in for what is called eagerness. And you actually said it right. It’s called conservative, the mode that WordPress currently uses. And it just means, I think it is conservative in the sense that it is the safest measure if you want to make sure you only load URLs that the user actually goes to.

But it’s also the least performance of all the options. It’s always a trade off because unfortunately we cannot predict the future, so there’s no real wizardry going on here. And because of that, there is always going to be a trade off. You can use signals that are very reliable on the user visiting the other URL, like clicking on the link. There is an scenario where you click a link and then you pull your mouse away before you let go of your finger. We probably all have done this, but we probably do this like 1% of our clicks, if even that. But people do this occasionally, very occasionally.

So that’s the way where a click would not trigger the actual URL to the link to be, that wouldn’t result in the user visiting the other URL. This would be the one example where conservative speculative loading would still load the other URL and the user wouldn’t go to it. But I think that risk, that trade off is very, very little because of how rarely that happens.

[00:15:46] Nathan Wrigley: Right, so the posture of the Performance Team was to go conservative. So although it’s not the most performant, it is the least likely to end up in, you know, needlessly downloading content that is perhaps never going to be looked at.

But again, just moving ourselves away from WordPress for a minute, the Speculation Rules API, if we were to go on the more eager side, what kind of things could be brought to bear? And again, not in the WordPress setup at the moment, but I know that you can modify those things. But what can the Rules API do, if you go like full eager?

[00:16:18] Felix Arntz: Right. So you can also use, the next after conservative is called moderate. That uses signals that are less explicit, like a hover. Again, I have to specify, on desktop it uses hovering, because on the phone you can’t hover, like you don’t have a mouse and it doesn’t know where your finger is if you don’t press the screen.

So, essentially, moderate on desktop, it relies on the hover over a link to preload the URL that is behind that link. So that generally, yeah, of course if you hover over link and then you click it, there may be like a second, easily a second between this, or there may even be five seconds in between those two actions, right? And sometimes you hover and click immediately. Other times you hover and you get back there, and then you click, and in that case, the whole page can technically be already loaded.

So that’s the part where speculative loading, if you configure it more eagerly, you can get to situations where you get instant page load. You go to the other page and it’s already completely loaded. There’s, for instance, there is also Core Web Vitals, metric Largest Contentful Paint, which measures the load time speed. So you can get to an LCP of zero. Like, literally. If you use it, for instance as moderate eagerness, let’s say your page normally takes two seconds to load completely, and you hover over a link, and then you get back there like three seconds later, you click, it’s already there, and your LCP is literally zero because you didn’t need to wait at all.

That’s the performance power that it has. But of course, it does also come with a trade off to consider. Like, how do you configure this in a way that it’s the least wasteful? And wasteful in the sense of loading URLs that the user does not go to, ends up not navigating to. But you have to basically weigh off, what is the performance gain? How do users typically use your website?

There’s also, there’s a lot of individual configurations that websites may want to do on their specific site. So going back to the conservative option that WordPress now uses, it’s just that, it’s simply that we want to give the bare minimum feature and we want to make the feature available in general to WordPress sites. But because WordPress is so massive, you need to go with a literally conservative default.

[00:18:25] Nathan Wrigley: Okay. So that’s all really interesting, but it sounds like all of this is happening in the browser. So all of these events are being triggered by the browser. Again, forgive my ignorance, I’m presuming that Chromium, Chrome, Firefox, all of the other variants that there may be out there, I guess they’re all shipping some variant of this inside the browser because obviously it can’t be WordPress that’s doing this.

If that’s the case, is there kind of like a broad consortium of people who are working on this initiative, maybe other similar related performance initiatives, and trying to make them all browser compatible?

[00:19:03] Felix Arntz: So there is, the Speculation Rules API is currently, it’s available in Chrome, Edge and Opera, so in the Chromium based browsers, but it’s not available yet in Safari and Firefox. That means that people that use Safari or Firefox, they’re basically just not going to get the benefit.

[00:19:18] Nathan Wrigley: So it’s like a progressive enhancement. There’s no downside, it’s just an upside.

[00:19:22] Felix Arntz: Exactly. So because overall the browsers that support it are very widely used, plus the other browsers not having any negative effects of this feature being on a website, that’s why we thought it was a good time to roll it out.

[00:19:36] Nathan Wrigley: Okay, that’s really interesting. It just suddenly, and completely unrelated to the conversation that we’ve had so far, it kind of makes me think that maybe in the future there’ll be a hardware layer to this. You know, imagine if my mouse had built into it some pressure sensation, or even proximity sensor where it could perceive that, you know, my finger is descending and it could fire the signal from the mouse to say, yeah, he’s about to click. Or even in a mobile phone, you know, you were mentioning earlier, we don’t know where your finger is. Maybe at some point in the future we will know where your finger is.

[00:20:09] Felix Arntz: That would be really powerful, yeah.

[00:20:10] Nathan Wrigley: It’d be kind of interesting. Okay, you heard it here first. But it’s not there yet. So, what has been the way that this has been implemented? My understanding is that you launched this as a plugin. I think you got a fairly high user account. I think 30,000, 50,000 or something websites.

[00:20:27] Felix Arntz: I think it’s now at 50,000.

[00:20:28] Nathan Wrigley: 50,000. So tons of data coming back. And presumably that data gave you the confidence to, yeah, let’s push this through. And I have a memory that, broadly speaking, you got fairly close to a 2% productivity gain. And obviously at 43% of the web, if we can do things 2% faster, doesn’t sound like a lot, 2%. But 2% of everything that WordPress gives up, that’s a lot.

[00:20:53] Felix Arntz: Performance is really like, people say sometimes things are numbers games, but performance is a tiny numbers game. Like it’s very hard to make performance wins sound very appealing. It’s like, here is 2% win. We scratched off 80 milliseconds of this, and it’s like, what is this even, like.

[00:21:08] Nathan Wrigley: But it literally is human years. It’s probably decades of time when you think about the internet as a whole. If you think about it in that sense, it’s really quite a lot of time.

[00:21:18] Felix Arntz: Exactly, and I think it’s important to remind ourselves of that sometimes. I feel myself like announcing something where it’s like, oh, here we scratched 80 milliseconds off. It sounds like nothing. It is quite something, but it sounds like so little that, I don’t know, I feel self-consciously saying such a tiny number as a great win.

But yeah, again, like I think it, you exactly mentioned it, the scale of rolling out performance enhancements like this, it really makes the number matter. And also, people browse so many webpages a day, like even for an individual person. If you go on one website, you easily might visit 10 URLs or more, and that’s just one website. So think about , again, I’m just continuing with that number, like if you had 80 milliseconds gain on all the webpages you visit in a day, I don’t know, it might come out at some seconds, maybe a minute, who knows. And if you do that every single day, like you gain time.

[00:22:09] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, I agree. It’s difficult to parse, isn’t it? The human brain doesn’t kind of work that microscopic level. That really tiny fraction of time is so difficult to become important. But there’s this compound interest effect to it. You know, the more that it adds up, the more time you spend on the internet every day clicking things. And I suppose the curious thing here is, nobody even knows that it’s happened. You would presumably just think, gosh, that is a very quick website. You know, I’m having a fabulous experience here. Everything’s loading amazingly. They must have an amazing server set up or, you know, they’ve got everything configured perfectly. And all the while it’s the Speculation Rules API working in the background.

But I think we’ve got it, you know, it’s adding up to tons of time, probably years, maybe decades of time when you throw that across the whole footprint that WordPress have.

However, most people who don’t follow the WordPress news really, really carefully probably won’t know about this. And there’s nowhere to know about it really, apart from WordPress journalism, and the blog posts that go out from the Performance Team. Because there’s no way in the WordPress UI, there’s no setting, there’s no menu item to go to, there’s no toggle, there’s none of that.

So that then leads me to ask, is there a way to modify this? If you have a need for more eager. Or you just wish to, I don’t know, you’ve got a desire to turn it off for some reason. Can it be modified with code, with hooks, with whatever?

[00:23:31] Felix Arntz: Yeah, certainly. Quick context on the reason that there is no UI in WordPress Core to control it, is that it’s considered a very technical feature, and the philosophy of WordPress Core says, decisions not options. That’s one of the Core philosophies. So try to use defaults that work for the majority, and most people won’t have to change. And then especially when it comes to very technical things, you don’t want to bother an end user that just wants to maintain, create their website with, here you need to learn now about this complex Speculation Rules API.

Like, we already talk about this for like 30 minutes now, and there’s probably so much more to uncover. So you can imagine that certain site owners don’t want to deal with that. So that’s why there’s no UI in WordPress Core. But it can be modified through hooks like you’re saying. There are several filters and actions to modify the behavior programmatically.

And in addition, the Speculative Loading plugin that existed prior to the Core launch, that still exists and it’s now, when you install it on top of 6.8, it still serves a purpose. While it doesn’t ship the whole API anymore, because that’s now part of WordPress Core, it’s still includes a UI where you can configure it via UI in different ways.

And it also changes the default behavior of WordPress, for the speculative loading feature. And that’s essentially because when we started the plugin, we went with a more aggressive default, because we want to know, the plugin only launches at first at small scale, it’s meant to, especially in the case of a feature plugin, it’s meant to inform us about how well it’s working, are there potential issues, and so on.

So we went with a more more performant configuration out of the box with the Speculative Loading plugin. So if you use the plugin, it will use the moderate eagerness that I mentioned before. And then in addition, it uses, and we haven’t covered that at all yet, so it pre-renders the URL. So I can explain that briefly.

The WordPress Core implementation, the Speculation Rules API allows you two alternative modes for speculatively loading a URL. Either you can pre-fetch the URL, or you can pre-render the URL.

Pre-fetching means you essentially just load the, you get the HTML content already, but then you don’t do anything else. Like, it doesn’t load any JavaScript or it doesn’t load any CSS or images, it still waits with all of that until you go to the other page.

With pre-render, it does everything, like literally everything. It loads the HTML, it loads also all the JavaScripts, CSS, images and whatever else is on your page. And it even renders this in the browser, like it basically does everything as if you were already on the page in the browser. Let’s think about it as if you had the page open in another tab and you couldn’t see it.

[00:26:08] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, you’ve just like pulled back a curtain suddenly and there it is. It’s just, it always there. You just couldn’t see it and suddenly.

[00:26:14] Felix Arntz: And the pre-rendering is the thing that can get you to those immediate page loads. Because when you use pre-fetching, it only loads the HTML, so then when you get to the page, it’ll be faster, but you still have to load all the other things, and render it. But pre-render is where, if you have pre-render and eagerness of moderate, and then we go back to our previous example, you hover over link, go back there, two seconds, three seconds later, then you might get this immediate page load with LCP zero.

[00:26:43] Nathan Wrigley: Okay, that’s really interesting. So you’ve kind of got two options. The first option is just accept WordPress Core. That’s how it is. And then, maybe three options. The second option then might be you can modify things with hooks and what have you. And I’m going to link to the articles that Felix wrote in the blog post that goes with this. So go to wptavern.com and search for the episode and you’ll be able to find all the bits. It’s more easy for me to say that than it is to read out the blog titles and things.

And then the other option, the third option would be to download the plugin, which gives you a UI, but just caveat emptor, beware, it will then automatically make things moderate. It’s going to be doing things in a more, a slightly more aggressive way.

[00:27:21] Felix Arntz: It brings you better performance, but it might also have more trade offs on, it will load, certainly to some capacity, load URLs that may not be navigated to. If you install the plugin, just keep in mind that the UI that it provides also would allow you to go back to the WordPress Core default. If you just want a UI and you install the plugin, just go into the UI of the plugin immediately, change it back to conservative pre-fetch, and you’re back at what Core would do as well.

[00:27:45] Nathan Wrigley: Great. Yeah, thank you. Now you mentioned LCP and things like that. And I think there’s been an obsession for the last, let’s go for four years, with speed and trying to get Lighthouse scores to be impressive for your website. I’m curious, is there a way that Google scraping the internet can perceive any of this?

In other words, if you do this, are you doing it simply to make your visitors happy, because they’re the people who are doing the clicking or what have you? Or is there some like Core Web Vitals metric which can be improved by this? Because it feels like there couldn’t be, because I doubt that Google Bot has the capacity to kind of speculatively load anything, but maybe there’s some flag in the, I don’t know, I have no idea how that would work.

[00:28:31] Felix Arntz: So, that’s a great question. I think you’d, certainly when you apply performance enhancements like this, the goal is that they benefit your website’s end users. Google, of course, would love to know how well these features work, right? And also the people that work on the actual Speculation Rules API would love to see how the features are used in production, on production sites. And we, as a Performance Team, would also like to know that, how it goes with WordPress specifically.

So there is a public data set called Chrome User Experience Report, which is sourced from anonymous data from users that use Chrome and have opted into this anonymous data tracking. So there is essentially a data set that collects the performance data of people visiting websites. And that is made publicly available, you can literally, if you know how to use BigQuery, which is this kind of advanced version of MySQL, where you can query gigantic amounts of data, you can query the Chrome User Experience Report data set, and you could be checking like, I don’t know, as long as sites that appear, it basically aggregates all the page, all the data by origin, so the domain.

Any site that is relatively popular is in there. I don’t know exactly what the threshold is, but something like, maybe like at least 50 monthly users or something like that. So then your site will appear in there and you could query this for your own site to see how your site is doing. And you could do this every single month. And you get like a chart, how the performance of your site is doing over time.

Of course, neither Google nor we as a Performance Team cares about one specific site. We’re doing things like in our team, we were building things for WordPress, for the WordPress ecosystem, try to improve the performance of the ecosystem as a whole. So I have been working a lot in the past years and learning a lot about this stuff. How to query the Crux, that’s a short version of it, Crux, the Crux Report, to gain insights on, how do you possibly measure the impact a certain feature has on these metrics?

There’s another data set called HTTP Archive, which is the domains that are in this are also sourced from the Crux Report. But what HTTP Archive is, it basically scrapes all of these URLs every single month, one time, and gets all sorts of public information from these URLs, like which technologies it uses, does it use WordPress? Does it use, I don’t know, React or whatever, all these things. It also stores, from this one momentary point, it also stores the actual HTML body, and it’s a gigantic data set. And also that is public as well. You can look it up on httparchive.org and how to use it.

So the goal of these efforts is to make these different performance data and to basically assess the health of the web ecosystem, publicly available, and then also these, especially HTTP Archive has a lot of charts on their own website based on their own data that essentially, yeah, makes it easily available without having to query BigQuery data.

But when you actually can query BigQuery data, it becomes really powerful. So we can combine the data from HTTP Archive to see which origins are using WordPress. So then we get like a scaled down version of the whole web that is just the WordPress sites. And then we can combine it with the Crux data that has the performance results for all origins, but scope it down to only the origins that use WordPress.

And that way we can see, for instance, the median LCP for a given month across all WordPress sites is this. Or the median INP and all the other metrics. More importantly, what we have been using as a more important metric though, is what’s called the passing rate. For every Core Web Vitals metric, there is a threshold where it’s, under this threshold is good, above this threshold, it’s not good. So for LCP for instance, that’s 2.5 seconds.

And passing rate is essentially the number of, in this example, is the number of origins that have a median LCP that’s better than 2.5 seconds, the percentage of origins that have an LCP that’s better than 2.5 seconds. And that you can track over time to see how WordPress LCP is improving or decreasing over time. That’s how we essentially monitor performance for WordPress at a high level.

And then we’ve been doing all sorts of experiments to try to get feature specific improvements. That’s really the difficult part because these data sets only gather data, the Archive data set only gathers data once a month, the Crux data set gave this data, it has all the data, but only the performance data. So it does not know, at what point did you activate a certain feature or deactivate another feature? That data doesn’t exist. So we can only make assumptions.

Like, for instance, even when you want to measure the difference, and like an easy example, and that’s already complicated, is to measure the difference from one WordPress version to the next. HTTP Archive has data, whether a site is on, let’s say 6.8 or 6.7, but it’s from one specific moment in time. And we generally broaden these moments in time to the whole month because that’s the generally, like they do it once a month. If you see that a site is on 6.8, I think the HTTP Archive runs, like the actual queries usually run somewhere between 20th and 25th of the month.

So if you see that the site is 6.8, you don’t know, is the site on 6.8 the entire month or did it just update to 6.8 a day before and most of the month data is actually the previous version? This is just unknowns that we have to deal with. And the data set being so huge, because WordPress is so popular, that helps a lot to sort of like make these unknowns maybe less impactful. Because if you’re at scale see that 6.8 has a big improvement, we can’t say that this value precisely is correct, but if it’s a clear improvement, we can assume that there is an actual improvement to a certain degree.

And doing that for feature specific level is even more complex. I don’t think we have time to get into this too much right now, but I just want to say that this 1.9% value that is in the blog post is based on such an effort, where I try to look at all the sites that have speculation rules, and I looked at all the same sites before they activated speculation rules and get this median difference between all of them. And I don’t even know how to explain anymore because I don’t remember, because it was so complicated.

[00:34:42] Nathan Wrigley: I am so glad that you are able to explain it though. I mean, firstly, really interesting, all of that, really interesting. Because you just sort of peeled back a whole curtain that I didn’t even know existed. So there’s just this aggregated, opted-in data coming out of the browser, dropping into this massive data set. I can only imagine what that is like to deal with.

But it does mean that you’ve got anonymised data. You can make reasonable guesses, in the aggregate, about what’s happening. You know, you can refine it to WordPress, you can refine it to 6.7, 6.8, okay? And day by day, maybe it’s not meaningful. But if you spread it over one month, six months, what have you, more and more trends start to pop out.

So you can see over time, you’ve got this 1.9%. And it, terribly complicated though it might be, I’m glad that you did that work for us. That’s amazing. Okay. And I didn’t know that whole thing was going on.

And again, getting back to the point that you made at the beginning, the whole purpose of this is to make it better for your users. The purpose is not for the data that Google’s gathering, but it’s gathering it. And it’s helpful because people like you can then use it and make reasonable assumptions about what the rest of us ought to be doing with our WordPress websites. But the key metric there is, does it perform better for your users? And of course, we know the answer to that.

[00:36:00] Felix Arntz: Just wanted to quickly add like we have been, these two data sets have been important source for us as a Performance Team from the very beginning in terms of even prioritising what we work on. There’s ways to get a high level idea. Like, out of all the 50 things that we could do to improve performance, which have shown to be the most impactful on the web so far outside of WordPress, or maybe even on the few WordPress sites that already use it through some other way. So it has helped a lot on the prioritisation, and personally a big advocate for data driven decision making. And in many parts of the WordPress project, we are not able to do that because we don’t have much data. But I’m really pleased that on the performance side, there is this big data set that can be used to see what is actually impactful.

[00:36:46] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, you can be really confident that your decisions are based upon fact, which is so nice. A lot of the WordPress project is, you know, intuition and design and things like that, and it’s hard to get agreement about that, and hard to get things right for everybody. But in this case, that’s slightly different.

[00:37:00] Felix Arntz: For anybody that’s interested in this to learn more, I did write a blog post on makewordpress.org/core at some point about it. How to assess performance with HTTP Archive, something like that. That’s something that we can probably, that you can probably look at. There’s a whole collab. I worked out for a while on a collab to teach as a sort of like tutorial, how to get started with this for anybody that’s interested.

[00:37:23] Nathan Wrigley: Okay, I’ve got a couple of pieces that I’ve got open over here, which are probably not the piece that you’ve just mentioned. So when I come back and edit this, I’ll make sure that I get in touch with you and we find that, and we’ll put that into the show notes. So there’ll be at least three things that you, dear listener, can go and check out.

I’m just wondering if there are any situations, because we know what people are like. Performance experts, they love to configure their servers, they love to put things at the edge that, you know, all these clever things that are going on. Are there any scenarios where things like the speculative loading that that can conflict, or overlap or be something that you actually don’t want to do because you’ve already got something in place that might be handling, I don’t know, let’s say for example, you’re in team Cloudflare, and you’ve jumped in on all the different things that they’ve got? Perhaps they do this already. I don’t know. But I’m just wondering if there are any scenarios where, let’s say I’m a hosting company, or I’m just really into my performance. Are there any scenarios where I need to be mindful, maybe I want to switch this off?

[00:38:22] Felix Arntz: I don’t think there’s a lot on the hosting side, but there can be on the whatever client side’s technologies you use. So because this speculative loading happens in the browser, so the, I don’t think there’s anything on the hosting side, or server side, that could do something similar. I think that wouldn’t work.

But there are other ways that some similar things like this have already been done outside of a browser specification, outside of a browser API. Like there are certain JavaScript frameworks, for instance, that have something like speculative loading. Like, if you have a Next.js site, for instance, which I think is not very common to be used together with WordPress, but if you do have a Next.js site for instance, it might load URLs speculatively too, but through its own mechanism, like a completely separate approach. I’m not sure about specific JavaScript libraries right now that do exactly this, but there are definitely things like it that some sites were already using before the browser Speculation Rules API came around.

[00:39:15] Nathan Wrigley: Okay, so broadly speaking, if you’re a WordPress, a typical WordPress user, you’ve got nothing to worry about. And you probably know that you’ve got something interesting and unusual going on with loading things in a different way, so you’re probably okay.

One of the things that I did want to know, I just wondered if there were certain, I don’t know, let’s say I’ve got a WordPress website, maybe there are bits of that website that I don’t wish to be speculatively loading.

I’m not really sure what that might be. An example that I think came out of one of your blog posts was you took the example of a Woo, well, I presume it was WooCommerce, you know, the end of the URL being cart or something like that, you know, so forward slash cart, forward slash whatever.

That’s possible though. I presume, again, with hooks you could say, okay, this predetermined set of URLs, we don’t want to speculatively load anything. That kind of stuff can be done. The URL parameters can be configured into all this.

[00:40:05] Felix Arntz: Yeah, exactly. So you can exclude certain URLs, or URL patterns from being applied to the speculative loading. And you can also configure whether you want to exclude them entirely or whether you want to exclude them only from pre-rendering, but not pre-fetching.

So this is important to consider because the WordPress site, well, probably now 95% of the sites with 6.8 use pre-fetch because that’s a default. There are still sites that change it to pre-render. And then there are different implications for the site, for the URLs that are pre-rendered.

And one of the considerations is, that’s actually another reason why we went with pre-fetch. because also pre-fetch, even though it’s less performant than pre-render, is also a safer option at the scale that we roll this out to all WordPress sites. Because the only risk with pre-fetch occurs if there is a URL that modifies something just by visiting that URL, which is an anti-pattern, like you should not do this, but there are plugins that do this occasionally. For instance, if you have like a URL that’s called empty cart, and just by visiting that URL you empty your shopping cart.

That means, if you speculatively load the URL and you don’t visit it, your cart is emptied. You don’t want that. This is the only risk with pre-fetch. But, for what it’s worth, WordPress, the WordPress Core implementation also includes some default exclusions already. One of them is that it won’t speculatively load any URL with query parameters, like those question marks, something. And that’s because most WordPress sites by far are using pretty permalinks, and on those sites, having a query parameters is extremely unusual. And if there is, it’s usually from a plugin that does something specific.

And so that’s why we exclude URLs because the chance that, like WordPress Core doesn’t have anything in the front end that will change something when you visit a URL, but plugins might. And plugins would usually handle this through query parameters if they do, and that’s why we exclude any query parameter URLs.

[00:42:07] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, I know that you will not have an answer to the next question, but I’m going to ask it anyway. But I’m just curious on your thoughts about it, because I know that anybody listening to this, there’s going to be a proportion of people thinking, wait, we want less bits traveling across the internet.

And I’m thinking about the environmental impact of things now. You know, we don’t want pre-fetching anything, because that’s then potentially just wasted energy. Just carbon being burnt for stuff which may, or may not, be looked at. And obviously the WordPress approach that you’ve taken is to try and minimise that.

But I just wondered if you had any thoughts, you know, around that and whether you could sort of calm people down about that or whether or not it, was that whole thing disregarded? Where does it fit into the thinking of all of this?

[00:42:52] Felix Arntz: Yeah, like I said in the beginning, it is a trade off that you have to make, but it also depends like, which decision you take probably depends on how your site is being used, like what is the best configuration of speculative loading for your own site?

If you go with a too eager configuration where there’s tons of URLs are eagerly loaded and then they might never be visited, then this definitely has a negative impact, like you’re saying. But obviously the ideal outcome is that the wasteful reloaded URLs are minimised and at the end of the day you, by speculatively loading, you improve the user experience.

I can’t really answer where you draw the line in that. That being said, the adverse effects of URLs being loaded that you don’t navigate to with this conservative eagerness is so little. That’s why we chose that value to be the default. And you can go for more performant solutions, or configurations, but when you do so, please test how that works out.

You can also, don’t want to get too deep into this, but you can also, if you have some kind of analytics provider for your site, you can gather like performance data or you can see which links users typically click on. And then you could configure speculation rules in the way that these links specifically may use like a more eager configuration. But the other ones don’t.

This is where people really get, I’ve not personally done this but when, I’ve heard from other people when they work with enterprise clients, they really go in and look at, oh, when somebody has sent this URL, they usually click one of these four URLs, one of these four links, and then you can configure speculation rules to say, these four links should have moderate eagerness, but all other ones only conservative, for instance.

[00:44:22] Nathan Wrigley: I can see a whole third party ecosystem of plugin developers kind of rubbing their hands together. You know, those that create performance plugins kind of leaning into exactly what you just said. Here’s your entire WordPress website, and here’s what we think, you know, in the same way that SEO plugins might give you a traffic light. Here’s a set of URLs, which we think you are not serving in the way that is going to be beneficial to your users or what have you. So, oh, that’s interesting as well.

[00:44:46] Felix Arntz: The tough thing though is that it’s usually, I think it’s going to be very heavily dependent on the individual site. That’s where my hesitation is with that is that like, I’m not sure how much a plugin, a generally applied plugin, throughout the ecosystem could predict that. I think it’s often depending on the layout of the site. What is even the content of the site, right? What do people mostly click on? I think that makes it challenging from a general plugin perspective. Like to me, that’s mostly something that developers would do for their client’s websites, or agencies would do for a client’s website or at an individual level.

[00:45:18] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah. Well, I mean, it’s just the beginning, isn’t it? It’s dropped in fairly recently. No doubt, the WordPress ecosystem will kind of figure out a posture on this. Maybe third party plugins will come along. Maybe developers will produce more documentation about how to wrangle it. How to surmise whether or not your website is using the Speculation Rules API in a way which is helping you, I don’t know, measuring the cost of your server infrastructure and what have you. But just the beginning.

So there you go. Now, dear listener, you know a whole load of stuff about WordPress 6.8 that you didn’t. Before because probably, it was completely invisible to you. So, is there anything we missed, Felix? Is there any burning issue that you think we did not cover that and that was important?

[00:45:58] Felix Arntz: No. I think we covered pretty much anything, everything. I just wanted to add that the new data from the Crux Report comes out, I think actually it came out yesterday, I believe. So it comes out every second Tuesday of the month. So I’m about to look at that. I want to take a look at that, definitely by the end of this week to see whether we can get any impact data now that speculative loading is out because, so the way that this works is the Crux data is released for the month before. That’s what happened, I think yesterday. So now we should have data on April where WordPress 6.8 came out. So now we can see how much did this feature launching in 6.8, and 6.8 in general, affect performance, hopefully in a good way.

[00:46:39] Nathan Wrigley: Okay. Yeah, yeah. So this is actually for you, quite a big moment. You are suddenly going to get this data dump, which is going to actually cover this 43% of the web. It will be on all, well, most of the sites, and you are suddenly going to see what the impact is. Do you know, if you write that up, I will find it, if it’s out before I produce this post, then I will definitely link to that. And I’ll be fascinated to see if we can calculate how many decades, or weeks, or months, or years of time we have actually saved. That’s absolutely brilliant.

Thank you so much for explaining it, helping to create it in the first place, and basically improving WordPress in a very, very demure way. You know, not shouting it from the rooftops, but doing a lot in the background to make everybody’s experience of the web a whole lot better. Felix Arntz, thank you so much for chatting to me today.

[00:47:29] Felix Arntz: Yeah. Thank you.

[00:00:19] Nathan Wrigley: Welcome to the Jukebox Podcast from WP Tavern. My name is Nathan Wrigley.

Jukebox is a podcast which is dedicated to all things WordPress. The people, the events, the plugins, the blocks, the themes, and in this case, what WordPress and Drupal have in common.

If you’d like to subscribe to the podcast, you can do that by searching for WP Tavern in your podcast player of choice, or by going to wptavern.com/feed/podcast, and you can copy that URL into most podcast players.

If you have a topic that you’d like us to feature on the podcast, I’m keen to hear from you and hopefully get you or your idea featured on the show. Head to wp tavern.com/contact/jukebox, and use the form there.

So on the podcast today we have Chris Reynolds. Chris is a developer advocate at Pantheon, where he brings nearly 20 years of experience in the WordPress community, as well as deep involvement with Drupal and open source technology at large. Prior to his advocacy role, he worked at some of the top WordPress agencies like Human Made and Web Dev Studios. He’s been active at events like DrupalCon, PressConf, and Word Camps.

In this episode we set aside the usual WordPress only focus, and turn our attention to two CMSs, WordPress and Drupal. What makes them tick, where they excel and where they might have something to learn from each other.

Chris draws on his unique perspective working closely with both platforms as Pantheon is one of the few hosts with a 50 50 split between WordPress and Drupal sites, and has a significant footprint in both ecosystems.

We discuss the similarities and differences between the two open source CMS communities, from the mechanics of flagship events like WordCamps and DrupalCon, to the ways these projects organize their contributors and support community initiatives.

Chris explains how Drupal’s model with its association run funding, and project governance, compares to WordPress’s approach, including how each community approaches plugin and module development, and what role agencies and companies play in contributing to Core and the broader ecosystem.

If you’re curious about how open source projects organize themselves, how their communities navigate growth and challenge, and what WordPress can learn from Drupal, and vice versa, this episode is for you.

If you’re interested in finding out more, you can find all of the links in the show notes by heading to wp tavern.com/podcast, where you’ll find all the other episodes as well.

And so without further delay, I bring you Chris Reynolds.

I am joined on the podcast today by Chris Reynolds. Hello Chris.

[00:03:20] Chris Reynolds: Hi. How’s it going?

[00:03:22] Nathan Wrigley: You cannot see, dear listener, what I can see. Chris has the most amazing setup where he’s doing the recording. I guess it’s an attic or something like that, but it looks like the Starship Enterprise from where I’m sitting.

[00:03:34] Chris Reynolds: I’m working on that.

[00:03:34] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, it’s really nice. Chris is joining us today and we’re going to have a conversation about the WordPress community. The things that we do well, and perhaps the things that we could improve. And we’re going to probably use Drupal as a comparison.

Before we get into that, Chris, I know it’s a dreadfully banal question, but it’s always good to scope out where you are and where you stand with WordPress and Drupal and the companies that you work for. So just a moment really to give us your little potted bio of who you are and what have you.

[00:04:04] Chris Reynolds: Sure. My name is Chris Reynolds, I am a developer advocate at Pantheon. I was formerly a senior software engineer for Pantheon for about three years, before joining the developer relations team around August, right before WordCamp US in September last year.

I’ve been in the WordPress community for close to 20 years. I think I’ve gone back to my first blog posts and my first, like talking about technology that I was using. And I think that I’ve found references to using WordPress in some capacity back in 2005, so almost exactly 20 years.

But even before that I was really interested, like as a side hobby in just open source software, playing with Linux and playing with other open source community projects that I found I was really a big fan of one called Ampache for a long time, which was a music sort of library app thing written in PHP. That was really cool. I think it still exists even.

But yeah, so I’m a developer advocate at Pantheon. That means I do a lot of these sorts of things, talk about best practices, write a lot of blog posts, get in a lot of trouble, not really, and go to events and stuff like that. So I was at DrupalCon in March. I was at PressConf last month. Probably doing stuff this summer and in the fall.

[00:05:14] Nathan Wrigley: Just to lean in a little bit on the Pantheon side of things. Pantheon, a hosting company, but very much aligned in two worlds, maybe more than two. But from my perspective, I used to use Drupal exclusively until about 2015. That was my CMS of choice for many, many years. I think Drupal 4, and then finally I jumped ship at Drupal 8 over to WordPress and have been that consistently.

But Pantheon was around as what felt like at that time, so we are going back more than a decade, the only sort of managed Drupal host, but it definitely had a WordPress side to it as well. Can you just speak to that for us for a moment? That is Pantheon’s sort of MVP, isn’t it? It handles managed hosting for both of those platforms. And maybe there’s more, I don’t know.

[00:05:57] Chris Reynolds: Yeah. I mean, I think that from a platform perspective, we obviously do host Drupal and WordPress. We also can host like Next.js and sort of front end sites. But the sort of hidden Pantheon magic is in the kind of DevOps, WebOps we like to call it, layer that happens like somewhere between pushing code and the code being a thing that like site managers and editors and things like work with, right? So automation tools, and we were one of the first providers that used Git by default. Now that’s not such a big deal anymore, but like that was a big thing within Pantheon for a really long time.

When I was a developer, the first time that I used Pantheon as a developer when I was back at WebDevStudios was, the thing that was the killer feature for me was we have a thing called Multi Dev, which is, each site has a development, a test, and a live environment. So everybody gets those three things and we have a very specific sort of workflow. Code goes to dev, to test, to live in that order. But we have these Multi Devs, which are entirely separate containers where you can build, you can do all your feature development on a branch in a Multi Dev and see what that looks like before merging it into dev.

It sounds like maybe not that much now, but I know when I was back in agency life and even when I was working at Human Made and we had built our own sort of stack that had this very similar kind of system, we didn’t have Multi Dev because spinning up new containers for sites that you’re just going to destroy at some point in the next couple weeks or days anyway is expensive and hard.

And so what that meant was the master branch, or the development branch, of all of your code is always really messy and dirty, and you want to keep that away from the code that is going to production, right? Because that’s where your experimental code is. Maybe you didn’t back it out entirely. That’s where like a whole bunch of weird database stuff is going. That’s like the junk, right? So you want to keep that separate from like your staging branch and your production branch.

And with Pantheon, the idea is your development branch is just where your finalised code goes, because you can do all that testing in a separate environment and then when you go from dev to test, it’s not a headache, it’s just this is production ready code, basically.

[00:08:10] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, I remember my recollection of Pantheon was that it was one of those platforms that, well, platform really, it felt more like a platform than a host, if you know what I mean? It just offered more as a layer on top of the typical host that you might find.

However, you also do a whole bunch of stuff around the Drupal space, but also the WordPress space. I’m just curious, maybe you don’t have this information, but maybe as a developer advocate, you do. What would you say, as a percentage, does Drupal represent as opposed to WordPress? You know, is it like an 80, 20 split, a 90, 10, a 50, 50?

[00:08:40] Chris Reynolds: We’re almost exactly 50, 50.

[00:08:42] Nathan Wrigley: Interesting.

[00:08:43] Chris Reynolds: And we’ve actually honestly been 50, 50 for about five-ish years, five or six years.

[00:08:48] Nathan Wrigley: So does that mean that in the Drupal side of things, okay, dear listener, WordPress as a CMS is a giant, it’s a leviathan of a thing, you know. Occupies a massive amount of the market share. Drupal I think is somewhere in the region of, I think it’s like 1.2% or something like that.

[00:09:05] Chris Reynolds: Yeah, we might be creeping up to two-ish, but yeah, it’s pretty low, yeah.

[00:09:09] Nathan Wrigley: That then implies that you as a company have, you’ve got your foot on the pedal more on the Drupal side of things. Maybe the people who are building clever things on top of Drupal are using you much more. You’re a bigger player in that space than you are inside the WordPress space, even though it’s, you know, the same in terms of revenue. As a community endeavor, Drupal probably means a lot more to you than WordPress maybe.

[00:09:32] Chris Reynolds: Yeah, I mean definitely going to DrupalCon for my first time this last March, it’s definitely, so there’s Acquia, which is essentially Drupal’s version of Automattic. Acquia is a company that was founded by Dries, who is the founder of Drupal, and very much like managed Drupal hosting the same kind of thing that Automattic is into, and a lot of the sort of same ideas, at least from a, where it sits in the ecosystem.

But, you know, you go to a WordCamp and you see the big Automattic booth and you’ll see a couple other sort of bigger hosting booths. At a DrupalCon it’s like, there’s the Pantheon booth and there’s the Acquia booth, and then there’s a bunch of little things. We’re definitely the kind of headliners because between the two of us, I think probably we do own most of those Drupal sites that exist in the ecosystem. But we’re definitely a bigger fish in that pond, than perhaps the WordPress pond. There’s also a lot more fish in the WordPress pond.

It’s an interesting thing, like for me coming to DrupalCon for the first time, to see just what Pantheon’s footprint is in contrast to when I go to WordCamps. And, you know, we were big in WordCamps for a long time, and then we kind of pulled back a little bit, and then the intervening time it’s I think felt by the community like, well, who are you? Where did you go? We’ve gotten sort of feedback from folks being like, I used to think about Pantheon, but like it’s been a long time, you laid a lot of people off. Why should I care anymore?

And that’s, you know, part of my personal goal is to say, no, this is why you should care. That’s one of the things that excited me of joining the DevRel team was to go back to our roots and go back into the community, and we still have a really good product that I believed in when I was a developer and I still think is really good as, you know, obviously I think of it as a developer advocate. But like I’m here because I like the thing. I think we have a good thing.

[00:11:19] Nathan Wrigley: Do you basically have the exact same platform for both of the CMSs? So I know there’s all the other stuff that you do, but let’s just concentrate on Drupal and concentrate on WordPress, those two things. Do you basically have the exact same platform? Or is there some nuance that you can do this on WordPress because of, I don’t know, WP-CLI or the REST API or whatever it is that you can’t do in the Drupal side? In other words, if I sign up for a Drupal account, do things look different, behave differently, or is it broadly the same?

[00:11:45] Chris Reynolds: It is broadly the same. There is sort of individual differences but they’re very minor. And honestly like, in many ways, I think that when Pantheon, and this is before my time, obviously, but I think when Pantheon jumped into the WordPress boat, it was really more of a, well, we have this stack and we’re really good at this thing, and WordPress is also a PHP application that has a lot of the same requirements, surely we can just run the exact same stack for WordPress.

And what’s sort of evolved over time is like, well, that’s like 80% true, but it’s the 20% that’s really important. And if you just go into building WordPress sites or hosting WordPress sites with the same mentality as you’re doing Drupal, well, you are going to run into a lot of the growing pains that we ran into, right? Drupal from like a database perspective is far more efficient. The queries are much shorter because the way that it’s structured is more efficient than WordPress. WordPress, you kind of have to do more sort of optimisation on top. So those are things that we needed to figure out.

The Drupal space sort of moved toward Solr as their sort of search tool of choice, which is a project from the Apache project. WordPress went into Elasticsearch. So trying to convince a WordPress team to use Solr, in fact, a pretty old version of Solr, is kind of pulling teeth. Like, well, why would I do that when I’m doing Elasticsearch for everything else? I don’t know why you would do that, honestly. Like, you should probably use Elasticsearch.

And so we’re like actually going in, that’s a project that’s on the roadmap as well finally, it’s something I’ve been talking about for like three years internally. There’s little nuances. Drupal obviously since version eight has been using Composer as a fundamental part of how the CMS just works. Whereas WordPress, you’ve got some people that are using Composer, in fact, last time I was here, two years ago, I was talking about Composer. And I don’t know that the adoption of Composer has really changed much in the WordPress ecosystem since that time.

I would like to say that it has. I still think that you should be using Composer. Throwback to the last WP Tavern Jukebox podcast that I was on about Composer. But yeah, so there’s little differences and I think that that’s, there’s not anything from a platform level where your experience is going to be that much different.

[00:14:00] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah. If you were to take a look at the Pantheon platform, I think quickly poking around on the site, maybe the pricing page or something would give you an intuition that really you are kind of more for the sort of enterprise level, I think would be fair to say. You know, you are trying to get the bleeding edge out of the websites that you’ve got, and so it’s, high traffic, that kind of thing.

But the endeavor today really is to put all of that code stuff to one side and get into the community side of things. So just to reiterate, we threw around a couple of words there, and maybe the listener doesn’t really know that even there’s a WordPress community or a Drupal community.

There really is. There’s just hundreds, maybe thousands of people who attend events, they might go to a local thing, which we might call them Meetup on the WordPress side of things. I don’t know if there’s similar things in Drupal. But then there’s these bigger events, which we’d call WordCamps, and then there are bigger ones of those which are kind of flagship WordCamps.

There’s one in the US, there’s one in Asia, and there’s one in Europe. They happen each year. And thousands of people show up and inhabit the same space, listen to presentations, hang out in the hallway.

And then you’ve got the same thing happening on the Drupal side. It’s called Drupal Con, but forgive my ignorance, I think the DrupalCon thing is a once a year thing and it moves around the globe. It’s not necessarily in the same space. Have I got that about right?

[00:15:15] Chris Reynolds: It’s more than once a year. It’s actually the equivalent. So DrupalCon is the equivalent of flagship WordCamps. So there’s a DrupalCon, there was a DrupalCon US in Atlanta this last year. There is going to be a DrupalCon Europe in, where is it? Maybe Vienna, in the fall. There’s a DrupalCon Asia that’s just starting to get fired up. That’s happening I think in, the next one is like 2026, I believe. I think they just had their first one. So very similar, like the Cons in the Drupal space are equivalent to the flagship WordCamps. There’s also DrupalCamps in much the same way as there are local WordCamps.

I feel like in the WordPress space, a lot of the local WordCamps kind of, they either blew up and got super big, or they kind of fizzled after Covid, right? I don’t have a lot of local camps. I don’t see a lot of local camps anymore. I do see those things happening a little bit in the Drupal space, or at least starting up again.

[00:16:08] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah so, what we’re basically painting a picture of here is that we’ve got two bits of software which basically are trying to achieve the same thing. They’re a CMS. They’re trying to make it so that non-technical, as well as technical people, can run a project and put it online. Whether that’s a website or an e-commerce solution, whatever it may be, you’re trying to get your stuff out onto the internet. And both of those things will work.

But also, behind the code is a bunch of people who are willing to go and hang out in the same place, the community, if you like, attend these events. And so there’s massive similarity. In fact, you know, if you’re an alien landing, I suspect that you wouldn’t really know that the two things were different. Okay, there’s different advertisers in the hall and there’s different logos and things, but broadly they would probably look really similar.

However, in the more recent past, and if you don’t know the story, I’m not going to go into it too much here, but you can figure it out by looking at various news articles in the WordPress space and what have you. The WordPress community has really been pulled in different directions, let’s say that. And it’s curious because no sooner had this happened than some of the more prominent people, Dries Buytaert, who is the founder of Drupal, put out a piece, really as a way of kind of offering, look, this is what Drupal do. We know you’ve got on the WordPress side things that are not working out for you. Here’s our model.

And far be it from me to say whether that is the perfect system. I don’t really know it, but I was just curious to get your thoughts on what that is. And that’s going to really occupy the majority of the rest of this podcast. What the Drupal community looks like. What you believe it does well. How it does things differently. So let’s start there. Let’s start with Dries’, what he was telling us about. How does Drupal, the community, how does it do things differently in terms of, I don’t know, events, the access to the code? So yeah, a conversation around that really. So I’m just going to throw it over to you, Chris. How is Drupal different than WordPress on that level?

[00:18:05] Chris Reynolds: Well, I was saying before we got on that I kind of had a crash course in Drupal when I went leading up to, and then immediately following going to DrupalCon. Part of that crash course was at DrupalCon, they actually have a community summit. It’s similar to like, in WordPress we’ve had sort of community summits before. At DrupalCon it was really more of like a track, with like presenters and like also conversations. It’s like space for chatting and hanging out with people.

But mostly, mostly it was like community related talks in a space, talking about what’s working, what’s not working, as well as a sort of a get to know you sort of thing. And that was really helpful. I also did homework before the event in watching a couple of Dries’ last Dries Notes. So Matt has State of the Word, Dries has Dries Notes, which is just like keynote. It’s basically the same thing, like the same state of the CMS, right?

I caught up on what was going on in Drupal before the Con. And one of the things that I learned about, and then I followed up and dug into the history a little bit, was we have the same problems, right? WordPress and Drupal have the same fundamental sort of issues from both a contribution standpoint as well as a just organisational, managerial management kind of standpoint.

And Drupal, or Dries, just kind of got to a point sooner where he’s like, well, I can’t do all of these things. So the Drupal Association, and I’m sure there’s some Drupalistas that are going to correct me on my history, but as I understand it, the Drupal Association was initially formed to sort of manage events, because Dries knew that they needed to have events. They were having events, they started off just similar to WordPress, small camp things. And they started getting bigger and Dries is like, well, I can’t do all of the management stuff of this, so I need to like do something, create an organisation that can do that stuff.

And that was where the Drupal Association first was founded, to sort of manage that thing. And then over time, that evolved into being able to fund, or kind of oversee, directions for where, more of like a community representative in the general sort of CMS development ecosystem, right?

There is a board. They are elected by the community. They are paid. They manage events, but they also, all of the money that is made after expenses and stuff from DrupalCons and donations and whatever, they have the authority to direct into whatever projects they think would be most valuable for the evolution, or the fulfillment, of the ideals of the Drupal software, right?

So Dries says, I want to do a thing, and he can go do that thing. The Drupal Association is like, well, I think that what we really need is this kind of thing, and we’re going to devote some of our resources that we have into hiring some folks to work on that thing.

So, most recently, where you can kind of see this in action is there’s been a lot of hype about Drupal CMS. That is a thing that exists because of the Drupal Association, because the Drupal Association saw, okay, I mean, I assume, I’m reading between the lines. But I assume that you can’t ignore the sort of declining line of Drupal in the broader ecosystem of CMS usage. But also, there’s been a really big problem since Drupal seven of a lot of the sites on Drupal seven remain on Drupal seven.

Drupal seven should be end of life by all accounts. Everything else up to the current version is end of life. Drupal seven isn’t, because there’s still, it’s now just under, but it’s still close to 50% of Drupal sites are running Drupal seven. It’s a version of Drupal that’s about 10 years old.

And the reason why, there’s so many people. Drupal historically has always been a thing where, when a new version came along, you kind of killed your old site and rebuilt it in the new version, because it wasn’t sort of backwards compatible. WordPress has gotten around that by just remaining backwards compatible all throughout its history.

Drupal seven to Drupal eight was the first version to introduce Composer. We talked about Composer and how a Composer’s been part of Drupal for a really long time. that was the cutoff. So that was a pretty big shift. And there’s a lot of people, teams, organizations that have not made, or have been reluctant to make that shift because it’s a, it’s a rebuild. It’s a full site rebuild.

It’s not just, we can just migrate the thing over. You have to rebuild your site. You do need to migrate your stuff over, but also you need to rebuild your site. So in the intervening time, WordPress has gained adoption and acceptance and grown into 43%. And so now we’ve got these Drupal seven sites where it’s like, well, we need to rebuild anyway. Do we rebuild the site in Drupal 10, 11? Or do we rebuild the site in WordPress where I’m never going to have this problem ever again.

And that’s where a lot of that like, bar graph, a lot of those sites have moved to WordPress. Some of them have stayed on Drupal, but it’s a declining number, right?

So obviously, folks inside Drupal see this and know that it’s happening, and know that they need to do something about it. So Drupal CMS is basically like a layer on top of the latest version of Drupal, which is 11. It’s got a far nicer installation screen. I wrote a blog post about this on the Pantheon blog, I think. It’s got a far nicer installation screen, that actually walks you through, stepping through like what type of site, what type of content you want to have on your site. To actually get you thinking about the site that you’re building before you just hit install. Which I find to be amazingly refreshing.

And then beyond that the admin interface is far less cluttered. I know one of my personal gripes about working with Drupal, even up until, up until now, like up until before Drupal CMS is that there’s too many buttons, there’s too many menus, there’s too much stuff. Like, I don’t know where stuff is.

This feels a lot more familiar, partially because I think it kind of resembles the WordPress admin a little bit. You know, sidebar on the left, menus. And it feels just more, more familiar to me. And then also they have built in some new architectural things like, recipes are a thing where, a recipe, Drupal has modules, WordPress has plugins. Modules generally need a lot of configuration, to get them actually working.

When you install a module, it’s not like it just works outta the box. A lot of WordPress plugins, you install a plugin, it just works outta the box. So a recipe is like, here is, maybe a collection of modules, maybe a specific module, but it’s probably a combination of a bunch of different modules, but also the configuration that goes along with them.

So when you install a recipe, it’s like, here’s the stuff that you probably will need. You’re most likely to need this stuff in this order, configured with these settings, and then you can do whatever you need after that. But like, here’s the go bag and now you can move on. So, one of the really interesting recipes for Drupal CMS is the SEO recipe.

And that is interesting because they’re using a Yoast module. The Yoast module is literally taking the JavaScript of Yoast SEO from the WordPress plugin and throwing it into Drupal. And what’s fascinating about that is it doesn’t have all of the other stuff that comes with the Yoast plugin, it’s just the traffic light system, and the scanning the text system and it’s, so it’s the best possible implementation of Yoast that I’ve seen because it’s all of the good stuff.

They’ve also built an AI recipe. And that’s interesting because when that is configured, you can actually talk to an AI chat bot inside your Drupal instance and ask it questions about Drupal or about your site. You could say, hey, I need to create an event content type. I’m gonna be hosting events. They’re this type of thing. I need to have a, like a, date picker and whatever, and we are taking attendees and you can tell that the chat bot that that’s the thing that you need. And it will, to the best of its ability, build that content type inside Drupal for you.

So the WordPress equivalent is, I have a podcast and I need an episode post type. I just talk to a chat bot, and it magically creates that episode post type for me with like the Gutenberg blocks I need. That makes it an audio format or whatever. And, it’s just there for you. It’s like, great, thank you chat bot. As a WordPress developer, I think that’s really cool. Because that’s kind of the thing that I want, is like I know how to do some things, but I really don’t know any of the buttons and gears and gizmos in the Drupal admin.

But if I have a chat bot to sort of help guide me through, I know I can figure out the rest of the way, or I can see how it did the thing, and I can figure out, oh okay, so that’s what I need to do. And so all of these things are geared toward the idea of just getting more people using Drupal and lowering the barrier to entry.

Because one of the big things with Drupal is it’s always been really developer centric, really highly technical, and you need sort of skilled individuals to even just manage the site. So if we lower that barrier to entry, you can target the people that are already using WordPress, the sort of content level people or the site administrators that don’t have a lot of technical experience.

That’s all like basically because the Drupal Association put money, funding that they had into backing these very specific projects.

[00:27:25] Nathan Wrigley: It is kind of a curious idea, isn’t it? It’s like a subset of the CMSs capabilities put into this one project, Drupal CMS. Which has like a target audience in mind. So it’s like a blogger, or a podcaster or something like that. You know, it’s for content creators. That was the message I got from when I read all of the, the marketing bits and pieces that came out.

But also addressing the need for it to look nice. That was always an area I thought WordPress excelled at. When you logged into the WordPress admin, it was night and day looking at a Drupal admin. Everything was consistent. Everything looked modern and clean and easy to understand. On the Drupal side, it was, it was much more difficult to understand. But also things like updating plugins. Backwards compatibility on the WordPress side, always much more straightforward. On the Drupal side, much more difficult.

And so this is such a curious experiment. Putting it into the hands of people who might want a blog, or whatever it may be, and hopefully making it more straightforward. And the website for it, I will link to it in the show notes, it’s just so kind of modern and appealing and friendly and, Drupal never, for me at least when I got to Drupal eight, for the exact reasons that you described, that’s all of my sites would have stayed on Drupal seven.

It definitely wasn’t that kind of warm and fuzzy welcome to everybody kind of thing. But now it really look like it’s leaning into that. But getting back to your main point, that was funded from the inside by some, facets, some internal mechanisms, some body inside the Drupal Association that decided that’s what we need to do. This is where the money’s going. But are you saying that decision making was divorced from Dries?

[00:29:02] Chris Reynolds: Dries leads the technical architecture. And Dries will like say we need to do a thing. And he may be personally involved in the leadership of doing that thing, but mostly he’s like at a director level. Like, go my people and go forth and do stuff. And the Drupal Association says, okay, well one of the things that Dries said we need to do is X. So how can we make X happen? And in the case of recipes, it meant getting agencies and people from agencies involved. Create like a coalition. Like there’s a bunch, it wasn’t just one agency. It was like a bunch of people from different agencies are working on this thing together. Which is another thing that I find really interesting about the Drupal ecosystem.

I have thoughts about that too. But in this context, yeah, I get a bunch of different people to work on this thing. Um. Whether it’s the SEO recipe. Whether it’s the AI recipe, and they, I think the way that it sort of broke down is, and it might have been even Dries that conceptualized the idea of recipes and it’s like, okay, go out and implement this thing.

But when they did, it was like, okay, if we’re gonna do this thing, we need these types of recipes from the get go, from day one. We need SEO, we need whatever. We need AI, we need content things, so that people have an idea of what a recipe is and can start building their own recipes.

[00:30:15] Nathan Wrigley: So they’re bound into it? You can’t install Drupal CMS without those things. They’re just there.

[00:30:20] Chris Reynolds: It supports the recipes, and in the installation process, when you’re doing the Drupal CMS installation, that screen that I was talking about, where it’s like asking you the type of site you want to build, those types of sites in quotations, correspond to sets of recipes that align with each of those things.

It doesn’t ask you about AI in the installation screen, but it does sort of say like, oh, do you want this type of content or that type of content? And then we, based on your selection, it automatically installs those recipes for you.

[00:30:48] Nathan Wrigley: So it’s installing things based upon a wizard at the beginning, but the principle being though that you the end user, not really interacting with anything apart from oh, I would like that. Yes, please. I would like that. And then you finally get to the end of the wizard, wait for a few moments. The modules get installed, activated, and they’re pre-configured to behave in a way which is likely to be the best that you can get.

[00:31:08] Chris Reynolds: To get you as close to what you want as possible. And the goal, the roadmap, is Dries wants to actually take that one step further, and do sort of site templates where if a recipe is a collection of modules and configuration, a template would be like, I want to build a real estate site. So I download this template, or I install this template and then click a button or two and it gives me a real estate site with the configuration that I might need to have a real estate site.

And obviously I can go in and customize things, but I have a starting point. One of the things that I heard a lot when I was talking to people within Drupal, among other things, there’s not really a marketplace as much for stuff, for software, for add-ons in the way that there is in WordPress. And there’s not really in particular, there’s not really the same sort of like theme or a repository, or a place to go for commonly used or shared themes in the way that we have the Themes Repository. Mostly you have like the default things and then you’re building your own.

So, as a user, having a template that maybe comes with a theme that is specifically tuned for that type of site is a really big win, because there really isn’t an alternative in the current ecosystem within Drupal.

[00:32:23] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, that’s, really worth leaning into because again, please interrupt me if what I’m about to say doesn’t actually match reality anymore. But when I was using Drupal, there was basically no commercial plugin system. Everybody had kind of leaned into the same thing for the same problem.

So if you wanted to put a form on your website, there were a few, but there was this one called Webform, and it was just the one everybody leaned into it. And so rather than in the WordPress space where you’ve got, you know, you’ve got a few repository ones that are free and easy to use, and then you’ve got the commercial ones that you can pay for and they add different features and support levels and all that kind of thing.

In the Drupal space, it felt like there was just this one kind of community endeavor to do the thing. Yeah, so if you wanted something to display data, Views was the thing you used. The Views module, and I think that did actually get rolled into Core. So it’s there. My point being, there isn’t this sort of, shattering is the wrong word, but in the WordPress space, there’s often a dozen, more than a dozen, there’s multiple alternatives. So you have to go and find the right thing.

In the Drupal space, it feels more like, okay, for that problem, we have this module, and everybody leans into it. So I’m presuming that all the people who contribute in the community to the code and what have you, they’ll all finesse that version. But that means therefore, that when you come to build the CMS, there’s basically this one way of doing it? Okay, if you want forms, we’re going to use that module. And if we’re going to add this feature for real estate or what have you, here’s the modules that we’re going to add in. And the jigsaw of those modules will make it work. And that’s different from WordPress. WordPress has much more leaned into commercial plugins and kind of figure out which ones you want for yourself.

[00:34:04] Chris Reynolds: Yeah, that was one of the things that I didn’t know going into DrupalCon that I learned while I was there. It’s a really different approach, and I actually kind of appreciate the Drupal model because the community is built around more of an idea of, if I build a form plugin and you build a form plugin, and mine is the defacto form plugin or.

In the Drupal space, it’s really more of a, well, let me talk to you and see what ideas you have that we can bring into the canonical one and just collectively like integrate those things. And that’s, that is a thing that happens more often than not in Drupal. That’s why you don’t see the competition, the competing modules for different things.

Because if you had a competing thing, or you had a different idea, you would contribute it to the one module that does that thing. Or if you had a different thing, then you might be invited to do the same, right?

In the WordPress space, it’s like I want to protect my form module or my form plugin because right now it’s free, but tomorrow I might want to sell it, and I want to keep my intellectual property to myself and not contribute because, you know, I might wanna make a buck on this later.

And, I kind of like the other thing better because it’s more, it is more of a community. Like I get like wanting to make money and everybody wants to make money and have a form plug in. Like, that’s great. Like I’m not going to say Gravity Forms shouldn’t exist or anything like that. Gravity Forms is amazing. But I do think that building an ecosystem around contributing to a collective, or a community based solution for the thing, where everybody has a, a say or a seat at the table, is a really, I don’t know, possibly overly idealistic, but very optimistic sort of view of how we can contribute to software.

I find it really nice. Like it feels good. Like it feels less like we’re all trying to grab our little piece of territory, you know?

[00:35:53] Nathan Wrigley: It feels to me like that moment when you first install Linux. And you realize, wow, there’s a free OS that I can put on my computer. And there’s just something quite remarkable about that. That a bunch of people got together and, really pointed everything at this one solution. I suppose that is the choice that you’re going to make. Really, that there is something right in there.

You know, the commercial side of WordPress has probably been its single biggest accelerator. The fact that people could build businesses on it. And they could have a living. They could obviously refine and finess and dedicate real time entire lifetimes, in many cases. Get staff on, support staff and what have you. Pay all of those people because they’ve cracked this nut and everybody wants a piece of it.

Whereas on the Drupal side, it’s much more, let’s go for egalitarian, let’s say that. But it, also, I suppose, means that at the moment where something doesn’t work you probably have to either understand how to maintain that yourself or hire a developer.

So there’s a bit of a trade off there. And I presume, like I said, I imagine that’s why there was this acceleration of WordPress’s popularity because the people who maybe were buying these plugins had that intention, I just want a website. I don’t want to learn how to code. I’m not interested in that.

I can see over here, look, I can buy that. It’s $97 a year. That’s perfect. That’ll satisfy me perfectly. Whereas maybe more on the Drupal side, it’s okay, that kind of works, but not entirely. I now need to make it work and obviously the community can do that.

So that leads me then to the next question, which is, who the heck builds Drupal? So in the WordPress space, if you’re listening to this, you probably have an understanding of that. There’s a lot of volunteers, but there’s also a lot of companies that will dedicate a proportion of their time. We have this idea of Five for the Future. And so 5% of whatever it is that you want to give, be that time or money, or what have you. And so there’s this idea of community massively, but also corporations, businesses, putting time in. Is it the same basically on the Drupal side? Is that how it works?

[00:37:51] Chris Reynolds: Yeah, largely. One of the things that I think you’ll notice that is a little bit of a distinction between WordPress and Drupal, from the events again. Is going through like the showroom, the sponsors floor. And at a WordCamp you see the hosts obviously, but then you see a lot of like plugin development shops, and that’s pretty much what I would expect, right? Big plugin or theme development shops and WordPress hosts. And a lot of the WordPress hosts are doing plugin development, and like, that’s sort of the thing.

In Drupal, and at DrupalCon, obviously we have the hosts. And we had a, I mean, CKE Editor was there. That was kind of weird to me. I don’t know, like it’s in Drupal. It was weird to have like a library have a booth space. That seemed weird to me. But like it’s a lot of agencies, because agencies are the ones that are doing the work, and I’ve never seen an agency or maybe not since very small, like local WordCamps, have I seen an agency with a sponsorship, a booth space at a WordCamp.

But that is, that’s where it is. And it’s agencies that do a lot of that Core contribution, because they’re also in the weeds working with clients and building these things for their Drupal customers. And so like, the SEO recipe that I was talking about, like at DrupalCon we, Pantheon has booth demos. Acquia also has booth demos, which means we can talk about, like do demos of our platform, whatever. What we actually did was bring in guest speakers from like agencies and universities and whatever that are actually using Drupal and Pantheon and to talk about their implementation of the cool stuff that they’re doing, because that works better.

And one of the people that I talked to was about the SEO recipe, and he is at an agency and he worked with other people at other agencies, competing agencies even, to make this SEO recipe. So it’s, that’s where the contribution comes from. But again, like it’s the same sort of thing.

Dries said 10 years ago, wrote a blog post about the maker taker problem, as he defines it. And then again in September, in relation to the current state of things in the WordPress ecosystem, because that’s a thing that he’s been thinking about for a long time. It’s obviously a thing that Matt’s been thinking about for a long time.

Like it’s not, again, we’re not that different. We have the same fundamental problems. At the Community Summit at DrupalCon, one of the topics of conversation was getting more people involved, a younger generation involved into Drupal development, which is the exact same conversation we’re having in WordPress as well.

Like, how do we appeal to a younger audience? It’s all the same stuff, right? And there was at some point like a contribution like pie chart. Again, similar to the pie chart that could be displayed at a WordCamp. You know, Automattic does a big chunk of that pie chart.

And then you’ve got, you know, maybe Google does a smaller part of that pie chart and maybe like Bluehost or whatever. Similar pie chart. Acquia does a lot of the big part of the, of that pie chart. And then like other agencies are noted around, and then there’s like an other category, right, of just like individual contributors. It’s a very similar breakdown.

[00:40:47] Nathan Wrigley: It’s interesting because obviously you alluded to the fact that WordPress has been in a state of flux since September. But Dries, I presume prompted by the situation that arose out of WordCamp US. He wrote a piece very much timed after that. So I presume it was in, there was some sort of correlation in his head. And he was laying out how Drupal have, not solved, but how they just have a different approach to that. And I can’t remember every single detail, but there was some curious examples in the Drupal community, like this kind of, I’m going to say pay to play thing.

In other words, if you as a company, let’s say Pantheon may fit into this perfectly, if Pantheon steps through certain hoops and can prove that they did this thing and this thing and this thing for the community, for the Drupal project. If you step through those hoops, you then get, kind of, merit on the other side.

You can, for example, turn up to DrupalCon as a sponsor. My understanding is that maybe it’s only certain tiers, I’m not really sure. But you can’t sponsor DrupalCon unless you have jumped through those hoops. And we don’t really have anything on the WordPress side like that. We have Five for the Future, but it’s hard to pin down. It’s hard to figure out who did what and what have you, because there aren’t the same sort of goalposts, but it feels like the goalposts are a bit more nailed down on the Drupal side.

[00:42:03] Chris Reynolds: There is a process of nailing things down. I don’t know that it goes to the level of, like you can’t actually sponsor, because obviously Pantheon does sponsor and we’ve been, on the other end of being told that we don’t contribute enough to both WordPress and Drupal. But that also depends on how you define contribution really. And I have thoughts about that. The merit thing, it’s just where you’re drawing the lines in the sand. And Drupal has, Dries has his particular lines and the things that make you a contributor to the ecosystem, and what that means in Drupal.

And then, to a degree, I mean, yeah, like you said, Five for the Future is kind of, sort of that thing, but it’s also kind of amalgamous and like it’s honor based. There’s not really a real sense of tracking or, you could kind of, sort of track things, I guess. But it’s very wibbly wobbly.

But my perspective on contribution always has always been, one of the things, I know we’re not supposed to talk about what was talked about at PressConf, but Brad Williams, who I, was my former boss said, he was talking about Five for the Future and was talking about how Web Dev was very early on an adopter of Five for the Future, and I was there at the time, so I remember this. So it’s not just Brad’s words that I’m repeating. And the way that he approached Five for the Future was very much in the umbrella of if you’re doing anything WordPress related that is open source, we are counting that as a Five for the Future project, right. And that was how I understood Five for the Future.

That was kind of how it was presented back in 2014 or whatever when Matt first threw the idea out to the, out to the ecosystem. And since then it’s sort of become this thing where contribution to WordPress really means Core contributions, or contributions in very specific ways. And it doesn’t mean all of this other stuff over here, including an up to theme development, plugin development.

Even if that stuff is on .org, even if that stuff is open source, that’s not included in contribution. But I’m very much in the side of the bucket where like, well, everything is kind of contribution. We wouldn’t know how good WordPress scales to like enterprise level sites that are running it today, that are driving the adoption of WordPress, and driving the bar in like the visibility of WordPress, if it wasn’t for just hosts that are running the thing and making sure that it operates properly. And the teams like 10up and Human Made, and whoever who are like then, oh, to get this working at its best, fastest, most optimized state we need to do some enhancements. Either through the plugin ecosystem or contributing back to Core, so that we can push this code to these hosts, or platforms, or softwares as a service or whatever so that they operate for these clients that we’re building.

So like I kind of feel like everything should be, even if you are a taker, in the language of Dries, that doesn’t necessarily mean that you’re not pushing the ecosystem forward. And I have that critique for both of our BDFLs, right? Because they both have very similar ideas.

Like I think that the contribution title could be applied and should be applied more broadly, because everything that we’re doing is driving the project forward. A lot of the stuff that I write is like GitHub actions, or like plugins or things that are still broadly available to, and publicly available, and they’re open source and they’re for the community, but they’re not technically contribution, because contribution is narrowed down into this very specific definition.

[00:45:30] Nathan Wrigley: It’s kind of curious, you know, if you were to cast your mind back 20 years, the beginning of both Drupal and WordPress, just even the idea that they would still be around for one thing, you know, that that software wouldn’t have just come and eaten them up and there would be like a two year lifespan.

[00:45:44] Chris Reynolds: And that there’s an open source solution for these things.

[00:45:46] Nathan Wrigley: And it’s going and it’s kept rising and it’s kept being used. That’s just so curious. But also the teething pains of that. The idea that, you know, it started with Matt, and it started with Dries, and then people got on board and it grew. And then in the case of Drupal, and in the case of WordPress, it just grew to the point where these individuals can no longer handle everything.

You know, you described how Dries needed to sort of say, can somebody handle the events please? Because that’s just not where I want to be. The same, presumably on the WordPress side. And now we’re into giant communities. Really, really complicated communities. A lot of differing opinions, a lot of different maybe even politics, but a lot of different backgrounds, geography, the whole thing.

It’s this international thing. And it’s difficult. It’s really, really hard to get it right. But what I’m taking from this conversation. Is that maybe Drupal do things differently, but they have way more in common than we have as differences.

But also maybe there are some things that WordPress does better. Maybe there are some things that Drupal does better. And it would be very, very interesting if the two communities could kind of collide more, and share those ideas and we pick the best of each of them. It’s never gonna be perfect, but maybe that’s something that in the future, given that really at a very core level we’re not in competition with each other, it would be very nice if those conversations could take place.

And I think you’ve laid the groundwork for a lot of that and explained how one project is not that dissimilar to the other one. So, that’s it.

Chris, thank you so much for chatting to me today. I really appreciate it. That was very enlightening.

[00:47:22] Chris Reynolds: Thank you for having me. I always love chatting with you.

[00:00:19] Nathan Wrigley: Welcome to the Jukebox Podcast from WP Tavern. My name is Nathan Wrigley.

Jukebox is a podcast which is dedicated to all things WordPress. The people, the events, the plugins, the blocks, the themes, and in this case a personal journey through the history of the internet from start to now.

If you’d like to subscribe to the podcast, you can do that by searching for WP Tavern in your podcast player of choice, or by going to wp tavern.com/feed/podcast, and you can copy that URL into most podcast players.

If you have a topic that you’d like us to feature on the podcast, I’m keen to hear from you and hopefully get you, or your idea, featured on the show. Head to wp tavern.com/contact/jukebox, and use the form there.

So on the podcast today, we have Wes Tatters. Wes has been immersed in the tech space for close to four decades, starting his journey with early computers like the Commodore 64 and TRS 80. He’s been an author, with multiple books on internet technologies to his name, has worked across AV and media, and today he’s the driving force behind Rapyd Cloud, a globally distributed hosting company. Wes’ perspective is shaped as much by his hands-on experience building communities on CompuServe, AOL and MSN, as by his deep involvement with modern open source platforms like WordPress.

Wes starts off by sharing some of the fascinating stories from the early web, when getting online meant stringing together modems and bulletin boards, and long distance communication felt nothing short of miraculous. He talks about the evolution of the internet as a space for community, and how chance encounters in early online forums led to opportunities like writing for Netscape and shaping the very first JavaScript Developer Guides.

We then discuss the changing meaning of community across different eras of the internet, touching on the shift from closed walled gardens, like AOL, to the open source ethos that powers projects like WordPress, and much else that we take for granted online. Wes describes how WordPress’ flexibility and openness allowed anyone, anywhere, to claim their own piece of the web without technical barriers, and how this has contributed to its rise as a cornerstone of global digital freedom and self-expression.

Our conversation also examines the challenges, and potential missteps, of the modern internet from social loneliness, to the commercial world of social media. And reflects on WordPress’s role in helping steer a path back to more positive, open, and empowering online experiences.

If you’re interested in how the history of the internet directly shaped WordPress, the Open Web, and the communities we build today, this episode is for you.

If you’d like to find out more, you can find all of the links in the show notes by heading to wp tavern.com/podcast, where you’ll find all the other episodes as well.

And so without further delay, I bring you Wes Tatters.

I am joined on the podcast today by Wes Tatters. Hello, Wes.

[00:03:50] Wes Tatters: Nathan, good to be talking together again.

[00:03:53] Nathan Wrigley: I’ve got to be very, very, accommodating of Wes’ time, because for me it’s about four in the afternoon, something like that. Wes, on the other side of the planet, is giving up his time at about one in the morning. I have no idea why you are here, but I appreciate it. Thank you.

[00:04:07] Wes Tatters: Oh look, my day tends to be largely focused on talking to people in Europe, and in the United States. Half my employees are in those parts of the world as well. So I tend to work midnight to midnight. And we’re in the middle of a big product launch, for Rapyd, which has meant we’re just talking, and being visible, and I’m awake and happy to chat.

[00:04:25] Nathan Wrigley: So you literally pivot your day, your Australian day, you pivot it so that you are available for North American and European customers. So we should probably say you work for a hosting company called Rapyd Cloud, And that’s where the thrust of your marketing endeavors go. So you pivot your day?

[00:04:41] Wes Tatters: Yeah, like about, I think about 60% of our customers are in the United States, and about 30, 45, 35 are in Europe, and 5% or something in Asia, Which is pretty generic for the WordPress space. Our focus is around obviously those markets, but also because we’re a global company, we don’t have a head office.

Everyone who works in our team is doing it remotely. It might be Dubai, or Chicago or the Philippines or Pakistan, India. So we choose times of the day, we have this great calendar and for every meeting we post up a list of all the times, and then there’s happy faces, red faces and smiley faces. And someone will go, all right, I’ll take the red face. That’s the nature of WordPress though.

[00:05:21] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, madness though, when you think about it. If you were to rewind the clock 30 years none of this was possible. I mean here, I am talking you through a web browser, as if it’s nothing, and it is utterly remarkable. And actually that’s going to be the thrust of this conversation, I think. We’re going to trace the WordPress community in particular, not just the community, the software and what have you, over the period of time it’s been in existence, 21 years odd.

So, do you want just give us your backstory, specifically I guess around WordPress, but just generally in tech? Because I know you’ve done quite a lot of other AV related things as well.

[00:05:54] Wes Tatters: I’ve, been in the tech space for close to 40 years. I was trying to work it out a little while ago, and it’s like, I remember my first computer. It was a Commodore 64 or something, or a TRS 80, or something like that. And I would’ve been 16 or 17, and even then it was like, I was programming them, not playing games on them. I enjoyed programming and coding.

So I started very early in the tech space, but as a result of which, even modems didn’t really exist when I first started in the IT space. Laptops and PCs and computers and certainly iPhones and all that wonderful technology we have today didn’t exist.

But there was already people in the space at places like DARPA, that were going, how do we connect the world? It was a government military strategy. How do we connect the world in the event of a nuclear war? That was the driving mentality behind what they were planning. It was originally going to be a network of radio towers sending, a bit like we had with the old modems, the buzzing noises.

But it was this whole concept of, how do we build a disconnected system that can survive massive breakdowns in the structure of communication? And a part of what they build, ironically, is what makes the internet so powerful these days. It’s that ability to interconnect disparate technologies, disparate systems, all different types of capabilities and devices and all those sorts of things, in ways that are transparent.

As you just said, we’re in two parts of the world and we are talking together in real time. I grew up in the, as a part of my life, in the media world, and film and television and primarily television. In a point in time where if we wanted to conduct a live interview with someone on the other side of the world, firstly, we had to book satellite space in the thousands of dollars per minute almost. And then we would go, Nathan, are you there?

And Nathan would come back four seconds later, and we would conduct these really bizarre interviews, with delays on this crazy technology. So much so that when live television was first starting, obviously there was a big fear that someone would say naughty words, or swear on television for the want of a better word. And one of the early ways that they originally managed, we have what’s called, a lot of television stations had this big red button called a dump button.

The whole idea was someone said f, someone had to slam the big dump button. But the way they we’re actually handling it was they were actually sending the entire signal up to a satellite and back down to the ground station before they transmitted it. Because that gave them roughly two or three seconds of delay, which gave them the ability for that big red button to stop the transmission point. But the signal had gone up and down through a satellite just to even achieve that craziness.

I came into that world, and started in that world. I was incredibly lucky that I lucked into an IT firm, here in Australia, that was at that stage of company that doesn’t even exist anymore. It’s a company called Wang Microsystems. Dr. Wang was the guy that invented the first memory ship, so he, he’s reasonably well healed, but that entire platform doesn’t exist. But Wang was one of the first it companies to release a processor with a box. There was this three racks that was a modem.

300 characters per second. It was bleedingly fast. But for, its time, and I was one of the first people that got to play with one of those things in Australia. And I’ll tell you what, I was hooked. I just went, even then I could go, oh my goodness. There were dreams of we can make it faster.

And we got 1200 baud, and then we got 1600 baud, and then we got 3,200 baud and 56 k. And every bit was exciting. Because what it was allowing me as a person to do, especially a person in Australia, was to reach out and communicate with people that weren’t in my part of the world. And we had things like America Online, well CompuServe first, I guess prior to America Online.

We had bulletin boards and local BBS software and things like that. And all of them were creating communities. All of them were starting to build communities around this same space. It was something that I really engaged with.

When I got into CompuServe though, it for me changed a lot of things. Because until that stage it was hard to communicate with anyone outside Australia. But with CompuServe, all of a sudden, I was connected to people around the world.

[00:10:37] Nathan Wrigley: What did that connection actually feel like though? Was it literally, you’d type something, and was it you’d leave the computer, like the email sort of exchange?

[00:10:46] Wes Tatters: They were really very, very similar to an early sort of discussion board. People would leave comments, and people would make comments back and respond, and people built relationships and discussions were built. And in my early life I was an author. I’ve written a number of books on internet technologies.

This is the guy in Brisbane, Australia, who happened to luck into a forum on CompuServe with a guy named Mark Tabor, who was the head of publishing acquisitions for Schuster and Schuster, which is McMillan, and sams.net, the biggest publisher on the planet.

And Mark was going, we are looking for authors to write in this space. They were releasing a new imprint at the time called sams.net, which was going to be like. Theirs was Teach Yourself series.

They were building it at McMillan, and their biggest problem was respectfully that IT people don’t make good writers. Love us, or like us, we don’t even like writing comments in code, let alone knocking out 4 or 500 pages of a book, to tell someone how to do something.

But that ability to be in a community outside of my own space, this is me in Brisbane, Australia, talking to the head of acquisitions for Macmillan, going, yeah, I can write a book. I’d already been doing some writing. I had, as I said from, because I have a media background, I’d been writing for magazine articles in Australia, and I’d been involved in communications and had some journalism experience, so I was kind of already in the space.

And yeah, the book got written. We actually wrote a book that told people how to connect CompuServe to the internet, because previously CompuServe couldn’t be connected to the internet.

[00:12:21] Nathan Wrigley: Do you remember those times like halcyon day’s, rose tinted spectacles. Because that was real pioneering stuff. The idea that, okay, so dear listener, if you are under the age of 30, your world was entirely connected from the moment you could conceive a thought. In some respect you could turn the tele on and be live tele from around the globe. You may not have had internet access.

[00:12:44] Wes Tatters: I remember trying to explain to my parents what I was doing, and they were looking at me going, you’re doing what? And it wasn’t until the first book, 500 pages, 50 copies arrived in a box from McMillan, that the lights went on in parents’ head who went, okay.

[00:13:04] Nathan Wrigley: There’s something in this.

[00:13:05] Wes Tatters: This is odd. And we sold hundreds of thousands of copies of edition of these books. I wrote the same book for America Online.

The joke was America Online actually wasn’t even in Australia at that stage, which was interesting. But it gave me lots of opportunities, and this was about communities. This was about getting into communities. While I was in that community, talking, working with the a AOL team on how they were going to connect to this thing called the internet. There was a little crowd called Netscape banging around, going hey, love what you did, Tim. Love that original browser. We’re going to build a better one.

[00:13:37] Nathan Wrigley: An open one.

[00:13:38] Wes Tatters: An open one. And the Netscape guys had seen my books, came to my publisher and said, hey, could we do a book with Wes on how to write, how to build websites for Netscape? So we wrote six books for Netscape over the next five years, going teach yourself HTML development for Netscape. So community was the whole basis of it.

[00:14:03] Nathan Wrigley: It’s so curious that for people that are born in the last, like I said, 20 years or so, the internet has just been a feature of their life, almost like a utility. Almost in certain parts of the world, like a human right. You might even describe it on that level.

This conduit of information that can come in. This capacity to talk to people, any point on the globe almost immediately with almost zero cost. And in the time that you are describing just the merest foundations of that were beginning. Little glimmers of that would beginning to emerge.

[00:14:34] Wes Tatters: Really edge.

[00:14:35] Nathan Wrigley: Really interesting though. I can imagine your passion and interest and all of that must have been. The curiosity that was spiked by that.

[00:14:42] Wes Tatters: It was. I loved it. But even then, we still didn’t truly understand where it was going.

I remember a call from the team at Netscape going, it was around, I think it was around version three of the Netscape. Going we’ve got this idea we’re going to, we’re going to put a scripting thing in Netscape. What do you think? And I’m going, yeah. What do you mean? What do you think? We need you to include it in the next book. It’s this little thing called JavaScript.

[00:15:04] Nathan Wrigley: Just little thing.

[00:15:06] Wes Tatters: And I remember sitting there going, interesting idea. Can you tell me more about what it can do? And they went, we don’t really know yet. We’re still working on those bits. So we ended up writing the first JavaScript development guide, me and my technical writer, who was my technical editor for my Netscape books. And I wrote the first JavaScript Developers Guide for Netscape.

So we were there in the middle of it, but all the way through, we still didn’t truly get it. It was still such this small thing. I was talking with Bud.

[00:15:37] Nathan Wrigley: Bud Kraus.

[00:15:38] Wes Tatters: Yeah, I was talking with Bud at PressConf, and we were chatting about just the way the internet’s evolved. I had the opportunity to meet Tim Burnes Lee.

[00:15:46] Nathan Wrigley: Nice, the Godfather.

[00:15:48] Wes Tatters: The Godfather of the internet. And listening to Tim talking about his dream of the internet and the worldwide web, this was a worldwide web conference seven, which was back before WordCamps. It was, that was what a WordCamp looked like before it was WordPress. And I look back and I was thinking, and I’m going, there were some serious names at that event. Tim Burnes Lee was there. James Gosling, the founder of Java, was there.

And these were guys doing for the want of a better WordCamp style sessions, chatting about these ideas they’ve had. Seeing even then that what the worldwide web, and what we’ve grown into with WordPress had the potential to be, was entirely different to the way the world thought before that.

I remember there was like, I think it was the Friday night. I actually ran the media for that particular conference, that was held in Australia. It was the first time being held out of the northern hemisphere. But no fully explained reason, it was being held in Australia, in my hometown, and I ran all the media for it.

And I remember some guys, they had this sort, they were going to create this shoe library, it was like, this is the early web. Who knows what we’re going to do with it? We want a shoe library.

[00:17:00] Nathan Wrigley: A shoe library, yeah.

[00:17:01] Wes Tatters: They taking photographs of people’s shoes, and I remember it was like 7:30 on a Friday night, and Tim’s in a pair of slacks and a t-shirt. Taking his shoes off so that they could photograph his shoes, so that his photograph of his shoes could go into the shoe library.

[00:17:19] Nathan Wrigley: Of course.

[00:17:20] Wes Tatters: And this is the guy that invented the thing that we all live on. This is the father of everything we do today. But even then, he was this amazingly humble person, that was happy to have a chat with a bunch of kids and take photos of his shoes. It’s a different world.

[00:17:38] Nathan Wrigley: When you are where you’re at. So in the year 2025, we’re concerned about the internet now. And so the way it ended up is how it now is. And honestly, it’s not one of those things that you pick apart, as like what is the history? What were the dominoes that fell to make the internet, what it now is?

Like, history, politics and warfare, and all of those kind of things get dealt with by historians. The migration of people over great land masses, all of the kings, queens, all of that.

But this, this kind of doesn’t, and it’s fascinating to listen to you there, because it feels like it could have gone in so many different directions. Maybe would’ve been a more AOL type thing, where everything was closed and you had to buy into AOL, and everything was handled by AOL. It didn’t turn out that way. Open won. I’m not entirely sure that we didn’t swing back to closed with things social media?

[00:18:29] Wes Tatters: One of the things that caused that was the people who started using the technology that DARPA invented first, and it was universities.

[00:18:41] Nathan Wrigley: Oh, interesting. That was the client base, wasn’t it? It was the academics.

[00:18:44] Wes Tatters: It was the academics. So Tim’s original agenda was to obviously create a way to communicate with all the scientists in Cern what was happening in the accelerator that was sitting under three countries. Even then it was about community and communication. But as it’s walked forward, I look at the whole journey of the internet and at every point community has been a part of that.

The ability to share things. The whole basis of what we have today in open source, moving towards WordPress, is about communication. So you can’t have open source without a group of people coming together to collaborate on a project as large as WordPress, or as large as, Linux or as large as Drupal, or as large as all of these other projects. And they’re not being paid for the most part.

They’re doing it because of community, and the underlying technology behind that obviously is the internet. And more insignificantly since then this thing called the World Wide Web that Tim originally envisaged as a tool for sharing.

[00:19:56] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah. But just tool for sharing with a handful of academics, and then it just grew exponentially. Do you remember the first time that the internet became more social. No, let me rephrase that. Do you remember when the internet shifted from something which a few people did? To something where, not the majority, but it was like hard to ignore at that point. Because definitely as a child have a of no internet.

[00:20:20] Wes Tatters: Done badly, but Microsoft MSN. Windows 95 was the watershed. So Windows 95 launched, and for the first time, anyone, in inverted commas, with a modem didn’t need to know someone at a university. Didn’t need to know how to hard wire AOL to connect to something else. They could literally go get me on the internet, and it happened. So that was the watershed moment.

Now, MSN as a platform also was heavily driven by community. And again, like it or love them, the original version of Messenger, an embarrassing mess, but it started the concept of community. The original version of MSN was a place where you could go and chat. Their design philosophies around. I remember, in Australia, 9 MSN was, the branding of it. 9 here is our major television network, and they partnered with MSN, in Microsoft and Australia and our major telco to bring MSN to Australia. But it was heavily geared around building communities. And I was quite active in that MSN community in Australia.

We used to do things like popular TV shows would go to air, and then we would host forums where the actor, or the presenter, or someone from the show would hop literally straight off, the show would end at 9:30, and they would be in a forum going, and hey, tonight we’ve got insert name of whoever it is.

And people could ask them questions. And we curated it. I was a part of the curations team at 9 MSN at that stage. And, again, it was using this crazy technology to build community, and to expand communities.

Now for that network they were using as just obviously a marketing tool, but what it was doing underneath it was again, building this ethos of communities and spaces.

We then have obviously Facebook that took that and ran with it in crazy directions, and commercialized it. But underneath it we’re still this open source thing. There’s still whole open source community.

[00:22:31] Nathan Wrigley: Do you remember the moment as well when the internet went more from a consumption kind of thing? So you know, you would log onto somebody else’s property, MSNs Messenger or whatever it may be. I do remember that, by the way. To I can own a bit of the web, a bit of that whole thing can be something that I am in control of. And now we move towards CMSs I guess.

[00:22:51] Wes Tatters: So this is probably 98 initially. So we were still writing books and Netscape was still trying to work out what they were doing in the world. And, Tim was, Tim was out telling people how big the internet could be. And I remember lots and lots of people, as I said, James Gosling’s come down, Tim Berners Lee’s come. The BBC had flown two camera teams, journalists, The Times had flown out people. NBC and CBS had flown out camera crews and to be at this event. Because Sir Tim was becoming Professor Tim at that stage. He was being reordered, a honorary doctorate from an Australian university. It was a big event.

Could not get a single Australian broadcaster to even show up. Now, put this in perspective. I knew them all. I was actually in that industry. I knew the people. I literally was on the phone to news directors going, dude, just send me one cameraman. Oh, what’s this thing? What’s this thing? It was the internet.

So 95 to 98, it was still a bit hokey. I think where it really started to change though is when things like WordPress started to arrive. Because before that my books on how to build a website, I love meeting people and go, I think I’ve got your book on a shelf somewhere. It was, and it was always either mine or Laura Lemay’s.

Laura and I were both writing in parallel for the same publisher. And some of her chapters are in my books, my chapters in her books. But then it was, we were still hacking HTML. If you wanted to use JavaScript, it wasn’t jQuery or anything like that. You were writing lines of code and hoping it worked.

And there were some predecessors and other things. Microsoft had to go at the same thing. Microsoft released a product called ASP, a little thing that.

[00:24:32] Nathan Wrigley: Oh yeah, that’s right. Active Server Pages.

[00:24:35] Wes Tatters: Yeah, and then they released a thing called asp.net, and this wonderful new programming language called C#. And that was their push into this community space. They released open source product with it. They released a product which was called I Buy Spy Portal, which was eventually then forked into a product by a guy named Sean Walker to become a product called DotNetNuke, which was literally their version of WordPress.

I was there, I know Sean. I was in that space, and we were building communities again, coming outta the Microsoft space on DotNetNuke. At the same time, this little thing called WordPress was happening in parallel. At that stage, ironically, at that stage, I think DotNetNuke was actually more a CMS than WordPress was. Because WordPress was still really a blogging tool. It was still really MySpace for people who actually had a desire to code a bit.

But I think it was then, that WordPress journey, the arrival of a mechanism that did two things. It allowed you to create a website without knowing how to code, and it allowed you to become a part of something, a community online, where you could all of a sudden reach out of your local neighborhood, your local city, your country, into the rest of the world. And take things to the rest of the world. Sell products to the rest of the world. Communicate to the rest of the world. Share your opinions and thoughts. In the past, you could do that on CompuServe. You could do that on America Online. But in all those places, you didn’t own your content.

[00:26:16] Nathan Wrigley: Right, exactly that.

[00:26:18] Wes Tatters: Even MySpace, sort of like the predecessor to almost Facebook. Facebook groups and forums. None of these spaces you owned your content. And so I think WordPress in its initial incarnation, a blog, was a way for people to start expressing their feelings. And the concept of blogging. And then we started to grow that how do we get our blog to the world? Well, RSS feeds, and then aggregators, and then this wonderful thing called Google came along.

[00:26:45] Nathan Wrigley: Discoverability.

[00:26:47] Wes Tatters: Discoverability, and visibility. And all along that journey, there’s this guy in the states beavering away, we’re talking about Matt, with a vision of what WordPress could be in that space. And he was creating that in parallel to these communities starting to emerge, to these other companies like Google, and Facebook building closed enclaves.

Where Matt, obviously very passionate about open source, had a philosophy to build this space that people could use, that people could communicate and share. It was incredibly open. Anyone could write a plugin. Anyone could write a theme. Anyone could decide that they wanted to commercialize that space by selling their theme or selling their plugin.

Hosting companies could host that platform. So the fact that was such an open product, tweaked something in the consciousness of the time. It tweaked something in that desire to communicate, but also I guess a concept of freedom to communicate.

Freedom of speech is a passionate position of a lot of countries. The right to freedom of speech, and to a certain extent the right to express an opinion, safely. Or in some cases the rights to communicate in communities.

I discovered during Covid that the platform that Rapyd grew out of Buddy Boss, which is a social media platform creation tool for WordPress. Install Buddy Boss and you’ve got your own private Facebook.

We discovered that there were communities using Buddy Boss to communicate things to their people that they were terrified to communicate on private spaces, like social media or Facebooks. I know people specifically in some of those communities, doctors, other frontline groups and organizations that were facing the real challenges of what was happening in Covid and impacts of those things. They were able to use that gift of community, freely given, freely shared, where you own your raw data in ways that I hadn’t even considered.

And for reasons that I hadn’t even considered. And each time I look at it, people find ways to use community creatively and in incredible ways. And we find that at the core of WordPress.

[00:29:14] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, we really do. I remember the first time I ever produced anything online, and it wasn’t with a CMS, it was just HTML. There was no CSS at the time, it was just tables and things. But I remember publishing that, a friend of mine knew more than I did, and he said, okay, here’s the environment. Here’s the text file. Just write it in there and, I’ll click a button and it’ll go to some server.

And then I saw it, saw it on his computer. And then I said to him, but it’s on your computer. And he said, no, no, no, if you go home, it’ll be on that computer well.

[00:29:44] Wes Tatters: And if, you go down the library, or you go up the road, and all you needed to know was where it was.

[00:29:50] Nathan Wrigley: And I remembered this profound feeling of, what the heck. That’s so amazing. What, I just put something on your computer, and now anybody in the world should they, discoverability is the big problem, but they could find it. He’s yeah, that’s it. That’s what the internet basically is. And I remember thinking, gosh, what a force for good.

[00:30:10] Wes Tatters: Huge force for good. Unfortunately, it’s also been a force for other things. I had a conversation with Tim, as a part of a set of interviews that the BBC were doing, this was in 1998. And at that stage, Tim was just exploring the idea of what he called the semantic web, which was zaml, and underlying metadata. And what Tim always envisaged the worldwide web should be, he always envisaged that every page, because he’s a data scientist, he envisaged that every page would have a beautiful set of metadata and structures, so that it could be searched and indexed.

Of course that’s everything the worldwide web didn’t become, respectfully. We have enough trouble in the WordPress space remembering to put a, an alt text on a photo that we upload. But his envision was of this beautiful semantic web. So it hasn’t gone exactly the same way as he envisaged.

But even without that semantic web, the additions and add-ons of things like Google, and Google search, and the ability to create an index, a massive index of the web. And now in 2025 going, hey, ChatGPT, can you just tell me the answer to this question please? And then can you write me a presentation?

I was having a meeting with an associate of mine. I haven’t caught up with each other for about six years, and he’s deeply involved in the concept of human centered design, which is, a business practice where you, look at the customer to identify the problem. Not look at the business and try to solve a problem.

He wanted to know about what I was doing in AI and that sort of stuff. And I said, did you know that I could write you a business plan? And they used to spend a lot of money creating business plans for people, and creating sessions and seminars. And I went, I can write you a seminar structure and plan in two minutes, on any topic.

I said, no, we’ll do better. Hey, ChatGPT, tell me what you know about human-centered design and why it’s good. And of course it printed out 20 paragraphs. And then I went, can you summarize that for a presentation seminar? And of course it did that. And then I said, now can you give me the structure of the seminar?

And it did that. And this guy sitting there going, are you kidding? And I said, that’s where we’ve come. But underlying all that is data and information. And none of that’s of any relevance unless you’ve got a community to share it with.

[00:32:23] Nathan Wrigley: Do you have a sense that the internet has gone in a, I’m going to use the word bad or poor direction over the last decade? Do you have a sense that mistakes have been made? If you could rewind the clock, were there any moments in time where you think, I wish it hadn’t have gone in that direction?

Because I often think things like proprietary platforms that kind of want to put a wall around the conversations that we have. They seem like, maybe in 50 years time when we look back, maybe they’ll seem like missteps. I don’t know. Maybe they’ll carry on and it’ll all be, as it is now.

But it does feel like there’s a resurgence more to owning your own conversation. So obviously we do that in WordPress, but it does feel like there’s a bit of a groundswell towards more federated protocols. Things like the AT protocol that Bluesky are doing, but Mastodon and an ActivityPub and those kind of things.

[00:33:12] Wes Tatters: I think again, if you harken back to Tim’s semantic web and, he wrote a document, 2022 I think, which was 30 years on. And he talked about where things had gone. I can tell you right now that the way I read Tim’s take on the worldwide web is that e-commerce was not a part of it. That was not a part of his idea of.

[00:33:36] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, how would you even have conceived that?

[00:33:38] Wes Tatters: Yeah, e-commerce wasn’t a thing. I don’t truly think, Snapchatting or no fully explained reason, 15 second videos in TikTok were anywhere on the radar, because there was this whole deal of philosophy. But each of these things actually has the same underlying traits.

It’s all about communities, it’s all about relationships and building relationships with people. Where I think personally we have made a misstep is in how our younger generations consume that community.

[00:34:12] Nathan Wrigley: It’s a lot.

[00:34:12] Wes Tatters: Well, it’s more than a lot. There was a survey done and I haven’t got the figures in front of me, because I wasn’t planning on discussing where we were here. That’s looked at the level of loneliness of people in 2025, compared to the level of loneliness of 20 and 30 years ago. And it directly related this online community thing. The, unfortunately, what do we call false community sometimes. The people we have never met that we talk to in a Snapchat or something like that, that are not community, and they’re not really our friends.

And there is an increase in loneliness. And I think if there’s any misstep that we as a society have maybe taken out of this thing, is a lack of understanding of the impacts of loneliness. And I think the internet’s to blame for that.

[00:35:13] Nathan Wrigley: The internet is so beguiling, isn’t it? Because there’s so much interesting stuff there. I think throw the mobile phone into that equation as well. This always on device, which is available 24 7. But it’s that capacity, incapacity, to put it down. You start doing something with it and then five minutes later you realize, often, in many cases, five minutes is not even the benchmark. More like an hour or something.

[00:35:36] Wes Tatters: And, there are clinical reasons for that. We’re actually getting out of these devices the same dopamine hits that lead to depression. The same dopamine hits that lead to mood swings and to a certain extent mental health issues.

We now have this whole, go on the internet and you’ll get, especially when you’re hitting my age, are you dopamine deprived? Join this, get on this dopamine detox. And it’s real. It’s a real problem. And the five minutes bursts, the swiping, the scrolling, the doom, scrolling, they’re not things that you could have even comprehended. We have all this data, massive amounts of data available to it, but we prefer to consume a, TikTok video, or look at photos of funny dogs or kittens, or dogs and kittens or whatever it is. The internet and the things that have grown out of that, have all contributed to that.

[00:36:32] Nathan Wrigley: It really is interesting. Bit of a double-edged sword, really. Like on the one hand, the internet is probably the greatest innovation, maybe of all time. Or the electric light or, you know, what did the Romans us kind of thing.

But also, curiously, it also has aspects of it which are really deleterious to humanity, and can really bring out the worst. It allows us to consume the worst to, I don’t know, to spend hours where we probably got other things that we should be doing, but for some reason we can’t let go of the phone, and things like that. So it is really curious.

[00:37:06] Wes Tatters: It’s the speed that it’s happened.

[00:37:08] Nathan Wrigley: And continues to happen. I don’t see any slowing down.

[00:37:12] Wes Tatters: At PressConf the other day, one of the sessions was an AI session. Of course there’s going to be an AI session. Seriously, if you go to the opening of a restaurant in the town center, there’s some guy doing a presentation, and we’ve got Barry to talk about AI for 15 minutes. It feels like that anyway.

One of the demonstrations was about two paragraph script, and it said effectively, hey, insert name of AI tool. I want you to create me a five second video, and I want the five second video to be of a dinosaur running out of a valley with a volcano erupting in the background. And as the dinosaur runs towards the camera, the ground shakes and the dinosaur’s then going to pass to the right hand side. And I’d like it to look a bit like Jurassic Park. That was literally the wording, and you hit enter not that long later, here’s a 15 second video that looks lifelike, realistic.

[00:38:05] Nathan Wrigley: Jurassic Park.

[00:38:06] Wes Tatters: It literally was, you may as well have been in the feature film. 10 years ago, 20 years ago, that would’ve cost couple of million dollars for that five seconds of animation. Now it’s literally something you can get on your mobile phone.

[00:38:20] Nathan Wrigley: Anybody can get on their mobile phone.

[00:38:22] Wes Tatters: I was looking at a video thing today. I was like, some AI tool where you can go, hey, can you, put me in a video of me flying? Yeah, sure. I just need 10 photos of you please. And, now what would you like to fly over? Yeah, technology’s changed.

[00:38:35] Nathan Wrigley: Madness though, when you think about it, if you were to rewind the clock 30 years none of this was possible. I mean here I am talking you through a web browser as if it’s nothing. And it is utterly remarkable.

[00:38:48] Wes Tatters: So we live in a society where we’ve moved from the first time anyone heard of a deep fake, but now it’s just what you do when you’re at lunch break.

Things are changing. Forget about the ethics, the morals, and all those things, but our technology has changed. So yeah, to answer the question, are there missteps? Probably. But the interesting thing about the internet, and it’s something that was built into it at the beginning at DARPA, it’s actually got this amazing ability in technology to recorrect itself.

And that was how DARPA was built. The whole idea was, if you can’t get it this way, it’ll go this way. And if you can’t get it this way, you’ll find a carrier pigeon, and you’ll keep the communications going. What we’ve discovered with communities, and with groups, is that they seem to have an inordinate way of self-correcting as well, through moderation, through conversations.

When you get critical mass, and you pull enough people together, there is this inordinate ability to self-correct. I don’t fully understand the psychological basis behind it, but it’s fascinating how the internet has this ability to self-correct itself. So maybe over time it will, who knows?

[00:40:02] Nathan Wrigley: Certainly in the world at large at the moment, we do seem to be in need of some sort of self-correction in all sorts of walks of life. And the WordPress community that we are both a part of definitely has had its schism over the last six months or so.

[00:40:17] Wes Tatters: Look, and it’s been, and that’s happened before. And even those things self-correct, because there are communities that are passionate in this space. Yes, there’s been some drama. and there’s no point in having conversation about that. But one of the outputs of that has been interesting new conversations in communities. Not looking at things like how we destroy WordPress, or how we, what we do next, but actually going, how do we build our community? How do we assist our community?

So even in those sort of challenges that every big ecosystem has, the community itself can self-correct. The community itself, can develop new relationships. And people grow out of those things.

PressConf was an amazing example of that. Obviously it had happened before in a slightly different form a number of years ago, but this was, let’s put 150 odd in a space for a weekend, and let ’em all chat and have conversations. And actually have intelligent dialogues and a whole heap of things grew out of it.

When we have WordPress events, we have WordCamps. We have Word Camp Europe coming up. Groups creating new vision. We talk about things like contribution and what contribution looks like. There’s been some negatives about contribution in the recent space, but there’s also been some huge positives about contribution. Out of the drama we’ve had, actually created a new conversation. Many people who didn’t even understand the concept. Oh yeah, I just assumed WordPress was this thing. I never thought that there was actually people giving up their weekends to go to a day in Hyderabad to fix bugs in wordPress. But that’s what people do.

And it actually helped us have a new conversation with a lot of people in the WordPress space that actually hadn’t even comprehended. Because they just assumed that they were, oh yeah, I just downloaded this WordPress thing.

[00:42:13] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, I do wonder if some things will come out of the year 2025 that would’ve been in the year 2024 unimaginable.

[00:42:21] Wes Tatters: I would say I’m quietly positive. There are lots of conversations, at many layers. I do think, and this is my own personal opinion, that there is a time for speaking and a time for listening. And I think that right now there is a need for a lot of listening from disparate part of the community, and by listening I think a lot of people need to listen to what other people have to say. And then as a community, look at what all those things are. What’s being said, and look at what we do to self correct. I think it’s important to listen.

[00:43:00] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, a conversation which drifted through what the internet even was and is. Then finally landing on CMSs and WordPress and the community built up around that. So Wes, what a pool of knowledge you are. You’ve really done the entire internet circuit and I’m really glad that we got a chance to speak today. Thank you.

[00:43:19] Wes Tatters: Nathan, it’s been a pleasure. Always happy to chat. It’s about conversation and communities. That’s what matters at the end of the day.

[00:00:19] Nathan Wrigley: Welcome to the Jukebox Podcast from WP Tavern. My name is Nathan Wrigley.

Jukebox is a podcast which is dedicated to all things WordPress. The people, the events, the plugins, the blocks, the themes, and in this case understanding the nature of WordPress contributions and making sure that contributors understand where they might be needed.

If you’d like to subscribe to the podcast, you can do that by searching for WP Tavern in your podcast player of choice, or by going to wptavern.com/feed/podcast. And you can copy that URL into host podcast players.

If you have a topic that you’d like us to feature on the podcast, I’m keen to hear from you and hopefully get you, or your idea, featured on the show. Head to wptavern.com/contact/jukebox, and use the form there.

So on the podcast today, we have Hari Shanker. Hari has been a member of the WordPress community since 2007, and has contributed in various capacities, including as a full-time contributor for several years, working with Automattic, working with initiatives like Five for the Future, and supporting numerous community events around the world. He currently volunteers his time as a community program manager, helping to grow and support the WordPress ecosystem from his home in India.

If you’re involved in the WordPress project, you likely know how vast and complex the contributor ecosystem can be, but you might not have heard of the WordPress Contribution Health Dashboards. An experimental initiative aimed at making sense of all the communities moving parts by gathering, visualizing, and sharing contribution data.

But why does WordPress need something like this? Well, it could help new and existing contributors figure out where to pitch in, and how their work might guide the project’s future growth. Hari’s here to explain.

We start the podcast by going off on a tangent, discussing the landscape of WordPress in India. India is experiencing a huge upswell in community activity, innovation and youth engagement, and it’s exciting to hear about.

We then dive into the main thrust of the podcast, the Contribution Health Dashboards. How the idea came about. Who helped drive it forwards. Why it’s proving so challenging to build, and the massive value it promises for contributors, team reps, project leadership, and anyone curious about where WordPress needs help.

We look at the practical aspects too. What tools are, and aren’t, available? The difficulty of tracking data across the many platforms WordPress uses, and what kinds of skills, and volunteers are needed to push this work forward.

Hari shares his vision for accessible visual dashboards that can guide contributors of all skill sets, and help make the best of every single contribution hour.

If you’ve ever wondered how to make your WordPress contributions matter even more, or how the project could be better supported by data driven insights, this episode is for you.

If you’re interested in finding out more, you can find all of the links in the show notes by heading to wptavern.com/podcast, where you’ll find all the other episodes as well.

And so without further delay, I bring you Hari Shanker.

I am joined on the podcast by Hari Shanker. Thank you for joining me.

[00:03:53] Hari Shanker: Thank you for inviting me to the podcast and I’m so excited to be here, Nathan.

[00:03:58] Nathan Wrigley: I am really pleased that you’ve joined me. We had aspirations of doing this podcast from Manila, but things conspired against us, and so we are doing this via an online call, let’s say a Zoom call or something like that. So I’m really pleased that we could finally hook up.

The intention is to talk today about something that I suspect many people in the WordPress community will not know a great deal about. So it is called the WordPress Contribution Health Dashboard, or dashboards I should say. And we’ll get into that in a moment. What it is. Why it exists, and how that project is moving along.

But before then, Hari, would you mind just giving us your little bio, your introduction to who you are, where you live, what you do in the WordPress space. As much as you like, really over to you.

[00:04:44] Hari Shanker: Thank you so much, Nathan. So my name Hari Shanker. I live in the south of India, in a city called Kochi. I’ve been with the WordPress community since 2007. I’ve been contributing actively since 2016. I have been contributing full-time. I had been contributing full-time from 2020 to 2024.

At this point, I’m a volunteer contributor. I used to work with Automattic for a while, from 2016 to 2025. At this point I’m not employed, I am a volunteer contributor, very much excited to work on WordPress. And I’ve done a bunch of things with WordPress. WordPress is one of my biggest passions.

My work has mostly been in the community team. I am still a community program manager, which means I approve events, I support events, and my work has mostly been in the contributor experience of WordPress. I led the Five for the Future initiative for quite a long time. And I was also working on the WordPress Contributor Working Group, where we held three editions of the WordPress Contributor Mentorship Program.

As I said, I live in Kochi. I have a wife and I have three cats. I absolutely love it here. They call Kerala Gods own country, and I love the state, I love where I live. And I love the fact that I can work on the best open source software in the world, sitting in my lovely little city, in my lovely little apartment. That’s all about me.

[00:05:58] Nathan Wrigley: That’s so nice. That’s really lovely. Can I just segue a little bit and steer away from the conversation that we’re intending to have? And ask you about WordPress in India?

Now, obviously you may not have your finger on the pulse of everything that’s going on, but I’m curious. Not having been to India during the period I’ve been using WordPress, I have an intuition that it’s a thriving community over there, dare I even say, a growing community.

But that’s just based upon the little bits and pieces that I’ve captured from friends, and articles that I’ve seen. And there seems to be this big upswell in plugin development, and agencies that are really doing great work. So there isn’t really a question there, it’s just more, tell us about how WordPress is going in India.

[00:06:40] Hari Shanker: Absolutely. So you got it right. WordPress, the WordPress economy, the WordPress ecosystem is really thriving. As you said, it’s everywhere. Like, the plugin ecosystem, we have VIP agencies. We have so much innovation happening in WordPress. We have companies like InstaWP. We have agencies like rtCamp, Multidots. There’s so much innovation happening. That’s just the tip of the iceberg.

There is also so much community activities happening. We’ve had so many of these events, so many innovative WordPress events, we’ve had WordCamps.

So I was involved in setting up an event called WordPress Photo Festival, and we’ve had a WP Campus Connect. We’ve had a host of women’s day events that were held on March 8th. Again, that’s the tip of the iceberg. There’s so many activities happening. So be it innovation in plugin development or theme development.

And again, themes are big in India. We have had, Astra theme comes from India. So many of these activities happening. And it’s not just centered in one city, it is really all over the place. So in Kerala where I live in, we have very thriving community. We have folks who’ve come up from the community, and who’ve built things that have made waves all over the world. And again, across different cities, be it Mumbai, Pune, Ahmadabad, Kolkata, Ajmer.

So India is, as you know, is a big country. So we have a host of these local WordPress meetup groups and several thousands of community members. And I do not use the word thousand as a euphemism. It really is, like we actually have thousands of community members who are doing cutting edge work. And I can tell you, it is so inspiring to see. I mean, as an open source fan, like it really gives me the energy to keep going.

So yeah, you are right. WordPress is thriving. And we have WordCamp Asia coming to India, in Mumbai in 2026. I am very excited about that.

I was actually the mentor of WordCamp Asia for a short while, but this point I’ve stepped down. I have applied as an organiser and I hope to be in the organising team as well. So I think it’s the best time for WordPress in India, and we still have heights to conquer. The best is yet to come. Super excited about all that.

[00:08:36] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, that’s really great because it does seem in different parts of the world, and maybe this will feed into the conversation that we’re about to have, it does feel in other parts of the world. So I’m in the UK, and it does feel that the community side of things has definitely taken a bit of a hit since the pandemic, so 2019 and beyond.

Those meetups that happened in some cases have come back, but in the majority of cases, they still are either dormant or perhaps have been abandoned. And I feel that the same might be true across Europe and North America. I can’t speak to whether that is accurate or not, but that’s the feeling that I get.

It does feel, like I said, the news that I see, the articles that I read in WordPress journalism, it really does feel like India is exactly as you’ve described it. But also it feels like it’s not just confined to WordPress, it’s tech in general. It feels like there’s, well, maybe renaissance is the wrong word, but there’s just a huge pivot in all things tech over to places like India. You know, whether that’s, I don’t know, SaaS apps and so on, but CMSs as well. It does feel like India is definitely on the rise in all manner of tech.

[00:09:41] Hari Shanker: Absolutely. I think there’s a bunch of reasons for it, but in my mind, I think a big reason for that, I wouldn’t call it the biggest reason, is our very young population. India’s population at this point is over 1.4 billion. I’m not aware of the latest number, but I think it’s around 1.5 billion. So off the top of my head, I think at least 50% of it is a young population. They are less than 35 years of age.

All these young folks, they’re coming in with so much energy. There’s an abundance of human capital. And we are in the internet age, and one good thing that happened after COVID-19 is a lot of these folks got connected. And India has really cheap internet. I mean, of all the places that I’ve traveled to, internet in India has been the cheapest that I know. So it’s really easy to get connected.

And a lot of these people who are connected, they’re using it very productively. That is one of the reasons why you’re seeing this spurt of activity. And there’s been a lot of these inspiring stories, which is really inspiring the youth. And WordPress being what it is, is seeing a lot of this innovation coming in.

But I think, again, we’re really at the tip of the iceberg. The best is yet to come, because I see a lot more people coming into the community. And my hope is with WordCamp Asia happening next year, we will see a lot more of these young folks embracing WordPress, not just tech, but embracing WordPress, and doing a bunch of innovations. So I think the goal for the Indian community is to get all these young people to WordPress.

[00:10:53] Nathan Wrigley: It’s interesting that you mentioned the young people. I was just wondering if there was a connection between, for example, education, you know, school and the emergence of jobs. I don’t know what age you leave school in India, but in the UK it would be typically 16 or 18. And at that point you’re perhaps going on to higher education, so university, something like that, or finding a job.

And I think there’s been a real effort in the UK to supply education in tech. But it doesn’t really seem to pivot around open source software. It tends to pivot around, can I use this already existing product? Often a kind of Microsoft version of something, in order to create wealth or a job. But I don’t know if there’s more of a pivot in India to use open source things to teach those kind of things.

So again, there’s no question there. It’s just more of an observation really.

[00:11:41] Hari Shanker: Yeah, so I think your observation is pretty astute. But I think India has a bit of a USP here when it comes to open source. We have had an open source movement since time immemorial. I mean, specifically my state of Kerala, we have a very uniquely liberal government. So they sort of stepped away from proprietary software and embraced open source software as early as in the nineties.

So Richard Stallman, when he used to be active in the community, he used to visit Kerala almost every other year. And we, as a result of that, have a pretty thriving open source community in my state.

All sorts of open source from Linux distributions, to Python and WordPress of course, and Drupal, and we have all these communities very active and thriving.

And a lot of the young people, they get their introduction to tech through these open source communities, which have local chapters. It’s not just related to my state, even though my state has a pretty high population of this, a lot more people doing this. I would say that the open source movement is pretty active all across India. So we have these big open source conferences in some of the big universities. We have these small local chapters where people get active. So at some point or the other young people who are interested in tech, they get some introduction to open source. And a lot of people are enamoured by the philosophy.

Now, coming specifically to the WordPress community, we have recently had some really good events. So these are in a youth camp format. I was involved in one of them. And there was an event called WP Campus Connect that was held in Ajmer, Rajasthan, which is held by Pooja Derashri. So these events, they were experiments really, but they’ve been quite successful, especially I would say the WP Camps Connect event. It’s been fantastic.

Like, it was an event series, and as a result of those events, I don’t know the numbers, but off the top of my head, at least 200 to 300 people, 300 kids, they got introduced to WordPress directly. I’m not just talking about, you know, setting up websites, they got an introduction to the community. And those efforts are really paying off. We are seeing these people coming into the community and being active.

So the gist of what I’m saying is, yes, you are right. We are seeing an open source movement and we, a lot of these young kids, I mean of course a lot of them, as you said, they move to proprietary technology, but they have more of a window into open source as they blossom.

[00:13:40] Nathan Wrigley: The interesting thing I suppose about that is, given the long march of history and having many decades into the future, that groundswell amongst the younger people now is going to paint a really interesting picture in a couple of decades time. So in the 2030s and the 2040s, it’ll be interesting to see how that movement, the young people obviously going into the marketplace, and getting a job in some industry or other, it’d be interesting to see how that all plays out.

Because one of the things that I always notice when I go to WordCamps is that age thing. The demographic of age, it always seems to skew older rather than younger, you know? If you were to say, how many people here are over, I don’t know, let’s say 45 or 50? I think there’d be quite a few hands. And if you would say, who’s under 20? Very few. Certainly in my part of the world. So it will be interesting how that shakes out.

But how positive is that? That’s such a great way to begin this podcast. I don’t know if you want to, if you’ve got anything more you want to leverage into there quickly before we move on, feel free to.

[00:14:40] Hari Shanker: I just want to add a quick comment. That is a huge opportunity, and to be honest with you, even in India, even with the huge population, the WordPress events that we have, we still haven’t seen that influx yet. But the good news is that it’s changing. It definitely has an effect because when I started organising events for the community in 2016, we got a lot of the young kids and I am seeing them.

So it’s been eight years. I’m seeing the same people, they’re making waves. I know three or four specific examples of folks who got into the community as college students and then really went places. So if we are able to, when I say we, I’m referring to the WordPress community, or specifically the Indian WordPress community. If we are able to leverage it well, and if we manage to keep the momentum and grow it, I would say the sky is the limit. So I am super optimistic and extremely excited about where the future lies for WordPress in India.

[00:15:25] Nathan Wrigley: So that was supposed to be like a one minute aside, and there we go. We’ve had a really interesting conversation about what WordPress is doing in your part of the world. Thank you for that. That was really interesting.

Let’s pivot now to the article. And I’m going to, in the show notes, I’m going to link everybody to an article which Hari wrote towards the latter part of last year, so 2024, September. And it was called WordPress Contribution Health Dashboards: An Experiment.

Now, obviously if you are in the WordPress ecosystem and you’ve been here for many years, you will have no doubt figured out how complicated and tangled WordPress is. Not just the community, but the software, the code, the events, the different teams which make up WordPress, the multitude of ways that you could become involved.

And I think it would be fair to say that if you were new to WordPress, that could be pretty overwhelming. It would be fairly easy to sort of step into the community and think, what? Where do I belong? Where do I fit? Where is my experience best used? Where would I find the most, fun or engagement, or meaning in the WordPress space?

And so it feels like these contribution health dashboards might be some version of trying to get an understanding of what WordPress is, where the gaps are, where the holes are being filled, where the holes in the future might emerge and so on. But just unpack it for us. Who’s involved? What is the idea of a contribution health dashboard?

[00:16:54] Hari Shanker: Great question. And thank you for the excellent introduction, Nathan. I think you did a great job of explaining everything.

To summarise, the idea behind the contribution dashboard is to have sort of like a cockpit or bird’s eye view of WordPress contributions. WordPress, as you know, has around 20, 22 contribution teams, and these teams are doing a bunch of different activities. As you said in your introduction, it’s very hard for everybody to follow this.

So the hope of this project is to build a dashboard, or dashboards, which provide anyone, not just contributors, really anyone in the community to get an idea of where things are with WordPress. So it involves updates on the release, latest releases. It involves activities from various teams, like Core, community, training, photos, meta, et cetera.

So to give anybody who is coming from any part, with any experience, to give them an idea about where things are. Because at this point it’s very hard to follow. We have these blogs, we have Slack, we have Trac, we have GitHub. When those contributions to spread out across multiple places, it’s very hard, even for experience folks to follow. So the hope behind this project was to simplify this with the help of data, and specifically data visualisation. So that is the project specifically.

Now, as regards to who is involved, I will need to share some history and I promise I’ll be brief. So this started as a collaborative effort with a bunch of folks, I should say Courtney Robertson’s name. Courtney has been a real force for good for this project. Like, she’s been very active. So Courtney Robertson, Naoko Takano, myself, Isotta Peira, and a bunch of contributors all over the world.

We all came up with this idea. This idea has been floated around for a long, long time. We need dashboards. It could be helpful. But we were not able to make a ton of progress.

So around WordCamp Europe 2023, there was a question asked in the keynote to Matt Mullenweg and he advocated for it. He said it would perhaps be good to have dashboards, which will bring all this information together.

So that was when all these efforts really gathered momentum. So Courtney was one of the first people to be really excited about this, she really led this forward. And since I was working on contribution health, I was part of the Contributor Working Group, I was also very excited about this. So Courtney and I, we joined hands and we kicked off efforts.

So we first looked at having a tool that will help set things up. But that is when we realized that it could get really complicated, and a lot of the existing tools out there, it may not really fit the bill. But we also needed to find out what we need to measure. What should be there in these dashboards? That was a big question that we had.

So we published a couple of blog posts in the Sustainability Team and the Meta Team. We got a bunch of ideas from the community. We did a lot of on the ground research. Progress was very slow, but we eventually found a tool called Bitergia. Bitergia is a paid tool, it costs a lot of money. Automattic were kind enough to sponsor the tool for the time being.

So we got a paid subscription with some of us having access to it. And we looked at the data, we crunched numbers. But the limitation of Bitergia was that it only looked at GitHub, like the WordPress GitHub. So if you look at the dashboard, the data for that needs to come from various sources, right? The Make WordPress Slack, there’s the P2 blogs, there’s Trac. So this tool was only limited to GitHub.

So after a lot of discussion with the community, and we held several project health hangouts all the way, Courtney Robertson, myself,  Naoko Takano, Isotta Peira, , all of us, we decided to do, with support from Josepha Hayden, who was then Executive Director of the project, and Chloe Brigmann, we decided to do an experiment.

We picked three teams, which was the Core Team, Community Team, and the Training Team. And we identified some KPIs, or progress some metrics, which we found out by discussing with the team members. We used the tools that we have, which includes Bitergia and some data that was already available. For instance, for the 6.6 release, we had the spreadsheet which developers always release once a release comes out, like you have the list of contributors. So we crunched numbers, we did some visualisations, and we published the blog post that Nathan, you’ve linked in the show notes.

So that is what we’ve done in short. It’s an experiment. We’ve shared some data that we have on what we’ve collected. We’ve identified some KPIs.

So the challenge that we have is, building a full fledged dashboard is time intensive, resource intensive. The Bitergia dashboard that we have, it’s very limited. It does not give out out the whole information. That post really is a snapshot. And we have data from January through September, 2024.

So the post, the content that we have, those are really snapshots of the project of contributions for the Core Team, Training Team and the Community Team, as well as stats for WordPress 6.6.

We went out, we put it out there, we hope to get feedback. So that’s what we’ve done. We’ve not moved ahead from there. But that’s a whole executive summary of the project and a history of what we’ve done.

We did get a lot of positive feedback from folks who were fascinated to find some of the information, which is not previously available. The good thing that we’ve done is we were also able to set some KPIs. But the work has not progressed since, we are still there. And it’s a resource intensive project, it needs more contributors and more work to be done in order to move forward. But that’s a brief summary of everything that we’ve done.

[00:21:48] Nathan Wrigley: Perfect. We’ll get into that bit in a moment, the resource intensiveness of it. But just an observation from my point of view is that, typically, I think if you were to do this experiment in a corporate environment, the data would go to the board of directors, if you know what I mean. So that they could inspect that and figure out how to, I don’t know, cut out waste, or figure out who needed to be employed, where people needed to be pushed around in the organisation in order to maximise things.

But whole point in a corporate environment would be the data would end up going north. It would end up towards the senior management way of looking at things. But this is not that. This is a democratised way. In effect, it’s kind of the opposite. The data is intended to be open for absolutely everybody, so all people can see all of the things.

And if somebody new were to drop into the project, yes, they might not understand what all of the data means, but at least they might get an understanding of, okay, that team over there looks as if it’s really fallen on hard times. That team over there, they seem to be doing great. Okay, maybe some of my time needs to be given over here. But the point being, the data is not so that senior management can do things if you like. It’s so that everybody would be able to see the same view. I hope that’s what it is anyway.

[00:23:04] Hari Shanker: That is exactly what it is, but we also hope to influence the senior management there as well. And when I say senior management, it’s not just for this project leadership, it’s also the contributors, the folks that keep the lights on. So that would mean Core committers, team representatives, anyone really.

And again, like you said, the beauty of WordPress, it belongs to everybody. So that’s the way it’s supposed to be, right? So we want to make sure that anyone can benefit something from it. So if it’s a new contributor, they can find out which projects need help. They should be able to identify the areas that they can contribute directly to.

For leadership, they should be able to see the leading indicators or like the areas where the project is doing really well. And the lagging indicators, where a project needs help so they can make better decisions. And they should be able to change the project goals alongside, by understanding the data. So essentially it is aimed at everybody, not just the top down folks. And that is the hope that we came to this with.

[00:23:55] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, perfect. Now, anybody that’s been in the WordPress space or contributed in any way you will have come across all the tools. You know, there are so many. There’s Trac, there’s P2, I suppose, if you’re working in that environment. There’s Slack. There’s probably a bunch of others as well. I’m sure you could list a whole bunch more.

And if you’ve ever wrangled with APIs or, I don’t know, web hooks or whatever it may be, trying to wrangle data, it’s a hard task. And it does require a lot of human intervention at the beginning.

I’m wondering, is the intention of the project to get it to the point where the human intervention can kind of step away? Because the hard work has been done. We’ve now understood how to capture the data. How to regurgitate the data. How to display the data. So that at some point it will be less about figuring out how to make the data meaningful and more about, okay, now everybody look at the data and draw conclusions from the data.

But it sounded from your description as if we’re still in the, how do we even get the data in? How do we recycle the data? How do we pull it in, regurgitate it and display it ?Again, is that about right?

[00:25:03] Hari Shanker: You are 100% right. That’s exactly where we are in at this point. I think I shared some of the background earlier. The challenge is, we are working on data, it’s a lot of work. I know this because I did a lot of the work in creating the pages that we have.

Unfortunately, we do not have a tool that gets all the data from all the sources. Any tool that we have, it will need to be customised extensively, and that needs developer help. We do not have a ton of data engineers in the WordPress community. We do have some folks, but they are not in the position to contribute their volunteer time towards this.

So this needs investment in terms of developer hours, in terms of more tools, in terms of integrations. So in short, this is a huge endeavor. This needs investment from several organisations working in WordPress for this to really succeed, at least to the vision of what we have. That is the realisation that we had.

But yes, the goal, if the project were to succeed, we should ideally need automated tools that automatically show data. Because if you were to publish this data manually, it’s a lot of work. I am not sure is the best returning because like, I worked with volunteers when I was working on the Contributor Mentorship Program, and I respect volunteer time.

They have daily jobs, even sponsored contributors. They have a ton of things to do. Everybody’s overloaded. That time is very precious, and using the time and creating these dashboards, trust me, it’s extremely resource intensive. Like, between Courtney and myself and, Isotta and Naoko, we took a lot of time to prepare the dashboards that were out today. So we did that as an experiment to inspire folks so that we can get things done.

But if you ask me, is it worth it to keep updating it? I’m not sure. Because I’m not sure if it’s worth the number of hours. Maybe we can do it. Maybe if there’s more folks to help out, it can be continued. But my hope would be to create an automated tool. I’m convinced that it is going to benefit folks.

[00:26:49] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, I mean, I guess that if you do everything manually and you draw the conclusions manually, you’ve got those one set of conclusions. And really what would be ideal is a portal, for want of a better word, where people can go and see and mine the data for themselves, and display it in interesting ways, and can consume it, and then decide how they’re going to display that and drill down in different ways. And obviously that requires automation.

So, okay, we’re recording this kind of the gap between May and April in 2025. If you could, and I should probably say, you know, the listenership to this podcast is fairly wide. If you could ask for people to come and assist with this project, what kind of people at this moment in time are you looking for. You mentioned that you know, there’s not many people who are really interested, maybe in data manipulation and what have you, in the WordPress project. Just give us an idea of who you would wish to speak to you after they’ve listened to this podcast.

[00:27:45] Hari Shanker: Anyone really. I’ll share why. The beauty of WordPress, and I think I’ve explored different open source projects and I think the beauty of WordPress is there’s something for anyone. So a big part of what we need to do is research. And in the sense of, what do people need to measure?

So any feedback that folks can give on what they would like to see in a dashboard, that would be helpful. So if you are a listener to this podcast and you have ideas on what you would like to find out, that feedback itself is a big contribution. That will go a long way. That is a big part of the information that will help us.

On the next level, I would like to have developers who are familiar with Python and data visualisation and things like that. We have explored different ways to do this. I’ve spoken with several Core committers and folks like Jb Audras who, I mean, Jb Audras does a ton of this amazing work. He publishes release information.

So I was inspired by that. And the 6.6 dashboard that I published was very much built on his work. He does a lot of that work. So he’s just published something on WordPress 6.8 in his blog, and he regularly publishes the, a month in Core, year in Core posts in the Make Core blog, which has some of this information.

So folks like that who have time to spare, who are really good with visualisations, that could be really helpful. And what Courtney and I, and Isotta and Naoko, what we had identified, what our group had identified was that we need a tool, we need an external tool. It’s very hard to build something from scratch.

What would really help is to manipulate a tool. And there’s a bunch of open source tools. There’s GrimoireLab, which is, it’s an industry standard tool. It’s an open source software. It powers several open source projects. And there’s a company called Bitergia, which builds on  GrimoireLab, to, provide like a sponsored alternative, which is the one that we are using.

We reached out to them to see if they can build something for us. They quoted a very high price. Currently Automattic is paying €1,000 per month. They quoted upwards of 30 to €40,000 to build this integration. That’s a huge amount of money and I don’t think we have the bandwidth to do it.

So what we need is to bring, again, for folks listening, if you’re a developer, if you’re interested in data visualisation, I’d like to bring you all together to discuss what would be the best way forward.

So first, once we have the KPIs clearly identified, let’s see how we can collect all this data and how we can display it. Maybe we can build something. We are in the era of vibe coding. So I think it’s a lot easier than when we started this project in 2023. It’s not impossible. Perhaps we can build something, build some very simple dashboard, identify some core KPIs. Maybe have two or three dashboards per team, which can be really filtered. Maybe that is possible. Maybe we don’t need a tool.

So we need those developers, and folks with experience in data visualisation. Even like Core developers, like folks who have significant experience tinkering with Meta and Core and all that. So all these folks, if we are able to bring them together, I think we can do that. So I invite all of them to work on this.

[00:30:29] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah. So if any of that is making sense to you, can I just ask you to go to WP Tavern. Search for the episode with Hari, H-A-R-I. That’s probably all you need to know. Search there in the Tavern search and hopefully this episode will pop up. And from there you’ll be able to link in the show notes to the piece that is described where you can find all of the links to the people contributing, but also Hari. Are you open to people contacting you directly and beginning conversations with you one-to-one?

[00:30:57] Hari Shanker: Absolutely, absolutely. So at this time, as I shared on the beginning of the podcast, my time is slightly limited, but I’m more than happy to bring people together. That is my strength. And Courtney Robertson, she’s also very interested in this project. So like, between both of us, I think we can wrangle something and we can keep this moving.

Because I firmly believe that WordPress needs this. And if folks are able to volunteer their time, I’m more than happy to bring people together and to keep this project moving. So please, feel free to ping me directly. I’m Hari Shanker in the Make WordPress Slack. That’s H-A-R-I-S-H-A-N-K-E-R. As you said, Nathan, folks can comment in the Tavern blog post as well. So any way you can find me, I will find you.

[00:31:32] Nathan Wrigley: It feels to me like, you know when you go into a great big store or a shop, and I’m going to use supermarket as an example, where you’ve never been to that one before. You’re looking for a particular item. And you can literally spend so many minutes, hours even just searching around. You know, where’s the aisle? Okay, I found what I think is the right aisle. Now, in the aisle, which shelf am I looking for? And then, where is it?

This feels like that. It feels like signposting to, here’s the thing you want. You’re standing at the door and I’ll just grab you by the hand and I’ll take you to the thing that you need to purchase right away. It feels like these dashboards are going to be something akin to that. Just a way of alerting people to the project as a whole, think the supermarket in this case, and how to just make that journey a little bit easier. Make it obvious to everybody what needs help? What doesn’t need help? What’s working? What isn’t working?

How is it going to be manifested? This will be my last question really. What will this look like? Are we going to be looking at spreadsheets full of numbers? Are we going to be looking at charts? What is the intention? Because when I hear dashboard, I’m kind of immediately drawn to like line graphs and things like that. That’s what I’m imagining I’m going to end up seeing. But what would be the intention? Because some of this data would probably fit in that, but maybe some of it is just not going to be that. It’ll just be paragraphs of text, I don’t know.

[00:32:47] Hari Shanker: I will share my vision for the dashboard, and it might be very different from what we end up building.

I would like to build visualisations in the best possible way. So it involves charts, it involves charts of various kinds, pie charts, line charts. So the best form of information depicted in a very visual way, which gives folks a clear understanding of where the project is headed.

In the current version, we’ve included some text because we wanted to sort of like share our findings. But I think as you shared earlier in this podcast, we want folks to find out the data for themselves. And Bitergia currently allows folks to download the data directly as a spreadsheet or in a CSV format. We’d like to give folks that option too. So if you’re not comfortable seeing, or understanding, the data that is in front of you, you can download it and you should be able to manifest it or manipulate it in the way that you want.

So what I have in mind is a very visual dashboard full of charts. And the goal is to not over complicate things, which is why we are really looking at some certain KPIs for teams and for the project itself. For instance, if you look at the project, market share could be a KPI. It’s not necessarily what I, I’m just using it as an example.

So identifying certain key metrics and building charts of various kinds which manifest this data, and to make it as user friendly, and as accessible, and accessibility in the strictest sense of the world. So that anybody with any size sort of accessibility requirement should be able to view this data and understand it. That is the vision that I personally have, and I think Courtney also has a very similar vision. So yeah, that’s what I have in mind.

[00:34:18] Nathan Wrigley: It feels like in the year 2025, where we are at the moment, it feels as if, and we don’t need to go into the reasons. It does feel like contributor hours are more precious than they’ve ever been. And so that in and of itself is a fantastic reason to have data like this available.

So for example, I don’t know, let’s imagine that I’m an enterprise agency and I want my contributions to really count. Well, I could throw my staff in all different directions and not really know whether they were being deployed in something which was already completely fine, or whether there was an area which really needed a bit of work. It might not be the most glamorous piece of work in the world, but it needs that work to be done.

And because the contributor hours at the moment are, let’s use the word struggling, something like that, then having a window into what is needed, it does feel like this project has more importance now, perhaps even than just a year ago when you were sort of in the weeds of setting the whole thing up.

[00:35:16] Hari Shanker: I cannot agree more, because I’ve tried to collect this data together, to put this together. And I’ve seen the information that it can help companies. So you mentioned organisations or companies who are contributing through Five for the Future. So I was working on Five for the Future for a long time, and I was mentoring quite a few organisations who are stepping into WordPress.

So this data that I picked up, it really helped them. I was able to guide people into the areas that. We had folks who were doing other things, like they were able to contribute strategically, which I have specific cases of organisations who were able to improve their place in the WordPress economy by making strategy contributions.

So this is all very linked. And again, that’s where I’m coming from. I mean, and as you said, contributor hours are very precious. I personally feel that any time or effort set towards building data oriented solution could go a long way. It is a very impactful way of contribution, and if folks are there to help it out, the potentials are limitless. That is where I’m coming from.

[00:36:10] Nathan Wrigley: There are so many dots being connected in this episode. So we talked at the beginning about the fact that, you know, WordPress is a growing and interesting thing for the younger generation in India, but the project obviously needs contributors.

Those contributors need to fit into the holes in the jigsaw, the bits of the jigsaw, where the pieces are missing, if you like.

And so there’s this kind of virtuous cycle going on here where, if something like the dashboard can meaningfully impact where those contributors go, the jigsaw grows. The pieces where there’s blank missing pieces, they get filled in. And so, like I said, there’s this wonderful virtuous cycle nature to this whole thing. And what a fantastic project.

It’s hard to encapsulate in words what you’re trying to do, but I think we did a pretty credible job of doing that. So one more time, Hari is going to be available to whichever way he described. I will put in the show notes the links to the pieces and Hari’s contact details and things like that.

What an interesting project, one that many people I’m sure haven’t heard of. Is there anything that you wanted to say before we sign off?

[00:37:11] Hari Shanker: Well, all I want to say is, if you’re interested in data, please consider looking into this project, or if there’s anything that you can learn from the data that we picked up. I know it’s a little old at this point. As I said, this is a project that anybody can contribute to. So even if you have insights on what data is missing or what data that you would like to see, that feedback really goes a long way.

So feedback is the best gift that you can give in, again, in an open source project like WordPress, especially for an initiative like this. It goes a long way. So it’s a very impactful way of giving back to the project too. And I see contributions as investments, so if you would like to invest in WordPress in your free time, it’s a great way to do it by helping us build these dashboards.

[00:37:51] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, as you said, it’s like an impactful but kind of curious, interesting, powerful way of helping the community. And perhaps it’s something that you’d not heard of before. So Hari Shanker, thank you so much for explaining all that to me today and joining me on the podcast. I really appreciate it.

[00:38:07] Hari Shanker: Thank you so much, Nathan. It was truly an honor to be here, and I absolutely enjoyed talking to you about my favorite topic.

[00:00:19] Nathan Wrigley: Welcome to the Jukebox Podcast from WP Tavern. My name is Nathan Wrigley.

Jukebox is a podcast which is dedicated to all things WordPress. The people, the events, the plugins, the blocks, the themes, and in this case, podcasting and finding inspiration in WordPress stories.

If you’d like to subscribe to the podcast, you can do that by searching for WP Tavern in your podcast player of choice. Or by going to wptavern.com/feed/podcast, and you can copy that URL into most podcast players.

If you have a topic that you’d like us to feature on the podcast, I’m keen to hear from you and hopefully get you, or your idea, featured on the show. Head to wptavern.com/contact/jukebox, and use the form there.

So on the podcast today we have Bud Kraus.

Bud’s name might ring a bell in the WordPress community, not only for his teaching and writing, but also as the host of the Seriously, BUD? Podcast.

Bud’s WordPress journey started back in 2009 when a client told him he had to learn WordPress, and ever since he’s been immersed in all aspects of it. From building sites to teaching, to creating content for major WordPress businesses. These days, Bud calls himself a WordPress content creative, focusing mainly on producing articles, videos, and of course, his own podcast.

In this episode, we turn the microphone around on Bud to talk about his transition from site building to content creation. He shares how the Seriously BUD? podcast came out of a desire to have real, unscripted conversations with people from around the WordPress community. Chats that go beyond plugins and code and dig into the stories, quirks and lives of the people behind the tech.

We talk about the format of the show, Bud’s technique for bringing out interesting stories, and the importance of really listening to guests. Bud explains his approach to podcast technology, why he thinks the tech stack doesn’t have to be intimidating or expensive, and he also offers insights into the editing process that makes his interviews come alive.

Towards the end, Bud shares his thoughts on the future of podcasting. Why it’s still such an appealing medium, and what it takes to keep a show fresh and enjoyable for the long haul.

If you’re curious about podcasting, interested in the art of conversation, or are thinking about starting your own show, this episode is for you.

If you’re interested in finding out more, you can find all of the links in the show notes by heading to wptavern.com/podcast. Where you’ll find all the other episodes as well.

And so without further delay, I bring you Bud Kraus.

I am joined on the podcast by Bud Kraus. Hello.

[00:03:12] Bud Kraus: Hi, Nathan. How are you?

[00:03:13] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, very good. Nice to chat with you. The tables are turned because not that many weeks ago I appeared on your podcast, which is going to be the focus of this podcast today. So it’s kind of inception, WordPress Podcast inception.

[00:03:27] Bud Kraus: You know, podcasting is getting very incestuous. I mean, everybody’s on everybody’s show. It’s more convoluted than the Hapsburg Empire. I mean, it really is.

[00:03:36] Nathan Wrigley: That’s a description. I like it. Before we begin and start to explore your podcast, why you did it and so on, let’s just get into who you are. So a couple of minutes, really, your potted bio. Tell us anything that you like. This is obviously a WordPress podcast, so centering it around your WordPress journey would probably be ideal. So, couple of minutes, over to you.

[00:03:54] Bud Kraus: Alright. Well, I have a little elevator speech on this, or a little longer than an elevator. But in 2009 I had a friend client who sat me down at the Oyster Bar in New York City and said, you know, you really need to learn WordPress. And I said, no, I’m a Rage Against the Machine kind of guy.

And then he got very serious and then I started to learn. And once I learned that you could make a child theme and what that was all about, you know, I was hooked. And then I started teaching WordPress at FIT in New York City and everywhere. I was just teaching like crazy. And I was making websites, and eventually I got to hate making websites because I just wanted to do it my way, not the client’s way. That’s not really a good attitude.

And eventually in the last couple of years, I’ve really gotten into creating WordPress content for WordPress businesses. So I call myself a WordPress content creative. That also includes, of course, podcasting and my show Seriously, BUD? So that’s it.

[00:04:44] Nathan Wrigley: So are you still working with WordPress in any way, shape, or form for other people, or is it primarily just for yourself now?

[00:04:51] Bud Kraus: I try not to, unless you beg me. Now, occasionally, no, I do have a couple of sites that I do updates for. I could get rid of that business. It’s not really much, but I just like doing it and I like the people and so, you know, I do it. But I have my own two sites, joyofwp.com and seriouslybud.com. And I am the client, so I get to decide everything and that’s what I like about it.

So yes, I don’t want to stop doing WordPress, okay, the site stuff, because it will diminish my ability to write and create WordPress content, but I don’t want to get paid to do it for clients.

[00:05:27] Nathan Wrigley: And was the intuition to move into content, was that purposeful? In other words, did you sit yourself down and say, do you know what? I’m fed up of doing the client thing, I want to stay in the WordPress space, so what can I do? Well, content seems like a good thing. Or was it more an evolution where you just wrote a few pieces and discovered that you enjoyed that?

[00:05:44] Bud Kraus: Well, I am not that smart. The first way to do it, like to think logically I should be doing this, I don’t go that way. So, Vikas Singhal from in InstaWP got me really on this track a couple years ago when we first met online. And he said, why don’t you create a video for me on security? I said, okay. And I did.

And then I started doing some other things, and then Marcus Burnette said, why don’t you write articles for GoDaddy? And I started doing that. And I said, you know, I have written articles before, but I never got paid for it. And I thought like, you actually can get paid to create WordPress content. No way.

So that turned into, now I write for Hostinger on a regular basis. I write for Kinsta on a regular basis. And I could write for, name it, okay. But that’s not, the problem is I can only, you know, one person and I’m not interested in cloning myself and making myself into a content agency. And so this is it.

And the podcast, well, we’ll get into that. But I wish I were smart enough to plan. Life is what happens to you while you’re busy making other plans. That’s just the way it is.

[00:06:48] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, I think the same is true for me. I was building client websites and straight into, I mean, all I do basically is create podcasts. I’ve never written much. I don’t really have the capacity to overcome the blank page at the beginning. But I stumbled into podcasting and it slowly became what I did.

And there was never an intention there. It surprised me that the WordPress ecosystem is actually big enough that that kind of thing is possible. Now, if everybody in the WordPress space decided to make a podcast, both you and I would be sunk.

[00:07:22] Bud Kraus: Wait a minute. Pardon for the interruption, but doesn’t everybody in the WordPress space have a podcast. Where are you going with this?

[00:07:29] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, it does definitely sometimes feel that way. But if everybody did it, then we’d all be sunk. But the fact of the matter is, there are literally millions of people out there using WordPress. And so there’s a niche within a niche. You know, you can find, I don’t know, maybe you do a security podcast in the WordPress space or a community podcast or what have you.

You’ve settled on, Seriously, BUD? Tell us what that is then, and how you’ve settled on that format? And what is the format?

[00:07:55] Bud Kraus: Well, the idea came in an instant. This was after years of saying to Bob Dunn, you know, I will never make a podcast. What are you doing podcasts for? This is the most ridiculous thing. Why does anybody ever make a podcast? So I was not looking to do this.

But I was in an Uber leaving WordCamp US 2023 in Washington. I’m telling you, like a lightning bolt, this thing hit my head and it went like this. You know, I wish I could spend more time with Nathan Wrigley. I just got to wave at him and like say hi, and that was about it. But boy, I’d certainly like to know about his childhood, his life, whatever, I’d like to spend more time, and have a conversation about his life.

And in that instant, the show was born. Now, it wasn’t called Seriously, BUD? Right away it was called In Conversation With, but that’s such a boring subject title. But I knew right from the get go that this is what I wanted to do. And I also said, I don’t care if I ever get sponsors. Now I do. I don’t care if I ever get listeners. Now I do. But I just wanted to do it for myself because, you know, it was like, what do they say, scratch an itch or whatever it is. Itch a scratch or scratch an itch.

So that was it. And about four or five months later, I did my first episode with Marcus. And it’s been every Friday at eight o’clock in the morning, in Eastern Standard time, a new episode comes out and I’ve, I don’t miss. The really cool thing is that the stories are phenomenal. I mean, there is a certain, similarities between people, there definitely is and I can write a book now about the WordPress community.

And I’m also, you know, the purpose of the show too is not just to satisfy me, but to give people an opportunity to tell their stories. And not surprisingly, people like to talk about themselves. You know, so my job is sort of, let them do that, get out of the way, hopefully get them to say something that they don’t really want to say. It’s just been really, it’s taken over my life.

[00:09:47] Nathan Wrigley: Have you always been, how to describe it, a raconteur? Have you always been the kind of character that can fill a silence? Or is this something that you’ve had to develop and get out of your comfort zone a little bit?

[00:09:59] Bud Kraus: No. I’ve always been pretty good at talking to people. And I really started to realise that, or sort of got into that, I took this train trip around the United States in 2018. I was gone for 19 days, went all the way around the country, and I basically would interview people. Now, you know, I didn’t record much, but I would just go around and say, when you’re on a train for that long a period of time, you get to talk to people.

And I started realising, my God, everybody I’m talking to has the most unbelievable story. It wasn’t like right from there, I went from that to WordPress, to my podcast. But I, you know, in a very gradual process, I started to realise that I like doing this. And the other thing is I love radio and the spoken word, and I think you do too. Most people who are in podcasting are sort of like frustrated radio personalities or whatever. I don’t feel that’s what I am, but I’ve always listened to talk radio ever since I was a little kid so, yeah, it all fits together.

[00:10:56] Nathan Wrigley: I feel there is a certain skill if you are going to do interviews as you do, and it, I guess it’s more of a conversation what you have. I think most of content that I create is more of an interview where the person comes and I ask a series of questions, which hopefully elicit responses.

But I think there is a certain character trait about that. You know, the ability to ask questions and then sit back and listen. And that is one of the things that I discovered at the beginning was the most important skill is not necessarily the question, it’s the listening. Which sounds a bit the wrong way round. But if you’re not listening to each reply as it comes out the guest’s mouth, then the follow-up question is basically, you’re just following a proforma.

Okay, I’m going to ask this question, and then whatever comes out of their mouth when they finish saying that, I’ll go to this question. And that, for me, has never really worked. It’s been more a case of, okay, be quiet Nathan, listen to the reply, and then hopefully the conversation will flow, because a question that you didn’t anticipate will come out of your mouth. And so I wondered if that was a part that you’ve discovered as well as I did, that listening is equally important.

[00:12:03] Bud Kraus: It’s probably more important now. You know, it reminds me, in fourth grade, I had a music teacher that said, it’s not the note you’re playing, it’s the next note. And that’s very much like what you’re talking about, which is you’re listening and you’re figuring out, and it’s hard. It’s not that simple, because you’re listening to what they’re saying, but you’re also thinking, what’s going to be my follow up question? What’s the natural flow of the conversation?

You know, and if you’re really good at it, you’re not really thinking that way. It just flows natural, you know? So if they say something, I think the first thing you need is curiosity. Where did that come from? Or, why did you do that? Or, how come you didn’t do this? And in fact, we’re releasing a book, an ebook now called Questions I Wish I Had Asked. And I have five people who have answered each one, their own question that I should have asked them, or I forgot.

So when it comes to this kind of stuff, you can build like a little empire with eBooks and blogs and this, you know, it’s just amazing what can grow out of a podcast.

[00:12:55] Nathan Wrigley: I make sure that all of the guests have access to some sort of shared show notes, so that if I have a series of questions, at least they can be prepared. But also my weapon of choice is what you can now see, but the people listening to this can’t. It’s basically a pen and a piece of paper. When something during the course of our conversation occurs to me, I know that my job is to not interrupt you with that moment’s thought, but I just scribble it down and then when you’ve finished, see if that’s where the journey takes me. But it might be that something else comes along. So yeah, it’s kind of interesting.

I think we’re both very lucky though, in that we are in the technology space, and WordPress in particular is this perfect medium for getting a podcast out into the real world. Because I feel that for a lot of people, that’s another hurdle that they’ve got to go through. Okay, I want to make a podcast. How do I do that? Where do I put it? How do I get a website, and all of that? And so, what do you feel about that? Do you feel that you’re in a, you know, a lucky position that you knew WordPress when you started out this whole thing?

[00:13:55] Bud Kraus: Yeah, but I didn’t really launch with a website. I launched just by learning the software, Descript and SquadCast and the Riverside and this and that, you know? Because I didn’t know any of this. And, you know, some people were giving me, why don’t you check this, check that? And eventually I came up with my podcast stack. How do you like that?

But then after I had a couple episodes out, I thought like, you know, I should have a website. And then that came along. And of course that’s easy because, you know, we both know WordPress, so that part’s done.

Yeah, you’re right. I mean, we’re lucky also that we’re in a community who is technologically savvy and will listen to podcasts. And so that’s another thing that’s also fortunate that there are many corporate sponsors of WordPress podcasts. Although I don’t consider myself a WordPress podcast, but you know, I guess I am.

[00:14:43] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, I guess the people that you’re interviewing are definitely bound to that subject, but you are very often not dealing with WordPress too much during the conversations, which is I think kind of nice. And we’ll get onto that in a minute.

But, do you mind if I obsess about the tech stack there? Because it may be that there’s people listening to this who have listened to this podcast and it just comes out of their phone or it comes out of their speakers, and they’ve never really thought too much about the bits and pieces that go on in the background. So let’s just share our similarities and differences there. What would you say is the tech stack that you’ve got? What are the three or four things which are essential that you’ve learned?

[00:15:16] Bud Kraus: Well, I start with SquadCast for the recording. And I’m not an expert on this because I’m still new at this and I don’t, you know, I haven’t used, I’ve experimented a little bit with Riverside, and I know there’s a whole bunch of other ones and free ones and this one, but SquadCast, you pay a little bit of money, so what. And I think it’s really good. You can do audio, you can do video, you can do all kinds of stuff. And then I use Descript to do the editing.

And you know, everybody has a different workflow. I will use the timeline, I will use the text-based editing. I’ll do it my way, you’ll do it your way. It’s always kind of interesting to learn how people use these tools in different ways. And then after the show is edited, and personally I find the editing to be the best part of the show, which is really, you know, you think talking to the people. Well, that’s fun but, you know, Nathan, going back to what you were talking about, about listening, I don’t really hear the show until I start editing.

That’s the first time I really hear it, because I’m not concentrating on the questions. I’m now focused on what the guest had to say. And then it’s a very creative process. Do you want to shorten the gaps between pauses? Do you want to take out all the ums, sos, you knows, all that stuff? You know, all those words that, the filler words, or do you want to let it fly? Do the Rob Cairn’s approach, no editing. There’s different ways of doing this.

I am more of a particular on the editing. I like to really clean things up and cut things out, especially if it’s me talking. I did this episode with Jeff Chandler where we went on and on and on about sports. That all got ripped out because like, come on, we’re both from Cleveland, Ohio. So you know, we start talking about Cleveland sports, get rid of this, no one’s going to listen. So I try to think of like the audience too.

But anyway, the editing is the most fun. A little tedious, but I think the most interesting part. And when it’s all done, then I run the file through, what did he take? It was a, I forgot what it’s called. Anyway, I run it through like a cleaner and then I published it to Buzzsprout, which seems to be doing a very good job publishing and putting it on all these platforms.

Because you don’t want, you need to have a podcast distribution service. You can’t go to all these different services and do it yourself. So it’s kind of, you know, it was sort of, because I had an understanding of technology and how things worked. The learning curve wasn’t too bad. It was pretty easy actually, when you think about it.

[00:17:37] Nathan Wrigley: I think when I started, I think I started in 2016 or something, it was definitely, it wasn’t difficult at that point. Many of the hurdles have been overcome, but it’s certainly easier now. When I did it, I began with Skype, which has just died actually, or at least Microsoft have said they’re going to kill it off.

I bought an app which would go on the Mac, and then that would record. But there was no clever sort of software like you described. We’re using now SquadCast, which is basically, you open it in the browser, send a link to somebody, and so long as they’ve got access to the internet and a microphone, we are good to go.

And it’ll record everything in separate isolated tracks. And then, as you said, both of us will throw it into Descript, which is a piece of software, it’s actually available in the browser, but you can also download it as app. And you can do all sorts. It’s amazing what it can do actually. It will bind the transcript that it creates to the timeline. And so you can delete portions of text by highlighting as if you’re in a Google Doc or something like that, so delete sentences and what have you. And it’s really sublime. So it’s much, much more straightforward.

But I’m, a bit like you, I’ve really enjoyed the editing experience because you can fiddle with it, can’t you? And you can decide which bits stay on the edit room floor and which bits go in, and sometimes you go off on different tangents. But the other side of it, that’s the software side. What are you using to actually record the audio? So microphones and computers and any of that.

[00:18:59] Bud Kraus: Okay, well, thank you Omnisend, my first sponsor. I have to get that in there, because they bought me, they said, we don’t want you using that crummy microphone anymore. Go out and buy yourself a nice microphone. Which is, it’s the same thing that you’re using. What is it?

[00:19:11] Nathan Wrigley: It’s a Shure MV7.

[00:19:13] Bud Kraus: Yes. And I really like it a lot. I have it on my desktop. I have a desktop stand for it. I have a hard time doing a boom microphone. So it’s a desktop, and it’s nice. But you know, you don’t need, I think a lot of people know, you don’t need a lot of heavy investment to do a podcast. It’s almost, talk about a barrier to entry being nothing or next to nothing. Podcasting certainly is that.

[00:19:35] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, you really, really need very little. You and I have got this modestly priced mic. It’s not the top tier and it certainly isn’t the bottom tier. But when I began, for probably four or five years, I had a really cheap mic. And it’s about where you position it and how far away you are from it and refining all of that and, you know, not breathing too heavily over it and different bits and pieces.

But the barrier to entry really is, if you’ve got a phone, you’ve got everything that you need, because it’s got its own microphone built in, it’ll do a credible job. The audio software will kind of clean it up nicely. And the website, the WordPressy bit is icing on the cake. If you really wanted to keep it cheap and cheerful, Google’s YouTube will suffice. Really, you could just upload it to YouTube and they now offer podcast as an option. It doesn’t have to be a video. Well, it needs to be a video, but it doesn’t have to actually be a picture of you and your guest or anything like that.

[00:20:28] Bud Kraus: I upload, I mean I know I’m interrupting you, but I have a question. So, where do you think the future of all this podcasting is going? I mean, what’s podcasting going to be like in a couple of years, according to you?

[00:20:38] Nathan Wrigley: I will give you the answer to that in about.

[00:20:40] Bud Kraus: I’m sorry for interrupting.

[00:20:41] Nathan Wrigley: No, no it’s fine. I will give you the answer to that in a few weeks time. I’m going to, one of the biggest podcast shows in the world is held in London every May. I’m going to be going to that. 10,000 attendees. You know, I’m in this little WordPress bubble of podcasting, but it’s an absolutely gigantic industry. It’s occupying one of the biggest convention spaces in the UK in London, in Islington, if you’re a person that knows London. I will give you more of an answer then because it’ll be interesting to see what the trends are.

However, we did have a bit of a bump in credibility in podcasting for a while, and then I think it plateaued a little bit or perhaps went down. But more recently, I think it’s been going up again.

The reason I think it remains popular is the same reason that talk radio hasn’t gone away, is because you can really get into the subject matter. If you’re really into WordPress, then there’s a bunch of WordPress things, or if you’re into, I don’t know, skiing, there’ll be skiing podcast and what have you. And the crucial bit for me is that you can do other things at the same time.

[00:21:43] Bud Kraus: Well, that’s where I was going to go too, which is talk about a mobile media. You could take it wherever you go. You don’t have to sit at a computer or anything, it’s in your headphones.

[00:21:52] Nathan Wrigley: If you’re stuck in your own house, you know, just doing chores, it can be done at the same time. And even things like mowing the lawn, which is typically quite loud and probably would’ve gotten in the way, the noise canceling headphones that you can have nowadays. And for me, basically, when I’m not doing something which requires my eyes to be on something, if I’m alone and I’ve got nothing else to do, you can more or less guarantee that I will have a podcast plugged into my headphones.

[00:22:19] Bud Kraus: Well, you know, this is the perfect medium for the legally blind. I ought to know, I’m speaking from experience here, but it is, it’s all ears.

[00:22:27] Nathan Wrigley: So, I don’t know. I don’t really have an intuition about where it’s going to go, but I don’t see any signs of it as a medium going away. Because I think we all love to listen, well, not all of us, but many of us really enjoy listening to other people and their stories, and their trials and their tribulations and their expertise and whatever it may be. I think it’s going to stick around

[00:22:50] Bud Kraus: Now, you’re so lucky because you have those golden pipes, I have nothing. I have this old man’s voice. God, I would do anything like if AI could clean me up and make me sound like you, I know it could. That gives me an idea.

[00:23:02] Nathan Wrigley: You’re very kind. I’m not sure you’ve captured entirely what my.

[00:23:06] Bud Kraus: Oh no, I remember, whoa, hold on a second. I first saw you and heard your voice when you were doing the agency summit and you’re doing all those intros. I don’t know how long ago was that?

[00:23:15] Nathan Wrigley: Oh, probably about, I don’t know, 7 years or something like that, yeah.

[00:23:18] Bud Kraus: Yeah. And I was listening. I go, oh, I’d like to. Who’s this guy with a voice?

[00:23:22] Nathan Wrigley: You know we talked about editing bits out.

[00:23:25] Bud Kraus: That’s going to be edited out. Don’t you dare. You better not or you’ll be hearing from me.

[00:23:30] Nathan Wrigley: We’ll see. We’ll see if it makes it. Okay, let’s, dig into your podcast. We’ve talked a lot about how we go about making podcasts. What is the plan? What do you do during that podcast? Yeah, just tell us what you do on typical episode and what are you trying to achieve there.

[00:23:44] Bud Kraus: Okay. Well, I’m trying to get an unexpected conversation. I always say it’s an unexpected conversation of so and so in the WordPress community. What I do is a guest first has to come to my site and fill out a form, which everybody says is ridiculously long. And I mean, you know, I ask about like almost, every question I could think of. What’s your blood type? Things like that.

And then I, before the show starts, I really don’t do any prep, very little. But before the show starts, I’ll look at what you submitted, I’ll look for a question, my first question, whatever it is. And it’s not going to be like, where were you born? Okay. It’s going to be like how come you like to smoke or something, you know? What’s that? It’ll be something like that.

Off we go. The show does not follow a linear progression, because that’s, I look at it like if I’m talking to you like at a bar or something like that. I’m not going to start from the beginning of your life and go to the end. I’m going to go back and forth and whatever. It’s just going to be, it’s sort of like a show about nothing, you know?

[00:24:35] Nathan Wrigley: It’s like the Seinfeld of podcasts.

[00:24:38] Bud Kraus: Right, and it works. Seinfeld worked. So I figured maybe this will work. So it goes back and forth and I try not to talk too much about WordPress. Usually I’ll say something like, okay, let’s talk about WordPress. You know, what do you do? And then if I feel like the guest is talking about anything, I’ll just jump in and go, okay, that’s enough of that, and we’ll go on to something else. When you’re in real life, at least for me, I’m rude enough to say to somebody, okay, enough, let’s go on.

[00:25:01] Nathan Wrigley: So the intention then is to sort of figure out the personality behind the thing. So let’s say, for example, it’s somebody that we’ve all heard of in the WordPress space, they’ve got a thing, we’re all familiar with the thing that they’ve got. Okay, we know that about them. That’s a given. So your idea is to drill in and figure out, okay, just tell us something quirky and interesting about you, your life, and let’s talk about that.

[00:25:23] Bud Kraus: Yeah, I mean, I try to ask like crazy questions to elicit some unusual, crazy response. And sometimes it happens, you know? Sometimes it does and sometimes it does. A couple of things. one I find the older you are, the more interesting you are to me, because you’ve lived a life. I don’t have anything against 25 year olds. I’ve had them on the show, but they don’t have the breadth of time that I’m looking for. That’s one thing.

And the other thing is some of the people I know very well, and some of the people I don’t know at all. I think Brian Gardner, I didn’t know Brian, and I had a great time talking, you know? or Andrew Palmer, wow, those were so much fun. So it isn’t necessarily. In fact, to me, those are the best episodes when I don’t know the person, because I just, I’m more inquisitive.

[00:26:07] Nathan Wrigley: How do you handle, or maybe you’ve not had one yet, how do you handle the guest who is not quite as talkative as you’d hoped for?

[00:26:16] Bud Kraus: Boy, that’s a good question. I’ve had a few of those. I just do the best I can. You know, I mean, everybody’s a little different. You know, the other thing too is I do interviews with people that English is not their first language, and you’ve got to keep that in mind. You’ve got to give them the space to go slow, let them talk, and then do a lot of editing.

Because what they tend to do is have what I call warmup words, where they’ll say the, the, the, the, and I don’t want four the’s, one is enough, So I’ll cut out the three the’s. That’s very typical of somebody where English is not the native language, because they’re thinking of how to say something. And I don’t necessarily think that makes for a good listening experience. So out it goes, and then they sound really good. You know, and I can think of a whole lot of people that, you know, I’d made them sound a whole lot better.

Now, I want to tell you another little quirky thing about the show. I always think like, well, when I do Nathan Wrigley, which I’ve done, right? wow, everybody’s going to be listening to that episode, you know? Because he’s so well known. Now this is not necessarily you Nathan, but it doesn’t work that way. It does not work that way. At the end of the day, I’ve realised I don’t know how many people listen to an episode, there’s so many factors. But one of them is not how well known they are. That is not a factor. Contrary to Bob Dunn, who when I first started this, he said, well, if they know the person, if people are really well known, then everybody will listen to that episode. Not true.

[00:27:41] Nathan Wrigley: Well, I guess maybe there’s that whole thing, who would listen to a podcast with me on it, because they can always listen to podcast with me on it, because that’s what I do. So yeah, that makes sense. And also, if you’ve heard from them, whoever the guest may be in a thousand different places, then yeah, I can understand that.

[00:27:57] Bud Kraus: It turned out to be sort of like the lesser known people, if you will. They get more plays. It’s just that people are just more curious. You know, they maybe they’ve heard of that person and they’re a little more curious.

Or, here’s the other thing that really increases. If so and so, let’s say it’s somebody in India or Australia or whatever, you know If they wanted to share this with their family and their friends, I see a lot of that kind of stuff going on. You get a lot of plays. So I look at, my podcast as not a WordPress podcast per se, and that’s why I think it has legs and, potential beyond the WordPress world.

[00:28:28] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, that was another question I was going to ask. Because you’re not really bound by anything other than, here’s a human being who can speak, and they’ve got a story to tell in some way, or at least we’ll try and pull a story out of them. I was going to ask if you were going to expand it beyond WordPress and just see where it leads you.

[00:28:43] Bud Kraus: I have no interest, but I have people coming, friends and stuff, will you interview me and stuff? No, I’m not interested. I don’t have time for that kind of stuff, There’s enough fascinating people in the WordPress world, and it’s definitely a way for people to get to know other people in the WordPress, see that’s, you know, it’s a platform. So that they can get to know you, me, whoever it is, beyond the typical, what’s your WordPress journey stuff, or what do you do with WordPress? It’s the story. It’s the person. It’s the biography.

[00:29:09] Nathan Wrigley: Have you ever had episodes that you were not able to get something that you’d hoped out of it? So in other words, you pressed record and then by the time you’d finished the episode, you thought, oh gosh, that didn’t work out as anticipated, or that just went off the rails, or there was nothing of interest there. Let’s can that one and either retry it or just bin it.

[00:29:30] Bud Kraus: Well, I’ve had two, one episode that the interviewee said, I don’t want you to air this, so, okay, I didn’t. And then another one said, there was a whole thing about something that this person said, I had it cut out because this person did not want me to air it. So I did. But for the most part, no. Now some of them I get off and I go, wow, that was really great. I do have that, like, whoa, what a story. And then sometimes it’s just okay, it didn’t go anywhere, or I thought it’d be better or whatever. So, I don’t know. I don’t know everybody that I interview and, the more I do this, the fewer people I really know, which is good.

[00:30:07] Nathan Wrigley: I set the expectations, like I said, with shared show notes, but also prior to hitting record, I mean, I know you so we didn’t do so much of that, but I always make time to, maybe even like half an hour or something just to chat before we hit record. So I’ll make sure that we just talk. And very, very often, very often I will do a call with somebody who wants to be on the podcast but doesn’t know if they can do a podcast. And we’ll just have a chat. And at the end of that chat, I’ll say, that’s what it’s like. Do you want to record it another day? And I’ve yet to find somebody that’s turned me down on that basis.

[00:30:45] Bud Kraus: You know, that’s an excellent point. because I’ve had a few people where English is not their language and they’ll say, well, I’ve never done a podcast. Now Anna Hurko, I was the first person, right the CEO of Crocoblock. My podcast was her first, her episode went through the roof. Absolutely went through the roof. And now you can’t get her off podcasts Like I see, she’s everywhere now, which is great. I love it. And you know, English is not her first. She speaks 85 languages, so it was great. Anna was fun. It’s an adventure. I guess it’s fun. I mean, God, Nathan, I have fun at everything I do, whether I’m writing, or spot podcasting or, you know, talking to you even.

[00:31:23] Nathan Wrigley: Even, yeah.

[00:31:24] Bud Kraus: One last thing I was about before the show, I try to keep that very short. Because I don’t want to not record something that’s really good. And I’ve noticed that a lot of really good stuff was being said before and after the recording. So I don’t want for that to happen. I want it to be recorded.

[00:31:40] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, it’s interesting because I have the opposite intuition. I have the intuition that if I get to know them, and put them at their ease, that rapport that is built up over 20 minutes or half an hour, will then lead to a better experience because we’ll both feel a little bit more relaxed and comfortable.

[00:31:54] Bud Kraus: Well, for what you do and how you do it, that makes a lot of sense. For me, it doesn’t because I’m going to leave stuff out. Now, here’s the problem though, and you probably realize this too. If you don’t know somebody, you don’t have a pre-established speaking pattern, and you tend to step on their words and they tend to step on yours. But like you and I, we pretty much have talked to each other, you know, for a while and different times. And so we now know, this is when I stop and this is when he stopped. You know, that kind of thing. It’s really hard when you’re first talking to somebody on a podcast and you don’t know them, boy, you’re going to be stepping on each other like crazy, in many cases.

[00:32:29] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, that’s kind of curious. So here’s an interesting thought then. You said that you’re enjoying it, which is lovely. I still very much enjoy doing podcasting. I have to pinch myself. What about the scenario where you have made podcasting the center, the fulcrum of what you do, and how you earn your money, and the sponsorships and all of those kinds of things. And then what if you don’t enjoy it anymore? Would it be a bit like the clients, would you be willing at that point to drop podcasting? Or do you feel like this is you for life now, this is what you’re doing?

[00:32:58] Bud Kraus: This is it now. I have to say, there are some days, if you ask my wife, that I get, oh, it’s not growing. It’s like flattened out. It’s like, she goes, because I realise well, what else are you going to do? There’s nothing else for you to do. This is like the perfect thing for legally blind people. What else are you going to do?

[00:33:14] Nathan Wrigley: You’re going to keep going.

[00:33:15] Bud Kraus: Well, as long as, I mean, I’m not a kid. I’m sort of, you know, on the senior side of life. But there’s no reason to stop as long as I can keep doing it, you know? And I just got started doing it, so who knows.

[00:33:26] Nathan Wrigley: The barrier to entry is low. The enjoyment is high. So it sounds like the perfect way to spend the next few years certainly.

I’ve discovered that about 35 to 40 minutes is about the sweet spot for a podcast episode, because it seems be the attention span that most people have got.

So that is a neat little segue for me to say we’re at minute 37 and a half, which is more or less exactly in the middle of that sweet spot. So I’m going to ask you just to sort of sign off. Tell us where we can find you. Where is the website, as in the URL? I know we’ve said the name of the podcast many, many times, but where can we find you? And where do we find you on socials and things like that?

[00:34:03] Bud Kraus: Oh God. Alright I have a website called seriouslybud.com It’s kind of easy to remember if you can remember the name. One little quick thing, I know we’re running out of time. It doesn’t have the word WordPress or WP in it, which is different than a lot of podcasts. So it could be done for anything. And it wasn’t a name that I came up with. It was my graphic designer came up with it.

Anyway, seriouslybud.com Now, the good thing about that is you can get all the episodes from the past. It’s very easy to access all those episodes. And eventually I’m going to be launching a blog which will discuss the show, the people in the show, the behind the scenes, all that kinda stuff. So I’m working on that. And as far as social, just, Bud Kraus, or seriously bud? That’s Kraus, No, E. Only one S. How’s that?

[00:34:45] Nathan Wrigley: Perfect. I will make sure that those links and any others that we mentioned during the course of this recording go into the show notes. Head to wptavern.com/podcast, search for the episode with Bud Kraus. And, Bud, it just remains for me to say thank you very much for chatting to me today.

[00:35:00] Bud Kraus: It’s always a pleasure to talk to. Well, let’s just say this. The pleasure was all yours, okay.

[00:35:05] Nathan Wrigley: You’re too modest.

[00:35:07] Bud Kraus: Alright, take care.

[00:00:19] Nathan Wrigley: Welcome to the Jukebox Podcast from WP Tavern. My name is Nathan Wrigley.

Jukebox is a podcast which is dedicated to all things WordPress, the people, the events, the plugins, the blocks, the themes, and in this case, what’s new for developers.

If you’d like to subscribe to the podcast, you can do that by searching for WP Tavern in your podcast player of choice, or by going to wptavern.com/feed/podcast, and you can copy that URL into most podcast players.

If you have a topic that you’d like us to feature on the podcast, I’m keen to hear from you and hopefully get you, or your idea, featured on the show. Head to wptavern.com/contact/jukebox and use the form there.

So on the podcast today we have Ryan Welcher. Ryan is a developer advocate sponsored by Automattic. He focuses on removing barriers to adoption for developers working with Gutenberg and WordPress. He’s a seasoned WordPress developer, and regular contributor to WordPress and the Gutenberg project. He also streams on Twitch as RyanWelcherCodes, where he focuses on custom block development.

This interview was recorded at WordCamp Asia 2025 in Manila, where Ryan was giving his Block Developer Cookbook workshop for the second year running. Ryan spends much of his time creating documentation, running live streams, and writing articles, explaining the knots and bolts of new WordPress features for developers.

He shares his journey from admiring the platform evangelists of the Flash era, to finding his own dream job helping developers understand and implement the new technologies in WordPress.

We talk about some of the biggest recent updates to WordPress Core, including the Block Bindings API, Plugin Template Registration API, Preview Options API, and the new Data Views. Ryan breaks down what these new tools are, why they matter, and how they’re making WordPress Block development both more powerful and more accessible.

He also discusses the growing emphasis on intentional high quality documentation and resources over the past few years, and how many teams are working to make life easier for developers of all skill levels.

We chat about the balance between the increasing flexibility of WordPress’ UI, and the risk of overwhelming new users, as well as exploring how emerging technologies like AI are shaping the future for WordPress developers and hobbyists alike.

If you’re interested in what’s new in WordPress development, want to understand where the project is heading, or are curious about the real impact of recent changes and features, this episode is for you.

If you want to find out more, you can find all of the links in the show notes by heading to wptavern.com/podcast, where you’ll find all the other episodes as well.

And so without further delay, I bring you Ryan Welcher.

I am joined on the podcast by Ryan Welcher. Hello, Ryan?

[00:03:37] Ryan Welcher: Hello. How are you?

[00:03:38] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, I’m good. Very nice to meet you. This is my second interview in Manila. It’s WordCamp Asia. You have a presentation coming up. No. You’ve got a workshop.

[00:03:47] Ryan Welcher: I do. Yeah. I’m really excited. It’s actually the second year in a row that I’ve given this workshop at WordCamp Asia.

[00:03:52] Nathan Wrigley: And it’s a sellout.

[00:03:54] Ryan Welcher: It is a sellout, yeah. And not in the bad way. It’s a sellout in the sense that there’s a wait list apparently and everything. So I’m very excited. I’m very flattered and very excited about it.

[00:04:02] Nathan Wrigley: So before we get stuck into what it is that you are doing here, and that’s going to be the focus of this conversation around the topic of, well, I’ll explain that in a moment. Would you just tell us a little bit about who you are, what kind of work you do in the WordPress space and who you work for?

[00:04:16] Ryan Welcher: Sure. Well, I am a developer advocate. I’m sponsored by Automattic. I’ve been with Automattic for, I guess it’s going to be my third year. Prior to that I was, I used to work at 10up, I’ve been at a bunch of agencies. I’ve been using WordPress as a developer since maybe 2009.

I’ve been around in this space a while and, yeah, my current role is a lot of fun. I get to do things like this. I get to chat with people in exotic places, and go to conferences and lead workshops and write code that nobody ever has to use in production. It’s fantastic.

[00:04:43] Nathan Wrigley: So you’ve got a really public facing role. Is that the kind of job that you’ve always wished to do, or is it something that you more or less fell into?

[00:04:51] Ryan Welcher: If you’ll indulge me with a bit of an anecdotal story here. When I first started in web work, I used to do a lot of work with Flash. I don’t know if I’m aging myself by saying that, but we used to do a lot of work in Flash. And there was this conference called Flash in the Can, and it’s still around now, it’s not called that anymore. And there was this guy who used to work for Adobe, his name was Lee Brimlow. I think that’s how you say it. He was a platform evangelist. His job was literally go to conferences and give really fun, cool talks on the latest, greatest in Flash.

And I remember seeing this guy, going, this is like my dream job. This is phenomenal. And I just wasn’t at a place in my career where there was anything like that. And then, fast forward however many years later, and there was an opening for Dev Rel. And I was like, yes, this is exactly what I would love to do.

I love writing code. I’ve always enjoyed being a developer, but now this is kind of like, I’m also pretty outgoing, extroverted, so this kind of fills both. You know, I get to write code and like my dream is just like sitting down writing code with some obscure API, and that’s literally all, like I just get to tinker, and that’s what I love about it. It’s so much fun.

[00:05:50] Nathan Wrigley: And is that full-time then?

[00:05:52] Ryan Welcher: It is, yeah. I’m full-time. Yeah, it is fun. It is very cool. And I realise fully how lucky I am, because this is a fun job and I get to hang out with really cool people all the time. And being public facing is fun, but it’s, you know, it’s got its downsides too.

[00:06:06] Nathan Wrigley: We have this expression in the UK and it’s called painting the Forth Bridge. And there’s this bridge in Scotland called the Forth Bridge, and essentially when you’ve finished painting it from one end, you go to the other end and begin again. And I feel that WordPress, maybe for somebody in your position, is a little bit like that. It’s this constant treadmill of, okay, that’s changed. Yeah. Now we need to adapt new content. And yeah, okay, that bit’s changed over there in the meantime. New content. Is that what it’s like a bit?

[00:06:37] Ryan Welcher: A little bit, yeah. I mean it’s, when we started, there wasn’t really a Dev Rel team for the open source project that is WordPress. We were like, you know, there’s a joke, it’s like, yeah, there’s five of us or six of us for 43% of the internet. So there’s like a lot of work to be done, right?

And so there’s a lot of that. We are doing a lot of work around documentation and all that sort of stuff, so it’s like improving that. But every release, there’s like a new cycle of things that, you know, the new stuff like 6.7, all the block binding stuff and, you know, Interactivity API and all that really cool, fun stuff.

And we get to do that, but then it’s like, okay, well then now there’s new changes to the Interactivity API, so we have to kind of like talk about that a bit and stuff. It’s always new, but then there’s always, I love it when we’re like, hey, remember that bug that people have been talking about for two years? Like, oh, it’s fixed now. So we get to also be the harbinger of really good news about things like that.

[00:07:23] Nathan Wrigley: And do you get to put your own roster together of work each week, or does it come in from on high?

[00:07:28] Ryan Welcher: We kind of, it’s usually based around the next release. So whatever’s coming out in the next release, there’s always sort of like, you know, the featured items that are coming out. So that kind of dictates what we focus on for the next release.

There’s no like on high declaration of what we need to work on. It’s more like we’re fairly autonomous in what we do, but I mean, it makes the most sense. If there’s like new features coming with the next version of WordPress, we should probably get that out and, you know, talk to developers and get people testing it and get people working with it, so we can take that feedback, good and bad, and give it back to the teams that are actually working on those features and stuff like that.

[00:07:59] Nathan Wrigley: So given that it’s a Dev Rel job, developer relations, is that your target audience? It’s definitely developers, a hundred percent developers, not novices?

It could be a 101 article on how to use WordPress or, you know, a video piece of content or something like that. Right up to, okay, here’s the nuts and the bolts of exactly how this thing works.

[00:08:22] Ryan Welcher: Yeah, exactly. Like, I did an article on the developer blog, developer.wordpress.org/news. It was on like the internals of webpack, which is like, if you’ve ever messed with webpack, nobody ever wants to deal with internals of webpack, but WordPress handles it. It does this really elegant thing where you don’t have to actually install packages that WordPress provides. It kind of like all of a sudden just uses the ones that are coming, that are with the install.

So like explaining all that, it’s cool, I get to nerd out and get right into the details but, you know, it’s not for everyone. Yeah, but then we’re like, I’ve also written our articles on like an introduction to SlotFill or an introduction to Block Variation so, yeah.

[00:08:55] Nathan Wrigley: It feels like, if we were to rewind the clock like three or four years, there wasn’t so much emphasis put on documentation, knowledge base articles, video content, learn.wordpress.org. But it feels like in the last two or three years, a much greater emphasis has been put on getting the pieces of documentation right. Getting the Learn resources, you know, putting the courses together and those kind of things. Just looking at it from the outside, that’s what I think. But is this on the internal side, is this what’s happening?

[00:09:22] Ryan Welcher: Yeah, there’s definitely a focus on that. I mean, when you’re a developer and you don’t have the resources to get the answers that you’re looking for, that’s extremely frustrating. We’ve always had documentation, we’ve had, you know, it’s like 20-year-old documentation. It’s been around a long time.

But we’ve spent a lot of time improving that. Like, we’ve focused a lot on the Block Editor Handbook because block development is something that can be very difficult, especially if you’re coming from, you know, solely a PHP background, and you’re not really up to speed on React or you just don’t know JavaScript as deeply as other folks do.

And I mean, our job is to like make that transition easier, as much as possible, right? So that’s why there’s a lot of tooling around it that abstracts away the things, like the scripts package, which is like the build process that the Gutenberg plugin uses it, but it’s also like the defacto build process for building blocks.

That handles all that webpack stuff, that handles all that config stuff. You just have to like build your files. Like, you don’t have to worry about that. So there’s a lot of trying to make life easier, simpler. And a lot of that is in improvements to documentation, but there’s also like quality of life fixes for people who are working in the code specifically.

You know, like I spent a lot of time working, like the Create Block package is like my baby. I absolutely love it. It’s not my baby, like I didn’t build it, I’ve just been trying to maintain it as much as I can and adding new features to make life a little bit easier so you can like reuse it and, I don’t know, I could get into the minute details.

But I love that kind of stuff because as a developer, having been one for a long time, I know what I like and I think, I’m not saying like, what I like everyone should like, but I know when something is getting in my way versus helping me. And I think that’s a really, that’s kind of like my compass that I try to work with. It’s like, okay, it’s great, but it’s done all these things I don’t need, now I have to go and delete all that and figure out all this other stuff to get around this scaffold and, I don’t know, I’m really in the weeds right now.

[00:11:04] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, yeah. But it feels like, I’m kind of asking the same question again really, about the materials being created in a much more, well, intentional way. Yeah, the backstory to that, presumably though, is that there’s more boots on the ground. And I don’t know if it’s, in your case, it’s Automattic sponsoring you into the project. Is there more focus on that from, well, let’s just go from the Auttomatic side, so more investment from them, yeah?

And if that’s the case, is that a reaction to anything? Like, perhaps the rise of SaaS platforms, proprietary platforms, you know, the Wixs and the Squarespaces. Because that’s interesting. It kind of feels like that’s always been talked about, you know, WordPress versus all the other platforms. Pay your $20 over there per month, and you get this, and you get access to their platform and it’s well documented and so on. So I didn’t know if it was connected to that.

[00:11:57] Ryan Welcher: I don’t think there was any, I think that the rise of Dev Rel played a large part in that. Like, I don’t know the reasoning behind the creation of the team, that was decided before I joined. But I think that in the past four and five years, there’s been a real, like just across the tech community, there’s been a real like surge in the concept of developer relations and improving developer experience.

Because I think people realise that developers, like a lot of these platforms, developers are literally their client base, right? And so I think Automattic recognised that and thought, hey, it’d be great if we had a dedicated team of folks that were just making life easier for developers. You know, I always say that there’s no, like I have no KPIs or whatever, I just make things, my mandate is to make things better, as much as possible.

[00:12:40] Nathan Wrigley: Where do you make things? So is it things like YouTube videos, written documentation, knowledge base articles, blog posts?

[00:12:48] Ryan Welcher: A bit of everything. I tend to focus a bit more on the, like I have a live stream that I do on Twitch every Thursday at 10:30 Eastern. I tend to do a lot more of that sort of stuff. That’s kind of like more my wheelhouse. I write articles. I’m not the best writer. I rely on ChatGPT to help me clean that up a little bit. I write the articles, but then I, you know, smarter brains than I help me make it nicer to read.

Yeah, so I think we all, like everyone across our team has their own sort of strengths and we all kind of like play to our strengths a bit. Mine is definitely more like in the video side. I try to use my development experience as much as possible to do more complicated things. That’s not to say that the other folks on our team don’t either, but, I mean, I think I’m in a position to be able to be like, here’s a really complicated issue that people are having and how would we solve that? And it’s fun because I get paid to solve that. And other people who have clients that don’t want to pay them 20 hours just to fart around on a problem is, that’s where I can come in and help with that.

[00:13:39] Nathan Wrigley: Give that to us again though. Where do you do your YouTube stuff? And what handle would that be?

[00:13:44] Ryan Welcher: I stream on Twitch and YouTube. I multistream to both platforms. Thursdays, 10:30 Eastern, every week.

[00:13:50] Nathan Wrigley: And what handle would that be?

[00:13:52] Ryan Welcher: Ryan Welcher Codes.

[00:13:53] Nathan Wrigley: We’ll drop all of the links that we stumble across during this episode into the show notes. Yeah, so you can find it all there.

So WordCamp Asia, the workshop that you are giving is called the Block Developer Cookbook. And I am just going to read the blurb so that you, dear listener, get some idea of what it is that Ryan’s doing. And it says, this is the second year for the Block Developer Cookbook Workshop at WordCamp Asia. Last year in Taipei, we covered lots of topics like block transforms, adding editorial notes, creating a custom format and more.

This year, in addition to the existing recipes from the last year, we will have new ones to choose from that leverage the newest features released in WordPress 6.7, such as Block Bindings API, Plugin Template Registration API, Preview Options API and more. And there’ll be a workshop all about that.

And so I think your intention at this workshop, should the internet hold up, is to do like an interactive thing where the audience say, I want to do this, and you hopefully help them out with that because that’s very brave.

[00:14:58] Ryan Welcher: You can say that, yeah. I’ve had this idea for a while of a workshop where the attendees pick the content. Because, especially with a topic like block development, it’s like saying, come to my WordPress workshop. Like, there’s so many things, right? So like picking something for everyone is really hard.

And so I thought, well you know what? I’ll build this little website and they can go in. It’s like chef theme because it’s block developer cookbooks. So, you know, you login, you have a little chef hat on your avatar and stuff like that. But you can vote on which of the recipes that you’d like to work on. And so that’s the idea. And then they vote and then we go from top to bottom. We get as many done as we can in the 90 minutes or whatever it is.

I’ve been going to conferences and speaking at conferences long enough to know better than to rely on the wifi, but I thought, I’m just going to do it. So this is the second year in a row. I did this last year as well at Taipei. So I’m like super flattered that they accepted my submission is a second time in a row, so.

[00:15:49] Nathan Wrigley: I think there’s a push to make WordCamps a little bit more, and I’m going to use air quotes, exciting, interactive. Yeah, it seems like, you know, Jamie Marsland’s, the thing that he does with the Speed Builds, just sort of grabbing the attention of the audience a bit more. Does it feel a bit like that?

And workshops, they seem to grab the audience a little bit more, because it’s more interactive. It’s kind of less being presented to and more interacting with. So I don’t know, kind of opening up the laptop, trying things out. What do you think? Is that a way that you think events should go in the future?

[00:16:23] Ryan Welcher: I think so too. I think for me personally, I gravitate towards workshops more than talks. I’ve given talks and I’ve done workshops before and I think I enjoy, personally enjoy the workshop aspect because there’s a lot more like interaction and back and forth. And like if you have a question, you just raise your hand and we answer, you know. And it’s just more organic, I guess is maybe how I’d describe it.

But, yeah, I think you’re right. These sort of like fun interactive things. I have some 3D printed swag that I’m bringing. I don’t have nearly enough, so I’m going to have to come up with a, maybe whoever asks a question gets a, it’s a little like key chain of like a chef hat with the WordCamp 2025 on it.

[00:16:57] Nathan Wrigley: I am sure it’ll come out on WordPress TV at some point in the near future. But yeah, good luck with that at least anyway.

But some of the bits and pieces that you are going to be talking about, we’re going to get into that now. And the way I want to take this interview is we’re at WordPress 6.7 at this point. It depends really on when you’re listening to this, but we’re at that point at the moment.

There’s a whole bunch of stuff that has dropped, and I feel that the audience for this podcast, there’s a ton of developers. But there’s also lots of people who are not really inside the ecosystem too much. You know, just regular users. Maybe they’re using a page builder, maybe they’re a freelancer, something like that, and they don’t follow the project, they don’t really obsess about it as much as I do, and probably as you do as well.

So let’s just take a couple of these and discuss them. And if we could go in at a low level. So we’re not able to do a video and open a code editor on this podcast, it’s all about the audio, but let’s start talking about the Block Bindings API. What does it do?

[00:17:56] Ryan Welcher: Oh, I love the Block Bindings API. So there has been a long standing need in WordPress to be able to connect custom meta or custom fields with displaying them basically. And so, in classic themes, we would always just have a meta box that you would put some stuff in, and then in your templates you would just pull that information out of the database and show it.

With block themes, it’s a little bit different because we don’t really have, you can do that in some places, anyways. The idea behind Block Bindings is that you can connect a block with a piece of post meta, or a custom field and have it display. So you take a paragraph block, let’s use the example of like a personnel list maybe.

And so you’ve got like job description, you’ve got the date hired, all these pieces of metadata. And so what you can do with the Block Bindings API is you can connect that to say a paragraph block. So you can insert just a regular old paragraph block and then in the UI you can go over and say, okay, I want to connect the content field of that paragraph block with this piece of post meta. And it just shows up in there.

And then you can actually edit it in the block editor, as opposed to having to open up like the custom fields panel down at the bottom. You can edit it and it goes both ways. And it’s like extremely powerful. It’s the beginning of how powerful it’s going to get, but currently it supports, there’s four blocks that are supported. There’s the paragraph block, header block, the image block, and the button block.

So you have to use one of those four blocks, unless you want to get into custom bindings, which is sort of the second piece of it, which is like a means of defining your own binding sources. And then you can connect those binding sources to a block as well.

So if you wanted to connect to any sort of custom field manager plugin that’s out there, you could write your own that connects to that, and then you can have the block just read from that and it’s inline. You get a visual representation of it. It’s really, really cool.

[00:19:41] Nathan Wrigley: So it’s the kind of thing that in the past you would probably have got a plugin to do. Something like, I don’t know, maybe you would’ve downloaded Pods or something like that to do that.

[00:19:50] Ryan Welcher: I mean, it doesn’t manage the custom fields for you. So some of those plugins do that very, very well. But what it does do is it connects the block editor with that meta, which has been the missing piece for a while. It’s still kind of in its infancy, but already it’s shown to be super powerful.

Like, now we’re seeing a lot of people who are not writing custom blocks for this anymore. Like, it used to be like, okay, I want to show the job description, so I have to write a custom block that introduces something in the sidebar where you input the meta there and then that block displays that because you’re handling that, it’s a dynamic block, you’re pulling the meta out and the PHP, all that sort of stuff.

Now you don’t have to do that. Now you can just do a block variation of a paragraph block to auto set the meta that you want. You don’t even have to do that. You can do it right in the admin. But I would recommend doing a block variation, because setting that up every single time is a bit tedious. And especially if you’re doing it for clients, you can just do a block variation that says like, job description, and then you click on it and it just goes in.

[00:20:46] Nathan Wrigley: So you, your face, gave away something a moment ago. And it sounds like you are quite excited about what’s coming and is not yet there. But I guess one of the nice things about your job is that you really have that high level view of what’s going on in the project. And you can imagine scenarios in the near term, maybe 6.8 or something like that. For example, in this case, the Block Bindings API will enable novice users to do, well, more than you’ve just described. Yeah, that’s kind of a nice position to be in.

[00:21:13] Ryan Welcher: I don’t have, I will say this for the record, I don’t have an inside track to anything that’s not available on like Make. But I know some of the folks that are working on it, and like just in conversation, I’m very excited. I can see where it’s going, and that’s not because I have inside information, it’s just because the logical next step, it looks really cool.

Like, more blocks. Being able to do it with custom blocks will be huge once you have a custom block that you can now connect it to meta and stuff like that. There are some technical hurdles that need to be addressed to do that, but it’s going to be a big, I hate using the word game changer, but it’s going to be a game changer.

[00:21:47] Nathan Wrigley: One of the things which I always find interesting when I speak to people who are really in the weeds of it all, is that the stuff just, well, it just keeps on coming out. Because you are in there every day and it’s so self-evident to you. You know, you use all these acronyms, you know where everything connects, and you know how to make everything work. How do you feel like that is project wide?

We’re sort of going off piste a little bit here, but we’ll come back to your presentation, your workshop in a minute. How straightforward is it for people to keep up to date with this, and where would you point them? If somebody was really wanting to find out, for example, about the Block Bindings API, where’s the best place?

And I think what I’m trying to say is, there’s so much coming that it’s hard to keep up, for somebody that it isn’t paid to do it like you are. Is the documentation easy to find? There’s not really a question in there, but it’s just a, well, everything’s just coming so quickly, so fast, and it’s so disparate and you’ve got to spend, you know, like a whole week trying to track everything down and map everything to everything else.

[00:22:48] Ryan Welcher: I would say start with, it is a bit like drinking from the fire hose for sure. Like, there’s a lot of information. You’ve got stuff on the make.wordpress.org. where they sort of talk about what’s coming. You’ve got the Gutenberg releases. Like the Gutenberg, it’s on a two week release cycle, so there’s constant things coming out.

So one really great way of keeping up with that is there’s a, what’s new in Gutenberg post that comes out every two weeks, that talks about high level features. And then it’s got like a change log of everything that was merged in those two weeks. So that’s a really great way to like see what’s coming at a higher level, but also really get in the weeds.

Like, you can say, okay, this bug that I know about, oh look, they fixed it or whatever. That’s a really great place to start. You can hang out in the WordPress Slack where they do the Core Editor meetings, the Block Editor meetings, and sort of like ask questions in the open floor or just see what people are talking about.

Depending on what you’re trying to do, the GitHub repo is kind of an okay place to get some information. You’re going to get a lot of information, but that would be a place. I mean, it’s, I do it full time and it’s hard, so I get it. But the reason, that’s why I exist because if I can compile this stuff and make it palatable and easy to find for others, that’s what Dev Rel is, right? Like that’s what a lot of what we do is.

So like I’ll spend the time messing around with the Block Bindings API, and then I’ll do a live stream on it, where I’m like, okay, so we’re going to do this, and this is why I did it this way, and this is why you should do it this way because it’s easier, you know? And so like I can do all that busy work to help others who don’t, you know, because ain’t nobody got time to do all that, right? You know what I mean? So.

[00:24:15] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, that’s kind of a nice summation of where I was trying to get to. So let’s move on.

Another thing which is going to be mentioned, well, who knows whether it’ll come up, maybe somebody will ask about it. But the questions basically the same. What is the Plugin Template Registration API? What would that be and why would you want to use it?

[00:24:32] Ryan Welcher: So the example that I have is that you’ve registered a custom post type that manages people. This is going to be a common theme throughout this. And you want to inject a single page template for that particular post type that’s curated, that isn’t part of the theme that’s being shipped.

So it allows you to add templates to the active theme from a plugin, from a WordPress plugin. Which is really, really, really handy. Because if you have a plugin that, you know, you have a jobs list plugin, you probably want to provide some default templates so you can just display all the custom fields and everything, and the person that’s installed your plugin just gets that.

They can just go to the single page for each job and they have a default template. It’s a fairly straight, it’s like one hook, or a filter, I think. So it’s fairly straightforward, but it’s super powerful, it’s like a quality of life thing.

[00:25:16] Nathan Wrigley: I wondered if it was something that developers had been clamoring for.

[00:25:20] Ryan Welcher: I can remember like a year and a half ago spending half an afternoon figuring out, how can I do this? And it’s possible but, wow, is it ever in the weeds? So now it’s not. Now it’s like a filter that you just tell it where your template is and it shows up in your templates list.

[00:25:33] Nathan Wrigley: Once again, we’ll put the links into the show notes. Okay, next one. Alright, Preview Options API.

[00:25:41] Ryan Welcher: That’s a really big, fancy title for a new slot, for a slot fill. So in the preview panel where you can preview it as like a, you know, on mobile, desktop and tablet, there’s a slot that you can put something in there, and that’s kind of what it’s. So you can do whatever you want with it.

I’ve seen an example where people were toggling light and dark mode. You could have it, I mean, whatever you can imagine, you can put it in there because it’s a, like a slot is sort of like a hook, like an action.

[00:26:04] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, nice and straightforward. This one for me is probably the most interesting one. I don’t know why, I just find myself drawn to this one. And it’s not an API, we’re talking about data views. What is that?

[00:26:16] Ryan Welcher: The data views is wildly powerful. It’s a component, a component in the sense of like a JavaScript component. It’s what powers a lot of the views that you get in the site editors. So if you go into like your templates, or your pages was the first one, you can see it in a grid view, you can see it in a list view.

I believe the intention is that, as the site editor sort of spreads into other parts, you’ll see it being used for things like the post list view and stuff like that. So it’s a super powerful component. It’s being used in Gutenberg. I believe it’s still technically experimental because they’re still working on it.

[00:26:48] Nathan Wrigley: Feels like a nice one, that one, not just for developers who are building websites, but also for clients themselves, because they can suddenly, I don’t know, you’re selling houses, real estate websites, something like that, and suddenly you’ve got this house, custom post type, something like that. And there’s this image and there’s a number of bedrooms and you can make it sortable and filterable. We want to drill into the houses that are between 150,000 and 300,000. We want to reverse the order, that kind of thing.

And the end user, the real estate agent will be able to do that. And so it’s going to make the whole project easier to understand, easier to maintain. So custom post types, pages, posts, users, that’s my understanding anyway. Is that done through a UI? Is that going to be done through a UI, or is that going to be something like opening up templates?

[00:27:37] Ryan Welcher: It’s a React component that you will provide the information. So right now it’s a little lower level I think, than they maybe want it to be because there’s a lot, I’m kind of just going off what I think rather than, like no one’s told me this. But having used it a little bit, there is definitely some API refinement that could be done, in the sense of like being able, because you have to provide literally everything for it to handle all of the actions for like sorting and all that stuff. And I think what they’re trying to do is make it a little bit easier to use. So you just give it data, as opposed to like having to define all the callbacks when you click a specific button and stuff like that.

[00:28:09] Nathan Wrigley: It’ll certainly make the UI, the admin area more, I don’t know, more feature rich. Hopefully this will bring it more into parity with all of those other platforms out there.

Have you, and again, this is not really something that you are talking about, but this was just something that occurred to me. The biggest visual change that I saw in WordPress 6.7 was zoom out, zoom out mode.

Yeah, I just think the first time I, okay, I’ll explain. So let’s say you drop a pattern into a post or a page or something like that. Suddenly the whole thing kind of just zooms away. The page, the pattern is somehow distant. Everything shrinks almost like a mobile view, and it kind of just happens without you invoking it. And so that’s what that is, I think. What’s the point of that?

[00:28:55] Ryan Welcher: So you could get a sense of what you’ve just inserted in the overall size of the content. So like, if you’re writing really long pieces, my workshop website, I have very long content because it’s like a step-by-step, huge code blocks. For me to be able to insert something and get a sense of where it is on the page and look at it, that’s kind of what that’s for.

[00:29:11] Nathan Wrigley: I have a fairly small laptop, and by the time that the left sidebar and the right sidebar and the block editor have all gone in there, by the time I’ve dropped a pattern in, there’s basically no real estate left on the screen for me to see what’s above it or below it. And this pulls it right out and gives you the impression of, well, there’s the whole blog post.

And although that sounds really trivial, if the branding and everything really matters and you want one thing to follow another, I don’t know, it’s a landing page or something like that. It just gives you that overview and you can obviously move things around. Yeah, it’s hard to describe how profound it is. But it makes that editing experience, especially for novices, just so much more straightforward.

[00:29:50] Ryan Welcher: Oh, for sure, like, and if you drop a complicated pattern in the wrong spot, you’ll see that immediately. So yeah, it’s like a, I keep using the phrase quality of life, but it really is like a, oh, that’s just a nice touch. It’s made your life a little easier. And that’s kind of like, you know, I know there’s a lot of refinements going into the UI to make the writing experience better and easier, so yeah.

[00:30:07] Nathan Wrigley: A little bit off piste, and I’m putting you on the spot here. If you had to pick one thing that’s coming that people may not know about, I mean, it doesn’t have to be something revolutionary, but just something that you are curious about that is going to drop soon. I don’t know, the next 6 or 12 months, something like that, that you think people will get something out of and enjoy and be excited about. I know that’s putting you on the spot.

[00:30:31] Ryan Welcher: I don’t have one thing per se. I’m super excited about the concept of bits. It’s a very complicated thing, but being able to define areas that you can edit in the editor. So for example, the example that probably makes the most sense without me showing, like using my hands because nobody can see me, is like when you have a block binding that is connected to a piece of post meta. That’s it. Let’s use the, whatever the byline aspect, you know? So it’s like a bio or something that’s connected in post meta.

If you just want to edit one part of it, you can’t. You could edit the whole field, but you can’t edit just one section of it. Or if you have something like, my block developer cookbook site’s got a cooking time block that says, it’s got a little like cooking timer icon, and then it’s got 10, and then it says minutes.

And, well, the 10 part is actually the post meta. But I can’t edit that in line in the block editor because the whole output is, it’s like a span tag with some stuff, right? And so what bits would allow me to do is delineate that, I want to be able to edit just the 10, just that number. And that’ll be super, super powerful. It’s like an editable area inside of a larger editable area.

[00:31:32] Nathan Wrigley: Oh yeah. And I can see that being powerful in a whole bunch of different ways. Yeah, that’s interesting.

[00:31:37] Ryan Welcher: Yes. Yeah. And there’s obviously the Interactivity API, obviously, but it is one of the most exciting things that I’ve, I mean, it’s already out and there’s just more stuff coming and they’re just doing really, really cool things. I just love it. It is so cool.

[00:31:50] Nathan Wrigley: Do you think, again, just kind of dropping you into it a little bit, do you think we’re at any risk of overcomplicating the amount of things that you can do in WordPress at the minute? Here’s an example. Let’s say I just took somebody off the street and said, here’s a brand new installed WordPress website. It allows you to make content, publish websites, off you go.

How realistic do you think it is with all the different bits and pieces that are dropping? I know you don’t have to get into the weeds of all this, but how easy do you think the UI is right now? Do you think it’s getting more complicated at the expense of, my question basically boils down to, are there too many options right now in the same UI, which make it difficult for people to understand who are new to the project?

[00:32:30] Ryan Welcher: That’s an interesting question. WordPress has had a philosophy of decisions, not options for a long time. And I think Gutenberg is providing more options now, which is good.

So like, if I were to take my mother who’s not technical at all and sit her down and say, build a website, she would probably have a better chance of doing it with Gutenberg than she would’ve pre 5.0, because she can control every part of it. I mean, I’d have to tell her how to do it all because she’s not technical.

But I think that there is a lot of options, but there’s also a lot of potential for creativity. And you have access to almost everything that you would need in the editor experience now, whereas you didn’t before. If you wanted to build a very customised theme, like in classic, and this isn’t like taking a shot at classic, but if you wanted to have a person post type, you couldn’t do that. You needed to edit code to be able to output that meta.

I mean, I’m sure there were plugins and stuff, but now you don’t really need to do that. You have everything that you need as long as you know where to click to find it. But it’s like, anybody who’s never used WordPress would have to figure that out in any platform. You’d have to sort that out. I mean, there’s a lot of options, which can be confusing, but now you can do whatever you want to do, for the most part.

[00:33:38] Nathan Wrigley: I think it’s curious because for the longest time people have been sort of saying, you know, the sky’s falling in, the job market for WordPress developers is just going to get hollowed out because the UI, you know, the ability to do things, a novice being able to do things, it’s difficult. We should make it more straightforward. There’s going to be no left work for, I don’t know, freelancers, implementers, that kind of thing.

I don’t think that’s the case. I think all of these options are getting put in and some of the things that we talked about, you know, the Interactivity API and all of that, that’s the technical stuff. So there’s all of these new possibilities that are getting created, but it’s not going to be, it’s not probably going to be in the boundaries, at the beginning anyway, of a complete novice.

So it’s creating new workflows for developers to push what’s possible inside of a WordPress website, and kind of maintaining the job market for people who are implementing already. But hopefully that fear will go away because of all these different things.

[00:34:32] Ryan Welcher: Yeah, I think it’s kind of like the way a lot of developers are looking at AI right now. People are terrified AI’s going to take over. It’s not, you’re just going going to have to learn to use AI to get the job done. You still need to have the skillset to tell it what you need to do, right?

It’s the same with all this. Like, so the interactivity API, it’s really cool, and it’s ripe for someone to write a library of interactions with a UI. So the implementers who don’t maybe write that level of JavaScript, or any JavaScript, can just install that plugin. And now they can make their animations, and it’s like an animation library that’s got a UI.

I think it’s just going to open up other opportunities for the people writing code and building plugins and things like that. I mean, I think with change, change is hard. People fear change, right? It’s figuring out what the new opportunities are.

[00:35:16] Nathan Wrigley: Okay, let’s just talk about AI for just a minute. I really don’t want to get too much into AI because I’m coming from a real point of ignorance. But like you said, there’s a ton of information, misinformation. I don’t know what the right word is, that AI is basically going to be able to make it possible for anybody to speak a sentence and have a website. Give me a website, I want to read all about cars. And you just go off and it’ll come up with a website for that particular purpose. Is WordPress aligning itself to be useful with AI, do you think?

[00:35:47] Ryan Welcher: Yeah, I think so. I mean, AI is the new hotness, right? And it’s getting less and less expensive to do the AI stuff, you know, the LLMs and all that stuff. And it’s getting better, and it’s only going to get better and smarter and faster. I think that there’s, again, it’s just going to change what you have to do as a developer, right?

I am behind on AI, but I’ve made a concerted effort to start using Cursor AI, which I think is a lot of fun. I’m finding that like, I still have to be a developer to tell it what I want, right? But you can absolutely say, hey, build me a website that sells cars. And it’ll build you a website that sells cars. Who knows what the code looks like, and if you can maintain it, and if there’s a bug in there, can you find it?

So I think there’s like, I don’t know, I’m sure there are people listening that are like, oh, you don’t know what you’re talking about. You can already do that in AI and it’s amazing. Because I’m just not, it’s like the running joke, in JavaScript it’s like, there’s a new library released every other weekend. I feel like there’s a new AI tool that’s like better and better and better like at every day.

[00:36:37] Nathan Wrigley: I am finding it fascinating that a lot of people who are putting out content into the WordPress space, videos and things like that, they’re making a concerted effort to bind AI into WordPress. It’s not like they’ve just pivoted completely to, let’s build websites with AI. It’s more, let’s find a thing in WordPress that we can do in a heartbeat, and we actually want to do it inside of WordPress, and let’s just add a piece of AI on top of that to enable me to do this curious thing, and solve this problem that I’ve got with a client website.

So it seems like people are using AI just to build stuff on top of WordPress, and not really the opposite. I haven’t seen any sort of move away. I don’t need WordPress anymore. That just doesn’t seem to be what I’m seeing.

[00:37:22] Ryan Welcher: And I think it’s because the people that are doing that are, that’s where they work is in WordPress, right? Like, if you’re using, I don’t know, Wix or whatever, or like Next.js or any sort of like other platform for web stuff, I think you would see people trying to apply these AI things to that.

I think it’s a huge opportunity for an AI to be able to create block patterns and create templates that work properly. It’s hard to do right now because I don’t think the LLMs really have the information for it. Like, it’s not because of the way that the data’s stored, it’s sort of different than, like it’s not really that well documented, maybe. I may not be making sense right now. There’s no real like example, right? Because it’s sort of different.

[00:37:58] Nathan Wrigley: We need you to create more examples, yeah.

[00:38:02] Ryan Welcher: I think what’s really exciting is that having to be in an, like an encyclopedia of APIs, having to like to the documentation site all the time, I think that’s going to go away. It’s already going away. Things like GitHub Copilot and these intergrated AI tools in IDEs and everything. Now you can just be like, write me a plugin that does this. Or like, what’s the parameter name that I need for WP Query to be able to do a taxonomy query, right? It’ll just tell you.

You can just do that. Let it do its thing while you’re working on other things. And I think the days of like Stack Overflow, you know what I mean? That’s like, you Google the problem and the first example, and most upvoted answer, gets copied and pasted, right? I think that’s going to, maybe not replace, but the new Stack Overflow is like these AI tools that you can ask questions on, how do I do this? I don’t know, I think it’s just changing things.

[00:38:45] Nathan Wrigley: I think it’s a really interesting time and it doesn’t make me feel I’m nervous. I’m more sanguine about it, in all honesty. Yeah, maybe a year ago I was kind of assuming a bit like the sky was going to fall in, but it really does appear that people who are making interesting things in the AI WordPress space are just finding curious holes, yeah. And filling them up.

Okay, so Jamie Marsland did something the other day where he put a video together where he created a little iPhone app where he could upload images and click a button and it was able to do what Jamie wanted. And I think the same will be true, you know, for clients that will come to you. I’ve got this unique problem. Maybe that would’ve taken a week of developer time in the past. Maybe now it will be able to be done in a heartbeat, in more like an hour or a couple of hours or something like that. So it makes the possibilities for real bespoke websites much more possible.

[00:39:33] Ryan Welcher: Yeah. And like hobbyists, kids who want to get into coding, that’s fantastic. You can just say, I want to build a website for my dog, and then all of a sudden they’re like learning by osmosis how coding works and that sort of stuff.

The number of times that I’ve talked to a developer, and I’ve done this myself, where I’ve built a little like one-off thing, like my wife likes to track, she’s really into gut health. So like all the different like vegetables and stuff, you know, this like little point system. So I built a, just a like a really simple little app for it. It was like a weekend project. I probably could’ve done it in like half an hour in AI, and like that would’ve been nice. And it’s, you know, she doesn’t care about the features. She doesn’t care about what the code looks like. She just wants this thing that she can track information on.

[00:40:13] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, I think that’s going to be the curious thing. The thing that probably would’ve been a real cost benefit analysis in the past. They’re going to take, you know, something along the lines of that it would take three to six developers, six weeks to pull it off. Whereas now it’ll be, it’s going to take two developers an afternoon to pull it off. I mean, it might be that things need tidying up, but it just suddenly makes the possibilities, I don’t know, much more possible.

[00:40:38] Ryan Welcher: For sure. Like, there’s a classic joke about like unit tests in code. Like, ain’t nobody got time for unit tests, because once you’ve written the code, you’re never going to go back and write those tests. What if you told an AI, hey, go write all my unit tests for this code base. And even if it gets some of it wrong, you’re still going to get, you know, it’s going to save a lot of time, it’s going to do a lot of that busy work for you.

And I mean, I’ve never tested that. It would be really interesting to see, if we pointed it to like the WordPress repo, which has got, I don’t know what the percentage of test coverage is, but it just said, cover everything else in tests and see what happens. That’d be super fun. Who knows if it’d work, but yeah.

[00:41:11] Nathan Wrigley: I think it’s a really exciting time in WordPress. I think there’s so much going on. You’ve just described a whole ton of it over the past 40 minutes or so. Yeah, it’s really, genuinely feels like there’s a lot of scope for WordPress.

Well, whether the number goes up from 43 or stagnates kind of isn’t really what interests me. It’s more what’s possible, and the kind of crowd that you are going to be speaking to this week are the very, very audience that are going to make this stuff possible into the future.

So good luck and thank you. And I hope that the presentation goes well, and I pray that the internet holds up for you.

[00:41:43] Ryan Welcher: It’ll be a very one-sided, vote free presentation. So hopefully, hopefully they get it sorted out.

[00:41:50] Nathan Wrigley: Ryan Welcher, thank you so much for spending time with me today. It was really interesting. Thank you so much.

[00:41:55] Ryan Welcher: Thank you so much for having me.

[00:00:00] Nathan Wrigley: Welcome to the Jukebox Podcast from WP Tavern. My name is Nathan Wrigley.

Jukebox is a podcast which is dedicated to all things WordPress. The people, the events, the plugins, the blocks, the themes, and in this case, why open standards matter, and how WordPress fits into an open web.

If you’d like to subscribe to the podcast, you can do that by searching for WP Tavern in your podcast player of choice, or by going to wptavern.com/feed/podcast, and you can copy that URL into most podcast players.

[00:00:53] Nathan Wrigley: If you have a topic that you’d like us to feature on the podcast, I’m keen to hear from you and hopefully get you, or your idea, featured on the show. Head to wptavern.com/contact/jukebox, and use the form there.

So on the podcast today we have Aaron D. Campbell.

Aaron is an international speaker, open source advocate, and self-described outgoing introvert. He’s been a regular contributor to WordPress for more than a decade, and is currently director of product at A2 Hosting. His longstanding enthusiasm for WordPress stems from its role as a necessary counterbalance to closed web solutions, providing a vital, open source, alternative that fosters accountability among digital platforms. Aaron’s vision of WordPress’s importance has fueled his sustained commitment, and excitement for the platform matching his initial zeal from years ago.

Today we talk about a topic that’s integral to Aaron, and likely resonates with many of you listeners, the importance of the open web. With the advent of closed platforms, open standards and open source have become more crucial than ever.

Aaron shares his journey in the WordPress space, and how his commitment to the open web has kept him passionate about it over the years. We discussed the evolution of open web concepts, maintaining interoperability, and ensuring your digital creations remain under your control.

We compare this with the growing dominance of closed corporate platforms, and examine the impact of profit motives versus the more altruistic goals of open source. Aaron articulates why preserving the openness of the web is essential, not just for innovation, but for the entire fabric of global society.

If you’re curious about the role of open systems and the future they shape and why the open web matters now more than ever, this episode is for you.

If you’re interested in finding out more, you can find all of the links in the show notes by heading to wptavern.com/podcast, where you’ll find all the other episodes as well.

And so without further delay, I bring you Aaron D. Campbell.

I am joined on the podcast by Aaron D. Campbell. Hello, Aaron.

[00:03:13] Aaron D. Campbell: Hey, thanks for having me.

[00:03:14] Nathan Wrigley: Well, I’m really pleased to talk to you today. This is a subject which is fairly close to my heart. We’re going to approach it, first of all, from the non WordPress angle, and then we’ll get into it from the WordPress angle. It’s all about open standards, open source.

I guess before we begin, Aaron, I’ll just explain that this is the first interview that I’ve done at WordCamp Asia, which is in Manila. How are you finding it here? Did you have a nice journey over.

[00:03:36] Aaron D. Campbell: You know, my journey over was smooth and uneventful, which is exactly how I like my journeys to these things to be. And I’m finding the place to be fantastic, and the time zone change to be very difficult.

[00:03:48] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, that’s exactly my experience as well. I think we’re both fairly tired at this point.

It’s the first day, it’s Contributor Day, so there’ll be all of that excitement later. Aaron’s doing a presentation at WordCamp Asia, and this is what we’re going to talk about. It’s called The Future, why Open Web Matters.

Before we get into that, Aaron, do you just want to give us your little potted bio? Tell us why you are here, who you work for, what it is that you do in the WordPress space.

[00:04:13] Aaron D. Campbell: Sure, yeah. What do I do in the WordPress space? Well, that has changed a lot over the years, but I’ve been pretty actively contributing to the WordPress project for about 18 or so years now. Done everything from leading releases and leading the security team to helping put on some of these events like WordCamp US. I work for A2 Hosting, focusing on our products and helping to align what we do with the kind of open web, WordPress ethos that I have at my core.

[00:04:44] Nathan Wrigley: Can I just ask you, if you’ve been in the project for as long as you have, which is pretty much the length of the whole project, I think, 18 years or so. But basically you’ve been in it since the beginning. So it’s nothing to do with the topic at hand. Are you as excited about WordPress as a thing in 2025 as you were all those years ago?

[00:05:04] Aaron D. Campbell: Yes. Yes I am. I think that the thing that has kept me around this long, it’s not easy to do a thing for, you know, going on almost 20 years and to stay excited about it. But I think that the thing that has kept me there is this whole open web concept, and that I see WordPress as a very important counterbalance to some of the closed solutions that exist on the web.

Having a viable alternative that is open helps keep those other platforms accountable, if you will. And so I think that what’s kept me around is really that kind of idealistic thing that I have around how important WordPress is. And so, yes, I’m just as excited about it as I was back then.

[00:05:47] Nathan Wrigley: It feels like, if we were to rewind the clock 18 years ago, it feels like open was more normal, perhaps than it is now. And I think the closed platforms have monetised their way into the web and have kind of become, in many ways, the default, especially for people who aren’t in the inner circle of open source projects.

So for example, the way to carry out messaging online is to go to a closed platform. The way to communicate via email is to use close, well, the protocol’s open, but you know, the system that you might use may be closed, and so on and so forth. So that seems to be the default.

However, let me just read the blurb from your presentation so we’ll get a flavor of what it is that Aaron will be talking about out. So we’re talking about why the open web matters. And the blurb that went with that goes as follows.

The internet has revolutionised how we share information, enabling unprecedented collaboration, and accelerating human progress in ways once unimaginable. However, this powerful tool is now at a crossroads. In this talk, Aaron will explore the critical role that open systems and the open web play in shaping our future. He will delve into the potential consequences of a closed digital ecosystem, and argue why preserving the openness of the web is essential, not only for innovation, but the very fabric of our global society. Discover why the open web matters more now than ever, and what’s at stake if we lose it.

So there’s some fairly powerful words in there, you know, the future of society and so on. However, underpinning it all is this phrase, open web. And it occurs to me that, dear listener, you may not know what that means. So my opening gambit to you Aaron, what is the open web? What does that even mean?

[00:07:20] Aaron D. Campbell: Honestly, you were talking a little bit about how we see more of these closed platforms now, and maybe it was more the standard 18, 20 years ago, and it’s true. When the web started around 1991, it was open in that information flowed easily and freely back and forth. And the things that we used to interact with the web, HTTP, HTML, all these things that we use were these open standards that could be implemented by anyone. You could implement them in some sort of closed web browser. You could implement them in an open source web browser. Either way, they were open standards that you could implement.

And I think that that, where we started is kind of the core of this open that I’m talking about. It’s the interoperability, the ability for things to work together for different companies to be able to give you that same experience that you might want to have with their flavor. But if you then choose to leave that company, you can go somewhere else and still have whatever it is that you built, or created, or were using.

And so open, while I love open source and a lot of what I do is around open source, I don’t think that open source in and of itself is the open web. It’s more about this freedom to be able to own your stuff and take it wherever you want to take it. It’s that interoperability that’s really at the core of open when I’m talking about the open web.

[00:08:48] Nathan Wrigley: So it’s kind of the ability to pick up your data from one spot. Let’s say that you’ve got, well, in the case of WordPress, you’ve got a blog, you’ve got content that you’ve created, text, images and so on. The ability to say, you know what? I’m fed up with my CMS of choice. I want to move it elsewhere.

But the same would be the case for, okay, I’ve got a bunch of messages that I’ve written to some clients and to some friends. I want to be able to drop that platform and move it over here. So I guess email might be a good example there. You know, there’s the protocol behind the email, that’s completely open. It would be crazy if you could only email people who are using the same service that you had. And so you can move providers all the time, but you may not be able to move your email address. So it’s a sort of complicated picture, but transportability, yeah. Is that possibly it?

[00:09:30] Aaron D. Campbell: Yeah. I think that your example of, I’m fed up with my CMS, so I want to go somewhere else. That’s valid, I guess. But I look at it more from, let’s say that you’re a company that sells leather goods, and wherever you have your website has decided that they no longer allow you to sell leather goods on their platform.

You need to go somewhere else for your own livelihood. You need to be able to go somewhere else. Can you? And if your site is WordPress, and it’s your host that says, we no longer allow leather goods, you can just move somewhere else. But if your site is on Facebook, and Facebook says that you can’t do that anymore, you can’t just take what you have and move somewhere else.

And that’s a big difference because that’s a thing that is key to you continuing to, you know, I don’t know, run your business, make your money, put food on your table. And so it’s not just like, I got sick of this tool and wanted to move to another one. I think that part of it is like, who has control, and what are your options if what they want no longer aligns with what you want?

[00:10:36] Nathan Wrigley: So it really boils down, in your case, to the ability for you to choose where things end. Yeah, choice. A choice. Okay.

I really haven’t ever read a history of the internet, but the bits and pieces, the impression that I’ve got over the years when I’ve been reading around how the internet began, CERN and ARPANET and those kind of things. When the internet began, I don’t really know what the enterprise was to begin the whole thing.

But it felt like it was more or less a service to provide the capability for academics to communicate with each other. There was never this intention that, okay, we’ll be buying and selling goods online. We’ll all be communicating through messaging platforms online. We’ll be sending photos online. So how did the internet begin? Do you know?

[00:11:20] Aaron D. Campbell: It began open and it began specifically for the purposes of sharing information. The commercial internet exchange was trying to connect all these big networks that had tons of information in them at places like universities, governmental agencies, right? That were these silos of information.

They wanted to interconnect those networks, make the internet, be able to share data back and forth for the purposes of being able to learn from each other. It was very much an academic pursuit.

I think that that’s kind of how we grow our knowledge as people, right? We learn from what other people have learned, and then we learn some more on top of that. And they saw the value of having this kind of connected digital network to share information. And it was only useful if it was open, and that information could flow back and forth freely. And so, yes, you’re right, it wasn’t meant to be a commercial endeavor. It was meant to be a knowledge sharing endeavor.

[00:12:18] Nathan Wrigley: It’s kind of a really altruistic enterprise when you say it in those terms. It really feels like it’s for the betterment of humanity. But I’m sure all of us can imagine scenarios where we think about our use of the internet, and the words, betterment of humanity are just not, well, they’re just an anathema.

Because, you know, the internet has undoubtedly caused harms in various ways, and there’s misinformation being spread and all sorts of things like that, problems that we’ve got online.

But I’m wondering, well, if we were talking about open on all levels of the internet, so for example, the internet that I’m using, I’m using a CMS, a web browser. It’s HTTPS, CSS, JavaScript, those kind of things. But underpinning it all, here’s my Mac, and the Mac presumably talks to the TCP IP stack, and there’s a bunch of routers and all of those kind of things going on, holding the internet together. Does all of that stack need to be open, or is it okay for some bits and pieces holding the infrastructure together to be closed?

Because I’m not sure that you’d kind of want the hardware layer, if you know what I mean, some of those bits and pieces. Maybe they need to be, well, maybe they need to be proprietary and closed. I don’t know. What are your thoughts?

[00:13:27] Aaron D. Campbell: That’s a really intriguing question, and I think that for the purposes of just being able to use and enjoy and leverage the internet, no, all those layers do not need to be open. For the purposes of preserving the internet as this information sharing kind of altruistic tool, I think that there needs to be openness at every one of those levels.

I think that, for example, you were talking about the routers that shift all the information around, and they’re largely these hardware things, although they do have some software on them. But do all of those need to be open? No. But if one company is the only one that’s capable of shifting information around the web, then it becomes a problem. So as long as there are viable open alternatives, and some are closed and some are open, great.

But I don’t want any company, no matter who it is, you know, in this case maybe a, Cisco is maybe the biggest router company, right? I don’t want them to be the only one in control of what information can be sent back and forth across the world.

[00:14:31] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah. I think our conversation is probably going to dwell on the information layer, the bit at the top. So the text that we send and, you know, the images, and the CMS and so on. Now, in the beginning of your presentation, there was a phrase which stuck out because you said, we’re in a time of unprecedented collaboration, and accelerating human progress is what the internet is kind of all about. It’s a fairly lofty phrase and I was wondering what you meant by that.

[00:14:59] Aaron D. Campbell: So first of all, the internet allows for a kind of collaboration that we’ve never seen before in history, right? Like, collaboration, we all hop on these Zoom calls all the time and think nothing of the fact that I am in an instant virtual video call with people in eight different countries. But that’s possible. I literally do that almost every single day. People on my team are in the UK, they’re in Bulgaria, that’s normal. That was not normal 20 years ago. It was certainly not normal, I guess, what, 40 years ago, pre-internet.

There is a level of collaboration that can happen now that just never was able to before. And we see that in tons of places. My wife’s neurologist, I think I gave you this example in some notes that I sent over. She collaborates with neurologists all over the world, live, almost daily. And that’s mind boggling. But the fact that a neurologist can immediately learn from other specialists, like that is fantastic. That’s so amazing.

And so, yeah, it sounds lofty when you put it into words, but the truth is, this is our normal every day, and maybe we’ve gotten a little used to it. But if you take a step back and look, it’s amazing what the internet has enabled.

[00:16:22] Nathan Wrigley: I occasionally, and it really is an example of how quickly you can become, something that is extraordinary becomes completely normal, and you don’t really expect what’s going on. But occasionally I have the thought that, I’ll be looking at my computer, on my phone, and I think what I’m doing, to my 10-year-old self, was the realm of Star Trek. It was science fiction that there was a device in somebody’s hand which enabled you to communicate.

There was a screen which held images on it, and it was all encapsulated in your hand, you know? And obviously Star Trek, well, we’ve still got a long way to go. We can’t transport each other across the universe and so on. But it’s incredibly profound. And the mere fact, just take a look and think about it for a moment. You’re probably listening to this on a phone, dear listener, and I don’t know, you’ve probably got a pair of Bluetooth headphones or something like that.

This incredible stack of technology, which is now completely normal. You and I collaborating for this episode on a Google Doc. The world has utterly changed, and it really does behoove everyone, once in a while, to take a step back and think, wow, I’m really lucky.

[00:17:31] Aaron D. Campbell: I mean, when I was in school, my teacher very specifically would not let us use calculators on tests because, quote, you will not always have a calculator in your pocket. You need to know how to do this. Well, they were wrong. I have a calculator in my pocket, which is actually also a computer connected to every other computer in the world. It’s astounding how much things have changed.

[00:17:56] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, it’s pretty remarkable. I mean, I guess the next point that I want to raise is that the web, despite the fact that it’s marvelous in all these ways that we’ve just described, I think it’s, well, we’ve had an era over the last, let’s say, decade, maybe more, where it feels like the internet has been taken over largely by closed corporate platforms.

I mean, not to throw any aspersions out there, and not to name only these ones, but the ones which come to mind in my life are Google, dominating search, for example. You know, I basically have outsourced my brain most of the time to Google. I don’t really think I just Google something, and then trust that what Google gives me back is going to be credible and accurate. And I really give it a hundred percent of that. You know, I don’t question what it gives back. I assume that the algorithm is doing me justice and doing me a favor.

And equally things like Facebook over the years, I’ve invested large amounts of time into that. But it feels like in the last year, so we’re in 2025, most people have got a slightly different relationship. There’s maybe a bit more skepticism coming in. We can see the harms that maybe some of these companies are doing. And so this really does feel like a moment where open platforms, WordPress in particular, it’s an important moment to step up. So really there’s no question there. It’s more like, do you have any thoughts about proprietary platforms and their growing dominance?

[00:19:17] Aaron D. Campbell: Yeah. First of all, I hope that you are right and that in 2025 we’re seeing some of that, kind of, questioning of whether these closed, for-profit platforms are really doing what’s best for us. Because I know that they’re doing what’s best for them. The question is whether that is also what’s best for us. Companies like Facebook, like Google, they’re looking out for themselves. The question is, does that help us?

You’re right, we’ve all outsourced our brain to Google in many ways. I mean, when you talk about, I don’t know, researching a thing, you don’t even say, I’m going to go research it. You say, I’m going to go Google it. That’s what that means in our vernacular. And I think that, I hope that, people are really starting to realise, not that that’s bad because I don’t think it is, I am actually super thankful that Google makes it so easy for me to learn so many things. I love that.

But I hope that they, everyone’s starting to understand some of the potential risks there. Is it good that you don’t even question whether what Google fed back to you is the right thing? Does Google get to decide what we’re able to learn or not learn now? Is that healthy for us?

I would love if people are asking those kinds of questions, because it pushes toward having more alternatives. How do you go check, if you decide that you’re not sure if Google’s really looking out for you, how do you go check that? What do you use to make sure that Google’s still giving you what you ought to get? And if you go looking for that, that’s good. Going and looking for those alternatives, ensuring that there is a choice keeps us from being locked in, in a way that becomes unhealthy.

[00:21:11] Nathan Wrigley: I think my intuition is that increasingly these platforms seem to be tied up in profit motives, and so, the example that comes to mind in my head is the algorithmic feed in your social network of choice, really. Insert whichever platform you want there. But the idea that it will maximize engagement at any cost.

So if it can keep your eyes glued to the screen for another minute, that’s a win, regardless of whether or not that information that’s being given to you is good. And I’m doing air quotes. And so if that were to creep into, for example, Google search, okay, can we keep you on our platform? I know that’s a silly example because that’s not really the point of Google, but you get the point.

And what I’m wondering is, is profit really kind of the enemy here? Does everything have to be freely done by volunteers for it to be open? Because there’s this feeling, it feels that there’s a bit of that in the open source community. You know, if it’s done by volunteers, if it’s done for free, if you can access it completely for free, if the platform’s code is verifiable and open on the web, is that better? So, yeah, sorry there’s a lot there.

[00:22:18] Aaron D. Campbell: Well, first of all, I’ll go ahead and plant my flag on this one. And it’s maybe not the most popular opinion amongst the hardcore open source people that I honestly spend a lot of time with and work with regularly. But I don’t think profit is bad. I don’t. But if that is the core motive and that becomes the only tool that you have is one that is focused on profiting off of you, then yeah, there are concerns.

If Facebook, you’re right, or any of these social networks, they want to keep you around as long as they can because that’s their profit model. However, it doesn’t mean that you can’t profit off of open, and I am fine with profit as long as there is open. There are many companies in our space that make really good profit implementing WordPress solutions. That is open. The companies that they are implementing those solutions for own their own data. They can move it wherever they want. That’s great, even if there’s profit there.

And so I don’t think that profit alone is the enemy, but it does seem like most of these kind of closed solutions, yeah, are by for profit companies that are just looking to profit. And again, I think it comes down to choice. As long as there are enough options out there, you’re not beholden to just the one model from the one company. You know, social networks is a good example. If there’s something that’s a problem with you and Facebook, you can go to some other social network. There are other options. It’s when it’s a for-profit and just one option that it really starts to become a problem.

[00:24:03] Nathan Wrigley: I think it’s really a difficult thread to get right in our community. Because the WordPress community in particular does seem to have two sides. There’s the real for-profit side, and obviously we’re here at WordCamp Asia, and if we were to walk into any of the sponsor booths, there’s a bunch of companies here. And I imagine the fact that they can sponsor, they’re making a healthy profit. You know, they’re sending staff here and they’ve got a booth and so on.

But then there’s also the more, and again, I’m doing air quotes here, there’s the more community side, which seem to see that as a bit of a trade off. We’ve got to have these people here, but on some level it would be better if they weren’t here. If we could just do the whole thing more non-profit, that would be better. So I feel that the community we’ve got, that’s a difficult tightrope to tread.

[00:24:48] Aaron D. Campbell: It’s a very difficult tightrope to tread. The way that I thread it, I get the altruistic, if we could do everything just volunteer, but we could also have diverse volunteers and many volunteers with different points of view, and different sort of technical backgrounds, right? So that we could build a thing that works for everyone, that would be great.

But that’s really difficult because you see many open source projects that had that and built up and then failed and have sort of disappeared, because it’s very difficult to have longevity in that. To have people that stay around long enough.

And so I think that what the for-profit side does in our WordPress space is it helps ensure the longevity because those companies, hosts, for example, are hosting many, many thousands, or tens of thousands, hundreds of thousands of WordPress sites, they’re making money off of that. And so they have a vested interest in making sure that WordPress continues.

And so, yeah, there’s this fine balance between, they’re actually investing in a way that helps keep the platform going, keep the platform being built, keep the platform improving. But does that also mean that they want some influence in the platform? And I think that that’s that line you have to tread where profit helps with longevity. It does, it keeps people around. But it also leads towards a desire to influence. And are we watching out for that?

It is been a question that the WordPress project has been struggling with since its very beginning. I think that we’ve got it right at times. I think we’ve got it wrong at times. But I think that by and large, for 20 plus years, we have successfully brought those two things together, in a way that’s built something pretty amazing.

[00:26:39] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah. And also if you think about it in the long march of history, the internet is still in its infancy. And these open source platforms, this idea of volunteering your time for a global project is quite a new thing. We are just figuring it out.

And so whilst you and I are inside the baseball, we hear the arguments from both sides all the time, give it another a hundred years and no doubt things will have bedded down and the arguments would’ve been done this way and that way, and hopefully things figured out. So to me, it’s pretty remarkable that we’ve even got 20 years under our belt. Yeah, there’s going to be some disagreements along the way.

[00:27:15] Aaron D. Campbell: The internet sort of, as we know, it’s about 34 years old. It’s not been around long when you take a more, sort of, broader historical view alright.

[00:27:24] Nathan Wrigley: Over the last period of time, I’m going to say 12, 15 years, something like that, the internet feels like it’s become a sort of platform. So a good example of that would be social media, so X, Twitter and all the other ones, LinkedIn, and the multitude of ones that have come in to existence and even gone away in some cases. They’ve obviously got their proprietary technology stack, but it feels to me what you are proposing is that the internet shouldn’t be a place of platforms, it should be more a place of protocols. And what I mean by that is the underpinning technology.

So as an example, we could swap out X for something like ActivityPub or the AT Protocol. And then a variety of different platforms can build on top of that, change the UI, change the UX, change the experience for everybody. But we’d all be able to communicate using that same thing. Have I kind of got that right? Is that what you are hoping for?

[00:28:14] Aaron D. Campbell: I would love to see more of the platforms on the internet having open standards, open protocols, open data standards at their core. It would be fantastic if something like Twitter, X, whatever it is now, built on top of an open standard. And that was, like they built their own custom experience on top of it. They brought a lot of people together and gave a good experience, but that you could, other companies could also implement that protocol. And again, then you would have choice and options.

I think that at its core, like the easiest way to sum this up for somebody experiencing it is that, I really think that lock-in is unhealthy. If you can just choose to go somewhere else and you’re not locked in, then that company needs to keep you around by just serving you better, having a better experience for you, delivering more value to you. Rather than keeping you around because you’re locked in, and you’ve built a following there and you can’t get it anywhere else, et cetera.

And so, yes, I love all these varieties of platforms focusing in on specific things, you know, like LinkedIn on jobs and professional connections. I wish that more of them shared open standards at their core that could be implemented by others.

[00:29:35] Nathan Wrigley: Do you think there’s a realistic chance that these companies will move towards these more open protocols? Because obviously, you know, they weren’t, they weren’t there at the beginning. They developed their own code base and soon discovered, gosh, there’s a real economic lever here. If we can keep eyeballs on our platform, if we can lock data inside the platform so that they can’t go away, you know, users of LinkedIn, it’s just, you’re in LinkedIn, you can’t get stuff out of LinkedIn, it’s in there.

Is there any incentive for them to move to an open protocol? Apart from the fact that it’s just a morally good position to be in. Because it feels like if we were talking to the executives of LinkedIn, Facebook, et cetera, they would maybe make the right noises, but then they turn around and say, huh, we’re not going anywhere near that. We want to lock people in. We want everybody to be locked inside our silo.

[00:30:21] Aaron D. Campbell: Unfortunately, I think that there’s not a lot of, there’s not a good enough reason yet for them to move that way. So I don’t see a lot of the current platforms moving that way, at least not in the short term. I hope that some of these new platforms that are spinning up now, and that will in the near future, that might make use of that. We might be able to see new ones coming on with open standards, but I think it’s less likely to see existing ones move to that.

If I were talking to those executives though, and trying to talk about what the benefits would be to them, I think that the main things that I would try to focus on is, if there’s a chunk of your code, your system that many people are working on and improving, and you don’t have to fund every single worker on it, that there can be shared benefit from that.

I talk about this with WordPress and hosts all the time. Yeah, build some of your own custom cool stuff on top of WordPress, but also help improve WordPress itself. Yes, that improves it, the experience at other hosts as well. But if every host is doing that, then everyone’s getting shared benefit as WordPress gets better across the board. And so these existing platforms could benefit from that, not having to be the only one working on improving the protocols or whatever it is.

And the other thing is, if you are really confident that you’re building something great, if you really think you have a great product, then if you have shared protocols, that means you should be able to bring people in from those other companies that have those shared protocols. Because it means it’s easier to bring people from other places to you. They all tend to focus on the, saving what we have, preventing people from leaving. But if you really think that you can offer the best, then you can also win people in that way. And that’s sort of the approach that I take when I talk to them, but it’s difficult.

[00:32:22] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, I wonder what the age demographic of these debates is. And what I mean by that is, when it comes to events like WordCamps, if I’m looking around and being honest, I’m not really seeing many young people. And I don’t really know what I mean by young, but it seems like the average age here is not really anywhere near 18.

And I wonder if the ship has sailed in terms of, let’s take a typical child in the UK, a 16-year-old child, something like that. The excitement is all around things like TikTok and Instagram. I would imagine that the typical 16-year-old doesn’t even know that there’s such a thing as an open protocol. It’s just more, I want to use that service.

And I wonder if, well, where we need people to be going with these debates is skewing it more towards young people because they’re going to be the future. Like you and I, we, well, we’re a bit older, and we probably understand that a little bit more. I don’t know where the younger people sit around in all of this, and whether or not their semi addiction to technology is something that we can get in the way of. Or if there’s an argument to be had, if we need to be going out and talking about these things in schools, encouraging it. Curriculums in colleges and what have you, to be talking about this more.

[00:33:30] Aaron D. Campbell: I think that you’re right, that it skews towards the older crowd a little bit. As a parent, I kind of draw a parallel here, right? You can tell a kid, don’t touch that it’s hot, don’t touch that it’s hot, don’t touch that it’s hot. But it’s when they touch that and get burned, hopefully not too badly, but that’s when they’re like, oh, it’s hot. I need to pay attention to that.

And I think that that’s the same kind of struggle that I have conveying this kind of thing to youths right now is. Yeah, they’re super into all these platforms, but what they haven’t experienced yet is spending a lot of time building a thing on a platform and then it going away, and them having to start all over.

And people like you and I, people our age, we probably have. We may have experienced that many times over and, sort of, you can tell them what the risks are, but if they haven’t felt it yet, maybe they don’t quite get the importance of it. And I wish that there was an easier way to help them learn from my painful experiences rather than make them experience it themselves. But I definitely struggle with figuring out how to properly convey that in a way that they grasp the levity. I do think it’s important if we can.

[00:34:43] Nathan Wrigley: We shared some show notes when we were arranging this episode, and the question that I think hit you, the question that hit home the most was one that I wrote and it went like this. How do we get open, in quotes, to be the default given the market forces that we’re working against?

And so again, the example of Facebook, Google, et cetera. You know, they’ve got deep pockets, an incredible amount of money to spend on ads. They can occupy all the app stores, and they’ve got incredible lobby groups and so on.

And you thought, well, I think you thought that that was the question in this interview that was going to be the most interest to you. So how do we get open to be the default given the power of these massive platforms?

[00:35:22] Aaron D. Campbell: It’s so difficult, right? I think that I said that this is the billion dollar question. I think that this is kind of the core of what we need to look at and figure out. And I do think that there are some people in our space, in the open space, but even specifically in WordPress, that are trying to figure this out.

WordPress is amazing in that it’s put together by volunteers all over the world, and there’s contributors in every walk of life. But it’s not coordinated in a way that a company like a Google or a Meta or whatever, it can be coordinated to funnel all of their funds together and invest in, whether it’s lobbying or advertising or whatever it is.

We need to bring all this variety of companies, and people in our space together in a coordinated way like that, and that’s so much more difficult when each one of these companies is their own entity. But you’re starting to see some groups like the Scale Consortium, some of the enterprise WordPress agencies in our space have formed this consortium to work together to put out this kind of like enterprise level marketing for WordPress at that level.

And I would love to see more of that kind of thing happening. I think that groups working together is kind of our only chance of trying to compete with some of these companies.

[00:36:50] Nathan Wrigley: What was the organisation called? The Scale Consortium? Yeah, the Scale Consortium. Okay. And do you have a URL for that?

[00:36:56] Aaron D. Campbell: I think it’s scaleconsortium.com.

[00:36:59] Nathan Wrigley: Okay, I’ll include that in the show notes. But is this something that you are involved with personally? Does A2 Hosting, or are you involved?

[00:37:06] Aaron D. Campbell: No. So in my past life, I guess, before I really got into hosting, I ran an agency for many years including working in the enterprise space. And so I’m just still close to a lot of the other agency folks, agencies that are a part of this or people like Crowd Favorite and Human Made and 10up. They’re forming this Scale Consortium, and it’s fantastic. I talk to them about it. Every time I can see them and talk to them I want to talk to them about this thing they’re doing.

[00:37:32] Nathan Wrigley: It is kind of interesting and it’s fairly unique, I think, open source. The capacity of rivals, and again, I’m using air quotes. Yes, we can get together because, well, you know, Microsoft Bing getting together with Google, that seems really strange. I mean, maybe there’s a few web interoperability things that those companies, those proprietary companies get together on. But you know, they’re commercial rivals.

But in the WordPress space, that kind of thing’s possible. And in the open source space, that kind of thing is possible, because it’s more a case of a rising tide carries all boats. So not a case of, well yeah, we’ve got to kill the competition, kill the opposition. And that’s curious. And maybe that is the key to its success.

[00:38:08] Aaron D. Campbell: I think that you’re right about the rising tide lifting all ships. I think that in our space, WordPress especially, we have this amazing like coopetition thing where it’s cooperative competitors working together. And I think that that’s because, as long as we grow the open web, as long as we grow the people, the companies, the websites that are building on top of these open platforms, literally the pie is growing. So you don’t have to take away somebody else’s slice of the pie. As the pie grows, you can just have more and more and more of the pie.

And I think that companies in our space have really realised that. The more that they can get these enterprise level customers be building on us instead of Adobe’s platform, the more the pie has grown, and their piece of it grows. And so if they all work together, they can grow the pie better. And I think that that’s, honestly, that just makes it a more friendly, more fun area of the internet to work in.

[00:39:10] Nathan Wrigley: Do you think WordPress encapsulates a more or less perfect example of the open web? I mean, obviously we’ve got our own problems, but generally speaking, would you hold up WordPress as a really fine example of the open web or would you say there’s, I don’t know, room for improvement?

[00:39:25] Aaron D. Campbell: I think that there’s always room for improvement. I would hold up WordPress as a pillar of paving the way, right? Like, we’ve gotten it wrong a number of times, but we have pushed so hard toward building this open platform that really is truly open.

I think that there are single points of failure and stuff, even in how we have things set up. But by and large, I think we’ve done it right. I’m not going to say we’re perfect. That would be silly, because I think that we should continue to push to grow and improve. And if you think you’re perfect, you’re not motivated to do that. But, yeah, I think that we’ve done a really good job in WordPress of focusing on that.

[00:40:05] Nathan Wrigley: Well, hopefully people listening to this podcast, by the time this comes out, maybe Aaron’s talk will be out on WordPress TV. We’ll have to see. It’s a really interesting subject. It speaks to so many of the reasons why I enjoy the internet, and why I’ve skewed towards open source as opposed to proprietary.

There’s just something profoundly meaningful there for me. And let’s hope that if we would have this conversation in, oh, I don’t know, 10 years time or something like that, the arguments that you are portraying here, the powerful reasons for going open and not closed, let’s hope they win.

[00:40:36] Aaron D. Campbell: Let’s. That’s one of the most exciting things I could imagine.

[00:40:39] Nathan Wrigley: Well, Aaron, thank you so much for chatting to me today. I really appreciate it.

[00:40:44] Aaron D. Campbell: Thank you for having me. This was fantastic.

[00:00:00] Nathan Wrigley: Welcome to the Jukebox Podcast from WP Tavern. My name is Nathan Wrigley.

Jukebox is a podcast which is dedicated to all things WordPress, the people, the events, the plugins, the blocks, the themes, and in this case, how the Interactivity and HTML APIs are transforming the way developers work with WordPress.

If you’d like to subscribe to the podcast, you can do that by searching for WP Tavern in your podcast player of choice, or by going to wptavern.com/feed/podcast, and you can copy that URL into most podcast players.

If you have a topic that you’d like us to feature on the podcast, I’m keen to hear from you and hopefully get you, or your idea, featured on the show. Head to wptavern.com/contact/jukebox and use the form there.

So on the podcast today, we have Milana Cap. Milana is a seasoned WordPress engineer from Serbia working with XWP, and freelancing through Toptal. She’s not just a developer, she’s also active in WordPress community roles such as a co-rep for the documentation team, organizer at multiple WordCamps, and a member of the plugin review team.

We discussed some groundbreaking WordPress features that developers should be aware of, specifically focusing on her presentation at WordCamp Asia in Manila, titled, WordPress gems for developers: Fresh new features you’ll actually want to use.

We start the discussion with the Interactivity API. Milana explains how this feature allows blocks within WordPress to communicate seamlessly with one another. Until now, most blocks were just silos of information, they could not communicate with one another. This API enables developers to manage interactivity across multiple blocks without resorting to custom solutions.

Milana also gets into the HTML API, which underpins the Interactivity API. This empowers developers to manipulate HTML attributes using PHP, thereby reducing the reliance on JavaScript. This not only enhances page load speeds, but also simplifies the code management process. It’s not something that I’d heard of, but Milana explains how important it can be in rewriting the DOM for whatever goals you have in mind.

Throughout the episode, Milana shares examples of these APIs in action, demonstrating how they can simplify and optimize WordPress development projects, particularly at an enterprise level.

If you’re a developer looking to leverage these new WordPress features, this episode is for you.

If you’re interested in finding out more, you can find all of the links in the show notes by heading to wptavern.com/podcast, where you’ll find all the other episodes as well.

And so, without further delay, I bring you Milana Cap.

I am joined on the podcast by Milana Cap.

[00:03:32] Milana Cap: Yes. Thank you.

[00:03:33] Nathan Wrigley: Thank you. I’ve had to practice that name several times. It’s lovely to have you on the podcast today. I’ve never spoken to Milana before, although I’ve seen her from afar many times.

And we’re facing each other because we’re in the Philippines. We’re in Manila. It’s WordCamp Asia, and Milana is doing a presentation at the event. It is called WordPress gems for developers: fresh new features you’ll actually want to use.

Before we get into that conversation Milana, will you just spend a moment introducing yourself. Tell us who you are, where you’re from, what you do with WordPress, that kind of thing.

[00:04:07] Milana Cap: I’m Milana Cap from Serbia, and we have the best community in the world. I am currently WordPress Engineer at XWP and also freelancing through Toptal. I am one of the co reps for the documentation team, one of plugin review team members. I’m also a classical musician and just, you know, being loud all around. I like traveling and speaking at conferences, and that’s basically it.

[00:04:38] Nathan Wrigley: Can you just tell us a little bit about the bits and pieces going on in Serbia there? You sound quite proud of it. You said it the best or something like that. You’ve got a vibrant, healthy growing Serbian community.

[00:04:49] Milana Cap: Well, it’s not really growing, and it’s not that vibrant as it was. But the core of community that started getting together in 2016, or even before that, we still stayed, and we are still active and they’re like my brothers. We travel, we plan together. We visit each other in Serbia as friends, and we plan for barbecues and all the other stuff, besides, you know, organising events.

[00:05:22] Nathan Wrigley: So it really is an actual community.

[00:05:24] Milana Cap: Yeah it is.

[00:05:25] Nathan Wrigley: You spend social time together. Oh, that’s lovely. Yeah, and you mentioned you work with, for, XWP. This is a name that I hear a lot, but I don’t really know much about the company. Just tell us a little bit about what you do for them, and with them.

[00:05:39] Milana Cap: First of all, they are sponsoring my time at wordpress.org. It’s an agency that works mainly with enterprise clients. So we do all of it, like building you a new website, or maintaining the existing one, or fixing problems. And it’s usually, mostly, just enterprise clients.

[00:05:59] Nathan Wrigley: Is that an Australian based company?

[00:06:02] Milana Cap: It’s kind of, yeah, based. It’s created there but we are completely remote.

[00:06:07] Nathan Wrigley: Everything distributed, like a global team. Oh, that’s nice.

Okay, so let’s just move on into the topic today. The presentation that you were giving, I’ll just repeat the title, WordPress gems for developers, fresh new features you’ll actually want to use. And then I’ll read the blurb as well because it’ll give the listeners some context. We’ll take a closer look at the innovative HTML and Interactivity APIs as the most significant game changers in today’s WordPress development, with a splash of WP-CLI magic for fast and more fun development. And there might be a surprise or two.

Well, obviously on the audio podcast, we’re not going to be able to breakout WPCLI, but nevertheless, we’re going to talk about those things. We’re going to concentrate primarily on the Interactivity API. Obviously this is something that you’d need to get your hands on, you’d need to be opening a laptop. But we can’t do that. It’s an audio podcast. So first of all, let’s just break into the topic by asking the question, what is the Interactivity API? And let’s do that from a total novice perspective.

[00:07:07] Milana Cap: Okay, yeah. Well, Interactivity API allows you to get back to the whole page. At least I see it that way. Because before Gutenberg, we were using only PHP, and PHP page is aware of all of its parts. So in header, you know what’s happening in footer and vice versa.

But then we got Gutenberg and these blocks didn’t know about their surroundings. They were just like, oh, I’m a block here, and I do what I do and I don’t care about others.

And it was difficult to get that in your head, like this is a completely separate entity that, once it’s in a page, you can work with that, but there is no way to connect to it to the rest of the page. And today you have a lot of requests for having interactive page. You know, not just showing the text and people come and read, you need to have something that’s happening on that page.

And it was very difficult to, for example, make one block do something and then you use that data in another block, that was insane. And people were trying to do those things in so many different ways. It was a mess. Like, I have a slide with dolls that have misplaced eyes and all of that. That’s how it looks like.

So now with Interactivity API we finally get that connection, but it’s not like hacky thing, it’s in Core. So every block can be aware of the other block, and you can send the data from one block to all other blocks. And that’s really what was missing for a long time. And not just in WordPress, we have the same things happening before WordPress, in Symphony, in Laravel. So now we have that too.

[00:09:04] Nathan Wrigley: So let me just try and sum up what you’ve just said, and see if I’ve parsed it correctly and understood it. So prior to Gutenberg, given the PHP nature of WordPress, the bits and pieces that were displaying on the page, so header, footer content and what have you, they had some recognition within PHP of what one was doing and what the other was doing.

And then along comes Gutenberg and we shatter the experience on the page into a variety of different blocks. There’s an image here, and a paragraph here, and some more text over here, and a heading and what have you. And each of those little blocks is a silo. It lives by itself, for itself, it’s erected walls around itself so that it can’t be communicated.

[00:09:41] Milana Cap: It’s a diva.

[00:09:41] Nathan Wrigley: It can’t talk out and it can’t hear things in. And that’s a problem. I mean, it’s a brilliant solution if you want to move content around, but If you want one thing to shout to another thing and say, look, I just got clicked, go and update yourself. Add one to yourself, or whatever it may be. So that possibility evaporated.

But now with the Interactivity API, we’ve come up with a Core solution. So it ships with WordPress, everybody has it. And suddenly we’re able to say, okay, I’m a block, I’m a button, and when I get clicked, I want you to add one to the cart. And the shopping cart number can increment by one and what have you. So suddenly everything can communicate with everything else. Have I got that about right?

[00:10:23] Milana Cap: Yes.

[00:10:24] Nathan Wrigley: Oh, perfect. Okay. And so I’ve seen examples of Interactivity over many years since Gutenberg came around, and I’m imagining that each developer, therefore has had to create their own way of doing it. And presumably that works for them, but it doesn’t work for the project as a whole.

[00:10:44] Milana Cap: Not just that. It might work for them but, let’s say you have a plugin and your plugin is doing that interactive thing with your own blocks. But me as another developer, I want maybe to enhance your blocks, but I don’t have access to whatever is happening in your blocks. So whatever you are doing, like counting stuff and changing something, I don’t have that info. So I have to do, again, hacky thing.

But with Interactivity API, I have a standardised access to that. So I can, you know, set my blocks to support Interactivity API. And I can get, with just one function, I can get all the data from your blocks and work with them, and it’s completely in Core. It’s standardised. And anybody can take my data and, you know, this data and do whatever they want with that. And it’s not just that it’s easy to get that data, but we all do it the same way. So when I open your block, I know exactly what I will find there. I know exactly how to get that data, and how to provide to others.

[00:11:58] Nathan Wrigley: So the benefit is basically that it’s a standard mechanism. Everybody knows what the rules of the game are. So in the past, the experiences that I’ve seen online where plugin A has been able to clearly demonstrate this interactivity, a different developer coming to that would have to learn how plugin A does it, and then if they go and try and do the same thing for a different plugin from a rival, for example, they would have to learn that one.

And every time you wanted to do it, you’d have to learn how that system does it. So there’s no interoperability. It’s just little silos of interactivity. They worked, but they were a sort of stepping stone to what we’ve got now.

Okay, I think I understand that. That’s great. Hopefully the audience has got that as well. That should be good. Can you give us some nice examples that you’ve seen where the Interactivity API, you describe it, the audience can hear it and readily understand, okay, that’s something that it can handle.

[00:12:49] Milana Cap: Well, there is a beautiful demo that is used for demonstrating the Interactivity API by people who created Interactivity API. It’s a movie demo, and you can find it if you go for introductory post of Interactivity API at Core blog, you will find it. So it’s a simplified Netflix made with WordPress. So you get simple things like there is a favorites. So you can heart a movie, and it’ll show the number, how many favorites you have. But when you dig deeper, you can open one movie and play the trailer, and it’ll have a minimised video on the bottom. And you can, you know, browse the website and switch pages, and the video is still playing in the corner and it doesn’t even hiccup.

The thing that is happening there is you think you are reloading pages. You think you are going to different pages, but it’s really the same page and it’s just being reloaded in what you need to reload. So it’s the hardest thing for developer to do, to switch page, but doesn’t really reload the page. And if you take a look, if you try that demo and you take a look, you will see that URL changes, everything changes, but you really didn’t move from the first page.

[00:14:18] Nathan Wrigley: Okay, so what you’ve just described then, you’ve got a, like a tiled selection of videos, and underneath it is like a little heart icon. So it’s just a demonstration that if you click the heart icon, it says, I like this one. And then it keeps a record of that somewhere else. Like, how many of you hearted over here? Or, click this heart icon and it’ll take you to the ones that you favorited. That kind of thing. But also it gives the impression that you’re reloading pages, but really it’s all just happening within that one page session.

[00:14:46] Milana Cap: Yes.

[00:14:47] Nathan Wrigley: Okay. So that’s a really easy to understand version of it. And I would imagine something like, let’s say a shopping cart, I think I mentioned that earlier, where you, I don’t know, you click that you want to add something to the cart, sort of similar process. It’s a bit like hearting, isn’t it? You add something to the cart and you get that interactive cart icon in the top right of the screen if you’re on a desktop. And it says you’ve got three items in there, and you click it and you’ve got four items in there, and so on. Those kind of things. So again, it’s one part of the website, one block if you like, updating another thing. Are there any other examples that you think are quite useful?

[00:15:21] Milana Cap: Well, I saw like countdown. So if you want your website to show the countdown until launching something. There’s also we have already two examples in Core working. So you have a query block, and you can select to have it paginated, without pagination. That’s Interactivity API.

So anywhere you would use Ajax before, you can use Interactivity API. It’ll give you that feeling of nothing has been reloaded, so it’s just loading in that place. You don’t use Ajax, you just use Interactivity API.

[00:16:05] Nathan Wrigley: So this would be, I don’t know, a list of posts or something like that. And at the bottom of the screen, we’ve seen the first 12, 12 more, you would typically click two or the right arrow or something, and that would do some sort of Ajaxy request. But in this case, that’s now been removed and we’re using the Interactivity API, and it will give you the next 12, and the next 12, and so on. Yeah, that’s a really great example.

So presumably, if this is moving into WordPress Core, does that mean that a lot of the Core features that, like for example, pagination, has that now moved over in WordPress Core to using the Interactivity API?

[00:16:37] Milana Cap: Well, I know that that specific feature has moved to Interactivity API, and also the image block has the option for lightbox. That’s also Interactivity API. That’s currently in Core. And I imagine a lot of other things can be moved. But also it doesn’t have to. The only thing that it needs is a good documentation, and option that you can use it so you can do with it whatever you want.

[00:17:07] Nathan Wrigley: What is the documentation like? You know, if I was a developer and I wanted to begin using this because, sounds good, I’d rather not maintain my own bucket load of code for my interactivity in my plugin, for example. Let’s just throw all that out and go with what WordPress has. Is there a ton of documentation to get developers started?

[00:17:25] Milana Cap: There is. They are not making the same mistake we had with Gutenberg. I think for Interactivity API, the most difficult thing is to actually understand it. Because we had, I had, as PHP developer primarily, I had a problem to understand Gutenberg and to understand how React works, and why React doesn’t understand how I think, you know? And I was always over-engineering it because I was covering all the cases.

But React doesn’t care about all the cases. It was very difficult for me to understand how that works on components based, and these components don’t care about anything else but themselves.

So Interactivity API now connects all of this. And we are coming back to the system that is aware of all its parts. But not just that, in Interactivity API you have the option to write the code where it makes the most sense.

When I was playing with it, I had two blocks that were supposed to talk to each other, and I realised that something that was one block doing, it made the most sense to write the code for it in another block’s VueJS. So I was using the, there is the template that you can use for Interactivity API, and it’ll run the Create Block Script, but just use the Interactivity API template. And then you get the block that has switch from light to dark theme.

There is a toggle. The first was, it was only the toggle, and I was very disappointed. Like, the toggle shouldn’t use any JavaScript at all. But it was a good example for what Interactivity API can do. And now with the theme switching, it’s kind of complete. You understand all the things that Interactivity API is.

So this toggle was another button, and you click on it, and it shows the paragraph. And then you click on it again and it closes the paragraph. And then I used another block, and I wanted that other block to count how many times I opened and closed this toggle. It was mind blowing that that code for counting how many times I open and close it, I will show the data in this other block.

But it made much more sense to write the code for it in this first block, because I already have there code that is aware that this is open and closed. So I could just, you know, add one line of the code, and update the number there in another block. So that’s kind of the most difficult thing with Interactivity API, to understand how that functions, and that you can really achieve a lot with one piece of code, one line of code, but put it in a right place. And it can be in different places. So that’s something, you know, for you as a developer to document where I wrote things.

So with the Interactivity API, the most important thing is to actually understand how that works. There is very good documentation there for the basic stuff, definitions and all of it. And also, examples. But really, it’s not just copy, pasting from example, it’s playing with it and understanding how it is connected.

And once it’s clicked in your mind, it’s mind blowing. It’s like a game. Well, the coding for me is like a game. That’s why I started coding. But it is very interesting that you can, you know, play with it, you can break it, you can find different ways. And I was playing with putting the same code in different places to see if it will work, it will.

So there is a new skill that we will see with Interactivity API, like the most beautiful code and the most beautiful place where you put that code. And I think it’s very much open for optimising code. And you’ll see there the level of expertise of developer for how much they understand the optimisation of JavaScript code.

[00:21:45] Nathan Wrigley: Is the Interactivity API, how to describe it, is it finished?

[00:21:49] Milana Cap: No.

[00:21:50] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah. I mean, basically nothing in WordPress really is ever quite finished, is it?

[00:21:54] Milana Cap: If you software, then it’s never finished.

[00:21:56] Nathan Wrigley: No. But would you say it already has pretty much everything that you require it to have? Or can you imagine scenarios where it would be really nice to have this feature or this feature? What I’m trying to get to is, is it still under active development? Can people listening to this podcast who think that that would be an interesting use of their time to help contribute to that, is there still work to be done? And where would we go to get involved in that?

[00:22:21] Milana Cap: You can go to, there is a GitHub issue that is called Interactivity API showcase. It’s in Gutenberg repository. And you’ll see a lot of different ideas, how people want to use Interactivity API. And you will, when you start looking at those examples, you start to get ideas, what you could use it for. And you get to remember all the projects you had that you could really use Interactivity API there.

I don’t think it’s done. I don’t think it’ll ever be done because, you know, clients get very creative with things they want. And I think we can’t even imagine what we would want until we get to the request to do it for a project. So there’s a lot of things to do, as in feature terms, but there’s always, you know, fixing code, optimising here and there and cleaning things up. And then there’s an update from library that it depends on, and then you have to, you know, do that. So there’s always maintenance if you use software. It’s never done.

[00:23:31] Nathan Wrigley: I feel like if you are, let’s say 18 years old, you’ve been brought up in an era where you’ve had a phone in your hand and the apps on the phone are kind of what you’ve grown up with expecting from things online. And everything over on the phone is interactive. There’s just this expectation that you can click a button and it will do some desired action over there.

And it feels like a website that doesn’t have interactivity is almost, well, I mean, I know you can have brochure websites and things like that where it’s just static content. It feels like that’s the expectation and it’s more and more going to be the expectation. So if a project like this hadn’t come along, WordPress websites would’ve felt really strange. You know, stuck in the past in a way, because of that lack of interactivity.

And now hopefully developers who haven’t got the time, the budget or the experience to do this on their own, hopefully they can start offering solutions by just reading the documentation and not having to dig into the weeds of absolutely everything, just implement what’s been written for you, and hopefully that’ll bring WordPress more into the year 2025.

[00:24:36] Milana Cap: Well, I think that if you take from that perspective, like you are 18 years old and have everything, all the apps you want in your phone, I think that WordPress is already weird to them. They are not using CMS, it’s too much effort for the things they can do with another app in their phone.

But I don’t think that WordPress is for them. I mean, WordPress is CMS. So it’s meant to be used with purpose while kids today still look for, you know, quick content that they can, my daughter is 21 years old and she sends me, you know, memes and videos all the time. Most often than not, yeah, I tell her I don’t understand this. And she says, well, it’s funny because it’s stupid. I say, I still don’t understand this.

I mean, she understands the life cycle of something that is meaningful, something that is important. And that is something that we would use WordPress for. But their concentration and focus span is just, give me this stupid video, that’s funny because it’s stupid, and I’ll move on. So I don’t think we should even try to put WordPress there and try to satisfy that request. But still there are requests that Interactivity API does satisfy. And that was needed to be added to WordPress.

[00:26:07] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, it’s certainly nice for developers not to have to, well just basically roll their own solution and waste tons of time doing something 1,000 times, literally 1,000, maybe 10,000 times done differently. Whereas now everybody can just lean into this one implementation, and it’s baked into Core. And then everybody can inject things into, on top of your code, and you can look at other people’s code and extend it in that way. So hopefully that will mean that, you know, the project as a whole can move forward.

Let’s move on to something that I literally know nothing about, HTML API. You’re going to have to go from the very most basic description and I will try to keep up.

[00:26:46] Milana Cap: Well, HTML API is actually what powers Interactivity API. So we wouldn’t have Interactivity API as it is right now, if we didn’t have HTML API. For now we have two classes that we can use, HTML tag processor. Which is idea to use PHP to modify attributes in Gutenberg blocks, in their markup. Because it was so difficult to approach the block to get to that code and modify anything once it’s on the page.

So the HTML tag processor is just working with the attributes in markup. But it was meant to be used for Gutenberg blocks, but it really doesn’t matter what you use, it’ll process any HTML if it finds it. And it’s very useful for many things that we would use jQuery for before, and we would load the whole JavaScript file. You can add, remove, classes. You can set the aspect ratio for iframe. You can set image size attributes. You can add accessibility attributes where you need them.

And it’s all happening in PHP, you know, on the page load. It’s very fast. It’s amazing. And that’s what is powering those HTML directives that we have in Interactivity API. So in markup you will find data WP and then the rest of directive. And those directives are connecting the server side and the client side in JavaScript for Interactivity API. I think it’s called WP Directive Manager, the class that is really internal class, and it’s just being used by Interactivity API.

But then there’s a class that’s called HTML processor. And this one is doing more things than tag processor. This one knows about the closing tag, and this one will support inserting and removing nodes from the page, or wrapping and unwrapping tags on the page, then reading and modifying inner content. So everything that you were loading JavaScript for, you know, all the makeup stuff, and if something is clicked then, you know, wrap me this paragraph in this div, and then we will change the class or whatever.

You can do that with PHP now, and it feels so much less hacky. You have it. I had actually example for removing the no-follow attribute for internal links. So searching for internal links, before HTML tag processor, you would have to use regex, and regex is invented by extraterrestrials to make fun of humans.

So it’s also, you cannot cover all the cases with regex. There are always surprises. There is always some edge case you didn’t think of and cover. And when you look at that code, even five minutes later, you don’t understand anything. It’s something that you Google, and you trust the code that you found on Google.

But this one, when you used a tag processor, you actually understand everything. And it covers all edge cases. There are no surprises because it’s been built with HTML standards. So it supports every type of HTML that we will probably never see in our lives. You know, all the broken stuff and all of it, it supports it. And it’s been built by Dennis Snell. That is something unlike Interactivity API.

So we saw that Laravel has it, and Symphony has it, and Phoenix first did it. But this is something that nobody has. This is our own. And Dennis now built it from zero, completely custom. And he’s now working in putting it into PHP. So it’ll be available, yeah, to everyone. That’s a really big thing.

I gave this talk in September at PHP Serbia and people were sitting, you know, PHP developers who are working with Symphony and Laravel and doing custom PHP, and they were like, oh my God. And I was like, yeah, WordPress has something you don’t have. That was really nice feeling. Yeah, I like that Dennis is actually putting that into PHP.

[00:31:30] Nathan Wrigley: So again, like I did with the Interactivity API, I’m going to do the same here. Let me just see if I’ve understood what it is. So the idea really, if you want to interact with the DOM, right now, the typical way of doing that is with some JavaScript or other. So let’s say for example, I don’t know, you want to do the third child of a div, and you want to put a border around that.

With JavaScript, you’re going to find that third div, and then you’re going to insert some class, which will then get modified by the CSS to add a border and a border radius, and what have you. So that’s all done on the client side. Page loads, JavaScript loads, and then the DOM gets rewritten by the JavaScript.

But in this scenario, it’s going server side. It is PHP. So it’s really much more readable and maintainable, and it all just lives in this one spot with all the other PHP. And then you would write something, basically the same thing, but in PHP, to do the same job. And then WordPress, so there’s no rewriting of the DOM. WordPress writes the DOM with that in mind. So the output HTML already has that in it. You’re not using JavaScript to rewrite what’s already been written, so it speeds things up as well.

[00:32:39] Milana Cap: Yes, yes. You have less requests because there’s no file that you are requesting. There’s no waiting on, you know, everything to load. And to rewrite it, it’s just going right there.

[00:32:51] Nathan Wrigley: So it’s the same process though. The way that you would do it in JavaScript, you’re now just transferring that into PHP, but the method that you’re using to do it would be the same, you know, search for the third child of this parent div, and then give it an extra class and that’s what happens.

[00:33:04] Milana Cap: Yes.

[00:33:05] Nathan Wrigley: Okay. Yeah, that’s really straightforward. And really, really, really powerful.

[00:33:09] Milana Cap: It is.

[00:33:10] Nathan Wrigley: Because not only can you write your own thing in that way, but if you want to upend what’s already been written by, I don’t know, let’s say there’s something strange in a plugin that you’ve downloaded. Would this be able to rewrite the things that the plugin is injecting?

[00:33:23] Milana Cap: Yes.

[00:33:23] Nathan Wrigley: Okay, so you can, I don’t know, let’s say there’s a plugin which does something quirky in the HTML, you don’t like it, you want to strip something out or add something in. It sits between where the plugin injects its code and where the end user receives the HTML.

[00:33:35] Milana Cap: Yeah.

[00:33:35] Nathan Wrigley: That is interesting. So it’s a total rewrite of the HTML.

[00:33:38] Milana Cap: Mm-hmm.

[00:33:39] Nathan Wrigley: That is fascinating.

[00:33:41] Milana Cap: Yeah, and it’s fast. It’s actually working faster than when you would load JavaScript for that.

[00:33:48] Nathan Wrigley: So in many cases it renders much of the JavaScript, the JavaScript that’s being used to modify the DOM. It completely negates the need for that?

[00:33:59] Milana Cap: Yes.

[00:33:59] Nathan Wrigley: Have you found it easy to learn this?

[00:34:01] Milana Cap: Yeah, yeah. It’s very easy. It’s even easier than Interactivity API. It’s just, you know, you instantiate the class, pass the string to it that you want to, you know, search for tags, and then you have methods. You call the method and loop through the things, or you don’t have to loop, depending what you are looking for. And there is a method, remove attribute, add attribute, remove class. You know, it’s that easy.

[00:34:28] Nathan Wrigley: And, like everything in WordPress, you said earlier, it’s never finished. There’ll always be work done on it. But as of now, we’re recording this late February, 2025, is it pretty complete for all the things that you’ve wished to do? Does it have an answer for that, or is there still work to be done?

[00:34:42] Milana Cap: The HTML processor needs to be optimised, so it’s not completely production ready yet. Tag processor is optimised and ready to use, and we actually used it in 2023. We waited for new release when it was coming into Core. We waited for two weeks and delayed the deployment to get it in to actually, because that example that I used for removing no-follow attribute from internal links, that’s the real world example that we had. And it was really annoying problem that was so easily fixed with five lines of code, once the HTML API got into Core.

[00:35:25] Nathan Wrigley: I obsess about WordPress, like that’s all I think about most days basically, and yet this is somehow completely passed me by. The Interactivity API, somehow that captured my attention. There must have been some press release, or something to explain that this is happening. But the HTML API completely passed me by. I wonder if that’s just my lack of trying hard enough.

[00:35:46] Milana Cap: No, that was actually the case for many people. So for that WordPress release, I was leading the documentation focus. So I know, I wrote the field guide, and I knew that was there. But many people didn’t know.

And that idea behind this new series of talks that I do. So to find these, it’s very good that these things come into Core slowly, like piece by piece. What is ready? What is optimised? But because they are small, people don’t hear about them, because we don’t advertise that. And Interactivity API is, it gets the same treatment as any other Gutenberg feature. Like, oh, it’s flashy, it’s new, come see this.

But HTML API is completely PHP. It actually powers Interactivity API, but nobody knows that. And those were like small pieces getting in, because its purpose was to serve Gutenberg. So it wasn’t really advertised as something you can use for other things. But you know developers, they find ways to use something for different things.

And that’s why I wanted to create these talks to actually show people there are so many things you can do with WordPress now that are new. And you can use them today, and tomorrow they will be even better.

[00:37:14] Nathan Wrigley: I guess with the Interactivity API you are solving a really hard problem. So to be able to modify one part of the page, it’s content and it’s a separate block, that’s a difficult thing to overcome. So there’s a lot of work to get over that. But if you just want to add a border to the third child of a div, everybody’s using the same JavaScript technique to do it. So there’s a well understood way of doing it.

And so that, I suppose, leads to the question, what is the benefit over just using JavaScript? Why would we want to use the HTML API instead of just the familiar thing, which probably everybody’s doing, you know, just rewrite things with JavaScript. Is it basically coming down to ease of readability for everybody, and speed?

[00:37:57] Milana Cap: Yeah. I think if you take a look at, for example, enterprise projects. The way developers optimise the code, it’s like every piece of millisecond counts because these projects are huge, and they have a lot of visits. So if you can remove all the JavaScript, I mean, that’s huge. That is making such impact, and it brings you like 10 places before your competition. Doing just that is enough to use this over JavaScript.

But also, it replaces not just need for JavaScript, but need for regex as well. And again, in enterprise projects, when you have huge databases running regex and having potential to not work everywhere where it’s supposed to work, as opposed to this, that is very straightforward. Not too many lines of code, and it’s actually faster. You would take that chance.

[00:39:03] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, I guess if you’ve just got like a five page brochure website, that’s for a mom and pop store, you’re probably not going to be worrying too much. But if you’ve got an enterprise page, you know, an enterprise level website which is maybe getting, I don’t know, 50,000 hits every hour or something like that. Shaving 10 milliseconds out, multiply that by 50,000, I mean, not only is it quicker, so Google likes it, but also the cost of everything goes down. You know, there’s less bits flying across the internet. It’s all been optimised. And I guess at the enterprise level, all of those things matter.

[00:39:36] Milana Cap: Yeah, everything matters.

[00:39:37] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, that’s fascinating, genuinely fascinating, and something that I’d never heard of. So I will go and, when I’ve edited this podcast, I’ll go and preach the gospel of the HTML and Interactivity APIs. That’s everything I wanted to ask. Milana, is there anything that you wanted to get across that I didn’t ask?

[00:39:53] Milana Cap: No.

[00:39:54] Nathan Wrigley: No. In that case, Milana Cap, thank you very much for chatting to me today. Really appreciate it. I hope you enjoy the rest of your time in Manila.

[00:40:01] Milana Cap: Yeah, thank you for having me.

[00:40:03] Nathan Wrigley: You’re very welcome.

[00:00:00] Nathan Wrigley: Welcome to the Jukebox Podcast from WP Tavern. My name is Nathan Wrigley.

Jukebox is a podcast which is dedicated to all things WordPress. The people, the events, the plugins, the blocks, the themes, and in this case what the WordPress Playground is, and how it’s transforming the scope of WordPress.

If you’d like to subscribe to the podcast, you can do that by searching for WP Tavern in your podcast player of choice, or by going to wptavern.com/feed/podcast, and you can copy that URL into most podcast players.

If you have a topic that you’d like us to feature on the podcast, I’m keen to hear from you and hopefully get you or your idea featured on the show. Head to wptavern.com/contact/jukebox, and use the form there.

So on the podcast today, we have Birgit Pauli-Haack. Birgit is a longtime WordPress user, an influential voice in the WordPress community. She’s known for her role as the curator at the Gutenberg Times, and host of the Gutenberg Changelog podcast, and she brings her wealth of experience as a Core contributor to WordPress as well.

She joins me today for an in-person conversation recorded at WordCamp Asia in the Philippines, and we are discussing Playground, a remarkable development that’s set to redefine the WordPress development landscape.

Playground allows users to launch a fully functional WordPress instance directly in their browser, without the necessity of a server, database, or PHP, playground breaks down barriers, offering developers, product owners, educators, and everyone in between a new way to interact with WordPress.

We explore how this technology not only simplifies the testing and development process, but also sets the stage for more interactive and immediate web experiences.

We explore the concept of Blueprints within Playground, tailored configurations that enables a bespoke user experience by preloading plugins, themes, and content. This feature helps developers to present their work in a controlled environment, offering users an insightful hands-on approach that can significantly enhance understanding and engagement, and it’s all available with just one click. It really does eliminate the traditional hurdles associated with installing WordPress.

If you’re curious about how the WordPress Playground is set to usher in a new era of friction free web development, this episode is for you.

If you’re interested in finding out more, you can find all of the links in the show notes by heading to wptavern.com/podcast, where you’ll find all the other episodes as well.

And so without further delay, I bring you Birgit Pauli-Haack.

I am joined on the podcast by Birgit Pauli-Haack. Hello Birgit.

[00:03:28] Birgit Pauli-Haack: Oh, hey Nathan.

[00:03:29] Nathan Wrigley: We’re actually looking at each other, not through a screen.

[00:03:32] Birgit Pauli-Haack: Yes. It’s a total different feeling.

[00:03:34] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah. Birgit And I chat a lot on various other channels, and it’s a pleasure having you right in front of me. That’s lovely.

[00:03:39] Birgit Pauli-Haack: Yeah, same here. I’m always glad we meet at a WordCamp.

[00:03:42] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, thank you. So that’s the introduction then because here we are, we’re at WordCamp Asia, in the Philippines. It’s the first day of the conference in general. We had the Contributor Day yesterday, and we’ve got another day tomorrow.

And we’re going to have a chat with Birgit who is going to be talking to us today about Playground, because you’ve got a slot at the event all about creating a demo in Playground. And we’ll get onto that in a minute. But first of all, for those people who don’t know who you are, just a few moments for your potted bio. Tell us about yourself.

[00:04:09] Birgit Pauli-Haack: So I’m the curator at the Gutenberg Times and I’m the host on the Gutenberg Changelog podcast. And I also am a Core contributor to WordPress, and I work for Automattic. I live in Munich and I’m married, 37 years.

[00:04:22] Nathan Wrigley: There we go. That is a very potted bio. Thank you, I appreciate that.

So here we are, we’re going to talk about Playground. And I figured the best place to start is answering the question, what is Playground? And just before we hit record, it was pretty obvious that both you and I are very excited about this. And so I want to encourage people to really pay attention because this genuinely, for me is one of the most exciting developments, not just now, but ever, in WordPress. It truly is a transformational technology. But for those who don’t know what it is, just tell us what Playground is.

[00:04:54] Birgit Pauli-Haack: I’m totally with you there on the magic, yeah. And it’s not just for WordPress, it’s for web development. So WordPress Playground is a WordPress instance in your browser. Yeah, you go there, put in playground.wordpress.net. You get a full WordPress instance in your browser, and you can add plugins, you can themes, you can content. Test it out. Whatever you do with that and want to learn with Playgrounds, you don’t need a server, you don’t need a database, you don’t need PHP installed or something like that. So it’s just there.

And for someone who has been in the web development for many, many years, it’s like magic. Because before you’re always kind of, oh, where do I host things? What’s with the database? What’s with the server? And it’s all gone. Yeah, so it’s really cool.

[00:05:43] Nathan Wrigley: I think probably it’s best on this particular podcast to avoid the technicalities, but I would point the listener to a podcast that I did on the WP Tavern with Adam Zielinski several months ago now, where Adam came on and tried, in an audio form, it’s very hard to do, but explained in an audio form exactly what the underpinnings are.

And the only words I can use to describe it are, it’s voodoo. It is literal magic. Just two or three years ago, if you’d have said that Playground was possible, I honestly would’ve thought that you were talking nonsense. It could not happen. That will never happen.

[00:06:18] Birgit Pauli-Haack: Snake oil.

[00:06:18] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, exactly. And yet Adam managed to pull it off. And so just to re-explain what Birgit just said, it’s all in the browser. When you go to playground.wordpress.net, there is no server. Just say it again, there’s no server. There’s no PHP that you need to install on your local machine. It all happens inside the browser. Close the browser down, it goes away. We’ll come to that. Maybe that’s changed.

But the idea is it’s happening in the browser, and so you can have any combination of website that you like immediately inside of Playground, and it really is remarkable.

I liken to the moment that the iPhone got the App Store. The iPhone was a very useful thing to have. You know, it did phone calls and it looked beautiful, and you could upload music to the phone with a cable. And then along came the App Store, and suddenly a thousand, a million, different developers could get their hands on it and tell you, here’s a different way you can use the iPhone. And here’s another way, and here’s another thing that you can do. And it feels a bit like Playground is WordPress’ moment like that. You know, it just suddenly prizes the lid open, and makes developers able to show you what they’ve got in a heartbeat.

[00:07:25] Birgit Pauli-Haack: Yeah. And that’s pretty much, that’s a very good analogy because we also have a Blueprints gallery that could be something like an app store where you can learn how you can assemble it. So the core technologies is not not, I don’t know any of the technology that’s underlying. It’s based on Web Assembly. And that has been around for about 10 years, trying to get a lot of different programming languages talk to each other in the browser.

And then it’s based, not on MySQL, but on SQLite database. And then Service Workers and worker Threads API, that are browser APIs. For storage, for instance, yeah, or for sending commands to other different applications. But that’s all I know, yeah. I have never worked with Web Assembly, yeah. And MySQL, I know that, just really amazing.

So you can use that. Many people use it to spin up a fully functional WordPress and demo that. So you can use it in educational settings. You don’t have to download a whole lot of stuff. You don’t have to, as a teacher, you don’t have to set up, talk to your IT department to set up a server for all the students. You can just point them to the Playground and then give them instructions on how to work with that.

It’s a sandbox environment. It could be, yeah, if you want to. You can upload your content and then see what else can you change with it without messing with your live site. You can integrate it with your development. There is a WP now, VS Code extension where you can, so when you’re working on your plugin and you click on the button, it loads up a local Playground for you with the plugin that you’re working on already installed, and that’s really cool.

Same with the theme. The training team has been working on interactive demos in terms of having code examples on one side, and then you make changes to the code and you see it in the right hand side. How it changes the website. So that’s really cool.

[00:09:20] Nathan Wrigley: I think one of the things that you said there, you’ve got an understanding of some of the underlying technologies, but you were stressing that, basically you don’t need to understand them. Having a knowledge of them is fun, you know, it’s interesting. But a bit like I don’t have the faintest idea how to build an iPhone app, but I can still use an iPhone. And I can still benefit from this application, the maps, navigation app. I don’t need to understand how that’s built, but I can use it, it works.

And really that’s, I think the purpose. The developers over there, thank you so much, but most people are never probably going to want to get into the weeds of that. They just want to click the button and see what happens.

And just to be clear on this, if you’ve never done that, I, at my home, have a fairly good internet connection, so I don’t know if I’m in a sort of slightly privileged position, but when I click the button at playground.wordpress.net, I’m imagining it’s somewhere in the order of three to four seconds before that website is ready to go. Basically it’s the length of time it takes me to blink and grab the mouse again. It’s in a heartbeat. So there’s literally no friction.

But if you go to playground.wordpress.net and click the button, what you’re going to get there is a vanilla version of WordPress, which is fine. Then you can do whatever you like with that, put plugins in, what have you. But wouldn’t it be interesting, wouldn’t it be great if somebody came up with, oh, I don’t know, let’s call them Blueprints or something like that, where you could pre-build something that then somebody else could use.

So this is the App Store, isn’t it? You know, somebody’s built the maps navigation app. Somebody’s built the note taking app. Somebody’s built the whatever. This feels like what the Blueprints are. But I want to make sure that you are describing it and not me because I am not sure that I’ve encapsulated it perfectly.

[00:11:00] Birgit Pauli-Haack: No, you did. But in opposite to the App Store, you actually can look at other people’s Blueprints and steal them. Blueprints are written in JSON has nothing to do with Jason. It’s JSON. It’s a data format for JavaScript. And there is a schema for it, so when you put it into your code editor, it gives you signals, yeah, that you formatted right.

And then you have two different ways of configuring your Playground instance. One is to do settings. So you could do which PHP you want to use? Which WordPress version do you want to use? Also, do you want to have network enabled? And most of the time you want it enabled because you want to import and install themes or something like that. Those are the settings.

And then you have steps. And those steps are also just formulated in JSON format. For instance, you can log in. Automatically log in the person in the Playground. Or you can say, I have a landing page that should land, so when somebody uses that blueprint, when Playground is ready to completely load it, you should land in the block editor, for instance. And you should have that particular block plugin already active on that post, so you can really play with blocks. Nick Diego with his plugin Block Visibility has done a great way for a live preview of his block from the repository.

Another way is to, so install a plugin, add content to it. Use WP-CLI to instantly load up new versions, add new pictures, or use an export from another website, an XML file from another website and load it into the Playground instance.

But sometimes you have, you said you get the vanilla if you just do that, if you just do playground.wordpress.net, you get the vanilla WordPress. But it’s one post, Hello World, and it’s one sample page. But you don’t see how content kind of interacts with whatever feature you want to demo. So you need some content there, yeah. And the Blueprints Gallery has actually some nice examples on how to configure that.

[00:13:08] Nathan Wrigley: Let’s come back to the gallery in a minute. Just to recap what you just said. So there’s a bunch of settings, probably more for developers. You know, you might want to test something in a particular PHP environment or what have you, so you can select those. And then you can do these steps where you can essentially design, if somebody was to use that Playground and somebody was to click on your link, they would wait the 2, 3, 4 seconds, whatever, and then, depending on the steps that you’d set up, they would arrive where you chose them to be.

So for example, you might pre-install the latest, greatest plugin that you want to share with the world. And you want people in a post for that. And you want them inside the block editor. And you can make it so that upon clicking the button, the first thing they get is, we’re inside your plugin, we’re about to use it. So the profundity of that is pretty amazing. You can really tailor the experience.

So rather than going from being like Playground, which sounds like children, you’re messing about, larking about a little bit. It also becomes like serious ground a little bit, you know? Serious developers can use this to circumvent, I don’t know, support tickets, the capacity to demonstrate to users who’ve never seen your product before, your plugin, your theme, or whatever it may be.

You can point them to a link. They can click the link. You as the developer configure everything within an inch of its life, so they get exactly where you want them to be. And in that way you can use it as a sales mechanism, as a support mechanism.

[00:14:29] Birgit Pauli-Haack: And sometimes it’s really hard to tell people what your plugin does unless you show it them in the video. But then they still don’t get their hands on it. And with that feature, with the Playground combined with the Blueprints, you can actually make them feel the thing. How it works with them, and what ideas they get when they play around with it, and have better questions, educated questions for you, for the product, yeah.

[00:14:51] Nathan Wrigley: So a Blueprint then is a version of Playground in which somebody has pre-configured things. Is that basically what it is? You know, let’s say that I have got this fabulous new plugin and I want you to experience it. I don’t necessarily want you to land on a particular page, but I just want the plugin to be available to you and you can do things.

If I install my plugin, use Playground to do that, I can then share a link. And because I’ve tinkered with it, it becomes a Blueprint because it’s not the playground.wordpress.net version, it’s my doctored version, adapted version.

[00:15:26] Birgit Pauli-Haack: Well, it also goes to playground.wordpress.net, but it has a query parameter, to be a little technical term, that says, use the blueprint at this URL. So a plugin developer for the repository, at the repository there are live preview buttons now. And the plugin developer can put in a separate directory Blueprints on the WordPress site, put all the assets, all the image that they want to load, and the configuration file, which is written in this JSON file, and put it there, and then make that live. And every time someone clicks on the preview button, they go to playground.wordpress.net with the Blueprint kind of loaded, the configuration files.

[00:16:09] Nathan Wrigley: So it’s all happening through playground.wordpress.net. But then there’s JSON configuration file, which gets sort of sideloaded, if you like, through the URL. That tells it, okay, add this and then end up here and what have you. The important part is that JSON, that’s what makes it the Blueprint. It’s going to playground.wordpress.net, but the JSON file means that it does something else.

And you said the word gallery, which tells me that there’s a whole host of these things. Pre-configured, pre-built, put into a box if you like. And we can go to that gallery and explore. What kind of stuff is in there?

[00:16:38] Birgit Pauli-Haack: So, what kind of stuff is there? So there’s one, how do I put an admin notice on top of the dashboard? How do I add a dashboard widget and load it up with my Playground? So most of the time, when you want to log into a WordPress site, you get the dashboard. And if there’s a widget, you can actually guide people to go some other places. You can say, okay, I have a plugin that needs 50 posts, for whatever reason. So there is a Blueprint there and how to use WP-CLI to create 12 or 50 posts automatically, that are then loaded into the post content.

So there’s also a Blueprint for a specific WooCommerce extension. So it loads WooCommerce, it loads the extension, it loads some products, and then you land for a shipping page where you can say, okay, this shipping plugin, what does it do for me? And you see it working with products on a Playground site. So that is really remarkable. It takes a little longer when you have content to load.

[00:17:38] Nathan Wrigley: Goes up to like 10 seconds.

[00:17:40] Birgit Pauli-Haack: So you go and get your coffee and come back.

[00:17:42] Nathan Wrigley: But it’s still profound.

[00:17:43] Birgit Pauli-Haack: Yeah, remarkable. Yeah, you don’t have to do anything, kind of just wait a bit.

What else is in there? Oh, there is a demo of 2025. So when you load 2025 theme automatically and go to your website and see it, you get the post, the blog site, where all the posts are in one one big site with the full content. And not a whole lot of people have that kind of blog. And in the demo, you actually go to the magazine front page, and then see all the patterns that are in there. You can see all the templates in that Playground demo.

That’s interesting for plugin developers that have experimental themes or experimental settings on the settings page that you can actually preload them as well. There’s an example in there for the Gutenberg experiments. They’re on the check marks on a setting site. And you can take that and replicate that for your own plugins site, how to do that, with the areas.

Because you can do site options. So the site options is not only site title and tag descriptions, also, oh, make my block editor have the top toolbar instead of all the other things or the distraction free model, yeah. So these kind of features, you can also preload there and have examples from the Blueprints Gallery.

[00:18:57] Nathan Wrigley: I think we’re just at the beginning really, aren’t we? Of of this journey. And basically, the underlying technology is now provisioned. It’s there. And we’re at point where, okay, people, developers, explore. And we’re really just at the beginning of that. And the gallery is probably a good place to go.

But if you wanted to put one of these JSON files together, do you know, is there some credible documentation out there that would help people to get started, learn the ropes?

[00:19:25] Birgit Pauli-Haack: Yeah, there’s definitely, there’s documentation of all the steps that are there, yeah, like how to run PHP, how to have additional PHP extensions installed and all that. So when you open the Playground, there are three, and you’re not going to the full page, so you have three panes. On the left hand side you have some menus, and one of them is the documentation link. So that’s good.

And another link is there, it’s the Blueprint Gallery. So in the middle of the section of your Playground, you see all the list of all the gallery content. And then when you click on the preview or the view site, the Playground loads that for you, and then there’s another menu item where is says, view Blueprint. And that gives you a Blueprint editor.

So you see the Blueprint loaded in, but then when you want to edit from the documentation, okay, what happens when I put that in? And you click the run button, and it reloads that Playground with your changes. So it’s really, very hands on, and you still don’t have to create a server or a local environment or something like that.

[00:20:31] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, there’s this really virtuous cycle of, okay, so you’ve used something from the gallery, but you’re curious about how it works. Look, here’s how it works. Here’s the buttons to click to go and explore. Oh, and whilst you’re at it, if you want to edit anything, here’s the option to edit it. And when you click save, it’ll restart that whole thing and you’ll get the new version.

So all of the sort of helpful tooling is now built into it. Because when I talked to Adam, none of that existed. I mean, the version selection for PHP didn’t exist. The ability to land people on particular destinations when they first load up the playground, none of that existed. It was literally the technology of getting it working.

So now built into it is this knowledge base, if you like. Not really a knowledge base, but more, you want to know how this one works? We’ll show you. And it’s that beautiful, well, the purpose of WordPress, democratising publishing. In this case, it’s democratising the nuts and the bolts, and the bits and pieces of publishing.

Yeah, so that’s really nice. And that’s all built inside. So just follow the prompts in the UI, and you can adapt what you want, and what have you. But also there are some 101 articles out there, perhaps on Learn or something like that where can see in text format how do all.

[00:21:40] Birgit Pauli-Haack: Yeah, the developer blog has, on developer.wordpress.org/news has three articles about Playground. One is about the underlying technology from the Web Assembly people. That was really good for those who want to explore that even further.

And then there is one on what use cases you can do with a little bit of an example. And then also, so we are right now always talking about playground.wordpress.net. But you mentioned something that someone could put this on their website, and you can.

Playground can be self-hosted. It does not have to go through the wordpress.net site. But how to do this is in the documentation. It has a seperate section there. So if you say, okay, I don’t have my plugin in the repo, but I want to use it through my own website, then you can actually put it there, and it’ll have your own branding around it. So it’s even get further than just the WordPress part.

[00:22:35] Nathan Wrigley: So that’s a really important distinction to make. So in the cases that we’ve been talking about so far, if you want to go to playground.wordpress.net and you use your own JSON file, it will be able to suck in anything from the WordPress repo. And that’s the sort of, the WordPress way, if you like. I’m doing air quotes.

[00:22:51] Birgit Pauli-Haack: Also from GitHub.

[00:22:52] Nathan Wrigley: Oh, thank you. Yeah, that’s an important distinction. I’d forgotten that. Also from GitHub, but you know, it’s everything that’s open source out there, free to download already.

But a big part of the WordPress community, one of the things that makes it popular, is the ability to sell commercial plugins. And so that was another question that I had. Is possible to do it?

And so, yes, but you need to take the technology that builds WordPress at playground.wordpress.net, you put that onto your own server, and you can do whatever you like with that. So you can put your premium products in there on a, I don’t know, two day free trial sort of basis, and show people how that all works.

So Playground suddenly becomes more interesting outside of the free to play area as well. And you can imagine that being a really, really useful tool. Because we’ve always been able to play fairly straightforwardly with free things on the repo, but suddenly the moment where you’ve got to pay $100 for a thing, the capacity to see that really is the bit which opens the wallet.

Okay, it’s $100, maybe I’ll buy it, maybe I won’t. It’d be nice to see it. Okay, they’ve got a 14 day trial, but I’ve still got to pay for it. This opens up the capacity to, look, there it really is. Play with it for two days or whatever it may be. That’s fascinating.

[00:24:05] Birgit Pauli-Haack: Absolutely, yeah. And if you want to test that plugin, yeah, you still would need a local server or a hosting server to load it on. And you have that 14 day trial. And now you can really test it right now.

[00:24:16] Nathan Wrigley: Right. And that’s the other big thing. Because if you buy a commercial plugin, you then have to spin up a site somehow. You have to download the plugin, upload the plugin, get the plugin configured. This gets rid of all of that, because you don’t need to download and upload anything, and it can be pre-configured.

So the author of the plugin can say, okay, if you want to use my LMS plugin for this kind of thing, here’s playground version with everything just right. And if you want to do it for this kind of thing, I don’t know, you’re an elementary school teacher who might use my LMS plugin in this way, or you’re a university lecturer, who might use it in this way. Let’s build it a perfect version for you.

And you can imagine that a million times over for all the commercial plugins out there. You know, form plugins. Okay, this is the contact form that we’ve pre-built. This is the, I don’t know, the form which integrates with WooCommerce or whatever. So the developers can do all of this. And that really makes it super useful to them.

[00:25:11] Birgit Pauli-Haack: Yes, absolutely, yeah. What’s coming down the pipeline for Playground. One is that you can also use it with private GitHub repos. Which right now is not possible, but it’s in the works. And there was a problem with the proxy, that you get some cross site downloading errors because some servers are not set up to have images downloaded from a machine. They have created a proxy server now, where that is kind of circumvented that you can also from non WordPress sites download stuff, like images and content, or PHP plugins.

What also comes is, so SQL, MySQL, for some plugins Playground does not work yet, because they use very specific MySQL query, the union query, for instance. Select union and other commands like that. The SQLite doesn’t have those yet. And they are however working on it to replicate these kind of behavior of a database also with Playground. So to make it even more compatible with all the plugins that are out there.

I think they did a test of 10,000 plugins that are in the repo, and test every month kind of how many plugins don’t work with it yet. And they got it down from, I think 7% to 5%. So it’s always kind of progressing very well towards zero.

[00:26:33] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, there’s a lot of things going on in the background that the likes of you and I probably, you know, because we’re curious about it, we’ll probably know about, but maybe the average listener who’s not wedded to this subject maybe doesn’t. But that’s really interesting.

So the intention is to get it so that more or less anything works in more or less any scenario. And really nicely putting it out there so that you can do things which aren’t bound to GPL, WordPressy kind of things, if you know what I mean. So, you know, you can use your commercial product over here, and you can use your GitHub repo over here. That’s really nice.

My understanding is that when Adam began it, he was immediately repurposed. So Adam Zielinski, he was an, was, still is, I think, an Automattician. And I think that it was immediately understood, this is profound. Let’s get Adam on this full time. You know, it’s no longer a hobby project. But I also think that he’s got other people from Automattic involved. There’s like a little team around it now, pushing the development of that. Is that still the case? Is this a team which is growing, or stagnating at, well not stagnating, maintaining at a certain number?

[00:27:33] Birgit Pauli-Haack: Well, it’s growing in scope. So they’re also working, and that was a focus starting in last fall, that they’re working on using Playground for the Data Liberation Project. And that’s what Adam was doing also full-time now in the last few months. That he looks, okay, what kind of parser do we need to do really good data liberation from other systems, or from WordPress?

Yeah, because the import and export in WordPress only gets you so far, yeah. And there are some quirks in there, and they want to really have a perfect data liberation through Playground. They have a browser extension. It’s all beta right now. It’s not functioning yet. But it’s really coming along quite nicely.

[00:28:20] Nathan Wrigley: So Data Liberation then is this very laudable project of being able to bring into WordPress, I guess data liberation on some levels is the whole point of open source really, isn’t it? Is that you can grab your data and just pick it up and take it somewhere else.

[00:28:34] Birgit Pauli-Haack: Open content.

[00:28:35] Nathan Wrigley: Right, yeah. It’s your content. This platform is no longer being used, or you’ve fallen out with it. You know, you no longer love it in the way that you did. You want to now move it here. And you’ll be able to, let’s say, go Joomla into WordPress, Drupal into WordPress, or as you said, WordPress into WordPress.

Which suddenly kind of opens up the whole idea of migrating websites, which a real mess frankly. It’s a really difficult thing to do. And I often think that people are bound to products and services that they’re purchasing on a monthly basis because the migration process is so difficult. And they don’t want to be caught up in all of that because things can go wrong. You know, it might not work perfectly and there’s all the just carrying it out.

But if you can essentially do migrations, and Playground is the sort of go between. It’s the bit which talks from, I don’t know, one hosting company to another. So it goes from hosting company A to Playground. Playground then serves it up to hosting company B, which is where you want to end up. And all of that happens through Playground. That’s remarkable. And you can do the inspecting in the middle bit, the middleware, Playground if you like. Check it’s all working before you deploy it. That’s amazingly powerful.

[00:29:41] Birgit Pauli-Haack: Yeah. And that’s actually the vision of Playground’s part of Data Liberation. They also have a browser extension to kind of identify a non WordPress site, the various pieces like the pages, the posts, the news, the events, kind of the custom post types. And then kind of teach Playground what it all is. But that’s kind of, it’s very technical on one side, but it’s also, you need to have a total different concept about content management systems to actually make that. So that’s not really for a normal consumer.

[00:30:13] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, because if you’re coming from Drupal and you’ve got like 1,000 different modules in there, you know, think plugins in the WordPress space. Then it’s going to be difficult to one-to-one map that over to WordPress. But the endeavor is to do a half decent job and in the middle you can step in and say, okay, this might need modifying, that might need modifying. And then you can go back to your Drupal install, change things a little bit, try again because it takes no time to do it. That is really a key, interesting part. You do kind of wonder actually if hosting companies in the future will just offer Playground in as part of their bundle, you know, their onboarding migrating bundle.

[00:30:47] Birgit Pauli-Haack: Yeah. A lot of hosting companies have their own plugins for that. So I know that Pressable and SpinupWP, they all have their, or wordpress.com has their own plugin that they then connect with. I think it’s BlogVault most of the time. Pantheon, same, yeah. Where you can migrate in. But that part in the middle, that kind of always takes a long time.

And you are bound to the hosting company to actually offer that, yeah. And that’s not a cheap plugin. But if you go from one small hosting to one, another small hosting, you don’t have that luxury.

[00:31:20] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, and if you’re crossing platforms as well, say Joomla into WordPress and what have you. That’s also really different.

[00:31:25] Birgit Pauli-Haack: Yeah. There are a few agencies who have built for their customer things, but it’s not open source and it’s, well, it’s open source, but it’s not meant for a huge amount of public to kind of use it.

[00:31:36] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, I’d imagine that it’s fairly proprietary technology, isn’t it? It’s probably locked down because it’s the secret source of getting the Drupal installs into WordPress on their platform.

One of the things which Adam spoke about when we talked, I don’t know where we’re at with this, but I raised the question of the destructibility of it. So essentially when I spoke to Adam, when you launched Playground, you fiddle with it, played with it, the moment you click close on the browser tab everything went away. That’s how it was designed. But he said that at some point in the near future, and maybe that moment has already been passed.

[00:32:09] Birgit Pauli-Haack: It’s here.

[00:32:09] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, so now we’ve got a more permanent version. Tell us about that. Are there any constraints on that? Like, can I close the browser tab? Can I shut my computer down, for example? I mean, will it last forever? Could I even use it as a, I don’t know, as a temporary website in, let’s say I work in a school and I want an intranet for my staff or something, could for those kind of things?

[00:32:29] Birgit Pauli-Haack: Well, it cannot be, it doesn’t have a domain or something like that. So that wouldn’t work. But yes, you can save. You have two options to save the site that you’re working on, so you can come back tomorrow. One is in the browser. So it uses the local storage of the browser and really downloads the whole WordPress stuff there. And then you open up the browser again, you get the site again. You cannot load it from another computer because it’s a different browser.

And the second option is to load it in your local file system. So you can, it downloads the whole thing, gives you a directory and that’s your website, and you can load it then back into Playground a day later, or a week later, or two months later, because it’s still on your computer.

You can also have multiple sites now in one Playground instance. So you can say, okay, save this site, and then now I use another blueprint, load it again and it’s another temporary site. And you load it, you save it again, then you have a second website there.

[00:33:29] Nathan Wrigley: A curious version of version control or something like that. You’ve added this plugin in, I’m going to save a new version marking that this plugin got added. Let’s see how that works. And then if it doesn’t work, we can roll back to the, just delete that one and go back to the previous one. Oh gosh. So essentially permanent. Locally permanent maybe is the better way to describe it.

[00:33:50] Birgit Pauli-Haack: And you need to think about the saving part. If you do a second site and you close it, a browser without the saving part, it’s going to go away. Yeah, it’s still ephemeral there. Which is also a good thing sometimes.

[00:34:02] Nathan Wrigley: But obviously as you said, you know, the point of hosting in the end is that, you know, it connects to a domain name, it goes through the DNS process and you you can see it online. No.

[00:34:10] Birgit Pauli-Haack: No, not yet.

[00:34:11] Nathan Wrigley: This is not. Oh, not yet. I wonder.

[00:34:12] Birgit Pauli-Haack: No, no, I don’t think that’s ever going to be. But what can be, soon hopefully is kind of pushing it to a hosting company. And that, I think it needs to be just finalised which hosting is going to be there. And the Playground team learns a lot from wordpress.com, because the new development, local development system that wordpress.com has, Studio, is based on Playground. They develop some of the features also for, that wordpress.com can use them in their Studio. And what was the bug fixes? Come to Playground.

[00:34:46] Nathan Wrigley: That makes real sense though, for hosting companies to be clamoring all over this, to build a Playground import functionality. Because then developers all over the world, you know, maybe if in teams it might be a little bit more difficult, but you know, a solo developer, certainly at the moment, you’ve been working on something. You’ve got this perfect version of the site, you’ve got all the plugins that you want, you’ve set it up, it’s working on my machine. Now I go over to my hosting company of choice, click the import Playground button and there it is. Why wouldn’t the hosting companies offer that frankly, it just seems too straightforward.

[00:35:17] Birgit Pauli-Haack: Syncing up with the live site or there’s also a GitHub deployment there. It opens so many ideas, yeah. And when you ask Adam, well, if I think about this, and can you do that? He said, sure.

[00:35:28] Nathan Wrigley: Give a few weeks. I’ll add it to list of 1,000 things that people have already suggested.

[00:35:32] Birgit Pauli-Haack: Yeah, we need to develop that. Yeah, the ideas are there, the prototypes are there, the proof of concept is already done. Just a matter of resources now, yeah. I can for instance see one thing is, if you have a documentation and you need people to contribute to documentation, you load the documentation in Playground, you make the changes, and then you push it to GitHub as a pull request. And then somebody can review it, load it in their own Playground and approve it so the documentation could be updated.

Something like that is already in use. That scenario, that’s in prototype. It’s not there yet, but we know that it can work, because some theme developers have that process. They’re not developers per se, that they go into the files. They load the theme into Playground, use the Create Block Theme plugin. Make the changes to the theme. Save it and create the block theme, so it’s in files. Then push it to GitHub as a pull request for this theme, and then have all the changes there. So that’s how a lot of designers work with their developers on the themes. They don’t have to touch any code, but it’s still all saved in code.

[00:36:48] Nathan Wrigley: It’s just such an interesting beginning of everything. It does feel like we are at a moment where there’s just so many different roads that could be taken, and lots of people coming up with lots of different ideas.

Just quickly circling back to the Studio thing that you mentioned. So Studio is a local development environment. You’re going to be downloading this as a software bundle for your Mac or your Windows machine or what have you. You’re saying that’s a wrapper for Playground, is it?

[00:37:13] Birgit Pauli-Haack: Exactly.

[00:37:13] Nathan Wrigley: But that’s immutably stored. That’s not dependent on.

[00:37:17] Birgit Pauli-Haack: No, it’s on your machine, yeah.

[00:37:19] Nathan Wrigley: Right. So it’s going for the files on the machine approach as opposed to being stored in the browser. So if you download and make use of Studio, you can close that machine down, come back to it whenever you like, it’s there until you decide to delete it.

[00:37:32] Birgit Pauli-Haack: Like any other local environment that you can, yeah.

[00:37:35] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, okay. And that’s available free you to download for anybody.

[00:37:38] Birgit Pauli-Haack: Free, open source.

[00:37:39] Nathan Wrigley: Okay. Is there anything else you wanted to cover off, apart from the fact that we’ve both got ridiculously excited about this. Was there anything curious, interesting, quirky, novel that you’ve seen out there that we haven’t yet touched?

[00:37:50] Birgit Pauli-Haack: No, not yet. But I’m starting now to kind of dream about it. And sooner or later I come up with something, yeah.

What I would want and what I want to pursue is that I can have a Playground instance for writers. And I know writers who are not very keen on using the Block Editor, because it gets in the way. But the Block Editor has these settings where you can do distraction free, where you can do, put the toolbar on top, yeah, and hide it as long as I write, and just let me have when I’m not writing kind of thing, and log in and not have to go to the menu.

Right now, if I’m a blogger, I have to log into WordPress, and then I need to look at post, new post. This would give you, start writing, and don’t have to worry about the rest of it. And then click a button and then your WordPress site is updated with it. That’s kind of what I’m working on. I don’t know if really helpful, but.

[00:38:44] Nathan Wrigley: No, that’s really great. I mean, one of the things that I always thought was curious about it would be the idea in education, for educators literally standing in front of pupils, children who, you know, depending on what the kind of curriculum they’ve got. It might be we’re doing about poetry. We want everybody to upload and modify a poem, or comment on a poem or something like that.

And here’s the link. You know, we’re in an environment where everybody’s, we’re in the computer lab, everybody’s got a computer. Just click on this link, scan the QR code, whatever it may be. Give us your modifications, what have you. And I know that’s a sort strange example, but it’s the fact that instantly, very, very inexperienced users are in the same exact interface as all the other experienced users. And the level of difficulty was clicking a link. You just needed to click a link.

And the educator didn’t need a great deal of technology to set it up. The pupils needed zero technology to access it. And so it’s that one to many thing, where lots and lots of people can access the same thing in a heartbeat. And I’m imagining that the tooling to create the Playground installs, and to create the Blueprints is going to make it more and more easy in the future. So possibly not the perfect example, but I do like the example of one to many.

[00:39:56] Birgit Pauli-Haack: Yeah. What I like about it is that it’s not about WordPress. It’s about poetry. It’s about writing. It’s about, well, even image uploading and editing, yeah. You could certainly do that. Technology gets out of the way. And for the last 25 years, that’s always been in the way, yeah, and now it’s out of the way.

[00:40:14] Nathan Wrigley: Well, because the internet is basically a reading experience. I mean, I know we’ve got forms, but really all you’re doing is submitting a form so that somebody can read that. But you go to any website and largely websites, you know, if you’re going to some sort of SaaS app, that’s a different thing, it’s configured probably to be more interactive. But broadly speaking, you’re going to consume information.

But in this, you click a link and you’re reading information, but then you can do things with it. Oh, I think it would be better if there was an image there in that poem. Or, I don’t know, it’s an explanation of some principle of physics or something, and a diagram would be really useful at this point, and I don’t like the way they describe that, that could go in bold. And you are interacting with the internet. And it’s totally free, and it will be easy to deploy, and it’ll take seconds to load. And all of a sudden the internet became more interactive. And it’s just the beginning. It’s very exciting.

[00:41:05] Birgit Pauli-Haack: Yeah, it is.

[00:41:06] Nathan Wrigley: Birgit Pauli-Haack, thank you very much for talking to me today.

[00:41:09] Birgit Pauli-Haack: Thank you for leading me down the road of all the ideas here.

[00:41:13] Nathan Wrigley: Thank you for explaining it.

[00:00:00] Nathan Wrigley: Welcome to the Jukebox Podcast from WP Tavern. My name is Nathan Wrigley.

Jukebox is a podcast which is dedicated to all things WordPress, the people, the events, the plugins, the blocks, the themes, and in this case, the efficacy of website usability testing for WordPress projects.

If you’d like to subscribe to the podcast, you can do that by searching for WP Tavern in your podcast player of choice. Or by going to wptavern.com/feed/podcast, and you can copy that URL into most podcast players.

If you have a topic that you’d like us to feature on the podcast, I’m keen to hear from you and hopefully get you, or your idea, featured on the show. Head to wptavern.com/contact/jukebox, and use the form there.

Today I bring you the first in a mini series of podcasts I recorded in person at WordCamp Asia in Manila. This flagship WordPress event brought together hundreds of WordPress professionals, enthusiasts, and all manner of interested parties under one roof for a three day event. One contributor day, and two days of presentations.

I tracked down several of the speakers and workshop organizers and recorded them speaking about the subject they were presenting upon. I hope that you enjoy what they had to say.

So on the podcast today, we have the first of those conversations, and it’s with Jo Minney.

Jo based in Perth, Australia, is passionate about user experience, data-driven decision making, cats, pockets, and travel. She’s a small business founder, and works with organizations creating digital platforms with WordPress. She also freelances as a UX consultant. She volunteers with Mission Digital to address social issues using technology, and is an ambassador for She Codes Australia, promoting tech accessibility for women. Recognized as a 2023 Shining Star by Women in Technology, Western Australia, Jo is an international speaker on topics like user experience, accessibility, and gender equality. She’s committed to ensuring a seamless user experience, and today shares her insights from practical, everyday usability testing.

Joe’s presentation entitled, Budget Friendly Usability Testing for WordPress, helped attendees understand what usability testing is, and clarified why it differs from other testing methods. She shares examples from her work showing how small changes can significantly impact user experience, which is better for you, the website builder, and your client, the website owner.

We also discuss how usability testing can transform a website’s effectiveness by improving conversions. Joe explains the importance of recruiting novice users for testing, and highlights how usability testing pushes for real, user-centered, improvements.

Towards the end, Jo share’s practical advice on when and how to integrate usability testing into your process. Advocating for early and iterative testing to preemptively address potential issues.

If you’re looking to gain a deeper understanding of usability testing and its benefits, this episode is for you.

If you’re interested in finding out more, you can find all of the links in the show notes by heading to wptavern.com/podcast where you’ll find all the other episodes as well.

And so without further delay, I bring you Jo Minney.

I am joined on the podcast by Jo Minney. Hello, Jo.

[00:04:06] Jo Minney: Hi. It’s good to be back again Nathan.

[00:04:08] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, you’ve been on the podcast before. But this time it’s different because this time we’re actually facing each other. Last time we were doing it on, you know, something like Zoom or something like that, but here we are staring at each other because we’re at WordCamp Asia. We’re in the Philippines, Manila. It is the second day of the event, kind of. We had Contributor Day yesterday. Today is presentation day. It’s the first day of the presentations, and you are doing one.

[00:04:29] Jo Minney: I’ve done one actually. I did it at 11 o’clock this morning.

[00:04:33] Nathan Wrigley: How did it go?

[00:04:34] Jo Minney: It went really well, I think. I had very good feedback from it. Half of the things on my slides didn’t work. I think that’s normal for a conference though, and I’m pretty experienced now at just winging it, and rolling with it anyway, so. It was really exciting because it’s a topic that I’m super passionate about and I haven’t had a chance to speak about it at a conference before. So, yeah, it was really nice to be able to share something that I do on a day-to-day basis and can stand up there and really confidently talk about.

[00:04:58] Nathan Wrigley: I don’t think I’ve ever spoken about this subject before in any of the podcasts that I’ve done. That is quite nice, and it’s novel. I’ll just introduce the topic. The presentation that you gave was called Budget-Friendly Usability Testing for WordPress. And obviously that sort of sums it up. We’re going to talk about usability testing.

But before we do that, Jo, just to nail your colours to the mast a bit, tell us about you. Where you’re from. What you do for a job, and anything that you think is relevant to this podcast.

[00:05:22] Jo Minney: Okay, I really like cats and pockets.

[00:05:25] Nathan Wrigley: I saw that in your show notes. Why pockets?

[00:05:27] Jo Minney: Okay. So I think pockets are a great example of something that can be both a fantastic and a terrible user experience. You are like, oh yeah, maybe I know what you’re talking about. But, let me ask, do you live with a woman?

[00:05:39] Nathan Wrigley: I do.

[00:05:39] Jo Minney: I know that’s a very personal question, sorry Nathan. But, how many times on average a month does she complain about not having pockets in her clothing?

[00:05:48] Nathan Wrigley: Never, she carries a bag.

[00:05:50] Jo Minney: Yeah, but why do we have to carry a bag, right? She has to carry a bag because her clothing doesn’t have pockets. So I spoke at a conference late last year, and I asked this question. This has been a life goal of mine, was to speak about pockets at a conference. And I managed to do it. I asked all of the women in the audience, hands up if you’ve ever thrown out clothes or gotten rid of them because they didn’t have pockets in? And every single woman stood up and was like, yes, I’ve gotten rid of clothes because they didn’t have pockets in.

Most of the people that were there were men. And I said, stand up if you don’t have pockets in your clothes right now. And 400 men stayed seated. But this is an example of something where, yes, there’s a subsection of the population that’s experiencing this problem, but it’s a big problem for us. It’s very frustrating. You’re at a conference, you don’t want to have to carry around a handbag. So, pockets. They’re a great example of user experience.

[00:06:45] Nathan Wrigley: Okay, I get it. I understand now. Tell us a little bit about your sort of day-to-day work, though. You work with WordPress, I guess.

[00:06:51] Jo Minney: I do. So I run a small agency. We’re what I usually call a micro agency, and we have only three of us that are working on the WordPress team. We do website development, but specifically for charities, nonprofits, cause-based organisations, so a lot of social enterprises and that sort of thing.

On top of that, I also do consulting for user experience research. I’m not a designer. UX and UI often get lumped together. They’re very different. UI is about the interface and what people see, and UX is about user experience and how people use things. And they can’t be completely separated, but they’re also very different.

So I am lucky because I work in the niche that I work in, that I’m able to do a lot of usability testing and it’s something that a lot of people don’t get the experience to do. And so I thought I would share what I’ve been able to learn over having this sort of unique opportunity to do so much usability testing, and share with people how they can do it more cost effectively, but also the benefit that it can have for a project.

[00:07:54] Nathan Wrigley: Let’s dig into it and I’m going to actually crib the questions which you posed to the audience today. You put four questions surrounding your subject. And the first one is this. And I’m sure that the listeners to this podcast, if they’re anything like me, they’ll probably have some impression that usability testing is a thing that you could do. And I think the word there is could, as opposed to do, do.

I imagine most people have an impression of what it is, but whether or not they do it is another thing altogether. But that would then lead to this. What even is it? So what is usability testing, and what are you actually testing for? So that was a question you posed to the audience and now I’m throwing it right back at you.

[00:08:34] Jo Minney: Yeah, it’s a good question. It’s probably the sensible place to start. So usability testing is not the same as user testing, or user acceptance testing. And it’s focusing on, how do we identify what the problems are with something that we have created?

So a lot of UX research is focused on what we call quantitative testing. So, meaning we’re looking for quantities of something. It could be the amount of time it takes someone to do an action. It could be using heat maps. So we have a thousand users, let’s see where their cursors most often are going. Let’s see how often they scroll down the page. And quantitative testing is really good at showing you comparisons of whether one thing or another thing works better, but it’s not actually good at identifying what the problem is, only that there is a problem.

So you can do a lot of testing and still not know what the problem is. Usability testing is different because it’s what we call qualitative testing. So it means that we’re not looking for big numbers, we’re not looking for lots of data. We are looking for really deep user experience examples. And in a nutshell, the way that that works is you recruit some participants, usually five people per round is ideal. And often I get asked, well, how can you have statistically significant data with only five people? That’s not the point of qualitative testing. The point of qualitative testing is not to have statistically relevant data, it’s to have the actual user experiences.

So you recruit your people, you come up with your research questions and that’s the problem that you’re trying to solve or the question you’re trying to get an answer to. So, an example might be, are users going to recognise this label that I’ve used in my navigation? Is this button going to get clicked if I put it in this location? It’s often a thing that, if you’re working with a customer to develop a website for them, what we find is that often the things that we are testing for in usability testing are things that the customer and I disagree on, or things where they weren’t sure when they made the decision in the first place. And they’re a great example of things that you want to test for.

But the research questions are only the first part because if I say, the example I used in my talk today is that we had a support service directory. And this was for people who are experiencing family domestic violence. And they didn’t want to use the term directory because it’s a very harsh term. So they had called it support services, which sounds, on the surface like a good idea, but a lot of the people that are using their platform are not English first language. And they also tend to be in a really stressed out state as you can imagine.

And so what we actually found is that when we said to them, can you imagine you’re helping someone, can you help them find a legal service that will enable them to get a restraining order or something like this? What we found is that repeatedly they didn’t go to support services to start with. The minute we changed that to service directory, they started to find the thing that we wanted them to click on.

It’s such a small change, but it made a huge impact, the usability. Now, we found that out after the second test, which meant that we were able to change it after the second test, and then we had three more tests where we could show that every time they were able to find the thing that we wanted them to be looking for.

So this is an example where the research question and the research task or the activity that we’re giving to the user, they’re not the same thing. If we said to them, find support services, find the service directory, if we use that language, obviously they’re going to look for that label. But instead we asked them to do an activity that would hopefully take them to the place we wanted them to go to.

And then finally the last step is to iterate that and to actually take that data and make decisions, and make improvements to the project iteratively to try and make it better. That’s the goal, right? Is to find what the problems are and fix them. So we still have to work out how to fix them, but at least we know what the problems are and not just that people were not clicking on the button and we don’t know why.

[00:12:27] Nathan Wrigley: I have a couple of follow up questions. First thing isn’t the question, it’s an observation. So that’s really cleared up in my head what it is, so that’s amazing. But one of the things that I want to know from that is, do you filter out people who, let’s say for example, you’ve got a website, the kind that you just described. Do you filter out people who are not the target audience? So in other words, I don’t know, maybe that’s not a perfect example. But let’s say, on some websites, would it be better to have really inexperienced users of the internet as your five candidates?

[00:12:59] Jo Minney: That is exactly the ideal person.

[00:13:02] Nathan Wrigley: So people who are just, I’ve never come across this before. You want people who are potentially bound to be confused. If somebody’s going to be confused, it’s you five.

[00:13:10] Jo Minney: That is the ideal participant for a usability study. And often people say, I want to start learning how to do usability testing. Where should I start? And my advice to them is always the same, with your mum.

Recruit a person that’s a generation older than you, because I can guarantee that in most cases, sorry to generalise, but they tend to be less efficient and less used to technology because they haven’t grown up with it. So for millennials and younger, we have had technology for all of our adult lives and most of our childhood.

For my parents’ generation, they have had to learn that technology as an adult, and so their brains have a different mental model, and they don’t take for granted things that we take for granted. Like, when I click the logo, it will take me back to the homepage. I know that, you know that, your mum might not know that.

And I think that is something that is really valuable is to understand the benefit of testing with people who aren’t as experienced with technology. Who don’t speak English as a first language. Who are experiencing some kind of accessibility challenge. Whether that’s using assistive technology, being colorblind. Things like that are really good things to try and get some cross-sectional representation in your testing participant pool.

[00:14:25] Nathan Wrigley: So the idea then is that you’ve got these novice users who hopefully will immediately illustrate the point. And it’s driven by questions. So it’s not just, we are just going to stand over your shoulder and watch you browse the internet, and when you do something and describe, you’re looking for something and you can’t find it, that’s not how it’s done.

It’s more, okay, here’s a defined task, do this thing and we’re going to ask you to do five things today, we want you to achieve them all and describe what you’re doing, but it’s more of that process.

And then the idea is that you go from an imperfect website, slowly over time, iterating one problem after another towards a better website. The goal is never reached. It’s just an iterative process.

[00:15:01] Jo Minney: That’s it. Perfection does not exist.

[00:15:03] Nathan Wrigley: Okay, so that’s interesting. So we start with the novice. We’ve got a small cohort of people. We ask them specific questions, and we get feedback about those specific questions.

So the other thing that I wanted to ask then is, when do you do it? Because it feels like you need to build the website first, then show it to people. So there’s got to be something. This isn’t process of discovery prior to the website. You need pixels on pages. Buttons that are potentially mislabeled or what have you. Is that the case? Build first, then usability test afterwards. There’s no usability testing prior to the initial build.

[00:15:37] Jo Minney: It’s kind of a trick question because you can usability test at most stages. Probably the only stage you can’t usability test at is when you don’t yet have a site map. Having said that, my recommendation is, assuming you had unlimited budget and unlimited time, I would do at minimum two rounds of usability testing, and I would do one before you have any design, and I would do it just using wire frames.

So we build interactive wire frames using WordPress. So for the demo that I did today, I spun one up. I used InstaWP. You can get like a seven day website or something through there. It took me 42 minutes to build out the website in just the block editor, with no design or anything, just the layout of it. And I was eating a loaded potato at the time. So if I can do that in 42 minutes, eating a loaded potato, and that’s not my job, I think it’s a pretty efficient and cost effective way of being able to do early usability testing.

And often the thing that we’re testing for there is like, have I got the right navigation structure and hierarchy? Are the labels that I’m using sensible for people? Do they fit with the mental models of what our users are actually expecting? And the benefit of doing it that early is that when you don’t have a design applied, it’s a lot easier to identify problems.

Because there is a thing that happens in human psychology, and there’s a lot of psychology in user experience. And there’s a thing that happens where if something’s pretty, we will say that it is easier to use. Our experience is that it’s easier to use because it’s nice to look at. And that’s great. That means that UI is really important, but it also means that, if you have a really nice UI, it can mask problems that you have in the background. It is great that things can be easier if they’re pretty, but imagine how much easier they would be if they worked well and were pretty, that’s what we should be aiming for.

So typically we would do one round of usability testing when we just have a framework and just have the navigation. When someone lands on a page, sometimes we’ll just write a message on there and say, congratulations, you found the service directory where you can find this thing, this thing, this thing, this thing, and then we put a little button there. When they click it, it releases confetti on the page. So they get a dopamine hit and it’s like, yay, I completed the activity. You don’t have to have all of your content in place to be able to do testing, and identify early that you’ve got problems that you need to fix.

[00:18:02] Nathan Wrigley: It sounds almost like an overly complicated design is the enemy of usability. We are drawn towards beautiful, but sometimes maybe beautiful just is overwhelming. You know, there’s lots of colors on the page, the buttons get hidden, there’s just too much text on there. Looks great, but it might be sort of masking the thing that you’re really trying to show. And it feels like there’s this tight rope act of trying to balance one thing against the other. Yeah, that’s really interesting.

So, with the wire frame thing, in that case, you are really just testing, can the person find the thing? But I’m guessing once you’ve move beyond the wire frame stage and you’ve got a website, it’s literally out on the internet, it’s functional. It’s exactly what we hope would be the perfect version, then you’re drilling into more detail. You know, can a person find this resource? Do they know that this button is what we are intending them to click? Those kind of things.

[00:18:49] Jo Minney: Yeah. So I think things like searchability and discoverability are much easier to test for in the early stages when you’re just doing, say, using like a wire frame or a prototype. And things like usability, you really do need to have the complete designed product to be able to test for them well. And I say that, there’s actually kind of four categories of the different types of tasks that we can do. I’ll give you the link to the blog post that I wrote that has all of this in detail because we do not have time to go deep into that today.

But things like, does my search form work the way that I want it to? They’re the sorts of things that you do have to do some development to be able to get them working. So it’s not always practical to do that at the very early stages when you do want to start testing your navigation and stuff like that.

Something that you can do is if you’ve only got enough budget, or enough time, to be able to do, say, five usability tests total, you could do two of them early, and then you could do three of them towards the end, after you have the majority of the design and the development work in place. Users are pretty forgiving when they’re doing a usability test. If you say, this is still a work in progress, there might be a couple of pages that look odd and aren’t quite ready to go live yet. If you get somewhere and you’re not sure, you can just go back, it’s okay.

It’s not meant to be a perfect experience. The point is that you are getting their real time thoughts and feedback as they’re doing it. So it’s really important that you try and encourage them to follow the think aloud protocol, which is really outlining every single thing that goes through they’re head, just brain dump on me please. Like, I just want to hear all of your thoughts and thought processes.

And the only thing as the facilitator that I will say during a usability test is, tell me what you’re thinking. And other than that, I am completely silent. So even when it comes to giving them the activity, so if I’m asking you to do an activity like help somebody find a legal service that they can use in this particular state. I would actually send that task to you via the chat or something like that.

I would send the task to you via the chat, and then I would get you to read that task back to me, because I don’t want you to be thinking about how I’m saying it. I want you to be able to go back to that task and look at it, and think about it, and process everything inside your own head. But I want you to be telling me all of that.

So often we’ll find people ask questions during that, like, what should I do next? And the answer to that is really hard to train yourself out of replying to them with anything other than, what would you do if I wasn’t here? And I think that’s the hardest thing about learning to facilitate a usability test.

[00:21:24] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, and in a sort of an ideal scenario, you wouldn’t even be in the room. But in some strange way, you’d be able to just get into their head and say, okay, now I want you to do this, but every time you’ve got problem, just figure figure it out, and we’ll watch. But you have to be there because you have to be able to listen to what they’re saying and what have you. Yeah, that’s curious.

[00:21:40] Jo Minney: Yeah, and we do, at the end of each activity, we’ll then ask them for feedback on how they found it. If they had any suggestions or things that they didn’t say out loud while they were doing it that they wanted to share with us. How confident were they with the activity, and did they think that they were successful in it, which is a really good way of telling, I wasn’t really sure what the activity was meant to do. Or I wasn’t really sure if what I found really met the needs that I was looking for.

Then we ask them, how certain are you with the answer that you just gave? And if they’re like, three out of five, you’re like, alright, this person didn’t understand what it was that I was asking them to do in the first place. Maybe the problem is actually with my question and not with the website.

[00:22:18] Nathan Wrigley: Okay, so the whole process is, you’re not just asking for feedback about the website, there’s a whole process of asking for feedback about the process as well which is, that’s kind of curious. Meta, meta processing.

[00:22:27] Jo Minney: Very meta, for sure.

[00:22:29] Nathan Wrigley: We’re in an industry where at the moment everything is trying to be automated.

[00:22:32] Jo Minney: Is this the AI question?

[00:22:34] Nathan Wrigley: Well, no, this feels like it’s a very human thing. You need actual bodies on the ground. So it’s really a question of economics. Because I’m wondering if this often turns out to be a fairly expensive process. And because of that, I wonder if people push against it, because the budgets may not be there. If this is something that clients typically would say, well, okay, tell me how much that’s going to cost. It’s a nice idea but, okay, it’s going to cost us X thousand dollars because we’ve got to put five people in a room and we’ve got to pay for your time to moderate the event, and come up with the questions and so on.

How do we manage that in an era of automation where everything is, the dollar cost of everything has got to be driven down. This feels like the dollar cost is going up because there’s humans involved.

[00:23:14] Jo Minney: Yeah, it’s a great question. Have you ever run a Google ad before?

[00:23:17] Nathan Wrigley: It’s expensive.

[00:23:18] Jo Minney: It’s very expensive. It’s very expensive to get a new lead. It’s a lot more cost effective to convert a lead than it is to get a new one. And the point of usability testing is to improve conversion of people being able to do the thing that you want them to do on the website.

So my first answer to that would be, look at the cost benefit analysis. It’s worth it in most cases to do usability testing. Something that we’ve found with positioning of usability testing is that if we offer it as an add-on, then people don’t want to do it because they don’t want to pay for it. They see the value in it necessarily. However, we don’t offer it as an add-on.

We actually have it just as part of our proposal right from the start where we’re like, this is part of the point of difference between what you get when you build with us versus when you build with someone else. They’ll tell you what they think is the best way to do something. If we are unsure about the best way to do something or we disagree on it, it’s not going to ultimately be me making a decision or you making a decision. We’re going to test and we’re going to get real evidence from customers.

And they’re the ones that are going to be developing it so you know that the final result that you get is going to be the best possible version of the website. And often we might be more expensive than our competitors, but people will go with us because we are not competing on price. We’re competing on offering a service that nobody else is offering. I asked today in the presentation who has done usability testing before and not a single person put their hand up.

[00:24:42] Nathan Wrigley: That would’ve been my assumption actually.

[00:24:44] Jo Minney: Yeah. And honestly, I don’t think any of the people that we’re competing against in the industry that I’m in are doing the same thing as what we’re doing. And so it is very much a point of difference. I think it’s not a well understood technique, but it’s so valuable that it is a really easy way to position yourself as being different, and really actually do a better job for your customers, for the people that you’re building websites for. Because ultimately you are going to have a better result at the end of it.

[00:25:12] Nathan Wrigley: The interesting thing there is, when I say usability testing, somehow in my head there is a connection between that and accessibility. And that’s not where I’m going with this question, but there’s just something about it being unnecessary. And I’m not binding that to the word accessibility. What I’m saying is clients often think, I don’t need to do that. Obviously, we’re moving into an era where legislation says otherwise. But I can just leave it over there. I don’t need to worry about that, usability testing, not for me.

However, the lever that you’ve just pulled, it completely changes the dynamic because you’ve pulled an economic lever, which is that if we can get everybody to follow this action, I don’t know, fill up the cart with widgets and then press the buy now button, and go through the checkout process. If that’s the thing that you’re usability testing, you’ve made direct line. You’ve joined up the dots of, okay, user, money.

So it’s not just about it being a better website so that people can browse around it all day. It’s also about connecting the economics of it. So the usability is about people buying, converting, getting the resource. And so there might not be an economic transfer there, but it will be some benefit to your business. There might be downloading that valuable PDF that you want everybody to see or whatever.

So that’s kind of interesting. That’s changed my thoughts about it a little bit. And it is more about that. It’s getting an understanding of what you want out the website, getting an understanding of what you think should be happening is actually possible and happening. Have I sort of summed that up about right?

[00:26:40] Jo Minney: Yeah, I think that’s a really good summary it. I think the only thing I would add there is that a lot of the times the conversation around accessibility and the conversation around usability do have a lot of crossover. They are fundamentally different, but one of my favorite examples is actually something that I think applies to both.

So two of the common problems that we find very early on in design is often to do with colour. And so one of them is colour contrast and the other one is colourblind accessibility. And I think it’s a great way to get people to change their thinking, and their perception of the way we have these conversations is, if you have an e-commerce website, Nathan, what would you say if I said to you, I can instantly get you 8% more customers?

[00:27:23] Nathan Wrigley: Yeah, I’d say that’s great.

[00:27:24] Jo Minney: And I’d be like, cool, change your buttons so that colourblind people can read them, because 8% of men are colourblind. So actually it’s only 4% of people because assuming half of them are men, then you’ve actually only got 4%. But still 8% of men are colourblind, that’s a big percentage of the population. So if your button is red and green, then you’re going to have a problem. People are not going to be able to find the thing that you want them to click to give you their money.

Likewise, if you want people to be able to use your website when they’re outside and using their phone in sunlight, then you need to have good colour contrast on your website. So often this conversation is around, well, I don’t have people who are disabled, I’m not trying to cater to people that are using screen readers. It doesn’t matter because not very many people that are using my website are blind. And I’m like, well, I’m not blind but I still struggle when I’m looking at something where the text is too faint, and I’m looking at it on my phone, and I’m standing outside in the sun because we naturally don’t visualise as much contrast there.

So I think being able to position it in a way where people can see the value to themselves. I want to use a website that has better contrast, and so it makes that conversation easier with a customer.

[00:28:32] Nathan Wrigley: I hadn’t really drawn the line between accessibility and usability, but it seems like they’re partner topics, basically. There’s like a Venn diagram, accessibility over here, usability over here, with a massive overlap somewhere in the middle.

[00:28:43] Jo Minney: A hundred percent. That’s why we always encourage having that sort of intersection between accessibility and usability in our testing pool. So we always try and have one person who experiences some kind of accessibility challenge, whether that’s being colourblind, hearing impaired, if we’ve got a lot of video on the site, for example. And I think that it can be a really valuable way of collecting multiple data points at one time.

[00:29:04] Nathan Wrigley: When you have a client that comes to you and they’ve obviously, by the time that they’ve signed the contract with you, usability is already part of the deal it sounds like. How do you decide, what’s the thing in round one that we’re going to pick up on? Is there sort of like a copy book that you go through? Is it like, I don’t know, buttons or the checkout or colour or? Where do you go first? And sort of attached to that question a little bit, this process never ends, right? In theory, you could do usability testing each month. But I was wondering if you did it like on an annual cycle or something, yeah.

[00:29:34] Jo Minney: If you’re not changing stuff super often, I would say, there’s probably more cost effective ways that you can collect information about it. Typically we encourage, long-term, have things like heat maps and stuff like that. They will help you identify if there is a problem. If you know that there is a problem, let’s say you’ve got a heat map and you’re like, why is nobody clicking on our buy now link? That is a good instance of where you would do some usability testing to figure out what the problem is.

But if everything’s working and you’re getting conversions, then probably doing usability testing isn’t the most valuable thing that you can do. If you’re looking at making significant changes to the way that your website works, that’s another good time to introduce a round of usability testing. So we don’t do it just for the sake of doing it. We do it because we need to do it, and because there’s value in it for our customers.

[00:30:18] Nathan Wrigley: Do you keep an eye on your customer’s websites so that you can sort of get ahead of that, if you know what I mean? So let’s say that you put heat maps in, very often that would then get handed over to the client and it’s somebody in the client’s company’s job is to check the heat maps. Or do you keep an eye on that and, oh look, curiously, we’ve seen over the last 12 months, yeah, look at that. There’s not much going on over at that very important button over there. Let’s go back to the client and discuss that. That could be another round of usability testing.

[00:30:44] Jo Minney: Yeah, so I think we’re not uncommonly, a lot of agencies now do have some kind of retainer program where they will maintain communication and assistance for their clients. So we call them care plans. I know everyone has a different name for it. I think it’s pretty standard now in the WordPress ecosystem. It’s a very common thing to do.

As part of our care plans we have scheduled meeting with our clients once every three months or six months or 12 months, depending on how big the site is. And one of the things that we’ll do at that time is review their analytics, review the heat maps, that sort of thing.

Ask them, have they experienced any problems? Have they noticed a downturn in the people signing up for the memberships? Or have they noticed, have they had any complaints from people about something? Is there anything that they’re not sure about? Are they going to be changing the way that they operate soon, and introducing something new into their navigation that we need to consider where does that fit in the grand scheme of things?

I find if we’re having those conversations early and we are the ones starting those conversations, then often we are coming to them with solutions instead of them coming to us with problems.

[00:31:46] Nathan Wrigley: I think that’s the key bit, isn’t it? If you can prove to be the partner that comes with, we’ve got this intuition that there’s something that we can explore here. You are proactive, you’re going to them not, okay, anything you want? Is there anything we can help you with, you know? And the answer to that is always, not really.

Whereas if you go and say, look, we’ve got this idea, based upon some data that we’ve seen, we’ve got heat maps and what have you, shall we explore that further? That seems much more credible. You are far likely, I think to have an economic wheel which keeps spinning if you adopt that approach, as opposed to the is there anything you want doing, kind of approach?

[00:32:18] Jo Minney: Absolutely. I think every developer’s worst nightmare is having a customer come back to them and say, I’ve just noticed that I haven’t had anyone send through anything in my contact form for the last three weeks. And I’ve just noticed, when I went and tested it, that the contact form’s not working anymore.

I’m sure I’ve had that nightmare at least once. And I think if you can avoid being in that situation where they’re coming to you with something like, oh my God, it’s broken, how do I fix it? If instead you can go to them and be proactive about it and just kind of keep your finger on the pulse.

Yes, there’s a little bit of ongoing work, but like honestly, I jump on, I check all of the analytics maybe once every three months for my clients. I set aside one day to do it. Go and have a look through that. If I notice anything, I can usually fix it, make sure that we’re collecting the data again before it becomes a problem.

And then that way when there is an issue, we’ve got data that we can back up and we can start from there and go, okay, yes, we’ve identified, here’s where we need to do more research. And then we can apply something like usability testing to that.

[00:33:16] Nathan Wrigley: How much of your time on a monthly basis, let’s say as a percentage, do you spend on usability of existing clients? Is this something that is a lot of the work that you do? What I’m trying to figure out here is, for people listening, is this something that they can turn into a real engine of their business?

Because you might get two days, three days work a week just on the usability of pre-existing clients. So in a sense, you’ve created interest and work out of thin air, because these clients already exist, they’re in your roster, but there’s a whole new thing that we can offer to them. So, how much do you spend doing it?

[00:33:50] Jo Minney: Yeah, so it’s a great question. I would say it’s cyclical. I couldn’t really say like, I always spend this much amount of time. There might be entire weeks that go by where my whole life is usability testing, and there might be a month that goes by where I don’t do any. And it really does often depend on where our projects are in the life cycle at any particular time.

So we’re often working on projects that will span over years. And because of that, they might introduce a completely new part of their project. And that’s a good time to reintroduce that usability testing. As I said, like you don’t really want to do it just for the sake of doing it, but at the same time, if you can show that there will be value in making a change, if you can show that there is a lost opportunity somewhere, then a hundred percent you can sell that, the value to them of, hey, you could spend $1,000 now, but you could be earning $5,000 more every month for the next several years. That’s a no-brainer, right?

People are happy to make investment if they can see that there’s going to be a cost benefit for them in the future. Or if the thing that they’re trying to do is maybe their government website or something, and they’ve got a particular thing that they need to meet, they’ve got KPIs. If you can show that you are able to help them meet those KPIs, then they are going to invest in doing that thing that you’re trying to offer them.

[00:35:02] Nathan Wrigley: We talked about the Venn diagram of accessibility and usability, and the fact that there’s a lot of an overlap. In the year 2025, this is a year where, in Europe at least anyway, accessibility, the legal cogs are turning and the screw is getting tighter. So accessibility is becoming mandated in many respects.

And I was wondering about that, whether there was any kind of overlap in legislation on the usability side. The accessibility piece is obviously easier to sort of define in many ways, and it’s going to become less optional. But I was wondering if there was any usability legal requirements. I don’t know quite how that would be encapsulated.

[00:35:41] Jo Minney: Sort of. An example that comes to mind is that there are a lot of practices that historically have been really prevalent on the internet, and they’ve been identified as being really bad for usability. And they’ve actually now been identified as being so bad that they’re almost evil. And they’ve started to crack down on those.

And an example of that is, have you ever tried to unsubscribe from a gym? It’s basically impossible. And so now if you, at least in Australia, I know if you have a subscription on your site, you legally have to have a way of people being able to unsubscribe without having to call someone or send an email somewhere.

And that is an example where that is actually usability. And I think there are definitely things where we are picking up on stuff that is maybe a shady way of working, and a shady way of developing websites. And those things are starting, we’re starting to cut down on them.

I’m not sure if that is purely usability, or just like not being being a bad person. But I think that there is definitely, the only reason that we know that those things are a problem is because we have all had those bad experiences. And ultimately that’s all user experience is, it’s just how good or bad is experience of using a platform.

[00:36:49] Nathan Wrigley: I share your frustration with those kind of things because I’ve been through that process. Not just canceling a subscription but, I don’t know, something that you’ve got yourself accidentally into and you don’t want to be on that email list anymore. Seemingly no way to get off it.

[00:37:01] Jo Minney: They’ve changed the unsubscribe link so it doesn’t have the word unsubscribe in it. And now you just have to look for the word that’s not underlined, or highlighted in a different colour. That when you hover over it, something pops up and you’re like, oh, that’s the link. That thing that says manage preferences down the bottom, hidden in the wall of text. That is a shady practice. That is a poor user experience just as much as it’s just a bad thing to do.

[00:37:23] Nathan Wrigley: I think it’s got the label of deceptive design now. It used to be called dark patterns, didn’t it? But deceptive design. This notion of doing things in such a way to just deliberately confuse the user so that the green big button, which is the exact opposite of what you want to click, is the one which is visible. And then there’s this tiny little bit of greyed out text, which is the one which, clearly, you’ve ended up at this page, that’s the one you want. That’s the enemy of usability in a way. But for the business, it may be exactly what they want because it keeps the economic engine rolling.

Yeah, that’s interesting. I wonder if there’ll be more legislation to tighten those things up so that they’re not allowed. Yeah, that’s fascinating.

Last question. We’re running out of time. Last question. And it refers to something that we talked about earlier. I’m guessing this really never ends. This is a journey which you begin, you tweak it, you do a little bit, you fix, and then you start again a little bit later and what have you. Is there ever a moment though where you go to a client and say, we did it? This site, as far as we’re concerned, is now perfect. Or is it never a goal? It’s a journey and never a destination.

[00:38:23] Jo Minney: I think you’ll probably agree with me here, Nathan, that it’s basically impossible to be perfect, because ultimately someone is always going to have a different opinion. Someone’s always going to think that your shade of purple is too dark. Someone is always going to dislike the font that you chose, because it’s not loopy enough, or it’s too loopy, right?

So I don’t think there is such a thing as perfect. But through doing five usability tests, five people, you can pick up at least 85% of the potential problems with your design. And I’m not aiming for perfect, but I know that for me, if I can confidently say to my customers that I’ve been able to identify 85% of the potential problems that they might experience in their project, then they can confidently go away and say, hey, we’re pretty happy with what we’ve got.

We can definitely improve on that over time. But that is a huge milestone to be able to hit. And being able to have enough data, and enough research to confidently say that, I think is a really big win both for us and for our customers.

[00:39:26] Nathan Wrigley: Sadly, Jo, time is the enemy, and I feel like we’ve just pulled back the lid a teeny tiny bit on the big subject of usability. Honestly, I reckon I could talk for another two hours on this at least. You know, because you’ve got into colours there and all sorts, and there’s just so many tendrils that we haven’t been able to explore. But we’ve prized it open a little bit, and so hopefully the listener to this has become curious. If they have, where would they find you? What’s a good place to discover you online?

[00:39:53] Jo Minney: Yeah, so I think the best place is to hit up my personal blog, jominney.com. So it’s J O M I N N E Y .com. And I have a lot of stuff on there about usability, usability testing. I have a blog post that I wrote specifically for this talk that shares all of the resources that I used to put together the slides and everything. The talk itself will be on WordCamp TV. If you’re on socials and you want to hit me up, pretty much the only platforms I’m active on nowadays are LinkedIn and Bluesky, and I’m Jo Minney on both of them.

[00:40:23] Nathan Wrigley: Jo Minney, thank you so much for chatting to me today. I really appreciate it.

[00:40:27] Jo Minney: You’re most welcome, Nathan. Thanks for having me again.